WO2006080403A1 - Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit - Google Patents

Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2006080403A1
WO2006080403A1 PCT/JP2006/301238 JP2006301238W WO2006080403A1 WO 2006080403 A1 WO2006080403 A1 WO 2006080403A1 JP 2006301238 W JP2006301238 W JP 2006301238W WO 2006080403 A1 WO2006080403 A1 WO 2006080403A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
frame
data
transmission
communication
received
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2006/301238
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Koji Sakai
Hitoshi Naoe
Fumihiro Fukae
Shohei Osawa
Original Assignee
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/JP2005/014446 external-priority patent/WO2006013979A1/en
Application filed by Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha filed Critical Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority to US11/883,234 priority Critical patent/US8291273B2/en
Priority to JP2007500577A priority patent/JP4198741B2/en
Priority to CN2006800033193A priority patent/CN101112069B/en
Publication of WO2006080403A1 publication Critical patent/WO2006080403A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1829Arrangements specially adapted for the receiver end

Definitions

  • Communication device communication system, communication method, communication program, communication circuit
  • the present invention relates to a communication device, a communication system, a communication method, a communication program, and a communication circuit that transmit and receive data.
  • infrared communication systems have mainly used portable personal terminals such as portable telephones, notebook personal computers, electronic notebooks, etc., or electronic devices suitable for these portable devices, or desktop personal computers and infrared rays. It is widely used to exchange data with compatible printers.
  • IrDA Infrared Data Association
  • ASK Advanced Synchronization System
  • IrDA system is a communication system for high-speed, high-efficiency transmission mainly between computers. It is a communication protocol defined for infrared communication based on a certain HDLC communication system, and is widely used as a general one.
  • a frame also includes fields of address (A), control (C), information (I), and FCS, and flag powers given before and after, and for information (data) transfer.
  • I Information
  • S Supervisory
  • U Unnumbered
  • I frame Information
  • UI frame is used to transmit data Force on the field There is no serial number used to check for missing data.
  • the S frame is configured to have no I field for holding data, and is used to transmit reception preparation completion, a busy state, a retransmission request, and the like.
  • U-frames are called unnumbered frames because they do not have numbers like I-frames, and are used to set communication modes, report responses, report abnormal conditions, and establish or disconnect data links.
  • the IrDA communication method is based on the HDLC communication method.
  • a full-duplex communication method capable of simultaneously performing transmission and reception and a half-duplex communication method not simultaneously performing
  • infrared light of base band modulation that propagates over free space is used for data transmission, and two are within the communication range. If these stations transmit simultaneously, infrared interference will occur and normal communication can not be performed.
  • infrared rays do not exist in the communication area before establishing the communication link, and transmission is performed only when the communication link is established, and communication is performed after the communication link is established. It uses a half-duplex scheme in which transmission rights are periodically exchanged between the two.
  • FIG. 19 shows how to establish a communication link in IrDA.
  • the connection of the link layer (LAP layer) is established when the primary station transmits an SNRM command and the secondary station responds with a UA response.
  • various parameters data transfer rate, maximum data length, etc.
  • data will be transferred.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram for explaining an application of an effective communication system.
  • those performing transmission or reception are called "stations", and generally, a primary station performing data link control for controlling communication and a secondary station under control of the primary station Communication is performed by transmitting and receiving the above frame as a command (primary station ⁇ secondary station) and a response (secondary station ⁇ primary station).
  • the power system is called an unbalanced communication system.
  • computers, mobile phones, electronic organizers, etc., TVs etc. function as stations in communication
  • Data exchange is performed using infrared rays as a transmission medium.
  • FIG. 10 is a signal sequence diagram for illustrating a general procedure using an I frame in these communication methods.
  • data divided into a plurality of I frames is transmitted from station A as the primary station to station B as the secondary station.
  • the window size at this time is 3.
  • station A assigns numbers “0”, “1”, and “2” as I frames to each frame corresponding to data to be transmitted, and transmits them.
  • PZF Poly / Final
  • station A transmits with the P / F bit set to 1 in order to transfer the transmission right to the secondary station.
  • Station A confirms the response from station B, transmits from the third data again with a serial number of "3" "4" "5" and transmits. By repeating this procedure as necessary, the accuracy of multi-frame communication can be improved. If an error or missing data is detected at station B, an RR frame is transmitted with the data number desired to be retransmitted, and station A retransmits by re-sending from the desired data number. It becomes possible.
  • FIG. 11 is a signal sequence diagram for illustrating a general procedure using UI frames in these communication methods. Here, it is divided into multiple UI frames from station A to station B Indicate if you want to send out the data! In the case of data transfer using a UI frame, since the window size is not limited, station A can transmit frames continuously for the maximum turnaround time. When the maximum turnaround time for station A has elapsed, it sends an RR frame to the secondary station to transfer the transmission right.
  • the maximum turnaround time is the time when one station can maintain the transmission right, and after the transmission right is transferred to the other station, the response from the other station will be received even if the maximum turnaround time of the other station has elapsed. If not, the station that has transmitted the transmission right transfer frame can know to the other station that the frame for transmission right transfer has been delivered.
  • the maximum turnaround time of the partner station can be known by parameter exchange at connection establishment. In IrLAP, a turnaround time of up to 500 ms is defined.
  • station B to which the transmission right has been transferred by the RR frame is transmitted to the primary station by setting the P / F bit to 1 and transmitting the RR frame. Delegate the right.
  • Fig. 18 shows the standard IrDA protocol stack.
  • IrDA's protocol stack includes IrPHY, drDA Physical Layer (IrPHY) that defines modulation method, signal strength, directivity, etc., error control function according to general purpose High Level Data Link Control (HD LC), transparent transmission, and flow control.
  • IrLAP IrDA Lin Access Protocol
  • TCP / IP IrDA Lin Access Protocol
  • IrLMP IrDA Link Management Protocol
  • Tiny TP Transport Protocol
  • OBE X OBject EXchange protocol
  • a device requesting a command is called a client device
  • a device returning a response in response to the request is called a server device.
  • the client device issues a request command such as Put ZGet to the server device
  • the Sano device returns a response command according to the client Z server model.
  • the request commands defined in OBEX generally include the following. Connect with communication partner Z Disconnect CONNECTZ DISCONNECT Send object such as file send Z Receive PUTZ GET Receive path change server device receive destination path (current path) SET PATH Send object receive or send There is a forced A BORT.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates the basic exchange of request command Z response commands between the client device and the server device.
  • the client device When receiving an object exchange request from the user, the client device sends a CONNECT command meaning a connection request to the server device to establish a connection with the server device.
  • the server device having received the CONNECT command returns a SUCCESS response command to the client device if the connection is possible, and the client device receives the SUCCE SS response command, whereby the client device is received.
  • a connection is established between server devices.
  • the client device After establishing the connection, the client device starts exchanging objects, and transmits a PUT command for transmitting the object to the Sano device.
  • the Sano device successfully receives the PUT command from the client device, it returns a CONTINUE response command, and the client device receives that the server device receives a CONTINUE response command, and the server device successfully receives the PUT command. After confirmation, send the next PUT command.
  • the client device sends PUT commands until all objects have been sent.
  • the server device has successfully received the last PUT (Final) command, it sends a SU CCESS response command back to the client device.
  • the client device After receiving the SUCCESS response command from the Sano device, the client device sends a DISCONNECT command, which means a disconnection request, to the server device to perform disconnection processing with the server device.
  • the server device having received the DISCONNECT command returns a response command of SUCCESS indicating permission of disconnection to the client device, and the client device receives the response command of SUCCE SS. Connection between the client devices is disconnected, and object exchange between a series of client devices and server devices is completed
  • the server device exchanges an object by returning a response command to the client device request command.
  • header information is defined for each layer independently of the other layers, and between the computing devices. Header data is sequentially added to each layer from the highest layer to the lowest layer to the data to be originally transferred.
  • header information is sequentially removed in each layer from the lowest layer to the highest layer, and data is passed to the upper layer.
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 10-308791 (publication date: 1998)
  • the data transfer using the UI frame has a good communication path quality and no error occurs.
  • the time up to 500 ms as described above It is possible to perform continuous frame transmission, which leads to an improvement in communication efficiency, but when the quality of the communication path is not so good, it can not be retransmitted as in the case of using I frame.
  • the communication efficiency is bad.
  • conventional IrDA does not support data transfer in one-way communication that does not require a response.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a communication device, a communication system, a communication method, a communication program, and a communication circuit capable of performing retransmission of a frame in data transfer.
  • the communication device collectively transmits data without transferring the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited.
  • a communication device that divides batch transmission data to be transmitted collectively and generates transmission frames A transmission frame generation unit (transmission frame generation circuit, transmission frame generation means), a serial number generation unit (serial number generation circuit, serial number generation means) for assigning a serial number to the transmission frame, and the final of the batch transmission data.
  • a batch transmission final flag generation unit (batch transmission final flag generation circuit, batch transmission final flag generation unit) that sets a batch transmission final flag indicating that it is the final transmission frame of batch transmission data in the transmission frame of And a transmission unit (transmission circuit, transmission means) for transmitting a transmission frame.
  • the communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for collectively transmitting data without delegating the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited.
  • Batch transmission data is divided to generate a transmission frame, and a serial number is assigned to the transmission frame, and the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data is a batch to indicate that it is the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data. It is characterized in that the transmission final flag is set and the transmission frame is transmitted! /.
  • a communication device is a communication device that collectively receives data without transfer of transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited.
  • the serial number analysis unit (serial number analysis circuit, serial number analysis means) that analyzes the serial number included in the serial number to determine whether or not there is an error in the serial number, and the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame is the corresponding reception frame.
  • the serial number analysis unit detects an error in the received frame received so far when it indicates that the final transmitted frame of the batch transmission data divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and transmitted collectively.
  • a transmission frame generation unit (transmission frame generation circuit, transmission frame generation means); and a transmission unit (transmission circuit, transmission means) for transmitting the transmission frame.
  • a communication method is a communication method for collectively receiving data according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited and the transmission right is not delegated,
  • the serial number included in the frame is analyzed to determine whether there is no error in the serial number, and the batch transmission final flag included in the received frame is the received frame. If it indicates that it is the last transmission frame of the batch transmission data divided into multiple transmission frames by the transmitter and sent together, if an error is detected in the reception frame received so far, there is an error
  • a transmission frame including an error free flag set to indicate and a serial number at the time of error occurrence is generated, and the transmission frame is transmitted.
  • a communication system is characterized by including the communication device as the transmitter and the communication device as the receiver. / Scold.
  • the transmitter transmits batch transmission data in batch transmission of data without delegating transmission right.
  • the transmission frame is divided to generate a transmission frame, and a serial number is assigned to the transmission frame, and a batch transmission final flag indicating that it is the last transmission frame of batch transmission data is set in the final transmission frame of batch transmission data. And transmit the transmission frame.
  • the serial number included in the received frame is analyzed to determine whether there is an error in the serial number, and if an error is detected in the received frame, the no error flag set to indicate that there is an error and Generate a transmission frame including the serial number at the time of error occurrence and transmit it to the transmitter. Then, when the transmitter receives a frame including a serial number at the time of occurrence of an error from the receiver, the transmitter retransmits a transmission frame corresponding to the serial number.
  • the receiver determines that the transmitter has received the final transmission frame of the transmission frames obtained by dividing the batch transmission data, according to the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame.
  • the transmission frame including the serial number when the error occurs is not transmitted. That is, error notification is performed in batch transmission data units.
  • the communication device may be realized by a computer.
  • the communication device may be combined by operating a computer as each part of the communication device.
  • the communication program of the communication device realized by the computer and the computer readable recording medium recording the same also fall within the scope of the present invention.
  • the communication device may be realized by a communication circuit that functions as the above-described units.
  • the communication device is suitable for a mobile phone that communicates by the communication device. According to the above mobile phone, it is possible to communicate with quality and Z with high transfer efficiency.
  • the communication device is suitable for a display device that displays based on data received by the communication device. According to such a display device, communication can be performed with high quality and high Z or transfer efficiency.
  • the communication device is suitable for a printing apparatus that prints based on data received by the communication device. According to such a printing apparatus, communication can be performed with high quality and high Z or transfer efficiency.
  • the communication device is suitable for a recording device that records data received by the communication device. According to such a recording apparatus, communication with high quality and Z or transfer efficiency can be performed.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station according to a first embodiment of a communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a secondary station according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a frame configuration in the first embodiment of the above embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing when an error occurs in the first embodiment.
  • It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station and a secondary station according to a second embodiment of the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a frame configuration in the second embodiment described above.
  • ⁇ 8] is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing in the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram for explaining the application of the conventional HDLC communication system and IrDA communication system.
  • FIG. 10 is a signal sequence diagram for illustrating a general procedure of data transfer using an I frame in the IrDA communication standard.
  • FIG. 11 is a signal sequence diagram for describing a general procedure of data transfer using a UI frame in the IrDA communication standard.
  • FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station and a secondary station according to a third embodiment of the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a protocol stack of the data transfer system in the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a frame configuration in the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing in the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a signal sequence diagram showing a data transfer procedure when an authentication request is issued from an upper layer at the time of authentication or the like in the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a signal sequence diagram showing another procedure of data transfer when an authentication request is issued from an upper layer at the time of authentication in the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a conventional IrDA protocol stack.
  • FIG. 19 is a sequence diagram at the time of connection in the conventional IrDA.
  • FIG. 20 This is a sequence diagram of OBEX connection, data transfer, and disconnection.
  • FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of data transfer in IrDA.
  • FIG. 22 (a) shows the frame format of I frame in IrLAP, (b) shows the frame format in IrLAP
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing a frame format of IrLMP.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory drawing showing the frame format of the TinyTP layer.
  • FIG. 25 (a) shows the frame format of OBEX Put command, (b) shows the frame format of CONTINUE response, and (c) shows the frame format of SUCCESS response.
  • FIG. 26 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of data transfer in IrSimple's two-way communication.
  • FIG. 27 (a) is an explanatory view showing a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of two-way communication of IrSimple, and (b) is a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of one-way communication of IrSimple.
  • FIG. 28 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of data transfer in IrSimple one-way communication.
  • FIG. 29 This is a sequence diagram showing data transfer by OBEX's Put command, with OBEX as the upper layer.
  • FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication in which a receiver collectively transmits a frame including an error-free flag and a frame including SUCCESS into one.
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a receiver according to the fourth and fifth embodiments used for the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system. [34] FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to the fifth embodiment used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 35 A first sequence diagram according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 36 A second sequence diagram according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 37 A block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 38 A block diagram showing the configuration of a receiver according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 41 A block diagram showing a configuration of a receiver according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 42 is a sequence diagram according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system.
  • FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram according to an eighth embodiment used for the communication system of the present invention. [44] FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to the ninth embodiment used for the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 45 A block diagram showing a configuration of a receiver according to a ninth embodiment used for the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 46 is a sequence diagram according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing configurations of a PEG encoder and a JPEG decoder.
  • FIG. 48 is an explanatory view of a block of PEG (mcu), wherein (a) is 8 ⁇ 8, (b) 8 ⁇ 16, (c) 16
  • FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of division and retransmission processing in units of mcu in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of line-by-line division and retransmission processing in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of the file division and retransmission processing in the communication system of the present invention.
  • FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a client device in a conventional communication system.
  • FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the operation of the OBEX client in the conventional communication system.
  • FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a client device in the communication system of the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an operation of the OB EX layer in the client device in the communication system of the eleventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the configuration of server equipment in a conventional communication system.
  • FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the operation of the OBEX server in the conventional communication system.
  • FIG. 61 A flowchart showing an operation of the OBEX layer in the server device in the communication system of the thirteenth embodiment described above.
  • FIG. 62 A flowchart showing another operation of the OBEX layer in the server machine in the communication system of the thirteenth embodiment described above.
  • FIG. 65 An explanatory diagram of a communication system according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention using the communication system.
  • FIG. 68 A schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the [OSI 7 hierarchical model], the IrDA hierarchy, and the hierarchy of the present invention.
  • FIG. 69 (a) is a sequence diagram of connection establishment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • (b) is a sequence diagram of connection establishment according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • (C) is a packet format for connection establishment according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • (b) is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a packet format used in data exchange of IrDA.
  • (b) is a figure which shows the packet format used by the data exchange of this invention.
  • FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 73 (a) is a view showing a cutting sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • (b) is a figure which shows the cutting
  • (C) is a packet format of a disconnection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 74 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets during a connection sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory view showing a change of data in a function among layers of the arrow pointing to the right in FIGS. 74 and 76 in the connection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a figure which shows the change of the data in the function between each layer based on Embodiment of this invention.
  • FIG. 76 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets at the time of a connection sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 77 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets at the time of data exchange according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 78 is a diagram showing changes in data in functions among the layers in FIG. 77 and FIG. 79 at the time of data exchange according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 79 Function between each layer at the time of data exchange according to the embodiment of the present invention (instruction, message) And the flow of packets.
  • FIG. 80 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets at the time of a disconnection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 81 (a) is an explanatory view showing a change of data in a function among layers of the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 80 and FIG. 82 at the time of cutting sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention. (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the data in the function between each layer based on Embodiment of this invention.
  • FIG. 82 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets during the disconnection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing passing of connection request function data and connection parameters in the primary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 84 is a schematic view showing delivery of connection parameters of a connection request function in a secondary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram showing passing of a connection confirmation function at a primary station, data of a connection notification function at a secondary station, and a connection parameter according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 86 is a schematic view showing passing of data of a connection response function in the secondary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 87 is a schematic view showing delivery of connection parameters of a connection check function in the primary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing transfer of connection request function data and connection parameters at the primary station in the case of sharing connection parameters between layers, which is a modification of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing transfer of connection notification function data and connection parameters in the secondary station in the case of sharing connection parameters between layers, which is a modification of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing delivery of connection request function data and connection parameters in the primary station when each layer separately passes the connection parameters to the lower layer, which is a modification of the embodiment.
  • serial number analysis circuit serial number analysis means
  • Serial number generation circuit serial number generation means
  • Transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means)
  • Reception frame analysis circuit (reception frame analysis means)
  • Control unit (control means)
  • Serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means)
  • Transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means)
  • Reception frame analysis circuit (reception frame analysis means)
  • 3300 client device (communication device, primary station)
  • Application layer processing unit 3320 OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit)
  • 3500 server device (communication device, secondary station)
  • the OSI 7 layer model is also called the "OSI basic reference model” or “OSI hierarchical model”.
  • the communication functions that a computer should have are divided into seven layers in order to realize heterogeneous data communication, and standard functional modules are defined in each layer. It is done.
  • the first layer is responsible for electrical conversion and mechanical work for transmitting data to the communication line.
  • the second layer data link layer
  • the third layer network layer
  • the fourth layer performs communication path selection and management of addresses in the communication path.
  • the fourth layer transport layer
  • the fifth layer (session layer) establishes and releases virtual routes (connections) for communication programs to send and receive data.
  • the sixth layer (presentation layer) converts data received from the fifth layer into a format that can be easily understood by the user! /, And converts data sent from the seventh layer into a format suitable for communication. .
  • the seventh layer application layer
  • Each communication layer of the communication system also has the same function as the corresponding layer of the OSI 7 layer model.
  • the communication system has a six-layer structure in which the session layer and the presentation layer are one. Also, the description of the application layer is omitted.
  • the present invention is widely applicable to communication systems in which a transmitter and a receiver establish a connection of a plurality of communication layers to perform communication. That is, the division of communication functions does not have to conform to the OSI 7 layer model. Also, the number of communication layers can be arbitrarily selected as long as there are a plurality of communication layers to be connected.
  • the present invention makes it possible to assign a serial number to a frame and perform frame-based retransmission for each batch transmission data, communication efficiency is high in communications with few errors. Also, even if an error occurs, retransmission can ensure the reliability of communication.
  • the present invention is particularly suitable for communications that want to transmit a large amount of data in a short time, for example, wireless communications by infrared.
  • the present invention is also effective in other wireless communication and wired communication.
  • the present invention is not limited to IrSimple.
  • IrSimple is an improvement on some of the functions of the conventional IrDA.
  • the data link layer, the network layer, the transport layer, and the session layer + the presentation layer may be described as LAP, LMP, SMP, and OB EX, respectively, according to IrSimple.
  • LAP LAP
  • SMP SMP
  • OB EX OB EX
  • FIG. 21 shows the flow of data transfer in the conventional IrDA.
  • IrLAP IrLMP
  • TinyTP TTP in the figure
  • OBEX OBEX
  • the IrLAP layer retransmits when an error occurs, thereby providing a mode in which the reliability of the data is guaranteed to the upper layer, and without performing an error retransmission when an error occurs, to the upper layer.
  • FIG. 22 (a) shows the frame format of I frame in IrLAP.
  • the I frame is assigned a serial number so that the device receiving the frame can detect a frame dropout. This serial number is assigned to the Ns field area in Fig. 22 (a).
  • a limit is placed on the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time (window size), and the window size is 7 at maximum.
  • the primary station and secondary station notify the opposite station of the number of frames (window size) that the own device can receive at one time. Then, continuously transmit frames that exceed the window size of the opposite station.
  • the window size of the primary station is 1, and the window size of the secondary station is 2.
  • the Nr field Exists. If all the frames received in succession are normal, send the desired serial number by setting it in the Nr field. For example, if Ns receives frames 1 and 2 continuously, and all of them are received normally, set 3 in the Nr field and transmit.
  • the device transmitting the frame monitors the Nr field of the received frame, and the Nr field is one more than the Ns value of the last transmitted frame of the frames transmitted by the own device. If it is a value, it recognizes that all previous consecutive frame transmissions have been completed successfully, and starts transmitting the next frame. Also, if the Nr field of the received frame is the value of some serial numbers in the frame transmitted by the own device, retransmission will be performed from that serial number. At this time, the Ns field is also rearranged from the value of the Nr field.
  • the above-described procedure enables retransmission using I-frames in the IrLAP layer.
  • the window size is a maximum of 7 according to the IrLAP standard, so continuous transmission of eight or more frames is impossible.
  • the IrLMP layer is a layer that provides a logical channel for each application (LSAP: Link Service Acces- sion Point) to the upper layer.
  • LSAP Link Service Acces- sion Point
  • FIG. 23 shows the IrLMP frame format.
  • the IrLMP layer on the transmitting side of the frame arranges data of upper layer (TinyTP layer) power and IrLM P frame, and also transmits a logical channel (DLSAP: Destination Link Service Access Point) of transmission destination and transmission. Place the original rational channel (SLSAP: Source Link Service Access Point) as the IrLMP header.
  • DLSAP Destination Link Service Access Point
  • the TinyTP layer is a layer that performs division / combination and flow control of upper layer (OBEX layer) data.
  • FIG. 24 shows the frame format of the TinyTP layer.
  • the TinyTP layer divides the transmission data within the range not exceeding the maximum frame length of the lower layer (LAP layer), and transmits the data to the lower layer (LMP layer). give. Also, on the receiving side, the data in the received frame from the lower layer (IrLMP layer) is combined and passed to the upper layer (OBEX layer). Also, in order to prevent the reception buffer from overflowing, the number of frames that it can receive is notified to the opposite station in the form of credits. And it is not possible to continuously transmit frames that exceed the credits of the opposite station.
  • the OBEX layer is a protocol for object exchange.
  • FIG. 25 shows the frame format of the OBEX layer.
  • Figure 25 (a) shows the format of the Put command in the OBEX layer.
  • the OBEX layer uses the Put command to transmit.
  • information such as the file name of the file to be sent and the file size are also added.
  • FIGS. 25 (b) and (c) are frame formats of the power CONTINUE response and the SUCCESS response.
  • the receiving side of the file needs to return a response each time the Put command is received.
  • a CONTI NUE response is returned
  • a SUCCESS response is returned.
  • OBEX OBEX
  • TTP TinyTP layer
  • TTP (P) divides the transmission data into the maximum data length of the lower LAP layer.
  • dataP0, dataPl, dataP2, dataP It shall be divided into three.
  • TTP (P) since TTP (P) has a receivable credit of 1, the credit is 1.
  • the credit and divided data are used to generate an overhead frame, which is passed to the lower layer, the IrLMP layer (hereinafter referred to as LMP (P)) of the primary station.
  • LMP (P) the IrLMP layer
  • the LMP (P) that has received this adds logical channel information (LSAP header) to generate an LMP frame, and the IrLAP layer of the primary station that is the lower layer (hereinafter referred to as LAP (P) Pass to).
  • LSAP header logical channel information
  • LAP (P) Pass the IrLAP layer of the primary station that is the lower layer
  • the LAP (P) that has received this performs data transfer using an I frame.
  • the window size of the secondary station is 2, the I frame with Ns 0 and 1 is continuously transmitted.
  • LAP (S) the IrLAP layer of the secondary station
  • LAP (S) the IrLAP layer of the secondary station
  • LMP (S) the IrLMP layer
  • the LMP (S) that has received the above frame reception notification passes the upper layer data to the upper layer TinyTP layer (hereinafter, TTP (S)) of the secondary station after removing the LSAP header.
  • TTP TinyTP layer
  • the received TTP (S) combines upper layer data in the received frame.
  • the unit of data passed to the OBEX layer corresponds to the data size combining dataPO, dataPl, dataP2, and dataP3. Therefore, when dataP0 and dataPl are combined, data is received from the OBEX layer We did not give notice. Also, since data processing for TTP (S) receivable credits of 2 minutes (combination processing of dataP0 and dataPl) is completed, the own device can receive 2 frames with 2 credits for the opposite station. Pass TinyTP frame to lower layer to notify that there is.
  • LMP (S) Upon receiving this, LMP (S) adds LSAP information as an LMP header and passes it to LAP (S).
  • the LAP (S) that has received this performs data transfer using the I frame. At this time, it transmits by setting the value 2 of the Ns field which it wants to transmit next to the Nr field for the IAP frame continuous reception success notification of LAP which was holding transmission above. Also, in the Ns field, set the serial number of the secondary station's transmission frame together. [0093] Having received this, the LAP (P) checks whether the previous continuous transmission of I frame has ended normally by monitoring the Nr field. In the case of this explanation, since the Nr field is 2, it is recognized that the secondary station has successfully received an I frame of 0 and 1 from the previously transmitted Ns field. Also, since the upper layer data is included in the received I frame, the upper layer data is passed to LMP (P).
  • LMP (P) After receiving this, LMP (P) passes upper layer data to TTP (P) after removing the LSAP header.
  • the TTP (P) that has received this recognizes that the TTP (S) of the opposite station can receive two frames since the opposite station's credit in the received frame is 2.
  • Add the credit information of the primary station to the remaining divided data dataP2 and dataP3 respectively, and pass them to LMP (P).
  • LMP (P) Upon receiving this, LMP (P) adds an LSAP header and passes it to LAP (P).
  • the LAP (P) that has received this transmits two pieces of transmission data from the upper layer using two I frames.
  • the value of the Ns field of the next secondary station is set in the Nr field in order to notify that the reception of the I-frame by the above-mentioned secondary station was successful, and the Ns field Set the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the Ns field of the I frame last transmitted by the primary station.
  • the LAP (S) recognizes that the primary station has successfully received the I frame transmitted by the secondary station last time by monitoring the Nr field, and the LAP (S) in the received I frame Pass upper layer data to LMP (S).
  • the received TTP (S) combines upper layer data in the received frame.
  • DataP2 and dataP3 received this time are combined with the above combined upper layer data (dataPO and dataPl).
  • the upper layer data is passed to the OBEX layer (hereinafter referred to as OBEX (S)) of the secondary station that is the upper layer.
  • OBEX (S) OBEX layer
  • the credit may be passed to the lower layer as 2, but in the present invention, this transmission processing is suspended.
  • OBEX (S) analyzes lower level data and is a Put command. To generate a response frame to return a response to the primary station's OBEX.
  • TTP Upon receipt of this, TTP (S) combines the above-mentioned credit and upper layer strength data to create Tiny.
  • the LMP (S) that has received this adds the LSAP header and passes it to the LAP (S).
  • the LAP performs data transfer using the I frame.
  • the Nr field is set to indicate that the previous I frame has been successfully received
  • the Ns field is set to a serial number.
  • the LAP (P) that has received this recognizes that the secondary station has successfully received the two I-frames transmitted last time by monitoring the Nr field, and the upper layer in the received I-frames. Pass data to LMP (P).
  • LMP removes LSAP header and passes upper layer data to TTP (P)
  • TTP (P) passes the data in the received frame to ⁇ ( ⁇ ).
  • the number of frames flowing through the communication path is twelve.
  • FIG. 26 shows the flow of data transfer in two-way communication of IrSimple, which is an application example of the present invention.
  • the primary station and the secondary station respectively support the IrLAP layer, the IrLMP layer, the IrSMP layer (Infrared Sequence Management Protocol), and the OBEX layer. It is assumed that
  • FIG. 22 (b) shows the frame format of the LAP layer UI frame.
  • the N r and Ns fields present in the I frame are not present in the UI frame.
  • the IrLMP layer is a layer that provides a logical channel for each application (LSAP: Link Service Acces- sion Point) to the upper layer.
  • LSAP Link Service Acces- sion Point
  • the higher layer (TinyTP layer) is placed in the powerful data and IrLMP frame, and the logical channel of the transmission destination (D LSAP: Destination Link Service Access Point) and the sender's rational channel (SLS AP: Source Link Service Access Point) are placed as an IrLMP header.
  • D LSAP Destination Link Service Access Point
  • SLS AP Source Link Service Access Point
  • the IrLMP layer on the side of receiving the frame by monitoring the DLS AP field of the received frame from the lower layer, it is determined which upper layer application data it is, and to the corresponding upper layer application. On the other hand, pass the data in the received frame.
  • the IrSMP layer divides and combines data of upper layers. Also, as described above, since data transfer is performed using the UI frame in the IrLAP layer, and retransmission control in the IrLAP layer is not performed, retransmission control is performed in this IrSMP layer.
  • the upper layer data is divided into the maximum data length of the UI frame of the lower layer or less, and then the divided data is divided into a plurality of frames. Deploy and pass to LMP (P). At that time, add serial number, batch transmission end flag, and data end flag as SMP header.
  • FIG. 27 (a) shows a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of two-way communication with IrSimple.
  • the sequence number increases by one for each frame. If an error occurs during communication, renumber the re-transmission request serial number sent by the secondary station, and transmit the SMP frame again.
  • the batch transmission end flag (BL in the figure: Block Last) is an SMP frame within a range not exceeding the size of the reception buffer of the secondary station based on the reception buffer size notified from the secondary station at the time of connection.
  • BL 1 in the figure
  • the secondary station monitors the serial number of the received frame and detects missing frames.
  • RS Receive Status
  • the IrSMP layer (hereinafter, SMP (S)) of the secondary station combines the received upper layer data, and makes a connection with the OBEX layer (hereinafter, OBEX (S)), which is the upper layer of the secondary station. Once the received data is combined up to a defined data size, the combined data is passed to the upper layer.
  • the OBEX layer is a protocol for object exchange.
  • send using the Put command As described above, perform file transfer with the Put command.
  • OBEX (S) returns a SUCCESS response only for the final Put command when receiving the Put command reception, and receives the non-final Put command. Sometimes we do not send back a CONTINUE response.
  • OBEX (P) OBEX layer
  • when sending a Put command that is not final In the second station send the next Put command without waiting for the CONTINUE response, and wait for the SUCCESS response from the second station only when sending the last Put command, and the second station sends data using the Put command. Determine if the power was successfully received.
  • OBEX (P) OBEX (P)) of the primary station, when sending a Put command that is not final In the second station, send the next Put command without waiting for the CONTINUE response, and wait for the SUCCESS response from the second station only when sending the last Put command, and the second station sends data using the Put command. Determine if the power was successfully received.
  • omitting the exchange of CONTINUE response can be expected to reduce the number of frames in the LAP layer.
  • OBEX (P) passes a Put command as transmission data to TTP (P).
  • a non-final Put command consists of dataP0, dataP1, dataP2 and dataP3, and a final Put command consists of dataP4, dataP5, dataP6 and dataP7.
  • OBEX (P) is not final! /, Wait for reception of CONTINUE response to Put command! Because, if there is a space in the send buffer of SMP (P), pass Put command to SMP (P) continuously. .
  • the SMP (P) that has received this divides the transmission data by the maximum data length of the LAP layer that is the lower layer or less.
  • SMP (P) is divided into dataP0, dataP1, dataP2, and dataP3.
  • Seq and BL are set to perform retransmission control.
  • SMP (P) recognizes that the size of the receive buffer obtained from the secondary station's SMP (S) at the time of connection is the sum from dataPO to dataP5. Frames are transmitted continuously, and BL is set to 1 when transmitting dataP5 frames.
  • the size of the reception buffer is 6 frames, but it may be a value larger than this, for example, 128 frames (256 KB assuming that the maximum data length of the LAP layer is 2 KB).
  • the SMP frame to which the SMP header (DL, BL, SEQ) is added by SMP (P) is passed to LMP (P).
  • the LSAP header is added and passed to the LAP (P).
  • the LAP (S) that receives this passes the upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (S).
  • the LMP (S) that receives this removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to the SMP (S).
  • the SMP (S) that has received this detects a drop in the SMP frame by monitoring the serial number, and performs combining for the upper layer data without a frame drop.
  • the LAP (S) performs data transfer in the UI frame.
  • LAP (P) passes upper layer data in the UI frame to LMP (P).
  • LMP (P) Upon receiving this, LMP (P) removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to SMP (P).
  • the LMP (P) that has received this passes the LSAP header to the LAP (P).
  • the LAP (P) that has received this performs data transfer in a UI frame.
  • the LAP (S) passes upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (S).
  • LMP (S) Upon receiving this, LMP (S) removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to SMP (S).
  • the SMP (S) that has received this detects a missing frame by monitoring the serial number in the received frame, and for the frame without an error, Combine layer data and pass combined data to upper layers. Also, in this description, since BL of the frame including dataP7 is 1 and DL is 1 at the same time, a frame (frame including RS) for notifying the reception result in the SMP layer is transmitted at this time. do not do.
  • the received OBEX analyzes the inside of the received data and recognizes that the received data is the final Put command. If the previous received command is normal, Generate a SUCCESS response and pass it to SMP (S).
  • the SMP (S) having received this sets the above reception result (RS) in the SMP layer to 1, passes it to the LMP (S) together with higher layer data.
  • the LMP (S) that has received this adds the LSAP header and passes it to the LAP (S).
  • the LAP (S) performs data transfer in the UI frame.
  • the LAP (P) that has received this passes upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (P).
  • LMP (P) Upon receiving this, LMP (P) removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to SMP (P).
  • the SMP (P) that has received this recognizes that the previous batch transmission was successfully performed because the RS field in the received frame is 1, and the upper layer data becomes OBEX (P). hand over.
  • OBEX Upon receiving this, OBEX (P) analyzes the received data, and recognizes that the received data is a SUCCESS response, and the data in the Put command and the final Put command are the final ones until then. It will be recognized that all transfers have ended normally.
  • the number of frames flowing through the communication path is 10, and communication with a smaller number of frames as compared to the communication using the I frame described above for the conventional IrDA. Is possible.
  • the number of frames that can be collectively transmitted in the SMP layer is set to six.
  • This value is the transmission buffer of the primary station for retransmission and the reception of the secondary station.
  • the size of the transmission buffer allows, it can be set as many as possible, and it is possible to realize communication with the maximum capacity of the communication system.
  • the communication efficiency is improved by the window size restriction (7 in LAP). It is difficult to achieve.
  • FIG. 28 shows the flow of data transfer in IrSimple one-way communication, which is an application example of the present invention.
  • the primary station and secondary station respectively support the IrLAP layer, the IrLM P layer, the IrSMP layer (Infrared Sequence Management Protocol), and the OBEX layer.
  • the IrLMP layer is a layer that provides a logical channel for each application (LSAP: Link Service Acces- sion Point) to the upper layer.
  • LSAP Link Service Acces- sion Point
  • the IrLMP layer on the transmitting side of the frame places data on the upper layer (TinyTP layer) power and IrLM P frame, and also transmits a logical channel (DLSAP: Destination Link Service Access Point) of the transmission destination and transmission. Place the original rational channel (SLSAP: Source Link Service Access Point) as the IrLMP header.
  • DLSAP Destination Link Service Access Point
  • the DLS of the received frame from the lower layer is By monitoring the AP field, it is determined which upper layer application data it is, and the received in-frame data is passed to the corresponding upper layer application.
  • the IrSMP layer divides and combines data of upper layers. Also, as described above, data transfer is performed using the UI frame in the IrLAP layer, and the serial number is not assigned to the frame in the IrLAP layer, and the serial number is assigned to the frame in the IrSMP layer.
  • the upper layer data is divided into the maximum data length of the UI frame of the lower layer or less, and then the divided data is divided into a plurality of frames. Deploy and pass to LMP (P). At that time, add a serial number and an end-of-data flag as an SMP header.
  • FIG. 27 (b) shows a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of IrSimple one-way communication.
  • the sequence number is incremented by one for each frame.
  • the secondary station monitors the serial number of the received frame and detects the missing frame. If a missing frame or an error is detected, when it is detected, this is notified to OBEX (S).
  • the IrSMP layer (hereinafter, SMP (S)) of the secondary station combines the received upper layer data, and makes a connection with the OBEX layer (hereinafter, OBEX (S)), which is the upper layer of the secondary station. Once the received data is combined up to a defined data size, the combined data is passed to the upper layer.
  • the OBEX layer is a protocol for object exchange.
  • send using the Put command As described above, perform file transfer with the Put command.
  • the side receiving the file returns a response (CONTINUE response and SUCCESS response) to the Put command when receiving the Put command reception. Shina!
  • OBEX (P) OBEX layer
  • OBEX (P) passes a Put command as transmission data to TTP (P).
  • a non-final Put command consists of dataP0, dataP1, dataP2 and dataP3, and a final Put command consists of dataP4, dataP5, dataP6 and dataP7. Since OBEX (P) does not wait to receive a response to the Put command, if there is space in the SMP (P) send buffer, it continuously passes the Put command to SMP (P). When OBEX (P) passes the final Put command to SMP (P), it ends the data transfer by the Put command.
  • the SMP (P) that has received this divides the transmission data by the maximum data length of the LAP layer which is the lower layer or less.
  • SMP (P) is divided into dataP0, dataP1, dataP2, and dataP3.
  • a serial number (Seq) is set to detect frame omission at the secondary station.
  • DL is transmitted as 1.
  • the SMP frame with the SMP header (DL, SEQ) added by SMP (P) is passed to LMP (P).
  • the LSAP header is added and passed to the LAP (P).
  • the LAP (S) that receives this passes the upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (S).
  • the SMP (S) that has received this detects a drop in the SMP frame by monitoring the serial number, and performs combining for upper layer data without a frame drop.
  • the received OBEX analyzes the received data.
  • the primary station does not need a response to the Put command! And don't send SUCCESS response back to the primary station!
  • the data transfer by the Put command in OBEX will be completed when the final Put command is received.
  • FIG. 29 is a sequence diagram showing data transfer by the OBEX Put command, in which OBEX exists as the upper layer.
  • the transmitter transmits data3 collectively from dataO by the Put Final command indicating that the final of the OBEX data is included.
  • the batch transmission end flag is set to 1, and the data end flag is also set to 1.
  • the receiver when the receiver receives a frame having the batch transmission end flag and the data end flag set to 1, it passes the received data to the upper layer and there is no error in the received data up to that point, so there is no error flag. As an error-free meaning, reply. After that, at the receiver, the lower layer is notified of the SUCCESS response that means reception success from the upper layer OBEX, but at the time of notification reception, transmission is suspended because the receiver does not have the transmission right.
  • the transmitter receives this and passes the received data (SUCCESS response) to the upper layer OBEX, whereby the communication at the upper layer OBEX level is completed.
  • FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication in which a receiver collectively transmits a frame including an error-free flag and a frame including SUCCESS into one.
  • the receiver when the receiver receives a frame of batch transmission end flag and data end flag power, there is no error immediately after the lower layer passes the received data to the upper layer.
  • the lower layer does not generate and transmit a frame with no error flag, and the lower layer waits for the SUCCESS response of upper layer power, arranges the above-mentioned no error flag and SUCCESS response in one frame, and transmits it. ing.
  • the transmitter does not have to transmit a frame for moving the transmission right after the receiver transmits a frame including only an error-free flag. Also, in the receiver, since the lower layer can immediately transmit the SUCCESS frame after the upper layer generates the SUCCESS response transmission request, communication efficiency can be improved. In addition, since there is no frame for moving the transmission right, there is no need to consider the processing of an error that occurs in the frame for moving the transmission right, so the process can be simplified.
  • FIGS. 1 to 8 and 31 to 67 show a communication having a primary station and a secondary station that represents certain information with a predetermined capacity as a group, such as image data and document data, and transmits and receives transfer data to be transferred.
  • a predetermined capacity is variable depending on transfer data.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station in the present embodiment.
  • the primary station (transmitting apparatus) 1 includes a CPU 11, a memory 12, a controller 13, a transmitter 14, and a receiver 15.
  • the CPU 11 performs predetermined arithmetic processing in accordance with a user's instruction input to an operation unit (not shown). As the predetermined arithmetic processing, there is transfer processing of transfer data.
  • the CPU 11 receives a transfer instruction of transfer data from the operation unit, the CPU 11 stores transfer data to be transferred in the memory 12 and makes a transfer request to the controller 13. Further, when the CPU 11 receives a transmission end notification from the controller 13 indicating that transmission of transfer data is completed, the CPU 11 completes the transfer processing.
  • the memory 12 temporarily stores transfer data to be transferred, and the CPU 11 writes the transfer data.
  • the controller 13 controls transfer of transfer data in response to a transfer request from the CPU 11 and notifies the CPU 11 of the analysis result of the received frame.
  • the controller 13 includes a control unit 131, a transmission frame generation unit 132, and a reception frame analysis unit 133.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 132 includes a data read unit 1321, a frame serial number addition unit (serial number addition unit) 1322, a transmission right transfer flag addition unit (transmission right transfer flag addition unit) 1323, a frame construction unit 1324 and An error detection or correction code adding unit 1325 is provided.
  • received frame analysis section 133 is provided with retransmission request determination section 1331 and frame serial number extraction section 1332.
  • control unit 131 When the control unit 131 receives a transfer request from the CPU 11, the control unit 131 requests the data reading unit 1321 to read out the data, notifies the frame serial number adding unit 1322 of the serial number, and the transmission right transfer flag adding unit 1323. A notification as to whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the other station Do knowledge. At this time, the control unit 131 controls the frame length and the frame interval by controlling the data length read by the data reading unit 1321 and the reading interval. The control unit 131 controls the frame length so that the data capacity that can be detected by the error detection or correction code adding unit 1325 described later is equal to or less than the required maximum frame length.
  • control unit 131 detects that all frames corresponding to the transfer data read from the memory 12 have been transmitted from the transmitter 14, and indicates that transmission of the transfer data has ended. Send an end notification to the CPU 11.
  • Frame construction unit 1324 performs transfer of the transmission right notified from data transmission unit 1323, the data received from data reading unit 1321, the frame serial number notified from frame serial number addition unit 1322, and the transmission right notified from transmission right transfer flag addition unit 1323. Generate a frame based on the information of whether or not. The transfer rate of the frame generated by the frame construction unit 1324 is controlled by the control unit 131.
  • the frame construction unit 1324 sequentially sends the generated frames to the error detection or correction code addition unit 1325. At this time, the frame construction unit 1324 makes the time interval between each frame equal to the frame interval received from the control unit 131.
  • the error detection or correction code addition unit 1325 adds an error detection code (or a correction code) to the frame generated by the frame construction unit 1324 and sends the frame to the transmitter 14 in the subsequent stage.
  • the error detection or correction code adding unit 1325 causes the error detection code (or correction code) to be included in the FCS in the frame.
  • the error detection code is, for example, a cyclic code such as a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code
  • the correction code is, for example, a parity check code, a gray scale code, a BCH code such as a reed Solomon code, etc. It is.
  • the CRC code is set, for example, at 4 bytes, and the data capacity is limited so that it can be detected by the 4 bytes.
  • the transmitter 14 transmits a plurality of frames received from the controller 13 to the outside at predetermined time intervals via an infrared communication path. Also, the receiver 15 sequentially sends response frames received from the secondary station to the received frame analysis unit 133 in the controller 13.
  • the secondary station retransmits the frame received from the receiver 15 in the retransmission request determination unit 1331 and the frame serial number extraction unit 1332 respectively.
  • the control unit 131 is notified of the force requested and which frame the error has been made by extracting the frame number.
  • control unit 131 notifies the CPU 11 whether or not the transmitted frame has an error, and if there is an error, which frame the error has been detected.
  • the secondary station instructs the primary station to transfer the transmission right so that a predetermined number of frames can be transmitted to the secondary station again. I will go to the next station. In this way, repeat the same procedure until all file data has been sent.
  • the number of frames transmitted before transfer of the transmission right is retransmitted in the same procedure as described above.
  • the CPU 11 may retransmit the number frame.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the secondary station.
  • the secondary station (reception device) of the present embodiment includes a CPU 21, a memory 22, a controller 23, a receiver 24, and a transmitter (transmission means) 25. .
  • the receiver 24 receives the frame transmitted from the primary station via the infrared communication path, and sends the received frame to the controller 23.
  • the controller 23 performs predetermined control processing based on the frame received from the receiver 24.
  • the controller 23 includes a control unit 231, a frame processing unit 232, an error detection or correction circuit 233, an error frame number holding unit 234, a response frame generation unit (response frame generation means) 235, and an error detection or correction code addition unit. I will have 236.
  • the frame processing unit 232 receives the frame from the receiver 24 and extracts the data field, the transmission right transfer flag, the frame serial number and the FCS portion. That is, the frame processing unit 232 extracts the information contained in the data field of the frame received by the receiver 24, the transmission right transfer flag, the frame serial number of the received frame, and the error detection code (or correction code) for the information. Do. The frame processing unit 232 transmits the extracted information and the error detection code (or correction code) to the control unit 231, the error detection or correction circuit 233, and the error. Send to one frame number holding unit 234.
  • the frame processing unit 232 when the frame processing unit 232 receives a frame, the frame processing unit 232 extracts and extracts transmission data, a transmission right transfer flag, a frame serial number, and an error detection code (or a correction code) included in the frame.
  • the transmission data, the transmission right transfer flag, the serial number of the frame and the error detection code (or correction code) are sent to the control unit 231, the error detection or correction circuit 233 and the error frame number holding unit 234.
  • the error detection or correction circuit 233 performs error detection (or correction) on the received information, and sends the result to the control unit 231 and the error frame number holding unit 234.
  • the control unit 231 performs predetermined processing in accordance with the result sent from the error detection or correction circuit 233. That is, when the result from the error detection or correction circuit 233 indicates that there is no error (error) in the received data, the control unit 231 writes the received data in the memory 22 and notifies the CPU 21 of the reception completion. I do.
  • the control unit 231 discards the received data, and an error is detected from the error frame number holding unit 234. The frame number that has occurred is read out, and the fact that there is a reception error and the number of the frame in which the error has occurred are notified to the CPU 21. Further, based on the transmission right transfer flag extracted by the frame processing unit 232, the control unit 231 also performs notification of whether or not the transmission right has been transferred.
  • the memory 22 is used by the receiver 24 to store the received data, and the control unit 231 writes the received data to which no error has occurred.
  • the CPU 21 performs processing in accordance with the notification from the control unit 231. That is, when the control unit 231 is notified that the transfer right of the control unit 231 has been transferred, if there is no error in all the frames received up to that time, all the received data stored in the memory 22 is used. Then, predetermined post-processing for received data is performed, and the control unit 231 is notified of transmission to the effect that a response frame to the effect that all frames have been normally received is returned to the primary station. When the control unit 231 is notified that transfer right has been transferred, the control unit 231 is notified if an error has occurred in a frame received up to that time. Since an error has occurred, a transmission notification is issued to request retransmission. Also here, the error is It also notifies the frame number of the generated frame.
  • control unit 231 When the control unit 231 receives a transmission request from the CPU 21, the control unit 231 notifies the response frame generation unit 235 that a response frame is to be generated. Here, information on whether or not there is an error in the received frame and notification of the frame number of the error frame when there is an error are also performed.
  • the response frame generation unit 235 generates a response frame based on the notification from the control unit 231, and sends the frame to the error detection or correction code addition unit 236.
  • the error detection or correction code addition unit 236 adds an error detection or correction code to the frame generated by the response frame generation unit 235 and sends the frame to the transmitter 25.
  • the transmitter 25 transmits the frame received from the error detection or correction code adding unit 236 to the outside via the infrared communication path.
  • the UI frame and the response (response) frame to the UI frame the frame serial number, a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station, and an error or error in the frame received so far
  • the frame configuration is shown when a flag is added to indicate whether the frame is missing or not.
  • the frame configuration shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • a 3-byte parameter is added to the UI frame and the response frame to the UI frame, a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station, and an error occurs in the received frame used by the secondary station.
  • a flag indicating whether it was a force and the remaining 22 bits consist of a frame serial number.
  • a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station is BL
  • a flag indicating whether the received frame used by the secondary station has an error is RS
  • a serial number of the frame is S. Ru.
  • Fig. 4 shows the case where all received data in two-way communication is forceless and no errors occur! /.
  • the CPU 11 that has received the transfer instruction from the operation unit
  • the transmission data is stored in the memory 12 and a transfer request is output to the controller 13.
  • the transfer right is transferred to the secondary station in units of n frames.
  • S, BL, and RS shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5 respectively indicate a frame serial number, a flag indicating whether transfer right is to be transferred, and a flag indicating whether re-transmission is necessary.
  • the primary station receives a response frame indicating that the n frames transmitted from the secondary station have been normally received, the same process as described above is performed. Also, the secondary station performs the same processing as the above processing, and the CPU receiving no notification of reception completion without error in all the received frames performs predetermined received data post-processing based on the received data.
  • FIG. 5 shows the case where an error occurs during frame communication in two-way communication.
  • S, BL, and RS are a frame serial number, a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right, and a flag indicating whether retransmission is necessary.
  • the secondary station detects that there is an error in frame 1 in which no error occurs in frame 0.
  • the primary station validates the flag indicating that an error has occurred in the received frame and makes the frame Send
  • the secondary station It receives a frame indicating that an error has occurred, detects that an error has occurred, and retransmits the frame in which the error occurred.
  • the power of the primary station performs transfer of the transmission right with the secondary station every n frames.
  • connection establishment is established when the connection performed by the IrDA communication system is established.
  • the number of frames that each station can transmit and receive at one time means in the connection request frame transmitted by its own station as the primary station and the connection response frame transmitted from the opposite station as the secondary station to the station.
  • a field is added and frame exchange is performed, and the optimum number of frames is calculated with reference to the number of frames that can be received at the other station received at each station at one time, and transfer right is transferred according to the number of frames.
  • the above number of frames can be set to any number.
  • the primary station requests the secondary station to establish a data transfer state, and first transmits an SNRM frame.
  • the secondary station receiving this sends back a DM frame if communication is not possible, and if the communication is possible, it returns a UA frame meaning acceptance to the primary station.
  • SNRM frames, DM frames, and UA frames are all in the form of U frames.
  • both stations establish data transfer status and data transfer becomes possible.
  • a connection establishment is performed by adding a parameter indicating the retransmittable data size of the own station to the SNRM frame or UA frame.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmission / reception circuit used in the communication system according to the present embodiment.
  • the transmission / reception circuit of this embodiment includes a CPU 61, a controller 62, a transmitter 63, and a receiver 64.
  • the CPU 61 receives an instruction to connect to the other station of the user input to the operation unit (not shown), the CPU 61 sends a connection request to the controller 62.
  • the controller 62 controls connection processing in response to a connection request from the CPU 61.
  • the controller 62 includes a control unit 621, a transmission frame generation unit 622, and a reception frame analysis unit 623.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 622 is provided with a connection establishment frame generation unit 6221 and a number-of-retransmittable-frames addition unit 6222.
  • the control unit 621 receives the connection request from the CPU 61 and the notification of the number of retransmittable frames, requests the connection establishment frame generation unit 6221 to generate a connection request frame, and sends the retransmittable frame number addition unit 6222 The number of retransmittable frames notified from the CPU 61 is notified.
  • connection establishment frame generation unit 6221 generates a connection request frame
  • the retransmittable frame number addition unit 6222 adds a field indicating a retransmittable frame to the generated connection request frame, and sends the transmitter 63 Send to The transmitter 63 transmits the frame received from the transmission frame generation unit 622 through the infrared communication channel.
  • the receiver 64 After transmitting the connection request frame, the receiver 64 receives a connection response (response) frame from the secondary station which is the opposite station. Receiving the connection response frame, the receiver 64 sends the received frame to the received frame analysis unit 623 in the controller 62.
  • the reception frame analysis unit 623 includes a frame analysis unit 6231 and a retransmittable frame number detection unit 6232.
  • the frame analysis unit 6231 analyzes the received frame and notifies the control unit 621 of the response result of the opposite station to the connection request of the own station.
  • the number-of-retransmittable-frames detecting unit 6232 extracts a field indicating the number of retransmittable frames from the received frame, and notifies the control unit 621 of the extracted field.
  • the control unit 621 can know the maximum number of retransmittable frames in both stations by comparing the notification result from the reception frame analysis unit 623 with the number of retransmittable frames of the own station, and as a result To the CPU 61.
  • the CPU 61 When the CPU 61 receives the result and performs data transfer, it transmits the transmission right to the opposite station by the method described in the first embodiment for each maximum number of retransmittable frames in both stations. It will be good if it transfers.
  • the procedure for the primary station to know the maximum number of retransmittable frames of both stations we describe the procedure for the primary station to know the maximum number of retransmittable frames of both stations.
  • the number of retransmittable frames in the connection request frame received by the primary station is also compared with the number of retransmittable frames of the own station, the maximum number of retransmittable frames of both stations. I will omit the explanation here because I can know.
  • FIG. 7 shows a frame configuration when the SNRM frame or the UA frame is added with a parameter indicating the retransmittable data size of the own station.
  • the frame configuration shown here is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • bit 0 means lByte
  • bit 1 is 2B yte
  • bit 2 is 3 Byte
  • bit 3 is 4 Byte
  • bit 4 is 8 Byte
  • bit 5 is S6 6 Byte
  • bit 6 is 32 Byte
  • bit 7 is 64 Byte I assume.
  • Both stations may transfer the transmission right of the frame within the receivable data size of the opposite station that can obtain the parameter power of the opposite station based on the received frame respectively.
  • FIG. 8 is a signal sequence diagram showing exchange of frames in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the primary station is the retransmittable data size strength Byte, and that the secondary station is 3 Bet e.
  • the primary station adds the data of "00001111" to the SNRM frame and transmits the SNRM frame because the size is the retransmittable data size Byte.
  • the primary station since the retransmittable data size of the secondary station is 3 bytes, in the frame configuration shown in FIG. 7, the data of “00000111” is added to the UA frame to transmit the UA frame. Since the primary station knows that the maximum receivable data size of the secondary station is 3 bytes, in the subsequent frame transmission, the primary station uses three frames by using the method described in the first embodiment. Transfers the transmission right to the other station each time it transmits.
  • a data transfer system (communication system) according to a third embodiment of the present invention relates to a system that performs communication using hierarchical communication protocols.
  • terms (including parts and functions) defined in other embodiments this is a book unless otherwise stated. Also in the embodiment, it shall be used according to the definition.
  • FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a station (primary station (transmitting apparatus) or secondary station (receiving apparatus) according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 shows a protocol stack of the data transfer system in the present invention.
  • the function of the present embodiment is realized by the communication protocol layer located in the TinyTP layer of the IrDA protocol stack, and the communication protocol layer is hereinafter referred to as an SMP (Sequence Management Protocol) layer.
  • SMP Sequence Management Protocol
  • the protocol stack for realizing the communication system according to the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the station 12 which is a primary station or a secondary station includes an application layer processing unit 121, an OBEX layer processing unit 122, an SMP layer processing unit 123, and an IrLMP layer processing unit 124.
  • the IrL AP layer processing unit 125, a transmitter 126, and a receiver 127 are provided.
  • the application layer processing unit 121, the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the SMP layer processing unit 123, the IrLMP layer processing unit 124, and the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 have a hierarchical structure in this order. It is a block that implements the functions of multiple types of communication protocols.
  • the application layer processing unit 121 issues a request frame for communication with the outside to the OBEX layer processing unit 122 according to the user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown). Notify (control). Further, when receiving the notification that the response frame has been received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the application layer processing unit 121 performs predetermined processing in response to the received response frame.
  • the OBEX layer processing unit 122 In response to the request from the application layer processing unit 121, the OBEX layer processing unit 122 notifies (controls) generation of a request frame and issuance of the request frame to the SMP layer processing unit 123. Also, in response to the response frame from the SMP layer processing unit 123, the reception result is notified to the application layer processing unit 121.
  • the SMP layer processing unit 123 includes a control unit 1231, a transmission frame generation unit 1232 and a reception frame. And an analysis unit 1233.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 includes a response frame request flag addition unit 12321, a frame serial number addition unit (serial number addition unit) 12322, and a transmission right transfer flag addition unit (transmission right transfer flag addition unit) 12323 And a retransmission request flag addition unit (response frame generation means) 12324 and a frame construction unit 12325.
  • reception frame analysis unit 1233 includes a response frame request flag determination unit 12331, a frame serial number analysis unit 12332, a transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333, a retransmission request determination unit 12334, and an upper layer data extraction unit. And 12335.
  • control unit 1231 When the control unit 1231 receives the transfer request from the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the control unit 1231 notifies the frame serial number addition unit 12322 of the serial number of the transmission frame, and the transmission right transfer flag addition unit 1232 To notify of the power or not. Further, the control unit 1231 controls the response frame request flag adding unit 12321 according to whether the transfer request from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 requests the response frame or not. Further, in the present embodiment, since the primary station does not make a retransmission request, retransmission request flag adding section 12324 does not need to perform any particular control. When the primary station makes a retransmission request, the retransmission request flag adding unit 12324 adds a retransmission request flag.
  • the upper layer notified of the response frame request flag addition unit 12321 requests a response frame for the transmission frame, Information indicating whether or not to transmit, the serial number of the frame notified from the frame serial numbered caro unit 12322, and the information notified from the transmission right transfer flag adding unit 12323 indicating whether to transfer the transmission right or not.
  • the header information is generated based on the information indicating whether or not to make a retransmission request from the retransmission request flag adding unit 12324 (however, the primary station does not always make a retransmission request, so it is always a fixed value), and the header information To build a frame. Then, the frame construction unit 12325 outputs the constructed frame to the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 which is the lower layer.
  • the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 adds predetermined header information to the received request frame to generate a frame, and outputs the frame to the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 which is a lower layer.
  • predetermined header information is added to the received request frame.
  • An additional frame is generated and output to the transmitter 126.
  • the transmitter 126 transmits a plurality of frames received from the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 to the outside at predetermined time intervals via an infrared communication path.
  • the receiver 127 When the receiver 127 receives the response frame transmitted from the secondary station via the infrared communication path, the receiver 127 outputs the received response frame to the IrLAP layer processing unit 125.
  • the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 and the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 analyze the received response frame power header information, perform predetermined processing based on the header information, and remove the header information, and the upper layer Response frame is passed! /.
  • the SMP layer processing unit 123 receives the response frame from the lower layer IrLMP layer processing unit 124, and analyzes the response frame in the reception frame analysis unit 1233.
  • the transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333 refers to the BL (described later) bit of the received frame and notifies the control unit 1231 of the determination result as to whether or not the transmission right is being transferred.
  • retransmission request determination section 12334 refers to the RS (described later) bit of the received frame, and when the retransmission request is made from the opposite station, notifies control section 1231 of the determination result as to whether or not it has power. Ru.
  • Frame serial number analysis unit 12332 extracts a frame number from the received frame, and outputs the frame number to control unit 1231.
  • control unit 1231 In response to the notification of the determination result from retransmission request determination unit 12331, control unit 1231 also retransmits the frame power of the serial number notified from frame serial number analysis unit 12332 if the other station requests retransmission.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 is controlled to perform. Also, if the determination result from the retransmission request determination unit 12331 indicates that the opposite station has not requested retransmission, the transmission is completed and the frames are sequentially transmitted.
  • the upper layer data extraction unit 12335 removes the header information of the SMP layer from the frame received from the lower layer (here, the IrLMP layer processing unit 124), and the upper layer (here, the OBE X layer processing). Output data to the part 122).
  • the primary station transfers data to the secondary station in the above-described procedure until transmission data is completely transmitted. Data transfer.
  • the receiver 127 receives a request frame to which the next station power is also transmitted, and the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 and the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 respectively analyze the header information, Header information is removed and the request frame is passed to the upper layer.
  • the reception frame analysis unit 1233 analyzes the reception frame.
  • Frame serial number analysis unit 12332 extracts the frame serial number from the received frame, checks the serial number of the received frame, and determines whether the result is normal or abnormal (frame missing etc.). Notify 1231. Also, when there is an error, the control unit 1231 is notified of the serial number of the frame in which the error occurred (retransmission, frame number).
  • the transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333 refers to the BL (described later) bit of the received frame and notifies the control unit 1231 of the determination result as to whether or not the transmission right is transferred.
  • the response frame request flag determination unit 12331 refers to the DL (described later) bit of the received frame and determines the result of determination as to whether the DL bit requests the response frame of the upper layer or not. To notify.
  • control unit 1231 Based on the determination result notified from transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333, control unit 1231 indicates that the determination result indicates that the transfer right of the other station has been transferred.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 controls (notifies) the transmission frame generation unit 1232 to generate and transmit a response frame.
  • the control unit 1231 requests the retransmission request flag addition unit 12324 to make a retransmission request. It indicates that the flag is set as shown, and an error notified from the frame serial number analysis unit 12332 occurs to the frame serial number addition unit 12322. Indicate the frame serial number.
  • the control unit 1231 does not make a retransmission request to the retransmission flag addition unit 12324 and normally receives it. Informs you to set a flag to indicate that it is complete.
  • the OBEX layer processing unit 122 prepares the response frame.
  • the response frame is not sent back until the completion of the response frame, and when it is notified from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 that the response frame has been prepared, the transmission frame generation unit 1232 is instructed to generate the response frame.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 adds predetermined header information to the response frame received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 to construct a frame, and outputs the frame to the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 which is a lower layer.
  • the response layer may be generated and transmitted in the SMP layer processing unit 123 until the preparation of the response frame is completed by the OBEX layer processing unit 122.
  • the control unit 1231 controls the transmission right transfer flag addition unit 12323 not to transfer the transmission right to the primary station, and controls to generate a transmission frame.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 is instructed to generate a response frame.
  • the transmission right transfer flag addition unit 12323 is controlled to set a flag so as to transfer the transmission right to the primary station.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 adds predetermined header information to the response frame received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 to construct a frame, and outputs the frame to the Ir LMP layer processing unit 124 which is a lower layer.
  • the transmission frame generation unit 1232 generates a response frame according to the control from the control unit 1231, and outputs the generated response frame to the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 which is the lower layer.
  • transmission of a response frame to the request frame from the primary station is performed each time transfer of the transmission right is performed from the primary station.
  • FIG. 14 shows a UI frame and a response (response) frame to the UI frame, a frame serial number, a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station, an error or a frame in the frame received so far A flag indicating if it has been missed and the primary station
  • This figure shows the frame configuration when the upper layer gives a flag indicating whether the response frame to the request frame requires a response frame or not.
  • the frame configuration shown here is only an example and is not limited to this.
  • a 3-byte header is added to the UI frame and the response frame to the UI frame, and a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right to the other station, the upper layer of the primary station responds to the request frame
  • a frame is requested and a flag indicating whether or not there is a power, a flag indicating whether or not the received frame used by the secondary station has an error, and the remaining 21 bits are configured as the serial number of the transmission frame.
  • a flag indicating whether the upper layer of the primary station requests the response frame to the request frame is DL
  • a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station is BL
  • the secondary station Let RS be a flag indicating whether the received frame used has errors or not, and let S be the serial number of the frame.
  • FIG. 15 shows the case where no error occurs in all received data in two-way communication.
  • the request layer transfer request is notified from the application layer processing unit 121 according to the user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown), and the OBEX layer processing unit 122 is a lower layer.
  • S, DL, BL, and RS shown in FIG. 15 respectively transfer the serial number of the frame, a flag indicating whether the upper layer of the primary station requests a response frame to the request frame, and transfer right of transmission. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is a flag indicating whether or not to make a retransmission request.
  • the SMP layer divides the transferred data transferred to the upper layer OBEX layer into predetermined data sizes, assigns a serial number, and outputs the data to the lower layer IrLMP layer.
  • the IrLMP layer and the IrLAP layer which are lower layers of the SMP layer, add a header sequentially to the frame which also receives the SMP layer force, and send the frame to the secondary station through the infrared communication path. Send
  • the secondary station receives a frame from the primary station via the infrared communication path.
  • the secondary station analyzes the header information sequentially from the received frame in the IrLAP layer and the IrLMP layer which are lower layers of the SMP layer, removes the header information, and outputs data to the upper layer.
  • the DL bit can be used in combination with a force that is used as a flag to indicate that the upper layer of the primary station requests a response frame to the request frame, and a flag of another meaning. It is. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 15, it is also possible to treat it as a flag that means the last frame of transfer data.
  • the OBEX layer after receiving notification from the SMP layer, all data has been successfully received, so a request to transmit a response frame is made to the SMP layer, and a response frame is passed.
  • the IrLMP layer and the IrLAP layer which are lower layers, add predetermined header information to the data that is also transferred to the upper layer as well, and pass the response frame to the lower layer, and the IrLAP layer passes the response frame via the infrared communication path. Sends a response frame to the primary station.
  • the secondary station receives the transmitted response frame, sequentially analyzes and removes header information from the lower layer, and delivers data to the upper layer. Then, the OBEX layer, which is an upper layer of the SMP layer, receives the OBEX response frame transmitted from the secondary station, and can recognize that the upper layer of the SMP layer of the primary station has also successfully completed the data transfer. It becomes.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 are signal sequence diagrams showing a data transfer procedure when an upper layer authentication request is issued at the time of authentication or the like.
  • header information is added to the response frame passed from the upper layer and the response frame is sent back to the authentication frame, so that the upper layer authentication between both stations is completed.
  • the SMP layer of the primary station receives the response frame at the SMP layer level (OBEX layer's response frame) before the response frame is prepared in the OBEX layer of the secondary station and the force response frame is returned. Response frames are included and can receive! /! As a result, since the SMP layer of the primary station can know whether or not the partner station has successfully received the frame before the response frame from the OBEX layer is sent back, the next data transfer is performed in advance. You can prepare for the
  • the transmitter (primary station) and the receiver (secondary station) are not limited to a power CPU configured to include a CPU, and may have an arithmetic processing function such as a microcomputer. It may be connected.
  • the controller transfers the transfer data in response to an instruction from the CPU.
  • the controller may transfer the transfer data by DMA (direct memory access) without intervention of the CPU.
  • transfer data can be transferred from memory that does not receive CPU power instructions. This can reduce the CPU load.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 31 as a block diagram of a transmitter
  • FIG. 32 as a block diagram of a receiver
  • FIG. 33 as a sequence diagram of signals.
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2001 according to the present embodiment. Note that Figure 31 This is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and is not limited to this. In addition, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • the transmitter 2001 is a device that transmits transmission data.
  • the transmission data may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • a transmitter (primary station, client device) 2001 includes a control unit (control means) 2002, a memory (storage means) 2003, a batch transmission final flag generation circuit (collective transmission final flag generation) Means) 2004, serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means) 2005, transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means) 2006, transmission unit (transmission means) 2007, reception unit (reception means) 2008, reception frame analysis circuit (reception Frame analysis means) 2009, no error flag analysis circuit (no error flag analysis means) 2010, error detection circuit (error detection means) 20 11, serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means) 2012 comprising.
  • a control unit 2002 controls each component of the transmitter 2001.
  • the memory 2003 stores transmission data.
  • This memory 2003 may be volatile memory (for example, SDRAM etc.) or non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD etc.). Further, in FIG. 31, the memory 2003 is disposed in the transmitter 2001, but may be connected to the transmitter 2001 as an external memory of the transmitter 2001 which is not necessarily present in the transmitter 2001. .
  • the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 means, when transmitting data in a certain unit, the transmitter 2001, when transmitting a frame including the final data of the certain unit. It is a circuit set as a value.
  • the abbreviation BL Block Last
  • BL Block Last
  • the abbreviation BL is used in the same meaning. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the force expressed as the batch transmission final flag, for example, the communication confirmation request flag, etc., it has essentially the same meaning as the batch transmission final flag in the present embodiment. Therefore, even if the flag does not necessarily have the same meaning as the batch transmission final flag, it is not limited to this as long as the flag performs the same operation.
  • the serial number generation circuit 2005 is a circuit that increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and assigns it to each transmission frame.
  • the abbreviation SEQ Sequence number
  • SEQ Sequence number
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 is a circuit that generates a transmission frame according to a predetermined format.
  • the above-mentioned batch transmission final flag BL, serial number SEQ, transmission data are arranged according to a predetermined format to generate a transmission frame.
  • a transmission frame in a frame format without window size limitation is generated. Examples include, but are not limited to, unnumbered information (UI) frames in Ir LAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol).
  • UI unnumbered information
  • Ir LAP Infrared Link Access Protocol
  • an error detection code is also added to allow the opposite station to detect an error.
  • the error detection code may be, for example, a cyclic redundancy check (CRC), but is not limited to this. Also, an error correction code may be added.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the transmitting unit 2007 is a circuit for transmitting the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • the communication medium may be an LED (light emitting diode) or an LD (laser diode), but it is not limited thereto.
  • the transmission unit corresponds to the communication medium.
  • the receiving unit 2008 is a circuit that receives a frame transmitted by the opposite station. For example, if infrared light is used as a communication medium, it becomes PD (photodiode), but it is not limited to this. When another communication medium is used, the reception unit corresponds to the communication medium.
  • PD photodiode
  • the reception frame analysis circuit 2009 analyzes the reception frame received by the reception unit 2008. Specifically, the no-error flag in the received frame is extracted and passed to the no-error flag analysis circuit 2010. Also, it extracts the serial number in the received frame and passes it to the serial number analysis circuit 2012. If data is present in the received frame, the data is extracted and stored in the memory 2003 via the control unit 2002. In the case of storing data in the memory 2003, the control unit 2003 may not necessarily be interposed.
  • No-Error Flag Analysis Circuit 2010 analyzes the no-error flag set in the opposite station according to a predetermined format, and notifies the control unit of the analysis result. In the present embodiment, a force expressed as no error flag, for example, an error flag, a retransmission request flag, or a retransmission request no flag may be used.
  • the error detection circuit 2011 interprets the error detection code attached to the received frame, determines whether or not there is an error in the received frame, and notifies the control unit of the analysis result.
  • the code for error detection may be, for example, a cyclic code such as a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) code. If an error correction code is given, error correction will be performed.
  • the serial number analysis circuit 2012 analyzes the received serial number and notifies the control unit 2002 of the analysis result.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a receiver 2101 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • the receiver 2101 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device.
  • the transmission data mentioned here is not limited to this, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • a receiver (secondary station, server device) 2101 includes a control unit (control means) 21 02, a memory (storage means) 2103, and no error flag generation circuit (no error flag generation means 2104, serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means) 2105, transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means) 2106, transmission unit (transmission means) 2107, reception unit (reception means) 2108, reception frame analysis circuit (reception frame analysis Means) 2109, batch transmission final flag analysis circuit (batch transmission final flag analysis means) 2110, error detection circuit (error detection means) 2111, serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means) 2112
  • the control unit 2102 controls each component of the receiver 2101.
  • the memory 2103 stores the received data.
  • This memory 2103 may be a volatile memory (for example, SDRAM or the like) or a non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD or the like).
  • memory 2103 is located in receiver 2101. However, it does not have to be in the receiver 2101 but may be connected to the receiver 2101 as an external memory of the receiver 2101.
  • the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 is a circuit that generates an no-error flag according to a predetermined format to notify the opposite station whether or not there is an error in the frame received from the opposite station. .
  • an error flag for example, an error flag, a retransmission request flag, or a retransmission request no flag
  • the error flag is essentially the same as the error-free flag.
  • There is no limitation to the flag as long as the flag does not have the same meaning as the no flag but the same operation is performed.
  • the serial number generation circuit 2105 is a circuit for setting a serial number desired to be retransmitted when making a retransmission request to the opposite station when an error is detected in a frame received so far.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 is a circuit that arranges the above-mentioned no-error flag and serial number according to a predetermined format, and generates a transmission frame.
  • IrL AP Infrared Link Access Protocol
  • the transmitting unit 2107 is a circuit that transmits the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
  • the communication medium may be an LED (light emitting diode) or an LD (laser diode), but it is not limited thereto.
  • the transmission unit corresponds to the communication medium.
  • the receiving unit 2108 is a circuit that receives a frame transmitted by the opposite station. For example, if infrared light is used as a communication medium, it becomes PD (photodiode), but it is not limited to this. When another communication medium is used, the reception unit corresponds to the communication medium.
  • PD photodiode
  • the reception frame analysis circuit 2109 analyzes the reception frame received by the reception unit 2108. Specifically, the batch transmission final flag in the received frame is extracted and passed to the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit. It also extracts the serial number in the received frame and passes it to the serial number analysis circuit. If data is present in the received frame, the data is extracted and stored in memory via the control unit. When storing data in memory, the controller You do not have to go through.
  • the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 analyzes the batch transmission final flag passed by the reception frame analysis circuit 2109, and notifies the control unit 2102 of the analysis result.
  • the error detection circuit 2111 interprets the error detection code attached to the received frame, determines whether or not there is an error in the received frame, and notifies the control unit 2102 of the analysis result.
  • codes for error detection include, but not limited to, cyclic codes such as cyclic redundancy check (CRC) codes. If an error correction code is given, error correction will be performed.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the serial number analysis circuit 2112 analyzes whether or not the serial number given in the received frame is increased or decreased according to a predetermined rule, and notifies the control unit 2102 of the analysis result. For example, when a frame is missed in the communication path, the serial number analysis circuit 2112 determines that an error occurs.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 sets an error-free flag to an error, and the serial number of the reception frame at that time is set. Generate a transmission frame that contains.
  • transmission frame generation circuit 2 106 includes the serial number of the received frame at that time when an error of serial number is detected in error serial number analysis circuit 2112 in which error of data is not detected in error detection circuit 2111. Generate a transmission frame.
  • the transmitter 2001 determines the size of data to be transmitted by the control unit 2002 when a transfer request for transmission data is generated from the own device or from outside, and notifies the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2003 of the size.
  • the control unit 2002 also notifies the serial number generation circuit 2004 to generate a serial number each time a frame is generated.
  • serial number generation circuit 2004 Upon receiving this, serial number generation circuit 2004 increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and passes it to transmission frame generation circuit 2005.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2005 arranges the batch transmission final flag, the serial number, and the data in a predetermined format, and transmits the data through the transmission unit 2006.
  • tl01, tl02, tl03, tl04, tl10 is a frame whose final transmission final flag is not final, and tl05, til is a final transmission final flag.
  • serial numbers (SEQs) in each frame of tl01, tl02, tl03, tl04, and tl05 are described in the present embodiment as increasing by one, and as a specific item.
  • the reception frame analysis circuit 2109 extracts each parameter in the reception frame.
  • the parameters are, for example, a batch transmission final flag, a serial number, data, etc.
  • the batch transmission final flag is passed to the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110, and the serial number is passed to the serial number analysis circuit 2112. If necessary, they are stored in the memory 2103 via the control unit 2102.
  • the error detection circuit 2111 performs error detection as to whether or not there is, for example, a CRC error in the received frame. If the error detection or error correction code is not a CRC code, error detection or error correction is performed accordingly.
  • the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 analyzes the batch transmission final flag, and notifies the analysis result.
  • serial number analysis circuit 2112 analyzes whether serial numbers in the received frame are increased or decreased according to a predetermined rule, and notifies analysis result to control unit 2102.
  • the predetermined rule the serial number is incremented by one for each frame.
  • the sequence diagram of FIG. 33 shows the case where the frame of serial number 3 transmitted by the transmitter 2001 is not recognized by the receiver 2102 due to a channel abnormality, and the next frame of serial number 4 is received. . In this case, the frame of serial number 3 is notified to the control unit 2102 as a frame in which an error has occurred.
  • control unit 2102 since the batch transmission final flag is notified that a frame meaning final is received, and serial number 3 is notified as a frame in which an error has occurred, errorless flag generation circuit 2104 is notified. On the other hand, the presence of an error is notified to serial number generation circuit 2105 and serial number 3 is notified, and transmission frame generation circuit 2106 is notified to generate a transmission frame.
  • the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 Upon receiving this, the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 generates a flag indicating the presence of an error according to a predetermined format, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
  • serial number generation circuit 2105 transfers the serial number 3 passed from the control unit 2102 to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 to which these error free flags and serial numbers are passed arranges these parameters according to a predetermined format, and transmits the parameters via the transmission unit 2107.
  • the frame of tl 17 is pointed.
  • the transmitter 2001 which has received the frame of tl 1 7 at tl 06 through the receiving unit 2008 performs extraction of each parameter in the reception frame in the reception frame analysis circuit 2009, and the extracted no error flag is
  • the error-free flag analysis circuit 2010 is passed on, and the serial number is passed on to the serial number analysis circuit 2012.
  • No Error Flag Analysis Circuit 2010 analyzes the passed no error flag. In this case, since the frame of tl 17 transmitted by the receiver 2101 indicates that there is an error, it is analyzed as having an error, and the control unit 2002 is notified of that.
  • the serial number analysis circuit 2012 analyzes the serial number and notifies the control unit 2 002 of the analysis result. In this case, the serial number 3 is notified to the control unit 2002.
  • Control section 2002 determines whether or not batch transmission can be normally performed by receiver 2101 based on the above analysis result of no error flag, serial number, and error detection result, and if there is an unsent portion in the transmission data For example, it is determined whether to transmit the data in a batch or to retransmit the data that has already been transmitted.
  • the receiver 2101 requests transmission from the frame with serial number 3 because there is an error, so that the transmission data is retransmitted from the part with serial number 3 at the previous transmission time. Do. Specifically, the batch transmission final flag circuit 2004 is notified that retransmission is to be performed, and the serial number generation circuit 2005 is notified of 3 as the start number.
  • Batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 recalculates the batch transmission data size, if necessary.
  • the same value as the previous batch transmission data size may be used, or the batch transmission last flag may be the last with the serial number of the frame when transmitting the frame meaning the last batch transmission final flag as the final.
  • the second batch transmission is performed. In the above, it is recommended that the batch transmission of serial numbers 3 to 7 be performed, and that the batch transmission of serial numbers 3 to 5 be performed.
  • serial number generation circuit 2005 when notified of retransmission from serial number 3 from control unit 2002, the start number of the serial number is reset to 3 and is passed to transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 generates a transmission frame, and transmits the transmission frame via the transmission unit 2007.
  • the receiver 2101 having received these retransmission frames determines that the error detection circuit 2111 and the pass number analysis circuit 2112 indicate that there is no error in all the received frames, the final transmission final flag indicates the end. After receiving the frame tl22, the control unit 2102 notifies the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 that there is no error.
  • the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 sets the no-error flag as a meaning of no error, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 places an error-free flag in the frame, and transmits it via the transmission unit 2107. Explanation of serial number at this time is omitted Do.
  • the counter can also process with flags that are not, which leads to simplification of the circuit.
  • transmission may be interrupted or terminated if the quality of the communication path is poor.
  • the notification may improve the quality of the communication path.
  • the transmitter 2001 may set the batch transmission data size to one frame length, and the batch transmission final flag may be final in all the frames. In this case, all In the communication system, the response from the receiver 2101 is required, and the communication efficiency decreases. However, the transmitter 2001 should reduce the storage area of data to be held in response to the retransmission request from the receiver 2101. This is effective in the transmitter 2001 where the memory can not be sufficiently secured.
  • the control unit 2102 causes the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 to batch Since the data until the transmission final flag receives the final frame and requests the transmitter 2001 to retransmit is the data to be retransmitted by the transmitter 2001, processing for storing the data in the meantime in the memory 2103 is You may not do this. By doing this, it is possible to reduce power consumption for storing data that is scheduled to be re-received by retransmission.
  • a restriction is placed on the number of retransmission requests to be made when an error is detected in the received frame from the transmitter 2001, and more retransmission requests than a predetermined value are made.
  • reception may be interrupted or terminated. In this way, when the quality of the communication path is extremely poor, it is possible to interrupt or terminate the communication and notify the user, and it is possible to perform communication on the communication path with improved quality.
  • an initial value predetermined in serial number generation circuit 2105 (for example, in the present embodiment)
  • the retransmission request frame may be transmitted to the transmitter 2001 by setting 0) at all times.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are to be regarded as true unless otherwise stated. Also in the embodiment, it shall be used according to the definition.
  • FIG. 34 As a block diagram of a transmitter
  • FIG. 32 as a block diagram of a receiver
  • FIGS. 35 and 36 as signal sequence diagrams.
  • FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2201 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 34 shows an example of the configuration of the transmitter, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • Transmitter 2201 is a device that transmits transmission data.
  • the transmission data mentioned here may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • each component other than timer (clocking means) 2213 has the same function as each component of transmitter 2001 (FIG. 31) in the fourth embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.
  • the timer 2213 is controlled by the control unit 2002. Specifically, after transmission is performed with the batch transmission final flag as the final, the control unit 2002 is started, and when a response frame is not normally received from the receiver 2101 within a predetermined time, the control unit 2002 Informing time out.
  • the control unit 2002 can not normally receive, at the receiver 2101, a frame whose last flag is the last in the batch transmission final flag transmitted immediately before due to an abnormality in the communication path (FIG. 35). (a frame of t205) or a frame whose last indication sent by the last transmission final flag transmitted immediately before is successfully received by the receiver, but a frame including the error-free flag to which the receiver power is also transmitted is communicated Due to the abnormality of the path, it is judged that the transmitter can not normally receive (frame of t312 in FIG. 36), and the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004, the serial number generation circuit 2005, and the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 are notified.
  • the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 that has received the notification sets the batch transmission final flag as the final, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • serial number generation circuit 2005 that has received the notification re-sets the serial number of the immediately preceding frame and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 Upon receiving these, the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 receives the same frame as the frame transmitted immediately before. The data is set again, and the batch transmission final flag and the serial number are set and transmitted via the transmission unit 2007.
  • the transmitter 2201 being configured, it is possible to retransmit a frame whose batch transmission final flag means the final, and even if the quality of the communication path is poor, the retransmission processing may be performed. It becomes possible to perform reliable communication.
  • the batch transmission final flag retransmits the final frame
  • the number of retransmissions is limited, and even if the number of retransmissions is larger than a predetermined value, batch transmission is normally performed to the receiver 2101. If this can not be done, the transmission may be interrupted or terminated. In this way, when the quality of the communication path is extremely poor, it is possible to interrupt or terminate the communication and notify the user, and it is possible to perform communication on the communication path with improved quality.
  • the reply frame t312 is transmitted to the frame of t311 for which the batch transmission final flag is the value indicating the final, the communication path is abnormal.
  • the reply frame t312 can not be received normally by the transmitter, the frame t313 may be received again with the batch transmission final flag indicating the final value.
  • the control unit 2102 holds the immediately preceding serial number, and the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 allows the batch transmission final flag to be the final frame.
  • the received notification is received, if the serial number from the serial number analysis circuit 2112 is the same as the previous serial number, even if the analysis result of the serial number analysis circuit 2112 is an error, no processing is performed as an error.
  • the control unit 2102 sets the same value as the frame transmitted immediately before in the no-error flag generation circuit 2104, and also sets the serial number of the frame transmitted immediately before in the serial number generation circuit 2105 and transmits it. If the value set in the no error flag generation circuit 2104 indicates no error, the serial number may not be set.
  • the batch transmission final flag indicates the final as described above, and the same
  • the control unit 2102 does not store it again. You may control. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the power consumption for data storage.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 37 As a block diagram of a transmitter
  • FIG. 38 as a block diagram of a receiver
  • FIG. 39 as a signal sequence diagram.
  • FIG. 37 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2301 according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 37 is an example of the configuration of the transmitter, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • Transmitter 2301 is a device that transmits transmission data.
  • the transmission data mentioned here may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • each component other than the opposite station buffer size analysis circuit (opposite station buffer size analysis means) 2313 has the same function as each component of the transmitter 200 1 (FIG. 31) in the fourth embodiment described above. Description is omitted because it has.
  • the opposing station buffer size analysis circuit 2313 analyzes buffer size parameters included in the received frame of the receiver 2401 (Fig. 38), and notifies the control unit 2002 of the analysis result.
  • control unit 2002 sets the batch transmission data size to a value smaller than the buffer size of the receiver 2401 to the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004, and performs batch transmission.
  • the receiver's buffer size should be received before batch transmission.
  • FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a receiver 2401 according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 38 is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this. Also, each component circuit is software It may be hardware or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • Receiver (Secondary station, server device) 2401 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device. Examples of transmission data as used herein include, but are not limited to, text data and image data.
  • each component other than the buffer size generation circuit (buffer size generation means) 2413 has the same function as each component of the receiver 2101 (FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment described above, I omit it.
  • the control unit 2102 passes the size of the buffer that can be received by the receiver 2401 to the buffer size generation circuit 2413.
  • the buffer size generation circuit 2413 generates the buffer size passed from the control unit 2102 according to a predetermined format, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 arranges the buffer size in the transmission frame and performs transmission. It is to be noted that the frame including the buffer size is preferably transmitted before the transmitter performs batch transmission, for example, the buffer size is arranged and transmitted in a frame transmitted at the time of connection. Is desirable but not limited to.
  • control unit 2102 of the receiver 2401 notifies the buffer size generation circuit 2413 of the buffer size that can be received by the receiver 2101 in brief.
  • buffer size generation circuit 2413 Upon receiving this, buffer size generation circuit 2413 generates a knob size parameter according to a predetermined format, and passes it to transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 Upon receiving this, the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 arranges the buffer size parameter in the transmission frame according to a predetermined format, and transmits it. This is t in Figure 39.
  • the reception frame analysis circuit 2009 extracts the knocker size parameter, and the opposite station buffer size analysis circuit 2313 Passed to
  • the opposing station buffer size analysis circuit 2313 analyzes the buffer size parameter and notifies the control unit 2002 of the analysis result.
  • the control unit 2002 sets a size equal to or less than the analyzed buffer size as the batch transmission data size, and passes the size to the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004.
  • the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 sets the batch transmission final flag based on the batch transmission data size passed from the control unit 2002, and performs batch transmission.
  • a default value of the batch receivable buffer size is determined in advance between the transmitter 2301 and the receiver 2401, and if the batch receivable buffer size is not received by the transmitter 2301, By defining that the default value is adopted, if the default value of the batch receivable buffer size in the receiver 2401 is equal to or less than the batch receivable knocker size of the receiver 2401, batch receivable is possible. Even if the buffer size is not notified to the transmitter 2301, if the transmitter 2301 performs batch transmission using the default batch receivable buffer size, the size of the batch receivable buffer of the receiver is also exceeded. It is possible to prevent the transmitter from performing batch transmission in advance. Also, in this case, it is not necessary for the receiver 2401 to transmit a frame for notifying the transmitter 2301 of the batch transmittable buffer size, which leads to bandwidth efficiency.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 40 as a block diagram of a transmitter
  • FIG. 41 as a block diagram of a receiver
  • FIG. 42 as a sequence diagram of signals.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2501 according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 40 is an example of the configuration of the transmitter, and the present invention is not limited to this. Also, each component circuit is software It may be hardware or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • Transmitter 2501 is a device that transmits transmission data.
  • the transmission data mentioned here may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • each component other than the data final flag generation circuit (data final flag generation means) 2513 has the same function as each component of the transmitter 2001 (FIG. 31) in the fourth embodiment described above, Is omitted.
  • Data final flag generation circuit 2513 determines whether or not the transmission frame includes the last of the transmission data, and if the final data is included, the data final flag is determined according to a predetermined format indicating its meaning. If the final data is not included, the data final flag is generated according to a predetermined format indicating its meaning, and is sent to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • control unit 2002 of the transmitter 2501 When the control unit 2002 of the transmitter 2501 generates a transmission frame, the control unit 2002 of the data final flag generation circuit 2513 transmits the final data of transmission data in the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2006. Inform if it is not.
  • Data final flag generation circuit 2513 receives this, generates a data final flag according to a predetermined format, and passes it to transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • the abbreviation DL Data Last
  • DL Data Last
  • the last data of transmission data is not included in the frame, and if DL is 1, transmission data is omitted.
  • the force of setting DL to 1 For example, when a certain type of response data is required as a response from the opposite station, this flag is a response request flag. If this flag has the same meaning as the response request flag and performs the same operation as the flag DL meaning the final data of the transmission data in the present embodiment, the flag It may be a request flag.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 arranges the data final flag, the batch transmission final flag, the pass number, and the data in the transmission frame, and transmits the data through the transmission unit 2007.
  • the frames at t501, t502, t503, and t504 are data.
  • the final flag DL is 0, and the final data of transmission data is not included in the frame, and the frame of t505 has the data final flag DL of 1 and the final data of transmission data is included in the frame, Show me.
  • FIG. 41 is a block diagram of a receiver 2601 according to the present embodiment. Note that Figure 41 is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • Receiver (Secondary Station, Server Device) 2601 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device.
  • transmission data as used herein include, but are not limited to, text data and image data.
  • each component other than the data final flag analysis circuit (data final flag analysis means) 2613 has the same function as each component of the receiver 2 101 (FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment described above, The description is omitted.
  • Data final flag analysis circuit 2613 analyzes the data final flag arranged in the received frame, and sends to control unit 2102 whether or not the received data includes the final data of the transmission data to be transmitted by the transmitter. And notify.
  • the received frame analysis circuit 2109 extracts a data final flag from the reception frame received via the reception unit 2108, and passes the data final flag analysis circuit 2613 to the data final flag analysis circuit 2613.
  • the batch transmission final flag and serial number are also extracted and analyzed by each analysis circuit.
  • Data final flag analysis circuit 2613 analyzes whether or not the final data of the transmission data of transmitter 2501 is included in the reception frame, and the result is notified to control section 2102.
  • control unit 2102 when the final data of the transmission data of the transmitter 2501 is included, a predetermined process (for example, the case where the reception data is compressed and it is ⁇ JPEG (Joint Photographic Exteriors Group) data It is possible to perform processing such as starting JPEG decoding, etc.).
  • a predetermined process for example, the case where the reception data is compressed and it is ⁇ JPEG (Joint Photographic Exteriors Group) data It is possible to perform processing such as starting JPEG decoding, etc.).
  • the transmitter 2501 having received this frame t512 at t506 can receive the response data from the receiver 2601 by analyzing the data in the received frame.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
  • the sequence according to the present embodiment includes the transmitter 2001 (FIG. 31), the receiver 2101 (FIG. 32), the transmitter 2201 (FIG. 34), the receiver 2301 (FIG. 37), and the receiver 2401 (FIG. 38), transmitter 2501 (Fig. 40) and receiver 2601 (Fig. 41) are additional functions that can be implemented.
  • FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram according to the present embodiment.
  • the IrDA Infrared Data Association
  • IrLAP Infrared Link Access Protocol
  • UI Unnumbered
  • Communication is performed using the Information) frame.
  • transmitters and receivers support Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX), and data shall be transmitted by the Put operation.
  • OBEX Object Exchange Protocol
  • transmission data is arranged in the Put Final command of OBEX, and frame transmission is performed using the UI frame of IrLAP.
  • the Put Final command is composed of dataO to data7, and dataO force and so on are all divided into data so that they become Put Final commands.
  • the batch transmission data size of the transmitter is a size obtained by concatenating data3 from dataO, and when the serial number becomes 3, a frame t604 with the batch transmission final flag BL set to 1 is transmitted.
  • the final data of transmission data configured with the OBEX Put Final command The data final flag DL is 0 because the data7 which is a data is not included in the transmission frame.
  • the receiver that received the frame of the batch transmission final flag BL power ⁇ at t 614 does not detect an error in the frame received so far, so the no error flag indicates no error, and at t 615 To send.
  • the SUCCE SS response which means normal reception for the Put Final command of OBEX, is not included in the transmission frame.
  • the transmitter that receives the frame indicating that the error-free flag indicates no error determines that the receiver has successfully received batch transmission of serial numbers 0 to 3, and subsequently transmits data4 as well as data7 collectively.
  • the batch transmission final flag is set to 1.
  • the data final flag DL is set to 1.
  • the receiver that received the frame with the data final flag 1 has received frames with serial numbers 4 to 7 correctly, and can correctly receive all Put Final commands from the transmitter. Therefore, a SUCCESS response is generated, which means normal reception for the Put Final command.
  • the batch transmission final flag is 1, according to the SUCCESS response, the no-error flag is regarded as having no error, and is sent together at t620.
  • the transmitter having received the frame indicating that the error free flag indicates no error at t610 recognizes that the batch transmission up to the serial number 4 and the serial number 7 has ended normally, and the inside of the received frame is received. Since the SUCCES response to the Put Final command sent by the transmitter is included, it is possible to recognize that the Put operation has also completed successfully.
  • the window size Even when the Ir LAP UI frame is used, confirmation of communication between the transmitter and the receiver And exchange of data can be performed reliably.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention is shown in FIG. It is as follows when it demonstrates based on 44 to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 44 as a block diagram of a transmitter
  • FIG. 45 as a block diagram of a receiver
  • FIG. 46 as a signal sequence diagram.
  • FIG. 44 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2701 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 44 shows an example of the transmitter configuration, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • the transmitter 2701 is a device that transmits transmission data.
  • the transmission data may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • a transmitter (primary station, client device) 2701 includes a control unit (control means) 2702, a memory (storage means) 2703, a serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means) 2705, a transmission frame A generation circuit (transmission frame generation means) 2706, a transmission unit (transmission means) 2707, and a data final flag generation circuit (data final flag generation means) 2713 are provided.
  • the control unit 2702 controls each component of the transmitter 2701.
  • the memory 2703 stores transmission data.
  • This memory 2703 may be volatile memory (for example, SDRAM or the like) or non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD or the like).
  • the memory 2703 is disposed in the transmitter 2701, but it is necessary to be connected to the transmitter 2701 as an external memory of the transmitter 2701 which is not necessarily present in the transmitter 2701. OK.
  • the serial number generation circuit 2705 is a circuit that increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and assigns it to each transmission frame.
  • SEQ Sequence number
  • SEQ Sequence number
  • Data final flag generation circuit 2713 determines whether or not the transmission frame includes the last of the transmission data, and if the final data is included, a predetermined frame indicating the meaning thereof. The data final flag is generated by the format, and if the final data is not included, the data final flag is generated according to a predetermined format indicating its meaning, and is sent to the transmission frame generation circuit 2706.
  • the abbreviation DL Data Last
  • the abbreviation DL is defined, and in the case where DL is 0, the last data of transmission data is not included in the frame, and in the case where DL is 1, transmission data It means that the final data is included. In the present embodiment, it may be a force-based expression represented by the abbreviation DL.
  • this data final flag needs to have a value indicating the final only in the transmission frame that necessarily includes the final data of the transmission data.
  • the final data flag may be set to a value indicating the final. In that case, it may be different from the data final flag.
  • DL and abbreviations are used as the data final flags.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2706 is a circuit that generates a transmission frame according to a predetermined format.
  • the above-mentioned data final flag DL, serial number SEQ, and transmission data are arranged according to a predetermined format to generate a transmission frame.
  • a transmission frame in a frame format having no restriction on the window size is generated.
  • a UI (Unnumbered Information) frame in IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol) is used.
  • an error detection code is also added to allow the opposite station to detect an error.
  • the error detection code includes, for example, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), but is not limited thereto. Also, an error correction code may be added.
  • the transmitting unit 2707 is a circuit that transmits the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2706.
  • the communication medium may be an LED (light emitting diode) or an LD (laser diode), but it is not limited thereto.
  • the transmission unit corresponds to the communication medium.
  • FIG. 45 is a block diagram of a receiver 2801 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 45 shows an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • each component circuit is software It may be hardware or hardware. The following explains each component.
  • the receiver 2801 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device.
  • the transmission data mentioned here is not limited to this, for example, text data, image data and the like.
  • a receiver (secondary station, server device) 2801 includes a control unit (control unit) 28 02, a memory (storage unit) 2803, a receiving unit (reception unit) 2808, and a reception frame analysis.
  • the control unit 2802 controls each component of the receiver 2801.
  • the memory 2803 stores received data.
  • This memory 2803 may be volatile memory (for example, SDRAM or the like) or non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD or the like).
  • the memory 2803 is disposed in the receiver 2801 but may be connected to the receiver 2801 as an external memory of the receiver 2801 which is not necessarily present in the receiver 2801. .
  • the receiving unit 2808 is a circuit that receives a frame transmitted by the opposite station. For example, if infrared light is used as a communication medium, it becomes PD (photodiode), but it is not limited to this. When another communication medium is used, the reception unit corresponds to the communication medium.
  • PD photodiode
  • a received frame analysis circuit 2809 analyzes the received frame received by the receiving unit 2808. Specifically, the data final flag in the received frame is extracted and passed to the data final flag analysis circuit 2813. Also, it extracts the serial number in the received frame and passes it to the serial number analysis circuit 2812. If data is present in the received frame, the data is extracted and stored in the memory 2803 via the control unit 2802. When storing data in the memory 2803, it does not have to be via the control unit 2802.
  • the error detection circuit 2811 interprets the error detection code attached to the received frame, determines whether or not there is an error in the received frame, and notifies the control unit 2802 of the analysis result.
  • codes for error detection include, but not limited to, cyclic codes such as cyclic redundancy check (CRC) codes. Also, an error correction code is given. If this is the case, error correction will be performed.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the serial number analysis circuit 2812 analyzes whether or not the serial numbers assigned in the received frame increase or decrease according to a predetermined rule, and notifies the control unit 2802 of the analysis result. For example, when a frame is missed in the communication path, the serial number analysis circuit 2812 determines that an error occurs.
  • the data final flag analysis circuit 2813 analyzes the data final flag passed by the reception frame analysis circuit 2809 and notifies the control unit 2802 of the analysis result.
  • transmission data is arranged in the Put Final command of OBEX, and frame transmission is performed using the UI frame of IrLAP.
  • the Put Final command is composed of dataO to data7. When all data7 and data7 are concatenated, it is divided so that it becomes a Put Final command. Also, it is the final data of data7 Force Put Final command.
  • the control unit 2702 notifies the serial number generation circuit 2705 of the generation of the serial number. Also,
  • the data final flag generation circuit 2713 is notified of the generation of the data final flag.
  • the serial number generation circuit 2705 increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
  • data final flag generation circuit 2713 determines whether or not the transmission data includes the final data of the transmission data, and indicates the final if it is included, and indicates the not final if it is not included.
  • a data final flag in a predetermined format is created and passed to a transmission frame generation circuit 2706.
  • the transmission frame generation circuit 2706 arranges the data final flag, serial number, and data in a predetermined format, and transmits the data via the transmission unit 2706.
  • the reception frame analysis circuit 2809 extracts each parameter in the reception frame.
  • the parameters are, for example, data final flag, serial number, data, etc.
  • the data final flag is passed to the data final flag analysis circuit 2813, and the serial number is passed to the serial number analysis circuit 2812, and the data is For example, it is stored in the memory 2803 via the control unit 2802.
  • the error detection circuit 2811 performs error detection as to whether or not there is, for example, a CRC error in the received frame. If the error detection or error correction code is not a CRC code, error detection or error correction is performed accordingly.
  • the data final flag analysis circuit 2813 analyzes the data final flag and notifies the analysis result.
  • the data final flag is not the last.
  • the data final flag is not received. Is notified to the control unit 2802 as the final.
  • serial number analysis circuit 2812 analyzes whether serial numbers in the received frame are increased or decreased according to a predetermined rule, and notifies control unit 2802 of the analysis result.
  • the predetermined rule the serial number is incremented by one for each frame.
  • all eight frames transmitted by the transmitter 2701 are normally received, and it is determined that the transmission number is incremented by one with the transmitter 2701 in advance. Since the serial number of the frame is increased by one compared to the serial number of the previous frame, the control unit 2802 of the receiver 2801 is notified as a normal reception in all the received frames.
  • control unit 2802 If no error is detected in all received frames, and a frame including a data final flag is received, control unit 2802 performs a predetermined process (for example, received data is compressed ⁇ JPEG data In this case, it is possible to perform processing such as starting JPEG decoding etc.). Further, in the receiver 2801, when the error detection circuit 2811 and the serial number detection circuit 2812 detect that there is an error in the received frame, it is assumed that the process of storing the subsequent data in the memory 2 103 is not performed. It is also good. By doing this, it is possible to reduce power consumption, which helps save data after an error is detected.
  • a predetermined process for example, received data is compressed ⁇ JPEG data In this case, it is possible to perform processing such as starting JPEG decoding etc.
  • the transmitter 2701 and the receiver 2801 in the communication method using the UI frame of IrLAP without limitation of window size, detection of frame omission also in one-way communication It is possible to perform reliable communication.
  • the transmitter 2701 can not receive a SUCCESS response to the Put Final command of OBEX.
  • the control unit 2702 of the transmitter 2701 in one-way communication, transmission of the Put Final is completed. Then, if it is determined to end the Put operation, data transfer by the Put operation can be performed normally even in one-way communication.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIGS.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
  • the size of batch transmission data transmitted collectively by the transmitter can be determined for convenience of data retransmission and data processing in the receiver.
  • the size of the batch transmission data may be determined by the application of the transmitter or the like according to the type of data to be transmitted, the state of the communication path, etc.
  • the size of the batch transmission data from the receiver You may send information to the transmitter to determine the size (for example, receiver sniff size).
  • data division is usually performed by the SMP layer, but may be performed by other layers.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a JPEG encoder in a transmitter and a JPEG decoder in a receiver.
  • DCT conversion is first performed on the original image in units of blocks (mcu: minimum coded unit) in the JPEG encoder 91 of the transmitter.
  • mcu is the minimum unit for JPEG conversion, and there are four types of 8x8, 8x16, 16x8, and 1616 depending on the compression method (Fig. 48 (&) to (1)).
  • the luminance component (Y) and the chromaticity components (Cb, Cr) have a one-to-one relationship in all pixels.
  • 8 x 16 (Fig. 48 (b))
  • Y is 2 (corresponding to 1 and 9 in 8 x 8), Cb (average of 1 and 9 in 8 x 8), Cr There is one each (average of 1 and 9 in 8x8).
  • 16 x 8 (Fig. 48 (c))
  • two Y correspond to 1 and 2 in 8 x 8
  • Cb average of 1 and 2 in 8 x 8
  • Cr (8 x 8) in one horizontally long unit 1) and the average of 2 in 8)!
  • 16 x 16 (Fig. 48 (d))
  • Y force (equivalent to 1, 2, 9, 10 in 8 X 8) and Cb (1, 2, 9, 8 in 8 X 8)
  • 1 Cr (average of 1, 2, 9 and 16 in 8x8).
  • the 8 ⁇ 8 has the lowest compression ratio, and the decoded image is closer to the original image, but the amount of data is larger. This is generally called 4: 4; 4.
  • the amount of data with the highest compression ratio in the 16 ⁇ 16 block is small, the number of averaged parts is large, so the possibility of obtaining a decoded image different from the original image is high.
  • DCT transform discrete cosine transform
  • This transformation is calculated as a multiplication of a two-dimensional matrix to obtain 64 transformation coefficients, the number of which is the same as the number of pixels in the block. The closer to the upper left, the lower the frequency component, and the closer to the lower right, the higher the frequency component.
  • the correlation with adjacent pixels is large, so the higher the conversion coefficient of the frequency component, the lower the appearance probability.
  • the above-mentioned transform coefficient is divided by a predetermined quantization table.
  • a predetermined quantization table since the appearance probability of high frequency transform coefficients is generally low, if the high frequency portion of the conversion table is enlarged, most of the high transform coefficients of frequency components become 0 by performing quantization.
  • entropy code ⁇ a predetermined entropy code ⁇
  • the entropy code is performed based on the bull.
  • the transform coefficient converted to 0 by quantization is expressed as a continuous number of 0 by the entropy code ⁇ , and compression is possible at this point. That is, in the original image, an image with a low frequency component (a change in adjacent color is severe) tends to have a high compression efficiency of JPEG compression.
  • the entropy coded image data is transmitted to the communication channel.
  • the operation performed by the JPEG decoder 92 is completely reverse to the operation performed by the transmitter. , JPEG decoding.
  • entropy decoding is performed based on a predetermined entropy code 04 table. Then, the data obtained by performing the entropy decoding is dequantized by dequantization using a predetermined dequantization table. The data after inverse quantization is converted to luminance component Y and chromaticity components Cb and Cr by inverse DCT transformation. Also, at this time, the image is restored using the luminance component Y and the averaged chromaticity components Cb and Cr according to the 8 ⁇ 8, 8 ⁇ 16, 16 ⁇ 8, and 16 ⁇ 16 compression methods, respectively.
  • FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of division and retransmission processing in units of mcu in the communication system of the present invention.
  • the above-mentioned DCT, quantization, and entropy coding are performed in mcu units. I am sending. Specifically, when the data is transferred to the temporary transmission buffer in units corresponding to mcul data, and the data of the temporary transmission buffer is transferred, the batch transmission end flag is set to 1.
  • the receiver transfers data in the reception temporary buffer to, for example, the application, and the application performs JP EG decoding.
  • the transmitter's temporary buffer for transmission and the receiver's temporary buffer for reception are only mcul (several tens of bytes to hundreds of bytes). You should secure it. Therefore, in a communication device where it is difficult to secure temporary memory, it is an effective split retransmission method.
  • FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of line-by-line division and retransmission processing in the communication system of the present invention.
  • the transmitter transfers one column's worth of data (corresponding to 8 lines in the case of 8 ⁇ 8) to the temporary buffer for transmission, and when transmission of one column's worth of transmission is complete, batch transmission
  • the end flag is set to 1.
  • the receiver When the receiver receives a frame of batch transmission end flag force ⁇ , for example, it transfers received data to the application and performs JPEG decoding in the application.
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of the division and retransmission processing in units of files in the communication system of the present invention.
  • the transmitter passes one transmission image to the transmission temporary buffer, and sets the batch transmission end flag to 1 when transmission of all the data in the transmission temporary buffer is completed.
  • the frame of batch transmission end flag force ⁇ is received, for example, the application
  • the received data is passed to Caseion, and JPEG decoding processing is performed in the application.
  • divisional retransmission processing can be performed in data units of one image, and thus the JPEG decoder of the application can perform JPEG decoding in units of one image.
  • processing such as updating a frame memory for display can be easily performed.
  • the transmission temporary buffer of the transmitter and the reception temporary buffer of the receiver will be about several hundred kB power MB.
  • processing such as continuing to display the previous image in a complete state is simplified. It is effective because it can be done.
  • the client device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) will be described below.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 52 is a block diagram of a client device that performs communication using the conventional OBEX protocol.
  • the conventional client device (communication device) 3200 includes an application layer processing unit 3210, an OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3220, and a lower layer processing unit 3230. At least a transmitting unit 3240 and a receiving unit 3250 are provided.
  • the application layer processing unit 3210 receives a user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown). In response to this, it requests the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 to issue a request command.
  • the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 includes a control unit 3221, a request notification unit 3222, and a response reception unit 3223.
  • the control unit 3221 In response to a request from the application layer processing unit 3210, the control unit 3221 notifies the request notification unit 3222 to generate a request command and issue a request command to the lower layer. Also, upon receiving the notification of the reception result of the response command from the response receiving unit 3223, the application layer processing unit 3210 is notified of the reception result of the response command.
  • the request notification unit 3222 receives the request command issuance notification from the control unit 3221, generates a request command, and outputs the request command to the lower layer processing unit 3230.
  • the response receiving unit 3223 receives the response command output from the lower layer processing unit 3230, analyzes the received response command, and notifies the control unit 3221 that the command analysis result and the response command have been received. Do.
  • the lower layer processing unit 3230 adds an appropriate lower layer header to the request command from the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 and passes it to the transmitting unit 3240 and, from the reception response command from the receiving unit 3250, an appropriate one. Remove the lower layer header and pass it to the OBEX layer processing unit 3220.
  • the transmitting unit 3240 transmits the request command received from the lower layer processing unit 3230 to the outside through the infrared communication path.
  • the receiving unit 3250 receives the response command transmitted from the other device (server device) via the infrared communication path, and outputs the received response command to the lower layer processing unit 3230.
  • control unit 3221 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 shown in FIG. 52 will be described using the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • Step S 51 is a step in which the application layer processing unit 3210 of the client device 3200 and the control unit 3221 of the OB layer processing unit 3220 determine whether or not a request command to the server device has been generated. If it is generated, the process proceeds to step S52, and if it is generated, the process proceeds to step S51 again.
  • Step S52 is a step of transmitting a request command to the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3230. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S53.
  • Step S53 receives a response command from the Sano device from the lower layer processing unit 3230. It is a step to determine whether or not. If it has been received, the process goes to step S54, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S53 again.
  • Step S 54 is a step of analyzing the received response command. After analysis, the process transitions to step S55.
  • Step S55 is a step of determining whether or not the communication end capability. If the communication has not ended, the process returns to step S51 again.
  • the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 of the conventional client device 3200 can issue a request command, analyze a response command to it, and perform communication by issuing the next request command again. It becomes possible.
  • the client device 3300 (FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment, after issuing a request command to the server device, the response command from the server device is issued. It is possible to issue the next request command without receiving. Specifically, it is as follows.
  • Step S 61 is a step of determining whether or not a request command to the server is generated in the application layer processing unit 3310 of the client apparatus 3300 and the control unit 3321 of the OB layer processing unit 3320. If it is generated, the process proceeds to step S62, or if it is generated, the process proceeds to step S61 again.
  • Step S62 is a step of transmitting a request command for the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3330. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S65.
  • Step S65 is a step of determining whether or not the communication termination capability. If the communication has not ended, the process returns to step S61 again.
  • the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 performs the above-described operation to send the request command from the client device 3300 and then receive no response command from the server device. , The next request command can be sent.
  • FIG. 54 is a block diagram of the client device 3300 according to the present embodiment.
  • the blocks other than the communication direction selection unit 3324 of the OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3320 are the blocks of the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 of the conventional client device 3200 described above with reference to FIG. 52. Description is omitted because it has the same function.
  • the communication direction selection unit 3324 has a function of selecting whether the communication is one-way communication or two-way communication.
  • one-way communication is communication that requires a response command from the server device in response to a request command from the client device.
  • the transmitting unit does not exist in the server device, or when the receiving unit does not exist in the client device, although the communication is necessarily one-way communication, the transmitting device and the receiving device are respectively provided by the client device and the Sano device. However, if the signal flow is one-way to the client device server device, it will still be one-way communication.
  • two-way communication is a communication method in which a server device transmits a response command in response to a request command to which client device power is also transmitted, and after analysis of the response command, the client device transmits the next request command again. is there.
  • response commands are not required, and arrangements have been made in advance in both the client device's OBEX layer and the Sano device's OBEX layer, if specific. The response command to the request command is not necessary!,.
  • control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.
  • Step S70 is a step in which the communication direction selection unit 3324 selects bidirectional communication or unidirectional communication. In the case of two-way communication, the process transitions to step S71, and in the case of one-way communication, the process transitions to step S81.
  • Step S 71 is a step of determining whether or not a request command to the server device has been generated in the application layer processing unit 3310 or the control unit 3321 of the OB EX layer processing unit 3320 in two-way communication. If it is generated, the process proceeds to step S72, and if it is generated, the process transitions to step S71 again.
  • Step S 72 is a step of transmitting a request command for the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3330 in two-way communication. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S73.
  • Step S73 is a step of determining whether or not the server device power response command has been received in the two-way communication. If received, go to step S74. If not, the process transitions to step S73 again.
  • Step S74 is a step of analyzing the server device power response command in the two-way communication. After analysis, the process moves to step S75.
  • Step S75 is a step of determining whether or not to end communication in two-way communication. If not, the process returns to step S71.
  • step S 81 whether or not a request command to the server device is generated in the control unit 3321 of the application layer processing unit 3310 or the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 in one-way communication. Is a step of determining If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S82. If not, the process proceeds to step S81 again.
  • Step S 82 is a step of transmitting a request command for the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3330 in one-way communication. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S85.
  • Step S85 is a step of determining whether or not to end communication in one-way communication. If not, the process returns to step S81.
  • the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 performs the above-described operation to send a next request command after waiting for a response command from the server device in two-way communication. In one-way communication, it is possible to send the next request command without receiving the server device's response command.
  • the client device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) will be described below.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 54 is a block diagram of the client device 3300 according to the present embodiment. That is, the operation of each block other than the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 is basically the same as the operation of each block in the eleventh embodiment. The explanation is omitted.
  • Step S 91 is a step of determining whether or not a Put request command to the server device is generated in the control unit 3321 of the application layer processing unit 3310 or the OBEX layer processing unit 3320. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S92. If not, the process proceeds to step S91 again.
  • Step S92 is a step of transmitting a Put request command to the Sano device. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S93.
  • Step S93 is a step of determining whether the sent Put request command is not the final Put request command. If it is final, the process goes to step S94, and if it is not final, the process goes to step S91.
  • Step S 94 is a step of determining whether or not the response command from the Sano device has been received. If it has been received, the process goes to step S95, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S94 again.
  • Step S95 is a step of analyzing a response command from the Sano device. After analysis, the process moves to step S96. At this time, it is determined whether or not the SUCC ESS response command to the final Put request command has been received.
  • Step S96 is a step of determining whether the communication has ended. If not ended, the process returns to step S91 again.
  • the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 performs the above-described operation to respond to a non-final Put request command without waiting for the server device's CONTI NUE response command. It becomes possible to send a Put request command, and it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of communication.
  • the client device 3300 can execute data transfer successfully to the server device 3300 because the client device 3300 checks the response to the SUCCESS response command from the server device in response to the final Put command. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.
  • the server device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) will be described below.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 58 shows a block diagram of a server device that performs communication using the conventional OBEX protocol.
  • the Sano device (communication device) 3400 has an application layer processing unit 34.
  • a transmitting unit 3440 and a receiving unit 3450 at least.
  • the application layer processing unit 3410 requests the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 to process a reception request command and issue a response command according to the user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown).
  • the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 includes a control unit 3421, a response notification unit 3422, and a request analysis unit 3423.
  • control unit 3421 In response to the request from the application layer processing unit 3410, the control unit 3421 notifies the response notifying unit 3422 to generate a response command and issue a response command to the lower layer. Also, in response to the request command reception result notification from the request analysis unit 3423, the application layer processing unit 3410 is notified of the reception result of the request command.
  • response notification unit 3422 In response to the response command issuance notification from control unit 3421, response notification unit 3422 generates a response command and outputs the generated response command to lower layer processing unit 3430.
  • the request analysis unit 3423 receives the request command output from the lower layer processing unit 3430, analyzes the received request command, and notifies the control unit 3421 that the command analysis result and the request command have been received. Do.
  • the lower layer processing unit 3430 adds an appropriate lower layer header to the response command from the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 and passes it to the transmitting unit 3440 and, from the reception request command from the receiving unit 3450, an appropriate one. Remove the lower layer header and pass it to the OBEX layer processing unit 3420.
  • Transmission unit 3440 is a request received from lower layer processing unit 3430 via an infrared communication path or the like. Send a command to the outside.
  • the receiving unit 3450 receives the request command transmitted from the other device (client device) via the infrared communication path or the like, and outputs the received request command to the lower layer processing unit 3430.
  • Step S101 is a step of determining whether the client device power is also the power that has received the request command. If it has been received, the process goes to step S102, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S101 again.
  • Step S102 is a step of analyzing the client device power request command.
  • Step S103 is a step of creating a response command to the client device. After creating the response command, the process proceeds to step S104.
  • Step S 104 is a step of transmitting the response command to the client device.
  • step S105 After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S105.
  • Step S105 is a step of determining whether to end communication. If the process is not ended, the process returns to step S101 again.
  • the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 of the conventional server device 3400 can perform communication by receiving and analyzing the request command and generating and transmitting a response command thereto.
  • server device 3500 receives the request command of the client device and analyzes it, and then sends it to the client device. It is possible to generate and send a response command and to receive the next request command. Specifically, it is as follows.
  • Step SI 11 is a step of determining whether or not the client device power request command has been received. If it has been received, the process goes to step S112, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S111 again.
  • Step S112 is a step of analyzing the received request command. After analysis, the process moves to step S115.
  • Step S115 is a step of determining whether communication has ended. If not ended, the process returns to step S111.
  • FIG. 60 is a block diagram of a server device 3500 according to another embodiment of the present embodiment.
  • the blocks other than the communication direction selection unit 3524 of the OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3520 are the same as the blocks of the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 of the conventional server device 3400 described above with reference to FIG. Description is omitted because it has a function.
  • the communication direction selection unit 3524 has a function of selecting whether the communication is one-way communication or two-way communication.
  • one-way communication is communication that requires a response command from the server device in response to a request command from the client device.
  • the transmitting unit does not exist in the server device, or when the receiving unit does not exist in the client device, although the communication is necessarily one-way communication, the transmitting device and the receiving device are respectively provided by the client device and the Sano device. However, if the signal flow is one-way to the client device server device, it will still be one-way communication.
  • two-way communication is a communication method in which a server device transmits a response command in response to a request command to which client device power is also transmitted, and after analysis of the response command, the client device transmits the next request command again. is there.
  • a response command is not required, and arrangements are made in advance in both the client device's OBEX layer and the Sano device's OBEX layer! / Not necessary to respond to specific request commands!
  • Step S120 is a step in which the communication direction selection unit 3524 selects two-way communication or one-way communication. In the case of two-way communication, the process transitions to step S121, and in the case of one-way communication, the process transitions to step S131.
  • Step S121 is a step of determining whether or not the request command from the client device has been received in the two-way communication. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S122, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S121 again.
  • Step S122 is a step of analyzing a request command from the client device in two-way communication. After analysis, the process moves to step S123.
  • Step S123 is a step of creating a response command to the client device in two-way communication. After creating the response command, the process proceeds to step S124.
  • Step S 124 is a step of notifying the lower layer processing unit 3530 in order to transmit the created response command to the client device in two-way communication. After the notification ends, the process transitions to step S125.
  • Step S125 is a step of determining whether or not to end communication. If it has not ended, the process returns to step S121 again.
  • step S131 is a step of determining whether or not a request command from a client device has been received in one-way communication. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S132, and if it is received, the process proceeds to step S131 again.
  • Step S132 is a step of analyzing a request command from the client device in one-way communication. After analysis, the flow proceeds to step S135.
  • Step S135 is a step of determining whether or not the communication has ended in one-way communication. If not ended, the process goes back to step S131.
  • a response command is generated and transmitted when receiving a request command of the client device in bidirectional communication. Also, in one-way communication, it is possible to receive the next request command without generating or transmitting a response command after receiving a request command from the client device.
  • the server device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 60 is a block diagram of the server device 3500 according to the present embodiment. That is, it is the same as the thirteenth embodiment described above, and the operation of each block other than the control unit 3521 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3520 is basically the same as the operation of each block in the thirteenth embodiment. Description is omitted because there is.
  • Step S141 is a step of determining whether or not a Put command of the client device has been received. If it has been received, the process goes to step S142, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S141 again.
  • Step S142 is a step of analyzing the received Put command. After analysis, the process transitions to step S143.
  • Step S143 is a step of determining whether the analyzed Put command is the final Put command but not the final Put command. If it is the final Put command, the process goes to Step S144, and if it is not the final Put command, the process goes to Step S141 again.
  • Step S144 is a step of generating a response command to the client device. After completing the generation of the response command, the process transitions to step S145.
  • the generated response command is, for example, a SUCCESS response command when all of the Put commands from the client device have ended normally. Also, in other embodiments, this embodiment does not mention.
  • Step S145 is a step of notifying the lower layer processing unit 3530 to transmit the above-mentioned response command to the client device. After the notification ends, transition to step S 146
  • Step S146 is a step of determining whether the communication has ended. If not end The process transitions to step S141.
  • the CONTINUE response generated in the conventional OBEX layer processing unit for a non-final Put request command It is possible to generate and transmit a SUCCESS response command in response to the final Put request command without generating or transmitting a command, which makes it possible to improve communication efficiency. Also, since the SUCCESS response command to the final Put command is sent to the client device, it is possible to determine whether the client device has successfully transferred data to the server device 3500 or not.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
  • FIG. 1 an example of communication between mobile phones will be described using FIG.
  • a mobile phone is used as a transmitter and a receiver
  • data can be transmitted by infrared rays according to any of the present invention methods.
  • the opposite device may not be a mobile phone.
  • data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to the mobile phone B using infrared rays.
  • the mobile phone B receives the data transmitted from the mobile phone A
  • the received data is stored in the memory in the mobile phone B or in the connected external memory.
  • the aforementioned data is text data, image data, voice data, telephone directory data, system information, etc., and is not limited to a specific format.
  • the data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
  • the transmitting side assigns a serial number to the IrLAP UI frame with no restriction on the window size by the method of any of the above-described embodiments. Transmit, and retransmit if necessary according to the contents of the reply frame of the receiver (mobile phone B), perform error detection and serial number analysis on the receiver (mobile phone B), if necessary, and By making a retransmission request, high quality communication can be performed.
  • the window size is not limited according to any of the methods of the above-described embodiments.
  • the frame is given a serial number and transmitted, and the receiving side (mobile phone B) can perform high-quality communication by performing error detection and serial number analysis.
  • a mobile phone is used as a transmitter, if the data can be transmitted by infrared rays etc. by any of the methods of the present invention, the transmitter is not a mobile phone. It does not matter.
  • the display device may be the transmission side.
  • data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to a display device B (such as a TV or a monitor) using infrared light.
  • the display device B performs appropriate processing on the data transmitted from the mobile phone A. For example, in the case of image data, display is performed by decompressing compressed data if necessary. But it is not limited to this.
  • the above-mentioned data are text data, image data, voice data, telephone directory data, system information and the like, and are not limited to a specific format.
  • the data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
  • the transmitting side (mobile phone A) assigns a serial number to the IrLAP UI frame with no window size restriction by any of the methods described in the above embodiments. Then, it retransmits if necessary according to the contents of the reply frame on the receiving side (display device B), and performs error detection and serial number analysis on the receiving side (display device B), if necessary. By making a retransmission request, high quality communication can be performed.
  • the window size is not limited according to any of the methods of the above-described embodiments. It is possible to perform communication with high quality by performing error detection and analysis of the serial number on the receiving side (display device B) by assigning the serial number to the frame and transmitting it.
  • transmission is performed by setting the reception buffer size notified to the transmitter by the display device at the time of connection to the image size of JPEG images (about several hundreds of KB and several MB).
  • the batch transmission data size of the machine can be set to a size that allows one JPEG image to be transmitted at one time.
  • the reception buffer is switched, and the second reception is performed. While receiving the next JPEG image in the reception buffer, processing such as decoding of the JPEG data in the first reception buffer can be easily performed.
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
  • the transmission device may not be a mobile phone as long as data can be transmitted by infrared rays or the like according to any method of the present invention.
  • the printing apparatus may be the transmission side.
  • data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to the printing apparatus B using infrared rays.
  • the printing device B performs appropriate processing on the data transmitted from the mobile phone A. For example, if it is image data, printing is performed by decompressing compressed data if necessary. But it is not limited to this. Also, the above-mentioned data are text data, image data, telephone directory data, system information, etc., and it is not limited to a specific format.
  • the data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
  • the transmitting side (mobile phone A) transmits an IrLAP UI frame having no window size limitation by any of the methods described in the above embodiments.
  • a number is added and transmitted, and if necessary, retransmission is performed according to the contents of the reply frame on the receiving side (printing device B), and on the receiving side (printing device B), error detection and serial number analysis are performed. It is possible to perform high quality communication by making a retransmission request if necessary.
  • the window size is not limited according to any of the methods of the above-described embodiments.
  • the frame is assigned a serial number and transmitted, and the receiving side (printing apparatus B) detects an error and By analyzing the serial number, it is possible to communicate with high quality!
  • the primary size can be set by setting the reception buffer size that the printing apparatus notifies the transmitter at connection time to the image size of JPEG images (about several hundred KB and several MB).
  • the batch transmission data size of the station can be set to a size that allows one JPEG image to be transmitted at one time.
  • the printing apparatus has two reception buffers and one reception buffer receives JPE G image data
  • the reception buffer is switched, and the second reception buffer is next received.
  • processing such as decoding JPEG data in the first reception buffer.
  • the printer when printing is in a state where it is not possible to receive the next data during printing, the printer notifies the transmitter that a error has occurred in a pseudo manner even if no error has occurred, and the transmitter power is retransmitted. It is possible to earn time, for example, by
  • the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG.
  • the terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
  • the transmission device may not be a mobile phone as long as data can be transmitted by infrared rays or the like according to any method of the present invention.
  • the recording apparatus may be the transmission side.
  • data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to the recording device B using infrared light.
  • the recording device B performs appropriate processing on the data transmitted from the mobile phone A.
  • the memory in the recording device B or the external memory connected to the recording device B Record on Memory in the recording device B is a volatile memo such as SDRAM It is also possible to use any non-volatile memory such as flash memory, recordable DVD, HDD drive, etc. as long as it can record temporarily or semi-permanently.
  • the above-mentioned data are text data, image data, voice data, telephone directory data, system information and the like, and are not limited to a specific format.
  • the data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
  • the transmitting side (mobile phone A) transmits an IrLAP UI frame having no window size limitation by any of the methods described in the above embodiments.
  • a number is added and transmitted, and if necessary, retransmission is performed according to the contents of the reply frame on the receiving side (recording device B), and on the receiving side (recording device B), error detection and serial number analysis are performed. It is possible to perform high quality communication by making a retransmission request if necessary.
  • the window size is not limited according to one of the methods of the above-described embodiments.
  • the frame is assigned a serial number and transmitted, and the receiving side (recording apparatus B) can perform high-quality communication by performing error detection and serial number analysis.
  • transmission is performed by setting the reception buffer size notified to the transmitter by the recording device at connection time to the frame size (about several hundred KB to several MB) of the MPEG moving image.
  • the batch transmission data size of the machine can be set to a size that allows one frame to be transmitted at one time.
  • the recording apparatus has two reception buffers and one frame of reception data has been received in one reception buffer, the reception buffer is switched, and the second reception buffer is switched to the next reception buffer. Processing such as decoding frame data in the first reception buffer can be performed easily while receiving frame data.
  • FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the OSI 7 hierarchical model, the hierarchy of IrDA, and the hierarchy of the communication system according to the present invention.
  • Each communication layer of the communication system according to the present embodiment also has the same function as that of the corresponding layer of the OSI seven-layer model. However, as shown in FIG. 68, the communication system has a six-layer structure in which the session layer and the presentation layer are one!
  • IrSimple is an application example of the present invention.
  • the present invention is not limited to IrSimple. Note that IrSimple is an improvement on some of the functions of the conventional IrDA.
  • the data link layer, the network layer, the transport layer, and the session layer + the presentation layer may be referred to as LAP, LAMP, SMP, and OBEX, respectively.
  • LAP LAMP
  • SMP SMP
  • OBEX OBEX
  • P is added to the transmitter (primary station) and "S” to the receiver (secondary station).
  • LAP (P) means the data link layer of the transmitter.
  • FIG. 69 (a) is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 69 (c) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • the same function as the search can be provided to the SNRM command by using the global address for the Destination Device Address of the SNRM (Fig. 69 (c) SNRM command).
  • SNRM command and UA response that are connection packets of the data link layer, upper layers such as the network layer, transport layer, session layer, presentation layer, etc. are included. Insert parameters and commands required for connection. As a result, it is possible to condense connection packets for connecting the upper layers required in the conventional IrDA into one packet.
  • search and connection sequences can be performed with one packet pair, which conventionally required multiple packets.
  • FIG. 69 (b) is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 69 (c) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (no response). In the present embodiment (no response), the UA response (UA response for SNRM in FIG. 69 (c)) is unnecessary.
  • connection sequence of this embodiment shortens the time required for connection by putting together the connection requests of a plurality of communication layers. Easy to connect. Therefore, the communication path is easily disconnected, and it is particularly suitable for, for example, infrared communication. However, it is also effective in other wireless communications including IEEE802.11 wireless, Bluetooth, and wired communications.
  • connection of all communication layers is connected by one communication
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • connection of one communication layer may be performed by multiple times of communication. For example, if the network layer connection requires two communications, combine the data link layer connection and the first connection of the network layer into one connection request, and the second connection of the network layer and the transport layer You may combine the connections in one connection request into one.
  • FIGs. 70 (a) and 70 (b) are sequence diagrams showing a data exchange sequence according to the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 70 (a) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • the responses of the lower layer and the upper layer for each piece of data are reduced as much as possible, and after transmitting a large amount of data, whether or not an error or helplessness is sent back is sent.
  • the transmitter is constructed of a sequential packet number, a flag for asking whether a problem has occurred with received data, and divided data obtained by dividing the above data according to the size of the packet. Use a packet.
  • the transmitter transmits a predetermined number of packets and then transmits a packet with the flag turned on.
  • the receiver receives a packet from the beginning of the previous data or the above flag is turned on and sends back a response, it indicates that it has received successfully if it detects no error. Notify the transmitter.
  • the receiver receives a packet from the beginning of the previous data or the above flag is turned on and sends back a reply, if an error is detected, the subsequent packets that can not be received are received. The divided data portion is ignored, only the flag is checked, and if the flag is on, the transmitter is notified of a packet number that can not be received due to an error.
  • the transmitter when the transmitter receives a signal indicating that it has been correctly received, the transmitter transmits from the next packet. Also, when the transmitter is notified that an error has occurred, it retransmits from the packet number which could not be received to the packet with the above flag turned on.
  • a UI frame (FIG. 71 (b)) is used in the present embodiment (with response). For this reason, the packet link can not be recognized in the data link layer (LAP layer), and is detected in the transport layer.
  • LAP layer data link layer
  • the data portion of the transport layer of the UI frame is provided with a sequential number, a flag for data confirmation, a flag indicating whether it is the last packet of data, whether the received data was normal, and these flags Send [0661] [B] No response
  • FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) are sequence diagrams showing a data exchange sequence according to the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (no response).
  • the receiver only confirms whether or not there is an error, and if it is received normally, after receiving all the data, it recognizes that the reception is normal within the receiver, and Perform the action of The next operation in this case is, for example, to display, print, or save the received data.
  • the next action in this case is an indication to notify the user of the failure or to be in the state of waiting for the next reception.
  • FIG. 73 (a) is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 73 (c) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • FIG. 73 (b) is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 73 (c) shows the case of the disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). It is explanatory drawing which shows the data structure of communication data. In addition, this embodiment (No response
  • the data link layer is LAP
  • the network layer is LAMP
  • Transport layer TTP or SMP Transport layer TTP or SMP
  • session layer presentation layer
  • LAP (P) means the data link layer of the transmitter.
  • FIG. 74 is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are explanatory diagrams showing data structures of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • connection preparation is performed for both the transmitter and the receiver.
  • the transmitter passes the upper layer request as it is to the lower layer and transmits it as one packet (SNRM).
  • the receiver receives the SNRM packet and reports that it can connect to the upper layer as it is, then passes the response of OBEX (S) to the lower layer as it is, and as one packet (UA) Send.
  • S OBEX
  • UA one packet
  • the transmitter concludes the connection by receiving the UA, and sends notification (Connect. Confirm) to the upper layer!
  • the sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
  • OBEX (P) When OBEX (P) receives an application connection request, it immediately sends a connection request command to the lower layer (S MP (P)) and issues a connection request function (Primitive). Produce. Also, when OBEX (P) receives the connection confirmation function from SMP (P), OBEX (P) confirms the response of the OBEX connection from the data, and responds that there is no problem (Success). If it is the connection is complete.
  • the SMP (P) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (P) and immediately transmits the data of the OBEX (P) connection request function to the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a connection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the connection check function from LMP (P), it extracts the parameters generated by the receiver's SMP (S) from the data data of the function, checks the value, and End the negotiation with). In addition, SMP (P) also transmits the data strength of the connection check function with the parameters of SMP (S) removed as the connection check function to OBEX (P).
  • the LMP (P) receives the connection request function from the SMP (P) and promptly sends the data of the connection request function of the SMP (P) to the parameters required for communication with the LMP (S) of the receiver. And generate a connection request function for the lower layer (LAP (P)). Also, when LMP (P) receives the connection check function from LAP (P), it extracts the nolometer generated by LMP (S) of the receiver from the data of the function, and confirms the value, and LMP (S) End the negotiation with Also, LMP (P) transmits the data obtained by removing the parameter of LMP (S) from the data strength of the connection confirmation function as a connection confirmation function to SMP (P).
  • LSAP Link Service Access Point
  • LAP (P) receives the connection request function from LMP (P), promptly transmits the data of LMP (P) connection request function, and the parameters necessary for communication with LAP (S) of the receiver. And output an SNRM command to the physical layer of the receiver. Also, when the LAP (P) receives the physical layer strength UA response of the receiver, it extracts the parameters generated by the LAP (S) of the receiver from the data of the UA response, confirms the values, and checks the LAP (S) End the negotiation with. Also, LAP (P) transmits data obtained by removing the parameter of LAP (S) from the data of UA response as a connection confirmation function to LMP (P).
  • OBEX (S) receives the connection request function from the application and enters the reception standby state . Also, when OBEX (S) receives the connection notification function (Indication) also for the lower layer (SMP (S)) power, it checks the OBEX connection command from the data, and if there is no problem, the response says Success. Is output to SMP (S) as a connection response function (Response), and connection is completed.
  • Connection notification function Indication
  • SMP (S) lower layer
  • the SMP (S) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (S), and stands by for reception. Also, when SMP (S) receives the connection notification function from the lower layer (SMP (S)), it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function, Create the response parameter of the above, remove the parameter of SMP (P) from the data of the above function, issue the connection request function containing the data to OBEX (S), and then return the connection response function from OBEX (S) I will wait.
  • SMP (S) When SMP (S) receives the connection response function from OBEX (S), it adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of the connection response function of OBEX (S) for LMP (S), Generate a connection reply function to LMP (S) and complete the SMP layer negotiation.
  • the LMP (S) receives the connection request function from the SMP (S) and stands by for reception.
  • LMP (S) receives a connection notification function from the lower layer (LAP (S))
  • LAP (S) extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter LMP (P) from the data of the function
  • Create a response parameter remove the parameter of data function LMP (P) of the above function
  • issue a connection request function containing the data to SMP (S) issue a connection request function containing the data to SMP (S)
  • connect response function from SMP (S) wait.
  • LMP (S) receives a connection response function from SMP (S)
  • LMP (S) adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of SMP (S) connection response function.
  • Generate a connection reply function to LAP (S) and complete the LMP layer negotiation.
  • LSAP Link Service Access Point
  • LMP Link Service Access Point
  • the LAP (S) receives the connection request function of the LMP (S) and enters the reception standby state. Also, when the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength SNRM command, it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter LAP (P) from the data of the SNRM command, and the parameter of the LAP (P) from the data of the SNRM command. Issued a connection request function containing the data to LMP (S) After that, create a response parameter for it and wait for the connection response function from LMP (S). Also, when the LAP (S) receives the connection response function from the LMP (S), it adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of the LMP (S) connection response function to Output the speech and complete the LAP layer negotiation.
  • FIG. 76 is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of this embodiment (no response). Further, FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (without response).
  • connection preparation is performed for both the transmitter and the receiver.
  • the transmitter passes the upper layer request as it is to the lower layer and transmits it as one packet (SNRM).
  • the LAP (P) raises the notification (Connect. Confirm) from the LAP (P) to the upper layer as the connection completion.
  • the receiver upon receiving the SNRM packet, notifies that the connection to the upper layer has been made as it is, and completes the connection when notified to the OBEX (S).
  • the sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
  • OBEX (P) immediately generates connection request function (Primitive) by putting connection request command into lower layer (S MP (P)) data when application connection request is received. Produce. Also, if OBEX (P) receives the connection confirmation function from SMP (P), the connection will be completed.
  • the SMP (P) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (P) and immediately transmits the data of the OBEX (P) connection request function to the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a connection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the connection confirmation function from LMP (P), it concludes the SMP layer negotiation, assuming that the transmitted parameters can negotiate. Also, at this time, SMP (P) sends a connection confirmation function to OBE X (P).
  • the LMP (P) receives the connection request function from the SMP (P) and promptly sends the data of the connection request function of the SMP (P) to the parameters required for communication with the LMP (S) of the receiver. Add Generate a connection request function to the lower layer (LAP (P)). Also, LMP (P) ends negotiation of LMP layer assuming that negotiation can be performed using the transmitted parameters when LAP (P) force also receives the connection confirmation function. Also, at this time, LMP (P) sends a connection confirmation function to SMP (P).
  • LSAP Link Service Access Point
  • the LAP (P) receives the connection request function from the LMP (P), promptly transmits the data of the LMP (P) connection request function, and the parameters necessary for communication with the LAP (S) of the receiver. And output an SNRM command to the physical layer of the receiver. Also, when the LAP (P) outputs the SNRM command, it concludes the negotiation of the LA p layer, assuming that the transmitted parameters can be negotiated. At this time, LAP (P) sends a connection confirmation function to LMP (P).
  • the OBEX (S) receives the connection request function also from the application power and stands by for reception. Also, if OBEX (S) receives lower layer (SMP (S)) power as well as the connection notification function (Indication), the middle power of the data also confirms the OBEX connection command, and if there is no problem, the connection is completed. I assume.
  • the SMP (S) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (S) and stands by for reception. Also, when SMP (S) receives the connection notification function from the lower layer (SMP (S)), it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function, and extracts that parameter. Use to complete the negotiation. And SMP (S) removes the parameter of SMP (P) from the data of the above function! Sends a connection request function containing overwhelmed data to OBEX (S).
  • the LMP (S) receives the connection request function from the SMP (S) and stands by for reception.
  • LMP (S) receives a connection notification function from the lower layer (LAP (S))
  • LAP (S) extracts the parameter generated by LMP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the function, and uses that parameter And complete the negotiation.
  • LMP (S) is the data power of the above function LMP ( Remove the parameters of P)! Send a connection request function containing the overwhelmed data to SMP (S).
  • LSAP Link Service Access Point
  • the LAP (S) receives the connection request function of LMP (S) and enters the reception standby state. Also, when the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength SNRM command, it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter LAP (P) from the data of the SNRM command, and uses that parameter to complete the negotiation. Then, the LAP (S) issues a connection request function to the LMP (S) including the data strength of the above function and the data excluding the parameter of the LAP (P).
  • FIG. 77 is a sequence diagram showing a data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • the transmitter As shown in FIG. 77, in the present embodiment (with response), the transmitter generates a PUT command, which is transmitted to the lower layer, and is output as a UI frame (FIG. 71 (b)). .
  • the receiver receives the data and raises the notification to the upper layer.
  • SMP (SMP
  • the transmitter transmits a certain number of packets, and then transmits the flag with a check to confirm that the data has arrived properly.
  • the SMP S notifies the transmitter of the error force or, if there is an error, the number in which the error occurred.
  • the transmitter outputs the next packet group if there is no error, and if there is an error, it retransmits the packet after the packet having the error.
  • the transmitter when the end of data is reached, indicates that the flag indicating the end of data is O.
  • the sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
  • OBEX (P) outputs a PUT command to the lower layer as a data transmission function.
  • OBEX (P) can be sent by SMP (P) without requiring PUT command responses (continuing return if normal) other than PUT Final (last PUT) command. , Output the next command.
  • commands other than PUT Final command or PUT command wait for the data notification function from the lower layer, and finish the command seeing the response in the data.
  • the data transmission function is a function (Data Request) that requests data transmission from the lower layer.
  • the data notification function is a function (Data Indicate) that notifies that lower layer strength data has been received.
  • the OBEX (S) receives the lower layer power as well as the data notification function to receive data.
  • OBEX does not return a response to PUT commands other than PUT Final command, and returns a response as a data transmission function for commands other than PUT Final command or PUT command.
  • the LMP can transmit the data to the LMP when the size that can be transmitted by the LMP is smaller than the size of the data in the data transmission function.
  • the SMP has a sequential number, an argument for inquiring the other device about the data reception status, an argument indicating the end of the data, an argument indicating that the SMP of the other device requires an OBEX response, and the received data is normal. Create an SMP header with an argument indicating whether it was. And this The data transmission function including the data obtained by adding the SMP header of the above to the divided or combined data is issued to the LMP.
  • the SMP when the SMP receives the LMP force data notification function, it extracts the SMP header from the data in the function, and confirms the force with which the sequence number is normal (that is, the force coming in order without missing). Do. Then, if it is normal, it issues a data notification function to OBEX. At this time, the data notification function may output V for each data notification function from the lower layer, or may output V and the data notification function data from several lower layers together! / ,.
  • the SMP (P) of the transmitter converts the data transmission function of OBEX (P) into the data transmission function to LMP (P), and specifies data transmission of a certain number of data amounts. Issue a function. After that, SMP (P) sets the argument for inquiring data reception status to the receiver to True, issues a data transmission function, and waits for the data notification function of LMP (P).
  • the SMP (P) analyzes the SMP header in the data notification function of LMP (S) power, and indicates that an argument indicating whether the received data was normal was received correctly. If it is ready to send the next data, it is ready to send to OBEX (P). That is, data from OBEX (P) can be received in this state.
  • SMP (P) analyzes the SMP header of the received data notification function of LMP (S) power, and the argument indicating whether the received data was normal or not is normal. If it indicates that the power has not been received, the data transmission function power notified that the power could not be received normally Generates up to the data transmission function with the argument True asking the data reception status to the external device Do. The SMP (P) repeats regenerating for a specified number of times until data from all data transmission functions are notified to the receiver.
  • SMP (P) receives a data transmission function whose argument is True from OBEX (P) is True, it enters the last data of the data transmission function, LM P
  • the data transmission function to (P) is issued with an argument indicating that this data transmission function is the end of data or an argument indicating that a response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is required.
  • the SMP (S) when the SMP (S) receives a data notification function LMP (S), the SMP (S) analyzes the SMP header from the data in the data notification function, and confirms the sequential number.
  • the SMP (S) can normally receive an argument indicating whether the received data was normal or not, if it can receive normally until the header for which the argument asking the data reception state to the receiver is True is received.
  • To create an SMP header to indicate that the data is sent to LMP (S) as a data transmission function.
  • the SMP (S) detects that the reception has failed normally, it stores the number of the SMP header expected to be not received properly. For example, if 0, 1, 2, 3, 5 is received, if the 5th should be 4 and if 4 is not received, the number expected to be not successfully received is 4 and so on. Become. Then, after that, SMP (S) checks only if the argument asking the receiver of the SMP header for data reception is True and stops the output of the data notification function to OBEX (S).
  • the SMP (S) can not normally receive an argument indicating whether the received data is normal or not when it receives a data notification function whose argument for inquiring data reception status from the receiver is True. And an SMP header number inserted into the sequential number entry field to create an SMP header, and direct it as LMP (S) as data to issue a data transmission function .
  • SMP (S) receives a data notification function whose argument indicating that it is the end of data or that an argument indicating that a response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is necessary is True. In this case, after outputting the data notification function to OBEX (S), wait for a data transmission request from OBEX (S).
  • the SMP (S) When the SMP (S) receives a data transmission request from the OBEX (S), it creates an SMP header which is assumed to be successfully received as an argument indicating whether the received data was normal, It is added to the data of the data transmission request of OBEX (S), and the data transmission function is issued to LMP (S). If there is an error, the notification to OBEX (S) will stop. In order to wait, it will be only when it was normal when waiting.
  • the LMP when the LMP receives the upper layer power data transmission request function, it adds an LMP header to the data in the function to create data, and issues a data transmission request function containing the data to the LAP. Also, when LMP receives the LAP force data notification function, it creates data from the data in the function excluding the LMP header, and issues a data notification function containing the data in SMP.
  • the LMP header contains an LSAP with a connectionless value.
  • the LAP When the LAP receives a data transmission request function from the LMP, it adds a LAP header to the data in the function to create data, and issues a UI frame containing the data to the physical layer. Also, when the LAP receives a data reception notification from the physical layer, it generates the data obtained by removing the LAP header from the data of the UI frame, and issues a data notification function including the data in the LMP.
  • the LAP header includes a connection address and a UI indicator.
  • FIG. 79 is a sequence diagram showing a data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the case of the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (without response).
  • the transmitter As shown in FIG. 79, in the present embodiment (without response), the transmitter generates a PUT command, which is transmitted to the lower layer and output as a UI frame.
  • the receiver receives the data and raises the notification to the upper layer.
  • SMP (SMP
  • the transmitter turns on a flag indicating that it is the end of data when it is the end of data, and transmits it.
  • OBEX (P) outputs a PUT command to the lower layer as a data transmission function.
  • OBEX (P) can terminate commands without requiring responses to all commands. Then, OBEX (P) outputs the next command when transmission is possible with SMP (P).
  • the OBEX (S) receives the lower layer power as well as the data notification function, and receives only data without returning a response to all commands.
  • the LMP can transmit the data to the LMP when the size that can be transmitted by the LMP is smaller than the size of the data in the data transmission function.
  • the SMP has a sequential number, an argument for inquiring the other device about the data reception status, an argument indicating the end of the data, an argument indicating that the SMP of the other device requires an OBEX response, and the received data is normal. Create an SMP header with an argument indicating whether it was. Then, a data transmission function including this SMP header added with the above divided or combined data is issued to the LMP.
  • the SMP when the SMP receives the LMP force data notification function, it extracts the SMP header from the data in the function, and confirms the force with which the sequence number is normal (that is, the force coming in order without missing). Do. Then, if it is normal, it issues a data notification function to OBEX. At this time, the data notification function may output V for each data notification function from the lower layer, or may output V and the data notification function data from several lower layers together! / ,.
  • the transmitter's SMP (P) converts the data transmission function of OBEX (P) into a data transmission function to LMP (P). Then, when it receives a data transmission function in which the argument that is the end of the data is False from OBEX (P), the data with the SMP header added to the data is emitted to LMP (P). On the other hand, if SMP (P) receives a data transmission function whose argument that is the end of the data is True from OBEX (P), SMP (P) receives that data transmission function. Data transmission function to LMP (P) containing the last data of the number, an argument indicating that this data transmission function is the end of data, or a response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is required. Make an argument indicating True and issue.
  • the SMP (S) of the receiver receives the data notification function from the lower layer, it analyzes the SMP header from the data in the data notification function, and confirms the sequential number. Then, if the SMP (S) analyzes the SMP header and confirms that the reception is normal, it issues a data transmission function to the LMP (S).
  • EX (S) Notify EX (S) as an error. For example, when 0, 1, 2, 3, 5 is received, the 5th is 4 when it should be 4 but not received.
  • SMP (S) waits for the argument indicating the end of the data in the SMP header or the argument indicating that the response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is required to be True.
  • the ability to receive a data notification function that is True but not notify OBEX (S) upon reception), the ability to receive a disconnection notification function, or data to OBEX (S) until a certain period of time has passed. Don't give notice, like.
  • the LMP (P) of the transmitter receives the data transmission request function from the SMP (S)
  • the LMP header is attached to the data in the function to create data
  • LAP P Issues a data transmission request function containing the data in
  • the LMP (S) of the receiver receives the data notification function also for the LAP (S) power, it creates data in which the LMP header is removed from the data in the function, and SMP (S) Issues a data notification function containing the data in.
  • the LMP header contains an LSAP with a connectionless value.
  • the LAP (P) of the transmitter receives the LMP (P) power as well as the data transmission request function, the LAP header is attached to the data in the function to create data, and the data is input to the physical layer Emits a UI frame.
  • the LAP (S) of the receiver receives the data reception notification from the physical layer, it creates data obtained by removing the LAP header from the data of the UI frame, and generates the data in the LMP (S). Issue a data notification function containing the data.
  • the LAP header includes a connection address and a UI indicator.
  • FIG. 80 is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are explanatory diagrams showing the data structure of communication data in the disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
  • a disconnection command of the transmitter is transmitted to the lower layer, and a DISC command is generated.
  • the receiver receives the DISC command and notifies the upper layer, and the response is returned and a UA response is generated. After that, the upper layer of the transmitter is notified that the UA response has been received, and the process ends.
  • OBEX (P) immediately sends a disconnection request command to the lower layer (S MP (P)) in the data and issues a disconnection request function (Primitive) when an application disconnect request is received. Produce. Also, when OBEX (P) receives a disconnection confirmation function from SMP (P), it confirms the response of OBEX disconnection from the data, and if it is a response that there is no problem (Success), the disconnection is completed. I assume.
  • SMP (P) receives the disconnection request function from OBEX (P) and immediately needs the data of OBEX (P) disconnection request function to communicate with the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a disconnection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the disconnection confirmation function from LMP (P), it extracts the parameters generated by the data source of the function's data receiver SMP (S), confirms the value, and End the disconnection process with In addition, SMP (P) also transmits data of the disconnection confirmation function from which the parameters of SMP (S) have been removed as a disconnection confirmation function to OBEX (P). However, normally, there are no parameters newly added by SMP (P) at disconnection.
  • the LMP (P) receives the SMP (P) power disconnection request function, and immediately transmits the data of the SMP (P) disconnection request function to the data required for communication with the receiver LMP (S). Add Generate a disconnection request function to the lower layer (LAP (P)).
  • LMP (P) receives a disconnection confirmation function from LAP (P)
  • it extracts the nolometer generated by LMP (S) of the receiver from the data of the function, confirms the value, and End the disconnection process with
  • LM P (P) transmits the data strength of the disconnection confirmation function as well as the data from which the parameter of LMP (S) is removed as the disconnection confirmation function to SMP (P).
  • the LAP (P) receives the LMP (P) power disconnection request function, and promptly transmits the LMP (P) disconnection request function data to the receiver, and the parameters necessary for communication with the LAP (S). And output a DISC command to the physical layer of the receiver.
  • the LAP (P) receives the physical layer strength UA response of the receiver, it extracts the parameter generated by the LAP (S) of the receiver from the data of the UA response, confirms the value, and Close the connection with).
  • LAP (P) issues data obtained by removing the parameter of LAP (S) from the data of UA response as a disconnection confirmation function to LMP (P).
  • OBEX (S) When OBEX (S) receives a lower layer (SMP (S)) power or a disconnection notification function (Indication), it checks the intermediate power OBEX disconnection command of the data, and if there is no problem, the response named Success is detected. Is output to SMP (S) as a disconnection response function (Response), and disconnection is completed.
  • SMP lower layer
  • Indication a disconnection notification function
  • the SMP (S) extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function when the lower layer (SMP (S)) force also receives the disconnection notification function, Create a response parameter, remove the SMP (P) parameter from the data of the above function, issue a disconnection request function containing the data to OBEX (S), and then disconnect response function from OBEX (S) Wait for When SMP (S) receives the disconnection response function from OBEX (S), it adds the parameter of the response to the data of the disconnection response function of OBEX (S) to LMP (S), Generate a disconnection response function for L MP (S) and terminate the SMP layer disconnection process. However, normally, there is no new parameter to add in SMP (S) at disconnection.
  • LMP (S) is the data of the function when lower layer (LAP (S)) power is also subjected to the disconnection notification function
  • the parameter generated by LMP (P) of the transmitter is extracted from the parameter, the parameter of the response is created, the parameter of data power LMP (P) of the above function is removed, and the disconnection request function containing the data is stored.
  • SMP (S) After issuing to SMP (S), wait for disconnection response function from SMP (S).
  • LMP (S) receives the disconnection response function from SMP (S), it adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of the disconnection response function of SMP (S) for LAP (S).
  • Generates a disconnection response function for LAP (S) and terminates the disconnection process of the LMP layer.
  • the LAP (S) When the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength DISC command, it extracts the parameter generated by the LAP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the DISC command, and the data strength of the DISC command is also L AP (P) After issuing a disconnection request function containing the data to LMP (S), create a response parameter to it and wait for the disconnection response function from LMP (S). Also, when LAP (S) receives the disconnection response function from LMP (S), the parameter of the response is added to the data of LMP (S) disconnection response function, and Output the LAP layer cutting process. However, normally, there are no new parameters added to LAP (S) at disconnection.
  • FIG. 82 is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (no response). Further, FIG. 81 (a) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the disconnection sequence of this embodiment (no response).
  • the disconnection command of the transmitter is transmitted to the lower layer, and the DISC command is generated.
  • the transmitter ends the disconnection process at this point.
  • the receiver receives the DISC command and transmits it to the upper layer, and the disconnection process ends when the upper layer is notified.
  • the sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
  • OBEX (P) When OBEX (P) receives an application power disconnection request, it immediately enters a disconnection request command to the lower layer (S MP (P)) and issues a disconnection request function (Primitive). Produce. In addition, OBEX (P) is completely disconnected when it receives a disconnection confirmation function from SMP (P). I will finish.
  • the SMP (P) receives the disconnection request function from the OBEX (P) and promptly transmits the data of the OBEX (P) disconnection request function to the communication with the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a disconnection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the disconnection confirmation function from LMP (P), it terminates the disconnection process of the SMP layer, assuming that it has been disconnected by the transmitted parameter. Also, SMP (P) sends a disconnection confirmation function to OBEX (P). However, normally, there is no new parameter added by SMP (P) at the time of disconnection.
  • the LMP (P) receives the SMP (P) power disconnection request function, and immediately transmits the data of the SMP (P) disconnection request function to the data necessary for communication with the receiver LMP (S). To generate a disconnection request function for the lower layer (LAP (P)). Also, when LMP (P) receives the LAP (P) cutting confirmation function, it concludes that the LMP layer has been disconnected, assuming that it has been disconnected by the transmitted parameters. LMP (P) also sends a disconnection confirmation function to SMP (P). However, normally, there is no new parameter added by LMP (P) at the time of disconnection.
  • the LAP (P) receives the LMP (P) power disconnection request function, and promptly transmits the LMP (P) disconnection request function data to the receiver.
  • the parameters necessary for communication with the LAP (S) And output a DISC command to the physical layer of the receiver.
  • LAP (P) outputs the DISC command, it concludes that the LAP layer disconnection processing is concluded, because it can be disconnected by the transmitted parameters.
  • LAP (P) issues a disconnection confirmation function to LMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter to add in LAP (P) at disconnection.
  • OBEX (S) receives a lower layer (SMP (S)) force and also a disconnection notification function (Indication), it checks the medium power OBEX disconnection command of the data, and if there is no problem, the disconnection is completed. It will
  • SMP (S) When SMP (S) receives the lower layer (SMP (S)) power disconnection notification function, it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function, and uses that parameter And complete the disconnection. In addition, SMP (S) issues a disconnection request function to OBEX (S) in which the data strength of the above function is also data excluding the parameter of SMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter added in SMP (S) when disconnected! When LMP (S) receives the lower layer (LAP (S)) cut notification function, it extracts the parameter generated by LMP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the function, and extracts that parameter Use to complete the disconnect. In addition, LMP (S) issues a disconnection request function to SMP (S) including data in which the data strength of the above function is also removed from the parameters of LMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter added in LMP (S) at disconnection!

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Communication Control (AREA)

Abstract

In a transmitter (2001), upon generation of each transmission frame having no window size limit, a batch-mode transmission final flag generation circuit (2004) assigns a batch-mode transmission final flag to each transmission frame and a serial number generation circuit (2005) assigns a serial number to each transmission frame. In a receiver, the serial number of the frame received from the transmitter (2001) is analyzed and if a serial number is skipped, retransmission is performed upon reception of a frame having the batch-mode transmission final flag indicating that it is the end. Thus, retransmission can be performed in data transmission using a UI frame, thereby improving the communication efficiency.

Description

明 細 書  Specification
通信機器、通信システム、通信方法、通信プログラム、通信回路 技術分野  Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, communication circuit
[0001] 本発明は、データの送受信を行う通信機器、通信システム、通信方法、通信プログ ラム、通信回路に関するものである。  The present invention relates to a communication device, a communication system, a communication method, a communication program, and a communication circuit that transmit and receive data.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 近年、赤外線通信システムは、携帯電話、ノート型パーソナルコンピュータや電子 手帳等携帯個人用端末を中心に、これら携帯に適した電子機器相互間の、あるいは これらと、デスクトップ型パーソナルコンピュータや赤外線対応プリンタ等とのデータ 交換に普及してきている。  [0002] In recent years, infrared communication systems have mainly used portable personal terminals such as portable telephones, notebook personal computers, electronic notebooks, etc., or electronic devices suitable for these portable devices, or desktop personal computers and infrared rays. It is widely used to exchange data with compatible printers.
[0003] 赤外線通信システムにおける通信方式としては、 IrDA (Infrared Data Association) 方式や ASK方式などが挙げられる力 IrDA方式は、コンピュータ間を主体とする高 速'高効率な伝送のための通信方式である HDLC通信方式を元に、赤外線通信の ために規定された通信プロトコルであって、一般的なものとしてよく普及している。  [0003] As a communication system in an infrared communication system, the power of IrDA (Infrared Data Association) system, ASK system, etc. can be mentioned IrDA system is a communication system for high-speed, high-efficiency transmission mainly between computers. It is a communication protocol defined for infrared communication based on a certain HDLC communication system, and is widely used as a general one.
[0004] また、コンピュータ等におけるデータ伝送にあたっては、ある大きさのデータと、その 前後に付与された通し番号、アドレス等を示す情報とからなるパケットを送受信する パケット交換によることが一般的である力 HDLC通信方式や IrDA通信方式におい て用いられるパケットはフレームと呼ばれ、 IrLAP層にて管理される。  [0004] In addition, in data transmission in a computer etc., it is common to use packet exchange to transmit and receive packets consisting of data of a certain size and information indicating serial numbers given before and after it, addresses, etc. Packets used in HDLC and IrDA communication systems are called frames and are managed by the IrLAP layer.
[0005] フレームは、アドレス (A)、制御(C)、情報 (I)、および FCSの各フィールドと、前後 に付与されるフラグ力も構成されるものであって、情報 (データ)転送用に用いられる I (Information)フレーム、通信の監視制御のための S(Supervisory)フレーム、および通 信における接続や切断、再送のないデータ通信等のために用いる U(Unnumbered)フ レームがある。  [0005] A frame also includes fields of address (A), control (C), information (I), and FCS, and flag powers given before and after, and for information (data) transfer. There are I (Information) frames used, S (Supervisory) frames for supervisory control of communication, and U (Unnumbered) frames used for data communication without connection, disconnection, and retransmission in communication.
[0006] 通常、伝送されるべきデータは 1フレームで送信できない場合が多いため、複数の フレーム(Iフレームもしくは UIフレーム)に分割して送信される。 Iフレームは伝送する データを I (Information)フィールドに持ち、データ抜けのチェックに用いる通し番号を 有することで信頼性の高い通信の実現を図る。 UIフレームは、伝送するデータを Iフ ィールドに持つ力 データ抜けのチェックに用いる通し番号を持たない。 [0006] Usually, since data to be transmitted can not be transmitted in one frame in many cases, it is divided into a plurality of frames (I frame or UI frame) and transmitted. I-frames have data to be transmitted in the I (Information) field, and have a serial number used for checking for missing data to realize highly reliable communication. UI frame is used to transmit data Force on the field There is no serial number used to check for missing data.
[0007] Sフレームはデータを保持する Iフィールドを有しない構成となっていて、受信準備 完了、ビジー状態、再送要求等を伝送するのに用いられる。 Uフレームは、 Iフレーム のような番号を有しないので、非番号フレームと呼ばれ、通信モードの設定、応答や 異常状態の報告、データリンクの確立や切断に用いられる。  The S frame is configured to have no I field for holding data, and is used to transmit reception preparation completion, a busy state, a retransmission request, and the like. U-frames are called unnumbered frames because they do not have numbers like I-frames, and are used to set communication modes, report responses, report abnormal conditions, and establish or disconnect data links.
[0008] 前述のように IrD A通信方式は、 HDLC通信方式に基づくものである力 一般に通 信方式としては、送信と受信とを同時に行い得る全二重通信方式と、同時に行わな い半二重通信方式とがあり、半二重通信方式の場合には、送信と受信とを切り換える 信号を規定しておく必要がある。  As described above, the IrDA communication method is based on the HDLC communication method. Generally, as a communication method, a full-duplex communication method capable of simultaneously performing transmission and reception and a half-duplex communication method not simultaneously performing In the case of the double communication method and the half duplex communication method, it is necessary to define a signal for switching between transmission and reception.
[0009] HDLC方式では全二重方式の採用も可能である力 IrDA通信方式の場合、デー タの伝送に自由空間上を伝搬するベースバンド変調の赤外線を使用しており、通信 圏内で 2つ以上の局が同時に送信すると赤外線の干渉が発生して正常な通信を行 えない。  [0009] In the case of a force IrDA communication system in which the full-duplex system can also be adopted in the HDLC system, infrared light of base band modulation that propagates over free space is used for data transmission, and two are within the communication range. If these stations transmit simultaneously, infrared interference will occur and normal communication can not be performed.
[0010] このため、 IrDA通信方式では、通信リンクを確立する前は通信圏内に赤外線が存 在しな 、場合にのみ送信を行 、、通信リンク確立後は通信を行って 、る 2局の間で 送信権の交換を定期的に行う半二重方式を用いている。  [0010] Therefore, in the IrDA communication method, infrared rays do not exist in the communication area before establishing the communication link, and transmission is performed only when the communication link is established, and communication is performed after the communication link is established. It uses a half-duplex scheme in which transmission rights are periodically exchanged between the two.
[0011] 図 19に、 IrDAにおける通信リンクを確立する様子を示す。 IrDAにおいては、一次 局が SNRMコマンドを送信し、二次局がこれに対して UAレスポンスを返すことで、リ ンク層(LAP層)の接続が確立する。前記 SNRMコマンドおよび U Aレスポンス内に は、データ転送時の各種パラメータ (データ転送速度、最大データ長など)が配置さ れ、お互いに対向局の通信パラメータを知ることができ、最も効率の良い通信パラメ ータにおいて、データ転送が行われることとなる。  [0011] FIG. 19 shows how to establish a communication link in IrDA. In IrDA, the connection of the link layer (LAP layer) is established when the primary station transmits an SNRM command and the secondary station responds with a UA response. In the SNRM command and UA response, various parameters (data transfer rate, maximum data length, etc.) at the time of data transfer are arranged, and it is possible to mutually know the communication parameters of the opposite station, and the most efficient communication parameter. Data will be transferred.
[0012] 図 9は、力かる通信方式の応用を説明するためのブロック図である。 HDLC通信方 式や IrDA通信方式では、送信または受信を行うものを「局」と呼び、一般には、通信 をコントロールするデータリンク制御を行う一次局と、一次局の制御に従う二次局とが 、上記のフレームをコマンド(一次局→二次局)とレスポンス(二次局→一次局)として 送受信することで通信を行う。力かる方式は不平衡通信方式といわれる。図示するよ うにコンピュータ、携帯電話、電子手帳等、 TV等は通信においては局として機能し、 赤外線を伝送媒体として、データ交換を行う。 [0012] FIG. 9 is a block diagram for explaining an application of an effective communication system. In the HDLC communication system and the IrDA communication system, those performing transmission or reception are called "stations", and generally, a primary station performing data link control for controlling communication and a secondary station under control of the primary station Communication is performed by transmitting and receiving the above frame as a command (primary station → secondary station) and a response (secondary station → primary station). The power system is called an unbalanced communication system. As illustrated, computers, mobile phones, electronic organizers, etc., TVs etc. function as stations in communication, Data exchange is performed using infrared rays as a transmission medium.
[0013] 図 10は、これら通信方式における Iフレームを用いた一般的な手順を説明するため の信号シーケンス図である。ここでは、一次局としての A局から二次局としての B局に 複数の Iフレームに分割されたデータを送信する場合を示している。なお、このときの ウィンドウサイズ (中断せずに一度の送信できる Iフレーム数)は 3とする。  FIG. 10 is a signal sequence diagram for illustrating a general procedure using an I frame in these communication methods. Here, a case is shown where data divided into a plurality of I frames is transmitted from station A as the primary station to station B as the secondary station. Note that the window size at this time (the number of I-frames that can be transmitted at one time without interruption) is 3.
[0014] 先ず、 A局は、送信するデータに対応する各フレームを Iフレームとして番号「0」「1 」「2」を付与してそれぞれ送信する。通し番号が「0」「1」のフレームを送信する際に は、送信権を二次局に委譲しないために、 PZF (Pole/Final)ビットを 0にして送信す る。また、通し番号が「2」のフレームを送信する際には、送信権を二次局に委譲する ために、 P/Fビットを 1にして送信する。  First, station A assigns numbers “0”, “1”, and “2” as I frames to each frame corresponding to data to be transmitted, and transmits them. When transmitting a frame with serial number “0” “1”, transmit with PZF (Pole / Final) bit set to 0 in order not to transfer the transmission right to the secondary station. Also, when transmitting a frame with serial number “2”, transmit with the P / F bit set to 1 in order to transfer the transmission right to the secondary station.
[0015] 通し番号が「0」「1」「2」のフレームをそれぞれ受信した B局は、それぞれのフレーム を正常に受信できた場合、 PZFビットが 1の通し番号「2」のフレームを受信後、「2」 の次の「3」の番号を付与したフレームを応答フレームとして返信し、「3番目のデータ を送信せよ」の意を伝達する。この応答フレームは RRフレームと!/、う Sフレームである 。二次局が RRフレームを送信する際には、やはり一次局に送信権を委譲するために PZFビットを 1にする。  Station B, which has received the frames with serial numbers “0”, “1”, and “2”, respectively, has successfully received each frame, and after receiving the frame with serial number “2”, the PZF bit is 1. A frame given the number "3" following "2" is returned as a response frame, and the message "transmit the third data" is transmitted. This response frame is an RR frame and! /, S frame. When the secondary station transmits an RR frame, the PZF bit is set to 1 again to transfer the transmission right to the primary station.
[0016] A局は B局の応答を確認して 3番目のデータから再び「3」「4」「5」の通し番号を付 与して送信する。この手順を必要なだけ繰り返すことによって、複数フレーム通信の 精度の向上を図ることができる。 B局において、エラーやデータ抜けを検知した場合 は、再送して欲しいデータ番号をいれて RRフレームを送信し、 A局が、前記再送して 欲 ヽデータ番号から再送することで、再送を行うことが可能となる。  [0016] Station A confirms the response from station B, transmits from the third data again with a serial number of "3" "4" "5" and transmits. By repeating this procedure as necessary, the accuracy of multi-frame communication can be improved. If an error or missing data is detected at station B, an RR frame is transmitted with the data number desired to be retransmitted, and station A retransmits by re-sending from the desired data number. It becomes possible.
[0017] Iフレームを用いたデータ転送では、一次局が一度に送信できるフレーム数は、ウイ ンドウサイズによって制限され、 IrDAの IrLAPdnfrared Link Access Protocol)(Verl. 1)においては、最大 7となっている。このため、大量のデータ転送を行う場合には、ゥ インドウサイズごとに二次局からの応答フレームが送信されるため、エラーがないよう な通信状況においては、通信効率の悪ィ匕の要因となる。  [0017] In data transfer using I frames, the number of frames that the primary station can transmit at one time is limited by the window size, and the maximum is 7 in IrLAP's IrLAPdnfrared Link Access Protocol (Ver. 1). There is. For this reason, when performing a large amount of data transfer, the response frame from the secondary station is transmitted for each window size, which causes poor communication efficiency in a communication situation where there are no errors. Become.
[0018] 図 11は、これら通信方式における UIフレームを用いた一般的な手順を説明するた めの信号シーケンス図である。ここでは、 A局から B局に複数の UIフレームに分割さ れたデータを送信する場合を示して!/、る。 UIフレームを用いたデータ転送の場合は 、ウィンドウサイズの制限を受けないため、 A局は、最大ターンアラウンド時間の間、連 続してフレームを送信することが可能となる。 A局の最大ターンアラウンド時間が経過 すると、二次局に送信権を委譲するための RRフレームを送信する。 FIG. 11 is a signal sequence diagram for illustrating a general procedure using UI frames in these communication methods. Here, it is divided into multiple UI frames from station A to station B Indicate if you want to send out the data! In the case of data transfer using a UI frame, since the window size is not limited, station A can transmit frames continuously for the maximum turnaround time. When the maximum turnaround time for station A has elapsed, it sends an RR frame to the secondary station to transfer the transmission right.
[0019] 最大ターンアラウンド時間とは、ある局が送信権を維持できる時間であり、送信権を 相手局に委譲してから、相手局の最大ターンアラウンド時間を経過しても相手局から レスポンスがない場合は、送信権委譲フレームを送信した局は、相手局に送信権委 譲のためのフレームが届 ヽて ヽな 、ことを知ることが可能となる。相手局の最大ター ンアラウンド時間は、接続確立時にパラメータ交換することにより、知ることが可能で ある。 IrLAPにおいては、最大 500msのターンアラウンド時間が規定されている。  The maximum turnaround time is the time when one station can maintain the transmission right, and after the transmission right is transferred to the other station, the response from the other station will be received even if the maximum turnaround time of the other station has elapsed. If not, the station that has transmitted the transmission right transfer frame can know to the other station that the frame for transmission right transfer has been delivered. The maximum turnaround time of the partner station can be known by parameter exchange at connection establishment. In IrLAP, a turnaround time of up to 500 ms is defined.
[0020] RRフレームにより、送信権を委譲された B局は、 自局内で送信データ転送要求が ない場合は、 P/Fビットを 1にして、 RRフレームを送信することにより、一次局に送信 権を委譲する。  If there is no transmission data transfer request in the own station, station B to which the transmission right has been transferred by the RR frame is transmitted to the primary station by setting the P / F bit to 1 and transmitting the RR frame. Delegate the right.
[0021] UIフレームを用いたデータ転送では、 Iフレームを用いた場合の再送を行わないが 、通信路の品質がよくエラーが発生しないような状況においては、前述のように最大 5 OOmsの時間、 A局は連続フレーム送信を行うことが可能であり、通信効率の向上へ とつながる。  [0021] In data transfer using UI frame, retransmission is not performed in the case of using I frame, but in the situation where the quality of the channel is good and no error occurs, the time of up to 5 OOms as described above Station A can transmit continuous frames, which leads to improvement of communication efficiency.
[0022] 図 18に標準の IrDAのプロトコルスタックを示す。 IrDAのプロトコルスタックは、変 調方式、信号強度、指向性等を定義する IrPHY drDA Physical Layer)、汎用の HD LC (High Level Data Link Control)に従った誤り制御機能、透過伝送、およびフロー 制御の他、通信速度や最大データサイズを通信に先立って互いにネゴシエーション する機能、および接続すべき不特定の外部機器を探索して発見する手続き等を定義 した IrLAP (IrDA Lin Access Protocol)、 TCP/IP (Transmission control Protocol /Internet Protocol)プロトコルの TCPや UDPで使われるポート番号に相当する多重 ィ匕 '多重分離の機能を提供する IrLMP (IrDA Link Management Protocol)、個別の 論理リンクにおいてフロー制御を行うための Tiny TP (Transport Protocol)、データ の送受信つまりデータ通信におけるオブジェクト交換用の通信プロトコルである OBE X (OBject EXchange protocol)で構成される。 [0023] OBEXでは、コマンドを要求する側の機器をクライアント機器、その要求に応じて応 答を返す側をサーバ機器と呼ぶ。通常、クライアント機器がサーバ機器に対して Put ZGetなどの要求コマンドを発行し、サーノ機器が応答コマンドを返すクライアント Z サーバモデルに従って 、る。 [0022] Fig. 18 shows the standard IrDA protocol stack. IrDA's protocol stack includes IrPHY, drDA Physical Layer (IrPHY) that defines modulation method, signal strength, directivity, etc., error control function according to general purpose High Level Data Link Control (HD LC), transparent transmission, and flow control. In addition, IrLAP (IrDA Lin Access Protocol), TCP / IP (IrDA Lin Access Protocol), which defines the function of negotiating the communication speed and maximum data size with each other prior to communication, and the procedure for searching for and finding unspecified external devices to connect Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) Provides a function of multiplexing and demultiplexing that corresponds to the port numbers used in TCP and UDP. IrLMP (IrDA Link Management Protocol), for performing flow control on individual logical links Tiny TP (Transport Protocol), which consists of OBE X (OBject EXchange protocol), which is a communication protocol for object exchange in data transmission / reception or data communication. . In the OBEX, a device requesting a command is called a client device, and a device returning a response in response to the request is called a server device. Usually, the client device issues a request command such as Put ZGet to the server device, and the Sano device returns a response command according to the client Z server model.
[0024] OBEXで規定されている要求コマンドは概ね次のものを備えている。通信相手と接 続 Z切断を行う CONNECTZDISCONNECT、ファイルなどのオブジェクトの送信 Z受信を行う PUTZGET、受信機器側であるサーバ機器の受信先パス (カレントパ ス)を変更する SETPATH、そしてオブジェクトの送信や受信を強制的に中断する A BORTがある。  The request commands defined in OBEX generally include the following. Connect with communication partner Z Disconnect CONNECTZ DISCONNECT Send object such as file send Z Receive PUTZ GET Receive path change server device receive destination path (current path) SET PATH Send object receive or send There is a forced A BORT.
[0025] 図 20に、クライアント機器とサーバ機器との間での基本的な要求コマンド Z応答コ マンドのやり取りについて説明する。利用者からのオブジェクト交換要求を受けると、 クライアント機器はサーバ機器との接続を確立するために、サーバ機器に対して、接 続要求を意味する CONNECTコマンドを送信する。  FIG. 20 illustrates the basic exchange of request command Z response commands between the client device and the server device. When receiving an object exchange request from the user, the client device sends a CONNECT command meaning a connection request to the server device to establish a connection with the server device.
[0026] CONNECTコマンドを受信したサーバ機器はクライアント機器に対して、接続が可 能である場合には、 SUCCESS応答コマンドを返信し、クライアント機器が SUCCE SSの応答コマンドを受信することにより、クライアント機器 サーバ機器の間で接続 が確立される。  The server device having received the CONNECT command returns a SUCCESS response command to the client device if the connection is possible, and the client device receives the SUCCE SS response command, whereby the client device is received. A connection is established between server devices.
[0027] クライアント機器では、接続確立後、オブジェクトの交換を開始し、サーノ機器に対 してオブジェクトの送信を行う PUTコマンドを送信する。サーノ機器はクライアント機 器からの PUTコマンドを正常に受信すると CONTINUE応答コマンドを返信し、クラ イアント機器は、サーバ機器力もの CONTINUE応答コマンドを受信し、サーバ機器 が正常に PUTコマンドを受信したことを確認後、次の PUTコマンドを送信する。クラ イアント機器では、すべてのオブジェクトを送信し終えるまで、 PUTコマンドの送信を 行う。サーバ機器では、最後の PUT (Final)コマンドまで正常に受信し終えると、 SU CCESSの応答コマンドをクライアント機器に対して返信する。  After establishing the connection, the client device starts exchanging objects, and transmits a PUT command for transmitting the object to the Sano device. When the Sano device successfully receives the PUT command from the client device, it returns a CONTINUE response command, and the client device receives that the server device receives a CONTINUE response command, and the server device successfully receives the PUT command. After confirmation, send the next PUT command. The client device sends PUT commands until all objects have been sent. When the server device has successfully received the last PUT (Final) command, it sends a SU CCESS response command back to the client device.
[0028] クライアント機器では、サーノ機器からの SUCCESSの応答コマンドを受信後、サ ーバ機器との切断処理を行うために切断要求を意味する DISCONNECTコマンド をサーバ機器に対して送信する。 [0029] DISCONNECTコマンドを受信したサーバ機器はクライアント機器に対して、切断 の許可を意味する SUCCESSの応答コマンドを返信し、クライアント機器が SUCCE SSの応答コマンドを受信することにより、クライアント機器 サーバ機器の間の接続 が切断され、一連のクライアント機器 サーバ機器間のオブジェクト交換が完了する After receiving the SUCCESS response command from the Sano device, the client device sends a DISCONNECT command, which means a disconnection request, to the server device to perform disconnection processing with the server device. The server device having received the DISCONNECT command returns a response command of SUCCESS indicating permission of disconnection to the client device, and the client device receives the response command of SUCCE SS. Connection between the client devices is disconnected, and object exchange between a series of client devices and server devices is completed
[0030] このように、 OBEXでは、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンドに対して、サーバ機器 が応答コマンドを返すことにより、オブジェクトの交換を行う。 As described above, in the OBEX, the server device exchanges an object by returning a response command to the client device request command.
[0031] また、上記の IrD Aプロトコルスタックにあるように OSIのような階層構造を持つ通信 プロトコルにおいては、層毎に他の層とは独立にヘッダ情報が定義されており、計算 機器間で本来転送されるべきデータに、最上位層から最下位層まで各層にお 、てへ ッダ情報が順次付加される。  In addition, in the communication protocol having a hierarchical structure such as OSI as in the IrD A protocol stack described above, header information is defined for each layer independently of the other layers, and between the computing devices. Header data is sequentially added to each layer from the highest layer to the lowest layer to the data to be originally transferred.
[0032] また、受信データに対しては、最下位層から最上位層までの各層にお 、て順次へ ッダ情報が除去され、上位層にデータが渡されて 、く。 Also, for received data, header information is sequentially removed in each layer from the lowest layer to the highest layer, and data is passed to the upper layer.
[0033] 〔特許文献 1〕日本国公開特許公報「特開平 10— 308791号公報 (公開日 1998年[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 10-308791 (publication date: 1998)
11月 17日)」 November 17) "
し力しながら、上記従来の構成では、 UIフレームを用いてデータ転送では、通信路 の品質が良くエラーが発生しな 、ような状況にぉ 、ては、前述のように最大 500ms の時間、連続フレーム送信を行うことが可能であり、通信効率の向上へとつながるが 、あまり通信路の品質が良くない場合には、 Iフレームを用いた場合のような再送を行 うことができないので、かえって通信効率が悪ィ匕してしまうという問題を生じる。  In the above-mentioned conventional configuration, however, the data transfer using the UI frame has a good communication path quality and no error occurs. In such a situation, the time up to 500 ms as described above, It is possible to perform continuous frame transmission, which leads to an improvement in communication efficiency, but when the quality of the communication path is not so good, it can not be retransmitted as in the case of using I frame. However, there is a problem that the communication efficiency is bad.
[0034] また、従来の IrD Aでは、レスポンスを必要としない片方向通信でのデータ転送は サポートされていない。 In addition, conventional IrDA does not support data transfer in one-way communication that does not require a response.
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
[0035] 本発明の目的は、データ転送においてフレームの再送を行うことができる通信機器 、通信システム、通信方法、通信プログラム、通信回路を提供することにある。  An object of the present invention is to provide a communication device, a communication system, a communication method, a communication program, and a communication circuit capable of performing retransmission of a frame in data transfer.
[0036] 上記の目的を達成するために、本発明に係る通信機器は、一度に送信可能なフレ ーム数に制限がない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲せずに、データを一括送信 する通信機器であって、一括送信する一括送信データを分割して送信フレームを生 成する送信フレーム生成部 (送信フレーム生成回路、送信フレーム生成手段)と、上 記送信フレームに通し番号を付与する通し番号生成部(通し番号生成回路、通し番 号生成手段)と、上記一括送信データの最終の送信フレームに、一括送信データの 最終の送信フレームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定する一括送信最終 フラグ生成部(一括送信最終フラグ生成回路、一括送信最終フラグ生成手段)と、上 記送信フレームを送信する送信部 (送信回路、送信手段)と、を備えることを特徴とし ている。 [0036] In order to achieve the above object, the communication device according to the present invention collectively transmits data without transferring the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. A communication device that divides batch transmission data to be transmitted collectively and generates transmission frames A transmission frame generation unit (transmission frame generation circuit, transmission frame generation means), a serial number generation unit (serial number generation circuit, serial number generation means) for assigning a serial number to the transmission frame, and the final of the batch transmission data. A batch transmission final flag generation unit (batch transmission final flag generation circuit, batch transmission final flag generation unit) that sets a batch transmission final flag indicating that it is the final transmission frame of batch transmission data in the transmission frame of And a transmission unit (transmission circuit, transmission means) for transmitting a transmission frame.
[0037] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲せずに、データを一括送信する通信方法であって、一 括送信する一括送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成し、上記送信フレームに 通し番号を付与し、上記一括送信データの最終の送信フレームには、一括送信デー タの最終の送信フレームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定して、上記送信 フレームを送信することを特徴として!/、る。  The communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for collectively transmitting data without delegating the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. Batch transmission data is divided to generate a transmission frame, and a serial number is assigned to the transmission frame, and the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data is a batch to indicate that it is the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data. It is characterized in that the transmission final flag is set and the transmission frame is transmitted! /.
[0038] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲されずに、データを一括受信する通信機器であって、 上記受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号のエラーがな ヽかどうか を判別する通し番号解析部 (通し番号解析回路、通し番号解析手段)と、上記受信フ レームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレームが送信機によって複数 の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データの最終の送信フレーム であることを示しているとき、上記通し番号解析部によって、それまでに受信した受信 フレームにエラーが検出された場合、エラー有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラ グおよびエラー発生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成する送信フレーム生成 部 (送信フレーム生成回路、送信フレーム生成手段)と、上記送信フレームを送信す る送信部 (送信回路、送信手段)と、を備えることを特徴としている。  [0038] A communication device according to the present invention is a communication device that collectively receives data without transfer of transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. The serial number analysis unit (serial number analysis circuit, serial number analysis means) that analyzes the serial number included in the serial number to determine whether or not there is an error in the serial number, and the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame is the corresponding reception frame. The serial number analysis unit detects an error in the received frame received so far when it indicates that the final transmitted frame of the batch transmission data divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and transmitted collectively. If it is set, a transmission frame including an error-free flag set to indicate that there is an error and a serial number at the time of error occurrence is generated. A transmission frame generation unit (transmission frame generation circuit, transmission frame generation means); and a transmission unit (transmission circuit, transmission means) for transmitting the transmission frame.
[0039] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲されずに、データを一括受信する通信方法であって、 上記受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号のエラーがな ヽかどうか を判別し、上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレーム が送信機によって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データ の最終の送信フレームであることを示しているとき、それまでに受信した受信フレーム にエラーが検出された場合、エラー有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラグおよび エラー発生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成し、上記送信フレームを送信す ることを特徴としている。 Further, a communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for collectively receiving data according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited and the transmission right is not delegated, The serial number included in the frame is analyzed to determine whether there is no error in the serial number, and the batch transmission final flag included in the received frame is the received frame. If it indicates that it is the last transmission frame of the batch transmission data divided into multiple transmission frames by the transmitter and sent together, if an error is detected in the reception frame received so far, there is an error It is characterized in that a transmission frame including an error free flag set to indicate and a serial number at the time of error occurrence is generated, and the transmission frame is transmitted.
[0040] また、本発明に係る通信システムは、上記の送信機としての通信機器と、上記の受 信機としての通信機器とを含むことを特徴として!/ヽる。  Further, a communication system according to the present invention is characterized by including the communication device as the transmitter and the communication device as the receiver. / Scold.
[0041] 上記の構成および方法により、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方 式に従って、送信権を委譲せずに、データを一括送信する際に、送信機では、一括 送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成し、送信フレームに通し番号を付与すると ともに、さらに、一括送信データの最終の送信フレームには、一括送信データの最終 の送信フレームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定して、送信フレームを送 信する。一方、受信機では、受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号 のエラーがないかどうかを判別し、受信フレームにエラーが検出された場合、エラー 有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラグおよびエラー発生時の通し番号を含む送 信フレームを生成して、送信機へ送信する。そして、送信機は、受信機から、エラー 発生時の通し番号を含むフレームを受信すると、その通し番号に対応する送信フレ ームを再送する。  With the above configuration and method, according to a communication method in which there is no limit on the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time, the transmitter transmits batch transmission data in batch transmission of data without delegating transmission right. The transmission frame is divided to generate a transmission frame, and a serial number is assigned to the transmission frame, and a batch transmission final flag indicating that it is the last transmission frame of batch transmission data is set in the final transmission frame of batch transmission data. And transmit the transmission frame. On the other hand, in the receiver, the serial number included in the received frame is analyzed to determine whether there is an error in the serial number, and if an error is detected in the received frame, the no error flag set to indicate that there is an error and Generate a transmission frame including the serial number at the time of error occurrence and transmit it to the transmitter. Then, when the transmitter receives a frame including a serial number at the time of occurrence of an error from the receiver, the transmitter retransmits a transmission frame corresponding to the serial number.
[0042] ここで、受信機は、送信機が一括送信データを分割した送信フレームの内の最終 の送信フレームを受信したことが、受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグによ つて判明するまで、上記エラー発生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを送信しない。 つまり、エラーの通知を一括送信データ単位で行う。  [0042] Here, the receiver determines that the transmitter has received the final transmission frame of the transmission frames obtained by dividing the batch transmission data, according to the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame. The transmission frame including the serial number when the error occurs is not transmitted. That is, error notification is performed in batch transmission data units.
[0043] よって、一度に送信または受信可能なフレーム数 (ウィンドウサイズ)の制限がな!ヽ 通信方式を用いても、フレームの抜け等を検出して、再送することができるため、信 頼性の高い通信を行うことが可能となるという効果を奏する。また、エラーの通知を一 括送信データ単位で行うため、データ転送の効率がょ ヽと ヽぅ効果を奏する。  Therefore, there is no limitation on the number of frames (window size) that can be transmitted or received at one time! ヽ Even if a communication method is used, it is possible to detect missing frames and retransmit, so reliability can be achieved. There is an effect that high communication can be performed. In addition, since the error notification is performed in units of batch transmission data, the efficiency of data transfer has a positive effect.
[0044] なお、上記通信機器は、コンピュータによって実現してもよぐこの場合には、コンビ ユータを上記通信機器の各部として動作させることにより上記通信機器をコンビユー タにて実現させる通信機器の通信プログラム、およびそれを記録したコンピュータ読 み取り可能な記録媒体も、本発明の範疇に入る。 In this case, the communication device may be realized by a computer. In this case, the communication device may be combined by operating a computer as each part of the communication device. The communication program of the communication device realized by the computer and the computer readable recording medium recording the same also fall within the scope of the present invention.
[0045] また、上記通信機器は、上記の各部として機能する通信回路によって実現してもよ い。  Further, the communication device may be realized by a communication circuit that functions as the above-described units.
[0046] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって通信を行う携帯電話に好適である。上 記携帯電話によれば、品質および Zある 、は転送効率の高 、通信を行うことが可能 となる。  Further, the communication device is suitable for a mobile phone that communicates by the communication device. According to the above mobile phone, it is possible to communicate with quality and Z with high transfer efficiency.
[0047] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって受信したデータに基づ 、て表示する 表示装置に好適である。このような表示装置によれば、品質および Zあるいは転送 効率の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。  Furthermore, the communication device is suitable for a display device that displays based on data received by the communication device. According to such a display device, communication can be performed with high quality and high Z or transfer efficiency.
[0048] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって受信したデータに基づ 、て印刷する 印刷装置に好適である。このような印刷装置によれば、品質および Zあるいは転送 効率の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。 In addition, the communication device is suitable for a printing apparatus that prints based on data received by the communication device. According to such a printing apparatus, communication can be performed with high quality and high Z or transfer efficiency.
[0049] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって受信したデータを記録する記録装置 に好適である。このような記録装置によれば、品質および Zあるいは転送効率の高い 通信を行うことが可能となる。 In addition, the communication device is suitable for a recording device that records data received by the communication device. According to such a recording apparatus, communication with high quality and Z or transfer efficiency can be performed.
[0050] 本発明のさらに他の目的、特徴、および優れた点は、以下に示す記載によって十 分に分力るであろう。また、本発明の利点は、添付図面を参照した次の説明で明白 になるであろう。 [0050] Other objects, features and advantages of the present invention will be fully addressed by the description given below. Also, the advantages of the present invention will be apparent from the following description with reference to the accompanying drawings.
図面の簡単な説明  Brief description of the drawings
[0051] [図 1]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第一形態に係る一次局の構成を示すブ ロック図である。  FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station according to a first embodiment of a communication system of the present invention.
[図 2]上記実施の第一形態に係る二次局の構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a secondary station according to the first embodiment.
[図 3]上記実施の第一形態におけるフレーム構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a frame configuration in the first embodiment of the above embodiment.
[図 4]上記実施の第一形態におけるデータ転送処理の手順を示す信号シークェンス 図である。  FIG. 4 is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing in the first embodiment.
[図 5]上記実施の第一形態におけるエラー発生時のデータ転送処理の手順を示す 信号シークェンス図である。 圆 6]本発明の通信システムにおける実施の第二形態に係る一次局、二次局の構成 を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 5 is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing when an error occurs in the first embodiment. [6] It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station and a secondary station according to a second embodiment of the communication system of the present invention.
[図 7]上記実施の第二形態におけるフレーム構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a frame configuration in the second embodiment described above.
圆 8]上記実施の第二形態におけるデータ転送処理の手順を示す信号シークェンス 図である。 圆 8] is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing in the second embodiment.
[図 9]従来力 の HDLC通信方式や IrDA通信方式の応用を説明するためのブロック 図である。  FIG. 9 is a block diagram for explaining the application of the conventional HDLC communication system and IrDA communication system.
[図 10]IrDA通信規格における Iフレームを用いたデータ転送の一般的な手順を説明 するための信号シークェンス図である。  FIG. 10 is a signal sequence diagram for illustrating a general procedure of data transfer using an I frame in the IrDA communication standard.
[図 ll]IrDA通信規格における UIフレームを用いたデータ転送の一般的な手順を説 明するための信号シークェンス図である。  FIG. 11 is a signal sequence diagram for describing a general procedure of data transfer using a UI frame in the IrDA communication standard.
圆 12]本発明の通信システムにおける実施の第三形態に係る一次局、二次局の構 成を示すブロック図である。 [12] FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station and a secondary station according to a third embodiment of the communication system of the present invention.
[図 13]上記実施の第三形態におけるデータ転送システムのプロトコルスタックを示す 図である。  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a protocol stack of the data transfer system in the third embodiment.
[図 14]上記実施の第三形態におけるフレーム構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a frame configuration in the third embodiment.
圆 15]上記実施の第三形態におけるデータ転送処理の手順を示す信号シークェン ス図である。 [15] FIG. 15 is a signal sequence diagram showing a procedure of data transfer processing in the third embodiment.
圆 16]上記実施の第三形態における認証時などに上位層から認証要求が発行され る場合のデータ転送の手順を示す信号シークェンス図である。 圆 16] FIG. 16 is a signal sequence diagram showing a data transfer procedure when an authentication request is issued from an upper layer at the time of authentication or the like in the third embodiment.
圆 17]上記実施の第三形態における認証時などに上位層から認証要求が発行され る場合のデータ転送の他の手順を示す信号シークェンス図である。 圆 17] FIG. 17 is a signal sequence diagram showing another procedure of data transfer when an authentication request is issued from an upper layer at the time of authentication in the third embodiment.
[図 18]従来の IrDAのプロトコルスタックを示す図である。  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a conventional IrDA protocol stack.
[図 19]従来の IrDAにおける接続時のシークェンス図である。  FIG. 19 is a sequence diagram at the time of connection in the conventional IrDA.
[図 20]OBEXの接続、データ転送、切断のシークェンス図である。  [Fig. 20] This is a sequence diagram of OBEX connection, data transfer, and disconnection.
[図 21]IrDAでのデータ転送の流れを示すシークェンス図である。  FIG. 21 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of data transfer in IrDA.
[図 22] (a)は IrLAPにおける Iフレームのフレームフォーマット、 (b)は IrLAPにおける [Fig. 22] (a) shows the frame format of I frame in IrLAP, (b) shows the frame format in IrLAP
UIフレームのフレームフォーマットを示す説明図である。 [図 23]IrLMPのフレームフォーマットを示す説明図である。 It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame format of UI frame. FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing a frame format of IrLMP.
[図 24]TinyTP層のフレームフォーマットを示す説明図である。  FIG. 24 is an explanatory drawing showing the frame format of the TinyTP layer.
[図 25] (a)は OBEXの Putコマンドのフレームフォーマット、 (b)は CONTINUEレス ポンスのフレームフォーマット、 (c)は SUCCESSレスポンスのフレームフォーマットを 示す説明図である。  [FIG. 25] (a) shows the frame format of OBEX Put command, (b) shows the frame format of CONTINUE response, and (c) shows the frame format of SUCCESS response.
[図 26]IrSimpleの双方向通信でのデータ転送の流れを示すシークェンス図である。  FIG. 26 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of data transfer in IrSimple's two-way communication.
[図 27] (a)は IrSimpleの双方向通信の場合の SMPフレームのフレームフォーマット 、 (b)は IrSimpleの片方向通信の場合の SMPフレームのフレームフォーマットを示 す説明図である。 [FIG. 27] (a) is an explanatory view showing a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of two-way communication of IrSimple, and (b) is a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of one-way communication of IrSimple.
[図 28]IrSimpleの片方向通信でのデータ転送の流れを示すシークェンス図である。  FIG. 28 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of data transfer in IrSimple one-way communication.
[図 29]上位層として OBEXが存在し、 OBEXの Putコマンドによるデータ転送を示す シークェンス図である。 [Fig. 29] This is a sequence diagram showing data transfer by OBEX's Put command, with OBEX as the upper layer.
[図 30]受信機がエラー無しフラグを含むフレームと SUCCESSを含むフレームとを 1 つにまとめて送信する通信例を示すシークェンス図である。  FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication in which a receiver collectively transmits a frame including an error-free flag and a frame including SUCCESS into one.
圆 31]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第四形態に係る送信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
圆 32]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第四形態および第五形態に係る受信 機の構成を示すブロック図である。 [32] FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a receiver according to the fourth and fifth embodiments used for the communication system of the present invention.
[図 33]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第四形態に係るシークェンス図である 圆 34]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第五形態に係る送信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。  FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system. [34] FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to the fifth embodiment used in the communication system of the present invention.
圆 35]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第五形態に係る第一のシークェンス図 である。 [Fig. 35] A first sequence diagram according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
圆 36]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第五形態に係る第二のシークェンス図 である。 [FIG. 36] A second sequence diagram according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
圆 37]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第六形態に係る送信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 圆 38]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第六形態に係る受信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 [FIG. 37] A block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention. [FIG. 38] A block diagram showing the configuration of a receiver according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
[図 39]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第六形態に係るシークェンス図である  FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system.
[図 40]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第七形態に係る送信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
圆 41]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第七形態に係る受信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 [FIG. 41] A block diagram showing a configuration of a receiver according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system of the present invention.
[図 42]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第七形態に係るシークェンス図である  FIG. 42 is a sequence diagram according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system.
[図 43]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第八形態に係るシークェンス図である 圆 44]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第九形態に係る送信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram according to an eighth embodiment used for the communication system of the present invention. [44] FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmitter according to the ninth embodiment used for the communication system of the present invention.
圆 45]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第九形態に係る受信機の構成を示す ブロック図である。 [FIG. 45] A block diagram showing a configuration of a receiver according to a ninth embodiment used for the communication system of the present invention.
[図 46]本発明の通信システムに用いる実施の第九形態に係るシークェンス図である  FIG. 46 is a sequence diagram according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention used in the communication system.
[図 47 PEGエンコーダおよび JPEGデコーダの構成を示すブロック図である。 [FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing configurations of a PEG encoder and a JPEG decoder.
[図 48 PEGのブロック(mcu)の説明図であり、(a)は 8 X 8、(b)は 8 X 16、(c)は 16 [FIG. 48 is an explanatory view of a block of PEG (mcu), wherein (a) is 8 × 8, (b) 8 × 16, (c) 16
X 8、(d)は 16 X 16のブロックを示す。 X 8 (d) shows a block of 16 X 16
[図 49]本発明の通信システムにおける mcu単位での分割、再送処理の説明図である  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of division and retransmission processing in units of mcu in the communication system of the present invention.
[図 50]本発明の通信システムにおけるライン単位での分割、再送処理の説明図であ る。 FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of line-by-line division and retransmission processing in the communication system of the present invention.
[図 51]本発明の通信システムにおけるファイル単位での分割、再送処理の説明図で ある。  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of the file division and retransmission processing in the communication system of the present invention.
[図 52]従来の通信システムにおけるクライアント機器の構成を示すブロック図である。 [図 53]従来の通信システムにおける OBEXクライアントの動作を示すフローチャート である。 FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a client device in a conventional communication system. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the operation of the OBEX client in the conventional communication system.
圆 54]本発明に係る実施の第十一形態および第十二形態の通信システムにおける クライアント機器の構成を示すブロック図である。 圆 54] FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a client device in the communication system of the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.
[図 55]上記実施の第十一形態の通信システムにおけるクライアント機器における OB EX層の動作を示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an operation of the OB EX layer in the client device in the communication system of the eleventh embodiment.
圆 56]本発明に係る実施の第十一形態の通信システムにおけるクライアント機器に おける OBEX層の他の動作を示すフローチャートである。 圆 56] A flowchart showing another operation of the OBEX layer in the client device in the communication system of the eleventh embodiment according to the present invention.
圆 57]本発明に係る実施の第十二形態の通信システムにおけるクライアント機器に おける OBEX層の動作を示すフローチャートである。 圆 57] a flowchart showing an operation of the OBEX layer in the client device in the communication system of the twelfth form of implementation according to the present invention;
[図 58]従来の通信システムにおけるサーバ機器の構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the configuration of server equipment in a conventional communication system.
[図 59]従来の通信システムにおける OBEXサーバの動作を示すフローチャートであ る。 FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the operation of the OBEX server in the conventional communication system.
圆 60]本発明に係る実施の第十三形態および第十四形態の通信システムにおける サーバ機器の他の構成を示すブロック図である。 [60] This is a block diagram showing another configuration of the server device in the communication system of the thirteenth and fourteenth modes of the present invention.
[図 61]上記実施の第十三形態の通信システムにおけるサーバ機器における OBEX 層の動作を示すフローチャートである。  [FIG. 61] A flowchart showing an operation of the OBEX layer in the server device in the communication system of the thirteenth embodiment described above.
[図 62]上記実施の第十三形態の通信システムにおけるサーバ機器における OBEX 層の他の動作を示すフローチャートである。  [FIG. 62] A flowchart showing another operation of the OBEX layer in the server machine in the communication system of the thirteenth embodiment described above.
圆 63]本発明に係る実施の第十四形態の通信システムにおけるサーノ機器におけ る OBEX層の動作を示すフローチャートである。 圆 63] It is a flow chart showing the operation of the OBEX layer in the Sano apparatus in the communication system of the fourteenth embodiment according to the present invention.
圆 64]本発明の通信システムを用いた実施の第十五形態に係る通信システムの説明 図である。 [64] It is explanatory drawing of the communication system which concerns on the 15th form of implementation using the communication system of this invention.
圆 65]本発明の通信システムを用いた実施の第十六形態に係る通信システムの説明 図である。 [FIG. 65] An explanatory diagram of a communication system according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention using the communication system.
圆 66]本発明の通信システムを用いた実施の第十七形態に係る通信システムの説明 図である。 圆 66] It is an explanatory view of a communication system according to a seventeenth embodiment of the embodiment using the communication system of the present invention.
圆 67]本発明の通信システムを用いた実施の第十八形態に係る通信システムの説明 図である。 [67] Description of the communication system according to the eighteenth mode of implementation using the communication system of the present invention FIG.
圆 68]OSI7階層モデルと、 IrDAの階層および本発明の階層の対応関係を示す模 式図である。 [Figure 68] A schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the [OSI 7 hierarchical model], the IrDA hierarchy, and the hierarchy of the present invention.
[図 69] (a)は、本発明の実施の形態に係る接続確立のシーケンス図である。 (b)は、 本発明の実施の形態に係る接続確立のシーケンス図である。(c)は、本発明の実施 の形態に係る接続確立のためのパケットフォーマットである。  FIG. 69 (a) is a sequence diagram of connection establishment according to an embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a sequence diagram of connection establishment according to the embodiment of the present invention. (C) is a packet format for connection establishment according to the embodiment of the present invention.
[図 70] (a)は、本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換シーケンスを示す図である。 (b FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention. (b
)は、本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換シーケンスを示す図である。 ) Is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 71] (a)は、 IrDAのデータ交換で使用されるパケットフォーマットを示す図である。 [FIG. 71] (a) is a diagram showing a packet format used in data exchange of IrDA.
(b)は、本発明のデータ交換で使用されるパケットフォーマットを示す図である。 (b) is a figure which shows the packet format used by the data exchange of this invention.
[図 72] (a)は、本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換シーケンスを示す図である。 (b FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention. (b
)は、本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換シーケンスを示す図である。 ) Is a diagram showing a data exchange sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 73] (a)は、本発明の実施の形態に係る切断シ—ケンスを示す図である。 (b)は、 本発明の実施の形態に係る切断シーケンスを示す図である。(c)は、本発明の実施 の形態に係る切断シーケンスのパケットフォーマットである。  FIG. 73 (a) is a view showing a cutting sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a figure which shows the cutting | disconnection sequence which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (C) is a packet format of a disconnection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
[図 74]本発明の実施の形態に係る接続シーケンス時の各層間の関数 (命令、メッセ ージ)とパケットの流れを示すシーケンス図である。  FIG. 74 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets during a connection sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 75] (a)は、本発明の実施の形態に係る接続シーケンス時の図 74および図 76に おける右向きの矢印の各層間の関数におけるデータの変化を示す説明図である。 (b )は、本発明の実施の形態に係る各層間の関数におけるデータの変化を示す図であ る。  FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory view showing a change of data in a function among layers of the arrow pointing to the right in FIGS. 74 and 76 in the connection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a figure which shows the change of the data in the function between each layer based on Embodiment of this invention.
[図 76]本発明の実施の形態に係る接続シーケンス時の各層間の関数 (命令、メッセ ージ)とパケットの流れを示すシーケンス図である。  FIG. 76 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets at the time of a connection sequence according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 77]本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換時の各層間の関数 (命令、メッセージ) とパケットの流れを示すシーケンス図である。  FIG. 77 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets at the time of data exchange according to the embodiment of the present invention.
[図 78]本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換時の図 77および図 79における各層 間の関数におけるデータの変化を示す図である。  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing changes in data in functions among the layers in FIG. 77 and FIG. 79 at the time of data exchange according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 79]本発明の実施の形態に係るデータ交換時の各層間の関数 (命令、メッセージ) とパケットの流れを示すシーケンス図である。 [FIG. 79] Function between each layer at the time of data exchange according to the embodiment of the present invention (instruction, message) And the flow of packets.
[図 80]本発明の実施の形態に係る切断シーケンス時の各層間の関数 (命令、メッセ ージ)とパケットの流れを示すシーケンス図である。  FIG. 80 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets at the time of a disconnection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
[図 81] (a)は、本発明の実施の形態に係る切断シーケンス時の図 80および図 82に おける右向きの矢印の各層間の関数におけるデータの変化を示す説明図である。 (b )は、本発明の実施の形態に係る各層間の関数におけるデータの変化を示す説明 図である。  FIG. 81 (a) is an explanatory view showing a change of data in a function among layers of the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 80 and FIG. 82 at the time of cutting sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention. (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the data in the function between each layer based on Embodiment of this invention.
[図 82]本発明の実施の形態に係る切断シーケンス時の各層間の関数 (命令、メッセ ージ)とパケットの流れを示すシーケンス図である。  FIG. 82 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of functions (instructions, messages) between each layer and packets during the disconnection sequence according to the embodiment of the present invention.
[図 83]本発明の実施の形態に係る 1次局における接続要求関数のデータと接続パラ メータの受け渡しを表す模式図である。  FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing passing of connection request function data and connection parameters in the primary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 84]本発明の実施の形態に係る 2次局における接続要求関数の接続パラメータの 受け渡しを表す模式図である。 FIG. 84 is a schematic view showing delivery of connection parameters of a connection request function in a secondary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 85]本発明の実施の形態に係る 1次局における接続確認関数と 2次局における接 続通知関数のデータと接続パラメータの受け渡しを表す模式図である。  FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram showing passing of a connection confirmation function at a primary station, data of a connection notification function at a secondary station, and a connection parameter according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 86]本発明の実施の形態に係る 2次局における接続返答関数のデータの受け渡し を表す模式図である。 FIG. 86 is a schematic view showing passing of data of a connection response function in the secondary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 87]本発明の実施の形態に係る 1次局における接続確認関数の接続パラメータの 受け渡しを表す模式図である。  FIG. 87 is a schematic view showing delivery of connection parameters of a connection check function in the primary station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 88]実施の形態の変形例である、接続パラメータを層間で共有する場合のの 1次 局における接続要求関数のデータと接続パラメータの受け渡しを表す模式図である  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing transfer of connection request function data and connection parameters at the primary station in the case of sharing connection parameters between layers, which is a modification of the embodiment.
[図 89]実施の形態の変形例である、接続パラメータを層間で共有する場合の 2次局 における接続通知関数のデータと接続パラメータの受け渡しを表す模式図である。 FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing transfer of connection notification function data and connection parameters in the secondary station in the case of sharing connection parameters between layers, which is a modification of the embodiment.
[図 90]実施の形態の変形例である、接続パラメータを各層が別々に下位層に渡す場 合の 1次局における接続要求関数のデータと接続パラメータの受け渡しを表す模式 図である。 FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing delivery of connection request function data and connection parameters in the primary station when each layer separately passes the connection parameters to the lower layer, which is a modification of the embodiment.
〔符号の説明〕 1 一次局 [Explanation of the code] 1 Primary station
11 CPU  11 CPU
12 メモリ  12 memory
13 コントローラ  13 controller
14 达 1  14 达 1
15 受信器  15 Receiver
131 制御部  131 control unit
132 送信フレーム生成部  132 Transmission Frame Generator
133 受信フレーム解析部  133 Received frame analysis unit
1321 データ読み出し部  1321 Data reader
1322 フレーム通し番号付加部 1322 Frame serial number adding unit
1323 送信権委譲フラグ付加部1323 Transmission right transfer flag addition part
1324 フレーム構築部 1324 Frame construction unit
1325 誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 1325 Error detection or correction code addition unit
1331 再送要求判定部 1331 Retransmission request determination unit
1332 フレーム通し番号抽出部  1332 Frame serial number extraction unit
2 二次局  2 secondary station
21 CPU  21 CPU
22 メモリ  22 Memory
23 コントローラ  23 controller
24  twenty four
25 送 1 ¾§  25 shipment 1 3⁄4§
231 制御部  231 control unit
232 フレーム処理部  232 frame processing unit
233 誤り検出または訂正回路 233 Error detection or correction circuit
234 エラーフレーム番号保持部234 Error frame number holding unit
235 レスポンスフレーム生成部235 Response frame generator
236 誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 6 一次局または二次局 236 Error Detection or Correction Code Adder 6 Primary station or secondary station
61 CPU  61 CPU
62 コントローラ  62 controller
63 送信器  63 transmitter
64 受  64 receiving
621 制御部  621 Control unit
622 送信フレーム生成部  622 Transmission frame generator
623 受信フレーム解析部  623 Received frame analysis unit
6221 接続確立フレーム生成部 6221 Connection establishment frame generation unit
6222 再送可能フレーム数付加部6222 Retransmission possible frame number addition part
6231 フレーム解析部 6231 Frame analysis unit
6232 再送可能フレーム数検出部 6232 Retransmittable frame number detection unit
12 局(一次局または二次局)12 stations (primary station or secondary station)
121 Applocation層処理部121 Applocation layer processing unit
122 OBEX層処理部 122 OBEX Layer Processing Unit
123 SMP層処理部  123 SMP Layer Processor
124 IrLMP層処理部  124 IrLMP layer processing unit
125 IrLAP層処理部  125 IrLAP layer processing unit
126 送 1目  126 shipments 1st
127  127
1231 制御部  1231 Control unit
1232 送信フレーム生成部  1232 Transmission frame generator
1233 受信フレーム生成部  1233 Received frame generator
12321 応答フレーム要求フラグ付加部 12321 Response frame request flag addition unit
12322 フレーム通し番号付加部12322 Frame serial number adding unit
12323 送信権委譲フラグ付加部12323 Transmission right transfer flag addition part
12324 再送要求フラグ付加部12324 Retransmission request flag addition unit
12325 フレーム構築部 12331 応答フレーム要求フラグ判定部 12325 Frame construction unit 12331 Response frame request flag determination unit
12332 フレーム通し番号解析部 12332 Frame serial number analysis unit
12333 送信権委譲フラグ判定部 12333 Transmission right transfer flag judgment unit
12334 再送要求判定部 12334 Retransmission request determination unit
12335 上位層データ抽出部 12335 Upper layer data extraction unit
2001 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2001 transmitter (primary station, client device)
2002 制御部(制御手段) 2002 control unit (control means)
2003 メモリ(記憶手段) 2003 Memory (storage means)
2004 一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 (一括送信最終フラグ生成手段) 2004 Batch transmission final flag generation circuit (batch transmission final flag generation means)
2005 通し番号生成回路 (通し番号生成手段) 2005 Serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means)
2006 送信フレーム生成回路 (送信フレーム生成手段)  2006 Transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means)
2007 送信部(送信手段)  2007 Transmission unit (transmission means)
2008 受信部 (受信手段)  2008 Receiver (Receiver)
2009 受信フレーム解析回路(受信フレーム解析手段)  2009 Received frame analysis circuit (received frame analysis means)
2010 エラー無しフラグ解析回路 (エラー無しフラグ解析手段) 2010 No Error Flag Analysis Circuit (No Error Flag Analysis Means)
2011 エラー検出回路 (エラー検出手段) 2011 error detection circuit (error detection means)
2012 通し番号解析回路 (通し番号解析手段)  2012 serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means)
2101 受信機に次局、サーバ機器)  2101 Receiver next station, server device)
2102 制御部(手段)  2102 Control unit (means)
2103 メモリ(手段)  2103 Memory (means)
2104 エラー無しフラグ生成回路 (エラー無しフラグ生成手段) 2104 No error flag generation circuit (No error flag generation means)
2105 通し番号生成回路 (通し番号生成手段) 2105 Serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means)
2106 送信フレーム生成回路 (送信フレーム生成手段)  2106 Transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means)
2107 送信部 (送信手段)  2107 Transmission unit (transmission means)
2108 受信部 (受信手段)  2108 Receiver (Receiver)
2109 受信フレーム解析回路 (受信フレーム解析手段)  2109 Reception frame analysis circuit (reception frame analysis means)
2110 一括送信最終フラグ解析回路 (一括送信最終フラグ解析手段) 2110 Batch transmission final flag analysis circuit (batch transmission final flag analysis means)
2111 エラー検出回路 (エラー検出手段) 2112 通し番号解析回路 (通し番号解析手段) 2111 Error detection circuit (error detection means) 2112 Serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means)
2201 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2201 Transmitter (Primary station, client device)
2213 タイマ (計時手段) 2213 Timer (Timekeeping means)
2301 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2301 Transmitter (Primary station, client device)
2313 対向局バッファサイズ解析回路 (対向局バッファサイズ解析手段) 2313 Opposite-station buffer size analysis circuit (opposite-station buffer size analysis means)
2401 受信機に次局、サーバ機器) 2401 Next to receiver, server equipment)
2413 バッファサイズ生成回路 (バッファサイズ生成手段)  2413 Buffer Size Generator (Buffer Size Generator)
2501 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器)  2501 Transmitter (Primary station, client device)
2513 データ最終フラグ生成回路 (データ最終フラグ生成手段) 2513 Data final flag generator (data final flag generator)
2601 受信機に次局、サーバ機器) 2601 Receiver next station, server device)
2613 データ最終フラグ解析回路 (データ最終フラグ解析手段) 2613 Data final flag analysis circuit (data final flag analysis means)
2701 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2701 Transmitter (Primary station, client device)
2702 制御部(制御手段)  2702 Control unit (control means)
2703 メモリ(記憶手段)  2703 Memory (storage means)
2705 通し番号生成回路 (通し番号生成手段)  2705 Serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means)
2706 送信フレーム生成回路 (送信フレーム生成手段)  2706 Transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means)
2707 送信部 (送信手段)  2707 Transmission unit (transmission means)
2713 データ最終フラグ生成回路 (データ最終フラグ生成手段) 2801 受信機に次局、サーバ機器)  2713 Data final flag generation circuit (data final flag generation means) 2801 Next to receiver, server equipment
2802 制御部(手段) 2802 Control unit (means)
2803 メモリ(手段)  2803 Memory (means)
2808 受信部 (受信手段) 2808 Receiver (Receiver)
2809 受信フレーム解析回路(受信フレーム解析手段)  2809 Reception frame analysis circuit (reception frame analysis means)
2811 エラー検出回路 (エラー検出手段)  2811 Error detection circuit (error detection means)
2812 通し番号解析回路 (通し番号解析手段)  2812 Serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means)
2813 データ最終フラグ解析回路 (データ最終フラグ解析手段) 2813 Data final flag analysis circuit (data final flag analysis means)
3300 クライアント機器 (通信装置、一次局) 3300 client device (communication device, primary station)
3310 アプリケーション層処理部 3320 OBEX層処理部 (オブジェクト交換層処理部) 3310 Application layer processing unit 3320 OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit)
3321 制御部  3321 Control unit
3322 要求通知部  3322 Request notification part
3323 応答受信部  3323 Response receiver
3324 通信方向選択部  3324 Communication direction selector
3330 下位層処理部  3330 Lower Layer Processor
3340 送信部  3340 transmitter
3350 受信部  3350 Receiver
3500 サーバ機器 (通信装置、二次局)  3500 server device (communication device, secondary station)
3510 アプリケーション層処理部  3510 Application Layer Processor
3520 OBEX層処理部 (オブジェクト交換層処理部)  3520 OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit)
3521 制御部  3521 Controller
3522 応答通知部  3522 Response notification unit
3523 要求解析部  3523 Request Analysis Unit
3530 下位層処理部  3530 Lower Layer Processor
3540 送信部  3540 transmitter
3550 受信部  3550 Receiver
発明を実施するための最良の形態  BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0053] はじめに、本発明の通信システムの概要について、図 21から図 30を参照しながら 説明すると以下の通りである。 First, the outline of the communication system of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 30 as follows.
[0054] 〔概要〕 [Overview]
(通信層)  (Communication layer)
後述する各実施の形態では、本発明に係る通信システムの送信機および受信機の 構成および動作について、 OSI7層モデルに基づいて詳細に説明する。ここで、 OSI 7層モデルとは、いわゆる「OSI基本参照モデル」「OSI階層モデル」とも呼ばれてい るものである。  In each embodiment described later, the configuration and operation of the transmitter and receiver of the communication system according to the present invention will be described in detail based on the OSI 7 layer model. Here, the OSI 7 layer model is also called the "OSI basic reference model" or "OSI hierarchical model".
[0055] OSI7層モデルでは、異機種間のデータ通信を実現するために、コンピュータの持 つべき通信機能が 7階層に分割され、各層ごとに標準的な機能モジュールが定義さ れている。 In the OSI seven-layer model, the communication functions that a computer should have are divided into seven layers in order to realize heterogeneous data communication, and standard functional modules are defined in each layer. It is done.
[0056] 具体的には、第 1層 (物理層)は、データを通信回線に送出するための電気的な変 換ゃ機械的な作業を受け持つ。第 2層 (データリンク層)は、物理的な通信路を確保し 、通信路を流れるデータのエラー検出などを行う。第 3層 (ネットワーク層)は、通信経 路の選択や通信経路内のアドレスの管理を行う。第 4層 (トランスポート層)は、データ 圧縮や誤り訂正、再送制御などを行う。第 5層 (セッション層)は、通信プログラム同士 がデータの送受信を行うための仮想的な経路 (コネクション)の確立や解放を行う。第 6層 (プレゼンテーション層)は、第 5層から受け取ったデータをユーザが分かりやす!/、 形式に変換したり、第 7層から送られてくるデータを通信に適した形式に変換したりす る。第 7層 (アプリケーション層)は、データ通信を利用した様々なサービスを人間や他 のプログラムに提供する。  Specifically, the first layer (physical layer) is responsible for electrical conversion and mechanical work for transmitting data to the communication line. The second layer (data link layer) secures a physical communication channel and performs error detection of data flowing through the communication channel. The third layer (network layer) performs communication path selection and management of addresses in the communication path. The fourth layer (transport layer) performs data compression, error correction, and retransmission control. The fifth layer (session layer) establishes and releases virtual routes (connections) for communication programs to send and receive data. The sixth layer (presentation layer) converts data received from the fifth layer into a format that can be easily understood by the user! /, And converts data sent from the seventh layer into a format suitable for communication. . The seventh layer (application layer) provides various services using data communication to humans and other programs.
[0057] 各実施の形態に係る通信システムの各通信層も、上記 OSI7層モデルの対応する 階層と同等の機能を有する。ただし、各実施の形態では、上記通信システムは、セッ シヨン層とプレゼンテーション層とを 1つにした、 6階層の構造となっている。また、ァ プリケーシヨン層については、説明を省略する。  Each communication layer of the communication system according to each embodiment also has the same function as the corresponding layer of the OSI 7 layer model. However, in each embodiment, the communication system has a six-layer structure in which the session layer and the presentation layer are one. Also, the description of the application layer is omitted.
[0058] 本発明は、送信機および受信機が複数の通信層の接続を確立して通信を行う通信 システムに広く適用可能である。すなわち、通信機能の分割は OSI7層モデルに従つ ていなくてもよい。また、通信層の数は、接続すべき通信層が複数であれば、任意に 選択できる。  The present invention is widely applicable to communication systems in which a transmitter and a receiver establish a connection of a plurality of communication layers to perform communication. That is, the division of communication functions does not have to conform to the OSI 7 layer model. Also, the number of communication layers can be arbitrarily selected as long as there are a plurality of communication layers to be connected.
[0059] また、本発明は、フレームに通し番号を付与して、フレーム単位の再送を一括送信 データごとに行うことを可能とするものであるため、エラーの少ない通信においては、 通信効率が高ぐまた仮にエラーが発生した場合でも、再送により通信の信頼性を確 保することができる。よって、本発明は、短時間に大量のデータを送信を行いたい通 信、例えば赤外線による無線通信に特に適している。ただし、本発明は、他の無線通 信、および、有線通信においても効果的である。  Furthermore, since the present invention makes it possible to assign a serial number to a frame and perform frame-based retransmission for each batch transmission data, communication efficiency is high in communications with few errors. Also, even if an error occurs, retransmission can ensure the reliability of communication. Thus, the present invention is particularly suitable for communications that want to transmit a large amount of data in a short time, for example, wireless communications by infrared. However, the present invention is also effective in other wireless communication and wired communication.
[0060] 各実施の形態では、説明の便宜上、本発明の一適用例である IrSimpleに基づ 、 て説明する。し力し、本発明は IrSimpleに限定されるものではない。なお、 IrSimple とは、従来の IrDAの一部機能を改良したものである。 [0061] 各実施の形態では、 IrSimpleに則って、データリンク層、ネットワーク層、トランスポ ート層、セッション層 +プレゼンテーション層を、それぞれ、 LAP, LMP、 SMP、 OB EXと表記することがある。また、通信層を送信機、受信機で区別する場合には、送信 機に" P"、受信機に" S"と付記する。例えば、 "LAP (P) "とは、送信機のデータリンク 層を意味する。 Each embodiment will be described based on IrSimple, which is an application example of the present invention, for convenience of explanation. However, the present invention is not limited to IrSimple. Note that IrSimple is an improvement on some of the functions of the conventional IrDA. In each embodiment, the data link layer, the network layer, the transport layer, and the session layer + the presentation layer may be described as LAP, LMP, SMP, and OB EX, respectively, according to IrSimple. When the communication layer is distinguished by transmitter and receiver, add "P" to the transmitter and "S" to the receiver. For example, "LAP (P)" means the data link layer of the transmitter.
[0062] (IrDAと IrSimpleとの比較)  (Comparison of IrDA and IrSimple)
以下、本発明の従来技術である IrDAと、本発明の一適用例である IrSimpleとを比 較する。  Hereinafter, IrDA, which is a prior art of the present invention, and IrSimple, which is an application example of the present invention, will be compared.
[0063] 1. IrDAにおけるデータ転送の流れ  1. Flow of data transfer in IrDA
図 21に、従来 IrDAでのデータ転送の流れを示す。なお、以下の説明においては 、 IrDAプロトコルスタックとして、 IrLAP、 IrLMP、 TinyTP (図中での TTP)、 OBEX が存在するものとする。  FIG. 21 shows the flow of data transfer in the conventional IrDA. In the following description, IrLAP, IrLMP, TinyTP (TTP in the figure), and OBEX are assumed to be present as the IrDA protocol stack.
[0064] (l) IrLAP層は、データ転送において、エラー時に再送を行うことで、上位層に対 して、データの信頼性を保証するモードと、エラー時に再送を行わず、上位層に対し て、データの信頼性を保証しないモードが存在する。本説明においては、前述の信 頼性を保証するモードでのデータ転送を行うこととする。また、信頼性を保証するため に、 IrLAPでは、 I (Information)フレームを用いてデータ転送を行う。  (L) In the data transfer, the IrLAP layer retransmits when an error occurs, thereby providing a mode in which the reliability of the data is guaranteed to the upper layer, and without performing an error retransmission when an error occurs, to the upper layer. There are modes that do not guarantee the reliability of the data. In this description, data transfer is performed in the mode that guarantees the aforementioned reliability. Also, in order to guarantee the reliability, IrLAP performs data transfer using an I (Information) frame.
[0065] 図 22 (a)に、 IrLAPにおける Iフレームのフレームフォーマットを示す。 FIG. 22 (a) shows the frame format of I frame in IrLAP.
[0066] Iフレームには、フレームを受信する機器において、フレームの抜けを検出できるよ うにするために、通し番号が振られる。この通し番号は、図 22 (a)の Nsフィールド領 域に割り当てられる。 [0066] The I frame is assigned a serial number so that the device receiving the frame can detect a frame dropout. This serial number is assigned to the Ns field area in Fig. 22 (a).
[0067] IrLAPでは、 Iフレームを用いてデータ転送を行う場合、一度に送信可能なフレー ム数 (ウィンドウサイズ)に制限を設けており、ウィンドウサイズは最大 7となる。このウイ ンドウサイズは、接続時に、一次局と二次局が、それぞれ自機器が一度に受信可能 なフレーム数 (ウィンドウサイズ)を対向局に通知する。そして、対向局のウィンドウサイ ズを超えるフレームを連続して送信しては 、けな 、こととなって!/、る。本説明にお!/、て は、一次局のウィンドウサイズは 1、二次局のウィンドウサイズは 2としている。  In IrLAP, when performing data transfer using I frames, a limit is placed on the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time (window size), and the window size is 7 at maximum. In this window size, when connected, the primary station and secondary station notify the opposite station of the number of frames (window size) that the own device can receive at one time. Then, continuously transmit frames that exceed the window size of the opposite station. In this explanation! The window size of the primary station is 1, and the window size of the secondary station is 2.
[0068] また、フレームを受信した機器が受信成功が否かを通知するために、 Nrフィールド が存在する。連続して受信したフレームが全て正常であった場合は、次に送信して 欲しい通し番号を Nrフィールドに設定して、送信する。例えば、 Nsが 1、 2のフレーム を連続受信して、いずれも正常受信した場合は、 Nrフィールドに 3を設定して送信す る。 Also, in order to notify whether the device that received the frame received successfully, the Nr field Exists. If all the frames received in succession are normal, send the desired serial number by setting it in the Nr field. For example, if Ns receives frames 1 and 2 continuously, and all of them are received normally, set 3 in the Nr field and transmit.
[0069] 一方、受信フレームに誤りがあった場合は、再送して欲しいフレームの通し番号を Nrフィールドに設定して送信する。例えば、 Nsが 1、 2のフレームを連続受信して、 2 のフレームにエラーがあつたと判別された場合、 Nrフィールドに 2を設定して送信す る。  On the other hand, if there is an error in the received frame, the serial number of the frame desired to be retransmitted is set in the Nr field and transmitted. For example, when it is determined that Ns = 1 and 2 frames are continuously received and it is determined that 2 frames have an error, Nr field is set to 2 and transmitted.
[0070] フレームを送信した機器は、フレームを連続送信後、受信フレームの Nrフィールド を監視し、 Nrフィールドが自機器の送信したフレームの内、最後に送信したフレーム の Nsの値より 1だけ大き!/、値である場合は、前回のフレーム連続送信がすべて正常 に完了したことを認識し、次のフレーム送信を開始する。また、受信フレームの Nrフィ 一ルドが自機器の送信したフレームの内のいくつかの通し番号の値である場合は、 その通し番号から再送を行うこととなる。このとき、 Nsフィールドも、 Nrフィールドの値 から振り直す。  After continuously transmitting frames, the device transmitting the frame monitors the Nr field of the received frame, and the Nr field is one more than the Ns value of the last transmitted frame of the frames transmitted by the own device. If it is a value, it recognizes that all previous consecutive frame transmissions have been completed successfully, and starts transmitting the next frame. Also, if the Nr field of the received frame is the value of some serial numbers in the frame transmitted by the own device, retransmission will be performed from that serial number. At this time, the Ns field is also rearranged from the value of the Nr field.
[0071] 上述の手順により、 IrLAP層における Iフレームを用いた再送が可能となる。 IrLAP の再送を用いる場合、ウィンドウサイズは IrLAPの規格上、最大 7であるため、 8以上 のフレームを連続送信することは不可能である。  The above-described procedure enables retransmission using I-frames in the IrLAP layer. When IrLAP retransmission is used, the window size is a maximum of 7 according to the IrLAP standard, so continuous transmission of eight or more frames is impossible.
[0072] (2) IrLMP層は、アプリケーションごとの論理的なチャネル(LSAP: Link Service A ccess Point)を上位層に提供する層である。  (2) The IrLMP layer is a layer that provides a logical channel for each application (LSAP: Link Service Acces- sion Point) to the upper layer.
[0073] 図 23に、 IrLMPのフレームフォーマットを示す。  [0073] FIG. 23 shows the IrLMP frame format.
[0074] フレームを送信する側の IrLMP層では、上位層(TinyTP層)力 のデータと IrLM Pフレームに配置するとともに、送信先の論理的なチャネル(DLSAP : Destination Li nk Service Access Point)と送信元の餘理的なチャネル(SLSAP: Source Link Servic e Access Point)を IrLMPヘッダとして、配置する。  [0074] The IrLMP layer on the transmitting side of the frame arranges data of upper layer (TinyTP layer) power and IrLM P frame, and also transmits a logical channel (DLSAP: Destination Link Service Access Point) of transmission destination and transmission. Place the original rational channel (SLSAP: Source Link Service Access Point) as the IrLMP header.
[0075] 一方、フレームを受信する側の IrLMP層では、下位層からの受信フレームの DLS APフィールドを監視することにより、どの上位層アプリケーションのデータであるかを 判別し、対応する上位層アプリケーションに対して、受信フレーム内データを渡す。 [0076] (3) TinyTP層は、上位層(OBEX層)データの分割 ·結合およびフロー制御を行う 層である。 On the other hand, in the IrLMP layer on the side of receiving the frame, by monitoring the DLS AP field of the received frame from the lower layer, it is determined which upper layer application data it is, and to the corresponding upper layer application. On the other hand, pass the data in the received frame. (3) The TinyTP layer is a layer that performs division / combination and flow control of upper layer (OBEX layer) data.
[0077] 図 24に、 TinyTP層のフレームフォーマットを示す。  [0077] FIG. 24 shows the frame format of the TinyTP layer.
[0078] TinyTP層は、上位層から送信データが渡されると、下位層(LAP層)の最大フレ 一ム長を超えない範囲で、送信データを分割して、下位層(LMP層)にデータを渡 す。また、受信する側においては、下位層(IrLMP層)からの受信フレーム内のデー タを結合し、上位層(OBEX層)に渡す。また、受信バッファがあふれるのを未然に防 ぐために、自局が受信可能なフレーム数をクレジットという形で、対向局に通知する。 そして、対向局のクレジットを超えるフレームを連続して送信してはいけないことにな つている。  When the transmission data is passed from the upper layer, the TinyTP layer divides the transmission data within the range not exceeding the maximum frame length of the lower layer (LAP layer), and transmits the data to the lower layer (LMP layer). give. Also, on the receiving side, the data in the received frame from the lower layer (IrLMP layer) is combined and passed to the upper layer (OBEX layer). Also, in order to prevent the reception buffer from overflowing, the number of frames that it can receive is notified to the opposite station in the form of credits. And it is not possible to continuously transmit frames that exceed the credits of the opposite station.
[0079] (4) OBEX層は、オブジェクト交換用のプロトコルである。  (4) The OBEX layer is a protocol for object exchange.
[0080] 図 25に、 OBEX層のフレームフォーマットを示す。 [0080] FIG. 25 shows the frame format of the OBEX layer.
[0081] 図 25 (a)が OBEX層の Putコマンドのフォーマットである。 OBEX層は、ファイルの 送信を行う場合は、 Putコマンドを用いて送信を行う。また、送信するファイルのフアイ ル名、ファイルサイズなどの情報も合わせて付加される。  Figure 25 (a) shows the format of the Put command in the OBEX layer. When transmitting files, the OBEX layer uses the Put command to transmit. In addition, information such as the file name of the file to be sent and the file size are also added.
[0082] また、図 25 (b)および(c)力 CONTINUEレスポンスおよび SUCCESSレスポン スのフレームフォーマットである。ファイルの受信を行う側は、 Putコマンド受信ごとに 、レスポンスを返す必要がある。最終でない Putコマンドを受信した場合は、 CONTI NUEレスポンスを、また最終の Putコマンドを受信した場合は、 SUCCESSレスポン スをそれぞれ返信する。  Also, FIGS. 25 (b) and (c) are frame formats of the power CONTINUE response and the SUCCESS response. The receiving side of the file needs to return a response each time the Put command is received. When a non-final Put command is received, a CONTI NUE response is returned, and when a final Put command is received, a SUCCESS response is returned.
[0083] つづいて、従来の IrDAにおける、 OBEXの Putコマンドを用いたデータ転送の手 順について説明する。  Next, the procedure of data transfer using the OBEX Put command in the conventional IrDA will be described.
[0084] 一次局の OBEXにお!/、てファイル送信要求が発生すると、一次局の OBEX層(以 下、 OBEX(P) )は、下位層である一次局の TinyTP層(以下、 TTP (P) )に対して、 Putコマンドを送信データとして渡す。本説明においては、 Putコマンド力 dataP0、 dataPl、 dataP2、 dataP3で構成されているものとする。  When a file transmission request is generated at the OBEX of the primary station, the OBEX layer (hereinafter referred to as OBEX (P)) of the primary station is referred to as the TinyTP layer (hereinafter referred to as TTP (hereinafter referred to as the TTP). P) Pass Put command as send data. In the present description, it is assumed that Put command force data P 0, data P 1, data P 2 and data P 3 are configured.
[0085] これを受けた TTP (P)は、下位層である LAP層の最大データ長に送信データを分 割する。本説明においては、 TTP (P)において、 dataP0、 dataPl、 dataP2、 dataP 3に分割されるものとする。また、 TTP (P)の受信可能クレジット数は 1であるため、ク レジットを 1とする。前記クレジットおよび分割データを用いて、 ΤΤΡフレームとして生 成し、下位層である一次局の IrLMP層(以下、 LMP (P) )に渡す。 [0085] Upon receiving this, TTP (P) divides the transmission data into the maximum data length of the lower LAP layer. In this description, in TTP (P), dataP0, dataPl, dataP2, dataP It shall be divided into three. Also, since TTP (P) has a receivable credit of 1, the credit is 1. The credit and divided data are used to generate an overhead frame, which is passed to the lower layer, the IrLMP layer (hereinafter referred to as LMP (P)) of the primary station.
[0086] これを受けた LMP (P)は、論理チャネル情報(LSAPヘッダ)を付カ卩して、 LMPフ レームを生成し、下位層である一次局の IrLAP層(以下、 LAP (P) )に渡す。  The LMP (P) that has received this adds logical channel information (LSAP header) to generate an LMP frame, and the IrLAP layer of the primary station that is the lower layer (hereinafter referred to as LAP (P) Pass to).
[0087] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 Iフレームを用いて、データ転送を行う。本説明にお!/、て は、二次局のウィンドウサイズが 2であることから、 Nsが 0、 1の Iフレームを連続送信し ている。  The LAP (P) that has received this performs data transfer using an I frame. In this explanation! Since the window size of the secondary station is 2, the I frame with Ns 0 and 1 is continuously transmitted.
[0088] 一方、二次局の IrLAP層(以下、 LAP (S) )では、前述の Iフレームを連続受信する と、 Nsフィールドを監視しながら、フレームの抜けを検出するとともに、 Iフレーム内の 上位層データを上位層である二次局の IrLMP層(以下、 LMP (S) )に渡す。また、 I フレームの連続受信成功通知を行う必要があるが、本説明においては、この段階で は、 Nrフィールドを 2にした連続受信成功通知フレームは、送信しない。  On the other hand, in the IrLAP layer (hereinafter, LAP (S)) of the secondary station, when the above-mentioned I frame is continuously received, while detecting the omission of a frame while monitoring the Ns field, Pass the upper layer data to the IrLMP layer (hereinafter referred to as LMP (S)) of the secondary station that is the upper layer. Also, although it is necessary to perform continuous reception success notification of I frame, in this description, the continuous reception success notification frame in which the Nr field is 2 is not transmitted at this stage.
[0089] 前述のフレーム受信通知を受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去した後、上位 層データを上位層である二次局の TinyTP層(以下、 TTP (S) )に渡す。  [0089] The LMP (S) that has received the above frame reception notification passes the upper layer data to the upper layer TinyTP layer (hereinafter, TTP (S)) of the secondary station after removing the LSAP header.
[0090] これを受けた TTP (S)は、受信フレーム内の上位層データを結合する。本説明に おいては、 OBEX層に渡すデータの単位を dataPO、 dataPl、 dataP2、 dataP3を 結合したデータサイズ相当としているため、 dataP0、 dataPlを結合し終わった時点 では、 OBEX層に対してデータ受信の通知は行っていない。また、 TTP (S)の受信 可能クレジット数 2分のデータ処理(dataP0、 dataPlの結合処理)が完了したため、 対向局に対して、クレジットを 2として、自機器が、 2つのフレームを受信可能であるこ とを通知するために下位層に TinyTPフレームを渡す。  The received TTP (S) combines upper layer data in the received frame. In this description, the unit of data passed to the OBEX layer corresponds to the data size combining dataPO, dataPl, dataP2, and dataP3. Therefore, when dataP0 and dataPl are combined, data is received from the OBEX layer We did not give notice. Also, since data processing for TTP (S) receivable credits of 2 minutes (combination processing of dataP0 and dataPl) is completed, the own device can receive 2 frames with 2 credits for the opposite station. Pass TinyTP frame to lower layer to notify that there is.
[0091] これを受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAP情報を LMPヘッダとして付カ卩し、 LAP (S)に渡 す。  [0091] Upon receiving this, LMP (S) adds LSAP information as an LMP header and passes it to LAP (S).
[0092] これを受けた LAP (S)は、 Iフレームを用いて、データ転送を行う。このとき、前述で 送信を保留していた LAPの Iフレーム連続受信成功通知のための Nrフィールドに、 次に送信して欲しい Nsフィールドの値 2を設定して送信する。また、 Nsフィールドに は、二次局の送信フレームの通し番号を合わせて設定する。 [0093] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 Nrフィールドを監視することにより、前回の Iフレームの連 続送信が正常に終了しているかどうかを確認する。本説明の場合、 Nrフィールドが 2 であるため、前回送信した Nsフィールドが 0および 1の Iフレームを二次局が正常に受 信できたことを認識する。また、受信 Iフレーム内に上位層データが入っているため、 LMP (P)に上位層データを渡す。 [0092] The LAP (S) that has received this performs data transfer using the I frame. At this time, it transmits by setting the value 2 of the Ns field which it wants to transmit next to the Nr field for the IAP frame continuous reception success notification of LAP which was holding transmission above. Also, in the Ns field, set the serial number of the secondary station's transmission frame together. [0093] Having received this, the LAP (P) checks whether the previous continuous transmission of I frame has ended normally by monitoring the Nr field. In the case of this explanation, since the Nr field is 2, it is recognized that the secondary station has successfully received an I frame of 0 and 1 from the previously transmitted Ns field. Also, since the upper layer data is included in the received I frame, the upper layer data is passed to LMP (P).
[0094] これを受けた LMP (P)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去した後、上位層データを TTP (P)に 渡す。  [0094] After receiving this, LMP (P) passes upper layer data to TTP (P) after removing the LSAP header.
[0095] これを受けた TTP (P)は、受信フレーム内の対向局のクレジットが 2であることから、 対向局の TTP (S)が 2つのフレームを受信可能であると認識し、上位層力もの送信 データの内、残りの分割データ dataP2、 dataP3にそれぞれ一次局のクレジット情報 を付加し、 LMP (P)に渡す。  The TTP (P) that has received this recognizes that the TTP (S) of the opposite station can receive two frames since the opposite station's credit in the received frame is 2. Among the transmission data, add the credit information of the primary station to the remaining divided data dataP2 and dataP3 respectively, and pass them to LMP (P).
[0096] これを受けた LMP (P)は、 LSAPヘッダを付カ卩し、 LAP (P)に渡す。  [0096] Upon receiving this, LMP (P) adds an LSAP header and passes it to LAP (P).
[0097] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 2つの Iフレームを用いて、上位層からの 2つの送信デー タをそれぞれ送信する。このとき、前述の二次局力もの Iフレームの受信が正常に行 えたことを通知するために Nrフィールドに次の二次局の Nsフィールドの値を設定す るとともに、 Nsフィールドには、前回一次局が最後に送信した Iフレームの Nsフィール ドの値に 1だけ足した値を設定する。  [0097] The LAP (P) that has received this transmits two pieces of transmission data from the upper layer using two I frames. At this time, the value of the Ns field of the next secondary station is set in the Nr field in order to notify that the reception of the I-frame by the above-mentioned secondary station was successful, and the Ns field Set the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the Ns field of the I frame last transmitted by the primary station.
[0098] これを受けた LAP (S)は、 Nrフィールドを監視することにより、前回二次局が送信し た Iフレームを一次局が正常に受信したことを認識するとともに、受信 Iフレーム内の 上位層データを LMP (S)に渡す。  Having received this, the LAP (S) recognizes that the primary station has successfully received the I frame transmitted by the secondary station last time by monitoring the Nr field, and the LAP (S) in the received I frame Pass upper layer data to LMP (S).
[0099] これを受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去し、 TTP (S)に渡す。  [0099] The LMP (S) that has received this removes the LSAP header and passes it to the TTP (S).
[0100] これを受けた TTP (S)は、受信フレーム内の上位層データを結合する。前述の結 合された上位層データ(dataPO、 dataPl)に今回受信した dataP2、 dataP3を結合 する。この時点で、上位層 OBEX層に渡すデータサイズに達しているため、上位層で ある二次局の OBEX層(以下、 OBEX (S) )に上位層データを渡す。また、この時点 で、受信データの処理が完了しているため、クレジットを 2として、下位層に渡してもよ いが、本発明においては、この送信処理は保留する。  The received TTP (S) combines upper layer data in the received frame. DataP2 and dataP3 received this time are combined with the above combined upper layer data (dataPO and dataPl). At this point, since the data size passed to the upper layer OBEX layer has been reached, the upper layer data is passed to the OBEX layer (hereinafter referred to as OBEX (S)) of the secondary station that is the upper layer. At this point, since processing of the received data is completed, the credit may be passed to the lower layer as 2, but in the present invention, this transmission processing is suspended.
[0101] これを受けた OBEX (S)は、下位層力ものデータを解析し、 Putコマンドであること を確認すると、一次局の OBEXに対して応答を返すために、応答フレームを生成し、[0101] Upon receiving this, OBEX (S) analyzes lower level data and is a Put command. To generate a response frame to return a response to the primary station's OBEX.
TTP (S)に渡す。本説明の場合、受信したコマンドが最終でない Putコマンドである ため、 CONTINUEコマンドを生成することとなる。 Pass to TTP (S). In the case of this explanation, since the received command is a Put command that is not final, a CONTINUE command will be generated.
[0102] これを受けた TTP (S)は、前述のクレジットと上位層力 のデータを合わせて Tiny[0102] Upon receipt of this, TTP (S) combines the above-mentioned credit and upper layer strength data to create Tiny.
TPフレームを生成し、 LMP (S)に渡す。 Generate a TP frame and pass it to LMP (S).
[0103] これを受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAPヘッダを付カ卩し、 LAP (S)に渡す。 [0103] The LMP (S) that has received this adds the LSAP header and passes it to the LAP (S).
[0104] これを受けた LAP (S)は、 Iフレームを用いて、データ転送を行う。また、このとき Nr フィールドに前回の Iフレーム受信成功の旨を設定し、また Nsフィールドには通し番 号を設定する。 Receiving this, the LAP (S) performs data transfer using the I frame. At this time, the Nr field is set to indicate that the previous I frame has been successfully received, and the Ns field is set to a serial number.
[0105] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 Nrフィールドの監視により、前回送信した 2つの Iフレー ムが二次局で正常に受信できたことを認識するとともに、受信 Iフレーム内の上位層 データを LMP (P)に渡す。  [0105] The LAP (P) that has received this recognizes that the secondary station has successfully received the two I-frames transmitted last time by monitoring the Nr field, and the upper layer in the received I-frames. Pass data to LMP (P).
[0106] これを受けた LMP (P)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去し、上位層データを TTP (P)に渡す  [0106] Receiving this, LMP (P) removes LSAP header and passes upper layer data to TTP (P)
[0107] これを受けた TTP (P)は、受信フレーム内のデータを ΟΒΕΧ(Ρ)に渡す。 [0107] Upon receiving this, TTP (P) passes the data in the received frame to ΟΒΕΧ (Ρ).
[0108] これを受けた ΟΒΕΧ(Ρ)は、受信フレームを解析する。本説明においては、 CONT [0108] Receiving this, ΟΒΕΧ analyzes the received frame. In this description, CONT
INUEレスポンスを受信しているため、前回の Putコマンドによるデータ転送(dataPO 力も dataP3)が正常に二次局に転送できたことを認識する。 Since the INUE response has been received, it recognizes that the data transfer with the previous Put command (dataPO and dataP3) was successfully transferred to the secondary station.
[0109] 以上により、最終でない Putコマンドの場合の通信が終了する。 Thus, the communication in the case of a non-final Put command is completed.
[0110] 最終の Putコマンドの通信の場合は、前述の OBEX (S)から返信されるレスポンス 力 SSUCCESSレスポンスに変わるだけで、その他の通信の流れは基本的に同じであ る。 [0110] In the case of final Put command communication, the flow of other communication is basically the same except that the response strength returned from OBEX (S) is changed to the SSUCCESS response.
[0111] 上記のとおり、本説明の条件においては、通信路を流れるフレーム数は 12個となる  As described above, under the conditions of the present description, the number of frames flowing through the communication path is twelve.
[0112] 2. IrSimpleの双方向通信におけるデータ転送の流れ 2. Flow of data transfer in two-way communication of IrSimple
図 26に、本発明の適用例である IrSimpleの双方向通信でのデータ転送の流れを 示す。なお、以下の説明においては、一次局と二次局は、それぞれ IrLAP層、 IrLM P層、 IrSMP層 (Infrared Sequence Management Protocol)、 OBEX層をサポートして いるものとする。 FIG. 26 shows the flow of data transfer in two-way communication of IrSimple, which is an application example of the present invention. In the following description, the primary station and the secondary station respectively support the IrLAP layer, the IrLMP layer, the IrSMP layer (Infrared Sequence Management Protocol), and the OBEX layer. It is assumed that
[0113] (l) IrLAP層においては、 UIフレームを用いて、データ転送を行う。前述のとおり、 UIフレームを用いると、ウィンドウサイズの制限がなくなるため、 Iフレームを用いた場 合に一度に連続送信可能なフレーム数 7よりも多くのフレームを連続送信することが 可能となる。このことにより、フレーム受信後、送信を開始するまでに待たなければな らない時間(Min Turn Around Time)の累積によるデータ転送効率の削減が期待で きる。  (L) In the IrLAP layer, data transfer is performed using a UI frame. As described above, when using UI frames, there is no limitation on the window size, and it is possible to continuously transmit more frames than the number of frames that can be continuously transmitted at one time using I frames. As a result, it is expected that the data transfer efficiency can be reduced by accumulating the time (Min Turn Around Time) which has to wait before starting transmission after frame reception.
[0114] 図 22 (b)に、 LAP層の UIフレームのフレームフォーマットを示す。  FIG. 22 (b) shows the frame format of the LAP layer UI frame.
[0115] 図 22 (b)に示すように、 UIフレームには、 Iフレーム(図 22 (a)に)に存在していた N r、 Nsフィールドが存在していない。これは、フレームに通し番号が振られていないこ とを示しており、 LAP層レベルでのフレーム抜けの検出が行えず、また、再送要求す べきフレームの通し番号の設定を行うこともできないことを示している。すなわち、 UI フレームを用いた転送の場合は、 LAP層レベルでの上位層データの信頼性は保証 していない。 As shown in FIG. 22 (b), the N r and Ns fields present in the I frame (in FIG. 22 (a)) are not present in the UI frame. This indicates that the frame is not assigned a serial number, indicating that frame loss detection can not be performed at the LAP layer level, and that it is not possible to set the frame serial number to be requested for retransmission. ing. That is, in the case of transfer using UI frames, the reliability of upper layer data at the LAP layer level is not guaranteed.
[0116] (2) IrLMP層は、アプリケーションごとの論理的なチャネル(LSAP: Link Service A ccess Point)を上位層に提供する層である。  (2) The IrLMP layer is a layer that provides a logical channel for each application (LSAP: Link Service Acces- sion Point) to the upper layer.
[0117] 図 23に示したように、フレームを送信する側の IrLMP層では、上位層(TinyTP層 )力ものデータと IrLMPフレームに配置するとともに、送信先の論理的なチャネル (D LSAP : Destination Link Service Access Point)と送信元の餘理的なチャネル(SLS AP : Source Link Service Access Point)を IrLMPヘッダとして、酉己置する。  [0117] As shown in FIG. 23, in the IrLMP layer on the side of transmitting the frame, the higher layer (TinyTP layer) is placed in the powerful data and IrLMP frame, and the logical channel of the transmission destination (D LSAP: Destination Link Service Access Point) and the sender's rational channel (SLS AP: Source Link Service Access Point) are placed as an IrLMP header.
[0118] 一方、フレームを受信する側の IrLMP層では、下位層からの受信フレームの DLS APフィールドを監視することにより、どの上位層アプリケーションのデータであるかを 判別し、対応する上位層アプリケーションに対して、受信フレーム内データを渡す。  On the other hand, in the IrLMP layer on the side of receiving the frame, by monitoring the DLS AP field of the received frame from the lower layer, it is determined which upper layer application data it is, and to the corresponding upper layer application. On the other hand, pass the data in the received frame.
[0119] (3) IrSMP層は、上位層のデータを分割 '結合する。また、前述のとおり、 IrLAP層 にて UIフレームを用いて、データ転送を行い、 IrLAP層での再送制御を行わないた め、この IrSMP層にて再送制御を行う。  (3) The IrSMP layer divides and combines data of upper layers. Also, as described above, since data transfer is performed using the UI frame in the IrLAP layer, and retransmission control in the IrLAP layer is not performed, retransmission control is performed in this IrSMP layer.
[0120] 具体的には、一次局の IrSMP層(以下、 SMP (P) )では、上位層データを下位層 の UIフレームの最大データ長以下に分割した後、分割データを複数のフレーム内に 配置して、 LMP (P)に渡す。その際、通し番号、一括送信終了フラグ、データ終了フ ラグを SMPヘッダとして付カ卩する。 Specifically, in the IrSMP layer (hereinafter, SMP (P)) of the primary station, the upper layer data is divided into the maximum data length of the UI frame of the lower layer or less, and then the divided data is divided into a plurality of frames. Deploy and pass to LMP (P). At that time, add serial number, batch transmission end flag, and data end flag as SMP header.
[0121] 図 27 (a)に、 IrSimpleの双方向通信の場合の SMPフレームのフレームフォーマツ 卜を示す。 FIG. 27 (a) shows a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of two-way communication with IrSimple.
[0122] 通し番号(Sequence Number)は、フレームごとに 1ずつ増えていく。通信中にエラー が発生した場合には、二次局力 送られてくる再送要求通し番号に番号を振り直して 、再び SMPフレームを送信する。  The sequence number increases by one for each frame. If an error occurs during communication, renumber the re-transmission request serial number sent by the secondary station, and transmit the SMP frame again.
[0123] 一括送信終了フラグ(図中の BL : Block Last)は、接続時に二次局から通知された 受信バッファサイズを元に、二次局の受信バッファのサイズを超えない範囲で、 SMP フレームを連続送信する際に、最終のフレーム送信時に、一括送信終了を示す値( 図中では BL= 1)に設定する。二次局は、受信フレームの通し番号を監視し、フレー ムの抜けを検出する。二次局が BL= 1のフレームを受信するとそれまでに受信した フレームにフレーム抜けやエラーが検出されなければ、エラー無しを示すフラグ (RS : Receive Status)をエラー無しの意味(図中では RS = 1)として、下位層に渡す。また 、エラーが発生している場合は、通し番号に再送して欲しい通し番号を設定する。  The batch transmission end flag (BL in the figure: Block Last) is an SMP frame within a range not exceeding the size of the reception buffer of the secondary station based on the reception buffer size notified from the secondary station at the time of connection. When continuously transmitting, when transmitting the final frame, set it to a value (BL = 1 in the figure) indicating the end of batch transmission. The secondary station monitors the serial number of the received frame and detects missing frames. When a secondary station receives a frame with BL = 1, if no frame loss or error is detected in the frames received so far, the flag indicating no error (RS: Receive Status) means no error (RS in the figure). Pass to the lower layer as = 1). Also, if an error occurs, set the serial number you want to retransmit to the serial number.
[0124] データ終了フラグ(DL : Data Last)は、上位層データの最終データがフレームに含 まれているかどうかを示すフラグである。含まれている場合は、その旨を示す値(図中 では DL= 1)に設定する。また、二次局の IrSMP層(以下、 SMP (S) )は、受信した 上位層データを結合し、二次局の上位層である OBEX層(以下、 OBEX(S) )との間 で予め定められたデータのサイズまで、受信データが結合されると、結合データを上 位層に渡す。  The data end flag (DL: Data Last) is a flag indicating whether or not the final data of the upper layer data is included in the frame. If it is included, set it to a value indicating that (DL = 1 in the figure). Also, the IrSMP layer (hereinafter, SMP (S)) of the secondary station combines the received upper layer data, and makes a connection with the OBEX layer (hereinafter, OBEX (S)), which is the upper layer of the secondary station. Once the received data is combined up to a defined data size, the combined data is passed to the upper layer.
[0125] (4) OBEX層は、オブジェクト交換用のプロトコルである。ファイルの送信を行う場合 は、 Putコマンドを用いて送信を行う。前述と同様、 Putコマンドにより、ファイル転送 を行う。  (4) The OBEX layer is a protocol for object exchange. When sending a file, send using the Put command. As described above, perform file transfer with the Put command.
[0126] また、ファイルの受信を行う側では、本発明の方式においては、 OBEX(S)は、 Put コマンド受信を受信した際に、最終の Putコマンドのみ SUCCESSレスポンスを返し 、最終でない Putコマンド受信時には、 CONTINUEレスポンスを返信しない。また、 一次局の OBEX層(以下、 OBEX (P) )においては、最終でない Putコマンド送信時 には、二次局からの CONTINUEレスポンスを待たず、次の Putコマンドの送信を行 い、最終の Putコマンド送信時のみ二次局からの SUCCESSレスポンゥを待ち、二 次局が Putコマンドによるデータ送信を正常受信できた力どうかを判別する。上述の 通り、 CONTINUEレスポンスのやり取りを省略することで、 LAP層でのフレーム数 削減が期待できる。 Also, on the file receiving side, in the method of the present invention, OBEX (S) returns a SUCCESS response only for the final Put command when receiving the Put command reception, and receives the non-final Put command. Sometimes we do not send back a CONTINUE response. Also, in the OBEX layer (hereinafter referred to as OBEX (P)) of the primary station, when sending a Put command that is not final In the second station, send the next Put command without waiting for the CONTINUE response, and wait for the SUCCESS response from the second station only when sending the last Put command, and the second station sends data using the Put command. Determine if the power was successfully received. As mentioned above, omitting the exchange of CONTINUE response can be expected to reduce the number of frames in the LAP layer.
[0127] つづいて、本発明の方式による双方向通信でのデータ転送の流れを説明する。  Next, the flow of data transfer in bi-directional communication according to the scheme of the present invention will be described.
[0128] 一次局の OBEXでファイル送信要求が発生すると、 OBEX(P)は TTP (P)に対し て、 Putコマンドを送信データとして渡す。本説明においては、最終でない Putコマン ドが、 dataP0、 dataPl、 dataP2、 dataP3で構成され、また最終の Putコマンドが da taP4、 dataP5、 dataP6、 dataP7で構成されているものとする。 OBEX(P)は、最終 でな!/、Putコマンドに対する CONTINUEレスポンス受信を待たな!、ため、 SMP (P) の送信バッファに空きがある場合、連続して Putコマンドを SMP (P)に渡す。 [0128] When a file transmission request is generated in the primary station OBEX, OBEX (P) passes a Put command as transmission data to TTP (P). In this description, it is assumed that a non-final Put command consists of dataP0, dataP1, dataP2 and dataP3, and a final Put command consists of dataP4, dataP5, dataP6 and dataP7. OBEX (P) is not final! /, Wait for reception of CONTINUE response to Put command! Because, if there is a space in the send buffer of SMP (P), pass Put command to SMP (P) continuously. .
[0129] これを受けた SMP (P)は、下位層である LAP層の最大データ長以下で送信デー タを分割する。本説明においては、 SMP (P)において、 dataP0、 dataPl、 dataP2 、 dataP3に分割されるものとする。また、 SMP (P)において、再送制御を行うために 、 Seq, BLが設定される。本説明においては、接続時に二次局の SMP (S)から得ら れる受信バッファのサイズが、 dataPOから dataP5までの和であることを SMP (P)が 認識しているものとし、 dataP5までのフレームを連続送信し、 dataP5のフレーム送 信時に BLを 1としている。本説明においては、受信バッファのサイズがフレーム 6個 分となっているが、これよりも大きな値、例えばフレーム 128個分 (LAP層の最大デー タ長を 2KBとして、 256KB)としてもよい。この場合は、 dataP7のフレーム送信時の み、 BL= 1 (DL= 1)とすることとなる。 SMP (P)により、 SMPヘッダ(DL, BL, SEQ )が付加された SMPフレームは、 LMP (P)に渡される。 The SMP (P) that has received this divides the transmission data by the maximum data length of the LAP layer that is the lower layer or less. In this description, SMP (P) is divided into dataP0, dataP1, dataP2, and dataP3. Also, in the SMP (P), Seq and BL are set to perform retransmission control. In this explanation, it is assumed that SMP (P) recognizes that the size of the receive buffer obtained from the secondary station's SMP (S) at the time of connection is the sum from dataPO to dataP5. Frames are transmitted continuously, and BL is set to 1 when transmitting dataP5 frames. In this description, the size of the reception buffer is 6 frames, but it may be a value larger than this, for example, 128 frames (256 KB assuming that the maximum data length of the LAP layer is 2 KB). In this case, BL = 1 (DL = 1) is set only at the frame transmission of dataP7. The SMP frame to which the SMP header (DL, BL, SEQ) is added by SMP (P) is passed to LMP (P).
[0130] これを受けた LMP (P)では、 LSAPヘッダが付カ卩されて、 LAP (P)に渡される。 [0130] In the LMP (P) that receives this, the LSAP header is added and passed to the LAP (P).
[0131] これを受けた LAP (P)では、 UIフレームでのデータ転送が行われる。 In the LAP (P) that has received this, data transfer in the UI frame is performed.
[0132] これを受けた LAP (S)では、 UIフレーム内の上位層データを LMP (S)に渡す。 The LAP (S) that receives this passes the upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (S).
[0133] これを受けた LMP (S)では、 LSAPヘッダを除去して、上位層データを SMP (S) に渡す。 [0134] これを受けた SMP (S)では、通し番号を監視することにより、 SMPフレームの抜け を検出するとともに、フレーム抜けのない上位層データに関しては、結合を行う。本説 明においては、 OBEX(S)との間で予め定められた上位層のデータサイズの単位が 、 dataPOから dataP3を結合したデータのサイズであったため、 dataP3を結合完了 した時点で、上位層に対して結合データを渡す。 DL = 0、 BL= 1のフレームを受信 した時点で、それまでの受信フレームにフレームぬけやエラーが検出されていないた め、エラー無しフラグ RSを 1にして、下位層に渡す。 [0133] The LMP (S) that receives this removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to the SMP (S). The SMP (S) that has received this detects a drop in the SMP frame by monitoring the serial number, and performs combining for the upper layer data without a frame drop. In this description, since the unit of the data size of the upper layer predetermined with OBEX (S) is the size of the data obtained by combining dataPO and dataP3, when dataP3 is completely connected, the upper layer is determined. Pass combined data to When a frame with DL = 0 and BL = 1 is received, no frame skipping or error is detected in the received frame so far, so the error-free flag RS is set to 1 and passed to the lower layer.
[0135] 前述の SMP (S)力 の受信データを受けた OBEX (S)では、受信データの解析を 行う。本説明においては、最終でない Putコマンドであるため、 CONTINUEレスポ ンスを一次局に返信しな ヽ。 [0135] In OBEX (S) that has received the aforementioned received data of SMP (S) power, the received data is analyzed. In this explanation, do not send a CONTINUE response back to the primary station, because it is a Put command that is not final.
[0136] また、前述の RS = 1の SMPフレームを受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAPヘッダを付カロし て、 LAP (S)に渡す。 Also, the LMP (S) that received the above RS = 1 SMP frame adds a LSAP header and passes it to the LAP (S).
[0137] これを受けた LAP (S)は、 UIフレームでのデータ転送を行う。 Having received this, the LAP (S) performs data transfer in the UI frame.
[0138] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 UIフレーム内の上位層データを LMP (P)に渡す。 Having received this, LAP (P) passes upper layer data in the UI frame to LMP (P).
[0139] これを受けた LMP (P)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去し、 SMP (P)に上位層データを渡 す。 [0139] Upon receiving this, LMP (P) removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to SMP (P).
[0140] これを受けた SMP (P)は、受信フレーム内の RSフィールドが 1であることより、前回 の一括送信が正常に行えたことを認識し、上位層の分割データの内、残りの分割デ ータ dataP6、 dataP7を送信する。また、 dataP7を送信時には、 BL= 1とするととも に、 DL= 1として、このフレームが上位層データの最終フレームであることを通知する  Receiving this, the SMP (P) recognizes that the previous batch transmission was successfully performed because the RS field in the received frame is 1, and the remaining upper layer divided data is Transmits divided data dataP6 and dataP7. Also, when transmitting dataP7, BL = 1 and DL = 1 to notify that this frame is the last frame of upper layer data.
[0141] これを受けた LMP (P)は、 LSAPヘッダを付カ卩して、 LAP (P)に渡す。 [0141] The LMP (P) that has received this passes the LSAP header to the LAP (P).
[0142] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 UIフレームでのデータ転送を行う。  The LAP (P) that has received this performs data transfer in a UI frame.
[0143] これを受けた LAP (S)は、 UIフレーム内の上位層データを LMP (S)に渡す。  Having received this, the LAP (S) passes upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (S).
[0144] これを受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去し、 SMP (S)に上位層データを渡 す。  [0144] Upon receiving this, LMP (S) removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to SMP (S).
[0145] これを受けた SMP (S)は、受信フレーム内の通し番号を監視することにより、フレー ムの抜けを検出するとともに、エラーのないフレームについては、フレーム内の上位 層データを結合し、結合データを上位層に渡す。また、本説明においては、 dataP7 を含むフレームの BLが 1であると同時に DLが 1であるため、 SMP層での受信結果を 通知するためのフレーム (RSを含むフレーム)をこの時点では、送信しない。 The SMP (S) that has received this detects a missing frame by monitoring the serial number in the received frame, and for the frame without an error, Combine layer data and pass combined data to upper layers. Also, in this description, since BL of the frame including dataP7 is 1 and DL is 1 at the same time, a frame (frame including RS) for notifying the reception result in the SMP layer is transmitted at this time. do not do.
[0146] これを受けた OBEX(S)は、受信データ内を解析するとともに、受信データが最終 の Putコマンドであると認識した場合は、それまでの受信コマンドが正常であった場 合は、 SUCCESSレスポンスを生成し、 SMP (S)に渡す。 [0146] The received OBEX (S) analyzes the inside of the received data and recognizes that the received data is the final Put command. If the previous received command is normal, Generate a SUCCESS response and pass it to SMP (S).
[0147] これを受けた SMP (S)は、前述の SMP層での受信結果 (RS)を 1にし、上位層デ ータと合わせて、 LMP (S)に渡す。 The SMP (S) having received this sets the above reception result (RS) in the SMP layer to 1, passes it to the LMP (S) together with higher layer data.
[0148] これを受けた LMP (S)は、 LSAPヘッダを付カ卩し、 LAP (S)に渡す。 [0148] The LMP (S) that has received this adds the LSAP header and passes it to the LAP (S).
[0149] これを受けた LAP (S)は、 UIフレームでのデータ転送を行う。 Having received this, the LAP (S) performs data transfer in the UI frame.
[0150] これを受けた LAP (P)は、 UIフレーム内の上位層データを LMP (P)に渡す。 [0150] The LAP (P) that has received this passes upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (P).
[0151] これを受けた LMP (P)は、 LSAPヘッダを除去し、上位層データを SMP (P)に渡 す。 [0151] Upon receiving this, LMP (P) removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to SMP (P).
[0152] これを受けた SMP (P)は、受信フレーム内の RSフィールドが 1であることで、前回 の一括送信が正常に行えたことを認識するとともに、上位層データを OBEX (P)に渡 す。  The SMP (P) that has received this recognizes that the previous batch transmission was successfully performed because the RS field in the received frame is 1, and the upper layer data becomes OBEX (P). hand over.
[0153] これを受けた OBEX (P)は、受信データを解析し、受信データが SUCCESSレスポ ンスであることを認識すると、それまでの最終でな 、Putコマンドおよび最終の Putコ マンドでのデータ転送が全て正常に終了したことを認識することとなる。  [0153] Upon receiving this, OBEX (P) analyzes the received data, and recognizes that the received data is a SUCCESS response, and the data in the Put command and the final Put command are the final ones until then. It will be recognized that all transfers have ended normally.
[0154] 上記により、 IrLAP層で UIフレームを用いた場合でも、 SMP層で再送制御を行うこ とにより、信頼性が確保された通信を行うことが可能となる。また、 UIフレームを用い ることにより、 Iフレームを用いた場合のウィンドウサイズの制限がなくなり、二次局の受 信バッファサイズに最適化された通信を行うことが可能となる。  As described above, even in the case where a UI frame is used in the IrLAP layer, it is possible to perform reliable communication by performing retransmission control in the SMP layer. Also, by using the UI frame, there is no limitation on the window size in the case of using the I frame, and it becomes possible to perform communication optimized for the reception buffer size of the secondary station.
[0155] 上記のとおり、本説明の条件においては、通信路を流れるフレーム数は、 10個とな り、従来の IrDAについて前述した Iフレームを用いた通信と比べて、少ないフレーム 数での通信が可能となる。  As described above, under the conditions of the present description, the number of frames flowing through the communication path is 10, and communication with a smaller number of frames as compared to the communication using the I frame described above for the conventional IrDA. Is possible.
[0156] また、本説明においては、 SMP層での一括送信可能なフレーム数が 6として説明 を行っている力 この値は、再送のための一次局の送信バッファおよび二次局の受 信バッファのサイズが許す限り、いくつにでも設定可能であり、通信系の持っている最 大の能力での通信を実現することが可能となる。これに対して、 Iフレームを用いた通 信においては、一次局、二次局がそれぞれ大量のバッファを保有していたとしても、 ウィンドウサイズの制限 (LAPにおける 7)により、通信効率の向上を達成するのは困 難である。 Further, in the present description, the number of frames that can be collectively transmitted in the SMP layer is set to six. This value is the transmission buffer of the primary station for retransmission and the reception of the secondary station. As long as the size of the transmission buffer allows, it can be set as many as possible, and it is possible to realize communication with the maximum capacity of the communication system. On the other hand, in communication using I frame, even if the primary station and secondary station each have a large amount of buffers, the communication efficiency is improved by the window size restriction (7 in LAP). It is difficult to achieve.
[0157] 3. IrSimpleの片方向通信におけるデータ転送の流れ  [0157] 3. Flow of data transfer in one-way communication of IrSimple
図 28に、本発明の適用例である IrSimpleの片方向通信でのデータ転送の流れを 示す。なお、以下の説明においては、一次局と二次局は、それぞれ IrLAP層、 IrLM P層、 IrSMP層 (Infrared Sequence Management Protocol)、 OBEX層をサポートして いるものとする。  FIG. 28 shows the flow of data transfer in IrSimple one-way communication, which is an application example of the present invention. In the following description, it is assumed that the primary station and secondary station respectively support the IrLAP layer, the IrLM P layer, the IrSMP layer (Infrared Sequence Management Protocol), and the OBEX layer.
[0158] (1) IrLAP層においては、 UIフレーム(図 22 (b) )を用いて、データ転送を行う。前 述のとおり、 UIフレームを用いると、ウィンドウサイズの制限がなくなるため、 Iフレーム を用いた場合に一度に連続送信可能なフレーム数 7よりも多くのフレームを連続送信 することが可能となる。このことにより、フレーム受信後、送信を開始するまでに待たな ければならない時間(Min Turn Around Time)の累積によるデータ転送効率の削減 が期待できる。  (1) In the IrLAP layer, data transfer is performed using a UI frame (FIG. 22 (b)). As described above, when using UI frames, there is no limitation on the window size, and it is possible to continuously transmit more than seven frames that can be continuously transmitted at one time using I-frames. This can be expected to reduce the data transfer efficiency by accumulating the time (Min Turn Around Time) which has to wait before starting transmission after frame reception.
[0159] 図 22 (b)に示すように、 UIフレームには、 Iフレームに存在して!/、た Nr、 Nsフィール ドが存在していない。これは、フレームに通し番号が振られていないことを示しており 、 LAP層レベルでのフレーム抜けの検出が行えず、また、再送要求すべきフレーム の通し番号の設定を行うこともできないことを示している。すなわち、 UIフレームを用 V、た転送の場合は、 LAP層レベルでの上位層データの信頼性は保証して ヽな 、。  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), in the UI frame, there are no! /, Nr, and Ns fields present in the I frame. This indicates that the frame is not assigned a serial number, indicating that frame loss detection can not be performed at the LAP layer level, and that it is not possible to set the serial number of the frame to be requested for retransmission. There is. In other words, if the UI frame is used for V transfer, the reliability of upper layer data at the LAP layer level is guaranteed.
[0160] (2) IrLMP層は、アプリケーションごとの論理的なチャネル(LSAP: Link Service A ccess Point)を上位層に提供する層である。  (2) The IrLMP layer is a layer that provides a logical channel for each application (LSAP: Link Service Acces- sion Point) to the upper layer.
[0161] フレームを送信する側の IrLMP層では、上位層(TinyTP層)力 のデータと IrLM Pフレームに配置するとともに、送信先の論理的なチャネル(DLSAP : Destination Li nk Service Access Point)と送信元の餘理的なチャネル(SLSAP: Source Link Servic e Access Point)を IrLMPヘッダとして、配置する。  [0161] The IrLMP layer on the transmitting side of the frame places data on the upper layer (TinyTP layer) power and IrLM P frame, and also transmits a logical channel (DLSAP: Destination Link Service Access Point) of the transmission destination and transmission. Place the original rational channel (SLSAP: Source Link Service Access Point) as the IrLMP header.
[0162] 一方、フレームを受信する側の IrLMP層では、下位層からの受信フレームの DLS APフィールドを監視することにより、どの上位層アプリケーションのデータであるかを 判別し、対応する上位層アプリケーションに対して、受信フレーム内データを渡す。 On the other hand, in the IrLMP layer on the side of receiving the frame, the DLS of the received frame from the lower layer is By monitoring the AP field, it is determined which upper layer application data it is, and the received in-frame data is passed to the corresponding upper layer application.
[0163] (3) IrSMP層は、上位層のデータを分割 '結合する。また、前述のとおり、 IrLAP層 にて UIフレームを用いて、データ転送を行い、 IrLAP層でフレームに通し番号が振 られな 、 、ため、この IrSMP層にてフレームに通し番号が振られる。  (3) The IrSMP layer divides and combines data of upper layers. Also, as described above, data transfer is performed using the UI frame in the IrLAP layer, and the serial number is not assigned to the frame in the IrLAP layer, and the serial number is assigned to the frame in the IrSMP layer.
[0164] 具体的には、一次局の IrSMP層(以下、 SMP (P) )では、上位層データを下位層 の UIフレームの最大データ長以下に分割した後、分割データを複数のフレーム内に 配置して、 LMP (P)に渡す。その際、通し番号、データ終了フラグを SMPヘッダとし て付加する。  Specifically, in the IrSMP layer (hereinafter, SMP (P)) of the primary station, the upper layer data is divided into the maximum data length of the UI frame of the lower layer or less, and then the divided data is divided into a plurality of frames. Deploy and pass to LMP (P). At that time, add a serial number and an end-of-data flag as an SMP header.
[0165] 図 27 (b)に、 IrSimpleの片方向通信の場合の SMPフレームのフレームフォーマツ 卜を示す。  FIG. 27 (b) shows a frame format of an SMP frame in the case of IrSimple one-way communication.
[0166] 通し番号(Sequence Number)は、フレームごとに 1ずつ増えていく。二次局は、受信 フレームの通し番号を監視し、フレームの抜けを検出する。フレーム抜けやエラーが 検出されれば、検出された時点で、 OBEX(S)に対して、その旨を通知する。  [0166] The sequence number is incremented by one for each frame. The secondary station monitors the serial number of the received frame and detects the missing frame. If a missing frame or an error is detected, when it is detected, this is notified to OBEX (S).
[0167] データ終了フラグ(DL : Data Last)は、上位層データの最終データがフレームに含 まれているかどうかを示すフラグである。含まれている場合は、その旨を示す値(図中 では DL= 1)に設定する。また、二次局の IrSMP層(以下、 SMP (S) )は、受信した 上位層データを結合し、二次局の上位層である OBEX層(以下、 OBEX(S) )との間 で予め定められたデータのサイズまで、受信データが結合されると、結合データを上 位層に渡す。  [0167] A data end flag (DL: Data Last) is a flag indicating whether or not the final data of the upper layer data is included in the frame. If it is included, set it to a value indicating that (DL = 1 in the figure). Also, the IrSMP layer (hereinafter, SMP (S)) of the secondary station combines the received upper layer data, and makes a connection with the OBEX layer (hereinafter, OBEX (S)), which is the upper layer of the secondary station. Once the received data is combined up to a defined data size, the combined data is passed to the upper layer.
[0168] (4) OBEX層は、オブジェクト交換用のプロトコルである。ファイルの送信を行う場合 は、 Putコマンドを用いて送信を行う。前述と同様、 Putコマンドにより、ファイル転送 を行う。  (4) The OBEX layer is a protocol for object exchange. When sending a file, send using the Put command. As described above, perform file transfer with the Put command.
[0169] また、ファイルの受信を行う側は、本発明の方式においては、 OBEX(S)は、 Putコ マンド受信を受信した際に、 Putコマンドに対するレスポンス(CONTINUEレスポン スおよび SUCCESSレスポンス)を返信しな!ヽ。  Also, in the method of the present invention, in the method according to the present invention, the side receiving the file returns a response (CONTINUE response and SUCCESS response) to the Put command when receiving the Put command reception. Shina!
[0170] また、一次局の OBEX層(以下、 OBEX (P) )においては、 Putコマンド送信時には 、二次局からのレスポンスを必要としない。 [0171] つづいて、本発明の方式による片方向通信でのデータ転送の流れを説明する。 Further, in the OBEX layer (hereinafter referred to as OBEX (P)) of the primary station, no response from the secondary station is required at the time of Put command transmission. [0171] Next, the flow of data transfer in one-way communication according to the scheme of the present invention will be described.
[0172] 一次局の OBEXでファイル送信要求が発生すると、 OBEX(P)は TTP (P)に対し て、 Putコマンドを送信データとして渡す。本説明においては、最終でない Putコマン ドが、 dataP0、 dataPl、 dataP2、 dataP3で構成され、また最終の Putコマンドが da taP4、 dataP5、 dataP6、 dataP7で構成されているものとする。 OBEX(P)は、 Put コマンドに対するレスポンス受信を待たないため、 SMP (P)の送信バッファに空きが ある場合、連続して Putコマンドを SMP (P)に渡す。 OBEX(P)は、最終の Putコマ ンドを SMP (P)に渡した時点で、 Putコマンドによるデータ転送を終了する。 [0172] When a file transmission request is generated in the primary station OBEX, OBEX (P) passes a Put command as transmission data to TTP (P). In this description, it is assumed that a non-final Put command consists of dataP0, dataP1, dataP2 and dataP3, and a final Put command consists of dataP4, dataP5, dataP6 and dataP7. Since OBEX (P) does not wait to receive a response to the Put command, if there is space in the SMP (P) send buffer, it continuously passes the Put command to SMP (P). When OBEX (P) passes the final Put command to SMP (P), it ends the data transfer by the Put command.
[0173] これを受けた SMP (P)は、下位層である LAP層の最大データ長以下で送信デー タを分割する。本説明においては、 SMP (P)において、 dataP0、 dataPl、 dataP2 、 dataP3に分割されるものとする。また、 SMP (P)において、二次局でのフレーム抜 け検出のために、通し番号 (Seq)が設定される。また、上位層の最終データ送信時 には、 DLを 1として送信する。 SMP (P)により、 SMPヘッダ(DL, SEQ)が付カ卩され た SMPフレームは、 LMP (P)に渡される。 The SMP (P) that has received this divides the transmission data by the maximum data length of the LAP layer which is the lower layer or less. In this description, SMP (P) is divided into dataP0, dataP1, dataP2, and dataP3. Also, in SMP (P), a serial number (Seq) is set to detect frame omission at the secondary station. Also, at the time of final data transmission in the upper layer, DL is transmitted as 1. The SMP frame with the SMP header (DL, SEQ) added by SMP (P) is passed to LMP (P).
[0174] これを受けた LMP (P)では、 LSAPヘッダが付カ卩されて、 LAP (P)に渡される。 [0174] In the LMP (P) that has received this, the LSAP header is added and passed to the LAP (P).
[0175] これを受けた LAP (P)では、 UIフレームでのデータ転送が行われる。 [0175] In the LAP (P) that receives this, data transfer in the UI frame is performed.
[0176] これを受けた LAP (S)では、 UIフレーム内の上位層データを LMP (S)に渡す。 [0176] The LAP (S) that receives this passes the upper layer data in the UI frame to the LMP (S).
[0177] これを受けた LMP (S)では、 LSAPヘッダを除去して、上位層データを SMP (S) に渡す。 [0177] The LMP (S) that receives this removes the LSAP header and passes upper layer data to the SMP (S).
[0178] これを受けた SMP (S)では、通し番号を監視することにより、 SMPフレームの抜け を検出するとともに、フレーム抜けのない上位層データに関しては、結合を行う。本説 明においては、 OBEX(S)との間で予め定められた上位層のデータサイズの単位が 、 dataPOから dataP3を結合したデータのサイズであったため、 dataP3を結合完了 した時点で、上位層に対して結合データを渡す。また、 DL= 1のフレームを受信した 時点で、一次局 OBEXの送信データを全て受信したことを認識し、 dataP4から data P7を受信データとして上位層に通知する。  [0178] The SMP (S) that has received this detects a drop in the SMP frame by monitoring the serial number, and performs combining for upper layer data without a frame drop. In this description, since the unit of the data size of the upper layer predetermined with OBEX (S) is the size of the data obtained by combining dataPO and dataP3, when dataP3 is completely connected, the upper layer is determined. Pass combined data to Also, when a frame with DL = 1 is received, it is recognized that all transmission data of the primary station OBEX has been received, and dataP4 notifies data P7 as data to be received to the upper layer.
[0179] これを受けた OBEX (S)では、受信データの解析を行う。本説明においては、一次 局が Putコマンドに対するレスポンスを必要としな!/、ため、 CONTINUEレスポンスお よび SUCCESSレスポンスを一次局に返信しな!、。最終の Putコマンドを受信した時 点で、 OBEXでの Putコマンドによるデータ転送が完了することとなる。 [0179] The received OBEX (S) analyzes the received data. In this explanation, the primary station does not need a response to the Put command! And don't send SUCCESS response back to the primary station! The data transfer by the Put command in OBEX will be completed when the final Put command is received.
[0180] 上述の通り、本発明の通信方式における片方向通信においては、再送制御は行え ないものの、 OBEX層にて、 Putコマンドに対するレスポンスを必要としないことを予 め一次局と二次局の間で定めておけば、問題なく通信を行うことが可能となる。また、 IrSMP層において、通し番号を付加することにより、通し番号がない UIフレームを用 いた場合でも、フレームの抜け検出が可能となり、ユーザに受信エラーの通知などを 適切に行うことが可能となる。  As described above, although retransmission control can not be performed in one-way communication in the communication method of the present invention, it is expected that the response from the Put command is not required in the OBEX layer. If it determines between, it will be possible to communicate without problems. In addition, by adding a serial number in the IrSMP layer, even when a UI frame without a serial number is used, it is possible to detect a frame dropout, and it is possible to appropriately notify the user of a reception error and the like.
[0181] (データ終了フラグ受信時の受信機の処理)  (Processing of receiver when data end flag is received)
データ終了フラグ受信時の受信機の処理について説明する。  The processing of the receiver when receiving the data end flag will be described.
[0182] 図 29は、上位層として OBEXが存在し、 OBEXの Putコマンドによるデータ転送を 示すシークェンス図である。  [0182] FIG. 29 is a sequence diagram showing data transfer by the OBEX Put command, in which OBEX exists as the upper layer.
[0183] 図 29では、送信機が OBEXデータの最終が含まれていることを示す Put Finalコ マンドにより、 dataOから data3を一括で送信している。そして、 Put Finalコマンドの 最終データである data3を含むフレーム送信時に、一括送信終了フラグを 1にすると ともに、データ終了フラグも 1としている。  [0183] In FIG. 29, the transmitter transmits data3 collectively from dataO by the Put Final command indicating that the final of the OBEX data is included. When transmitting a frame including data3 which is the final data of the Put Final command, the batch transmission end flag is set to 1, and the data end flag is also set to 1.
[0184] 一方、受信機は、一括送信終了フラグおよびデータ終了フラグが 1のフレームを受 信したとき、上位層に受信データを渡すとともに、それまでの受信データにエラーが なかったため、エラー無しフラグをエラー無しの意味として、返信している。その後、 受信機では下位層が、上位層の OBEXから受信成功の意味の SUCCESSレスポン スの通知を受けるが、通知受信時点では、受信機に送信権がないため、送信を保留 している。  On the other hand, when the receiver receives a frame having the batch transmission end flag and the data end flag set to 1, it passes the received data to the upper layer and there is no error in the received data up to that point, so there is no error flag. As an error-free meaning, reply. After that, at the receiver, the lower layer is notified of the SUCCESS response that means reception success from the upper layer OBEX, but at the time of notification reception, transmission is suspended because the receiver does not have the transmission right.
[0185] 次に、送信機は、エラー無しフラグがエラー無しを示すフレームを受信し、受信機が エラーなく通信できたことを認識する力 対向局からの SUCCESSレスポンスを受信 しないといけないため、再び受信機に送信権を渡すために、フレームを送信する。図 29では、この時点で、送信機から送信すべきデータが存在しないため、一括送信終 了フラグを 1として、ユーザデータ領域には何もデータを配置せず(data=NULL)、フ レームを送信している。 [0186] 次に、受信機がこれを受信すると、送信を保留していた SUCCESSレスポンスを送 信する。 [0185] Next, the transmitter receives a frame indicating that the no error flag indicates no error, and the receiver recognizes that the communication was successful without error. Since the transmitter must receive a SUCCESS response from the opposite station, the transmitter again Send a frame to pass the transmit right to the receiver. In FIG. 29, since there is no data to be transmitted from the transmitter at this time, the batch transmission end flag is set to 1, and no data is arranged in the user data area (data = NULL), and the frame is It is sending. [0186] Next, when the receiver receives this, it transmits a SUCCESS response that was pending transmission.
[0187] その後、送信機がこれを受信して、上位層の OBEXに受信したデータ(SUCCES Sレスポンス)を渡すことで、上位層の OBEXレベルでの通信が完了する。  [0187] Thereafter, the transmitter receives this and passes the received data (SUCCESS response) to the upper layer OBEX, whereby the communication at the upper layer OBEX level is completed.
[0188] ここで、上記と同じ条件において、エラー無しフラグを含むフレームと SUCCESSを 含むフレームとを 1つにまとめて送信する通信例について説明する。  Here, a communication example will be described in which a frame including an error-free flag and a frame including SUCCESS are grouped into one and transmitted under the same conditions as described above.
[0189] 図 30は、受信機がエラー無しフラグを含むフレームと SUCCESSを含むフレームと を 1つにまとめて送信する通信例を示すシークェンス図である。  [0189] FIG. 30 is a sequence diagram showing an example of communication in which a receiver collectively transmits a frame including an error-free flag and a frame including SUCCESS into one.
[0190] 図 30に示すように、受信機においては、一括送信終了フラグおよびデータ終了フ ラグ力 のフレームを受信したとき、下位層が上位層に受信データを渡した後、直ち にエラー無しフラグをエラー無しとして、フレームを生成、送信せずに、下位層は上位 層力 の SUCCESSレスポンスを待って、前述のエラー無しフラグと SUCCESSレス ポンスをまとめて 1つのフレーム内に配置し、送信している。  As shown in FIG. 30, when the receiver receives a frame of batch transmission end flag and data end flag power, there is no error immediately after the lower layer passes the received data to the upper layer. The lower layer does not generate and transmit a frame with no error flag, and the lower layer waits for the SUCCESS response of upper layer power, arranges the above-mentioned no error flag and SUCCESS response in one frame, and transmits it. ing.
[0191] こうすることにより、図 29に示したように、受信機がエラー無しフラグのみを含むフレ ームを送信した後に、送信権移動のためのフレームを送信機が送信する必要がない 。また、受信機では、上位層が SUCCESSレスポンス送信要求を発生した後、下位 層が直ちに SUCCESSフレームを送信できるため、通信の効率ィ匕を図ることが可能 となる。また、送信権移動のためのフレームがなくなることとなり、送信権移動のため のフレームで発生したエラーの処理等を考える必要がなくなるため、処理が簡単ィ匕で きる。  [0191] By doing so, as shown in FIG. 29, the transmitter does not have to transmit a frame for moving the transmission right after the receiver transmits a frame including only an error-free flag. Also, in the receiver, since the lower layer can immediately transmit the SUCCESS frame after the upper layer generates the SUCCESS response transmission request, communication efficiency can be improved. In addition, since there is no frame for moving the transmission right, there is no need to consider the processing of an error that occurs in the frame for moving the transmission right, so the process can be simplified.
[0192] つづいて、本発明の通信システムにおける実施の各形態について図 1から図 8、図 31から図 67 (ただし、図 52、図 53、図 58、図 59は従来技術の説明図である)に基づ いて説明すると以下の通りである。すなわち、本発明は、画像データや文書データな どのような、所定の容量を一塊として一定の情報を表し、かつ、転送すべき転送デー タを送受信するような一次局および二次局を有する通信システムに適用できる。ここ で、所定のデータ容量は、転送データによって可変である。  Subsequently, each embodiment of the communication system of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8 and 31 to 67 (however, FIG. 52, FIG. 53, FIG. 58, and FIG. It is as follows when it explains based on). That is, according to the present invention, a communication having a primary station and a secondary station that represents certain information with a predetermined capacity as a group, such as image data and document data, and transmits and receives transfer data to be transferred. Applicable to the system. Here, the predetermined data capacity is variable depending on transfer data.
[0193] 以下の実施の各形態では、赤外線により転送データを転送する IrDAに準拠した 転送方式 (伝送方式)を例にとり本発明を説明する。 [0194] 〔実施の第一形態〕 In each of the following embodiments, the present invention will be described by taking an IrDA-based transfer method (transmission method) for transferring transfer data by infrared rays as an example. First Embodiment of the Embodiment
本発明の実施の第一形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)につ ヽ て、図 1および図 2に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態 において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実 施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
[0195] 図 1は、本実施の形態における一次局の構成を示すブロック図である。図 1に示す ように、一次局(送信装置) 1は、 CPU11と、メモリ 12と、コントローラ 13と、送信器 14 と、受信器 15とを備えている。  FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a primary station in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the primary station (transmitting apparatus) 1 includes a CPU 11, a memory 12, a controller 13, a transmitter 14, and a receiver 15.
[0196] CPU11は、図示しない操作部に入力された利用者の指示に応じて、所定の演算 処理を行うものである。所定の演算処理としては、転送データの転送処理がある。 CP U11は、操作部から転送データの転送指示を受けると、転送すべき転送データをメ モリ 12に格納するとともに、コントローラ 13に対して転送要求を行う。また、 CPU11 は、コントローラ 13から転送データの送信終了を表す送信終了通知を受けると、転送 処理を完了する。  The CPU 11 performs predetermined arithmetic processing in accordance with a user's instruction input to an operation unit (not shown). As the predetermined arithmetic processing, there is transfer processing of transfer data. When the CPU 11 receives a transfer instruction of transfer data from the operation unit, the CPU 11 stores transfer data to be transferred in the memory 12 and makes a transfer request to the controller 13. Further, when the CPU 11 receives a transmission end notification from the controller 13 indicating that transmission of transfer data is completed, the CPU 11 completes the transfer processing.
[0197] メモリ 12は、転送すべき転送データを一時記憶するものであり、 CPU11により転送 データが書き込まれる。コントローラ 13は、 CPU11からの転送要求に応じて、転送デ ータの転送を制御するものであり、また、受信フレームの解析結果を CPU 11に通知 するものである。コントローラ 13は、制御部 131、送信フレーム生成部 132、および受 信フレーム解析部 133を備えて 、る。  The memory 12 temporarily stores transfer data to be transferred, and the CPU 11 writes the transfer data. The controller 13 controls transfer of transfer data in response to a transfer request from the CPU 11 and notifies the CPU 11 of the analysis result of the received frame. The controller 13 includes a control unit 131, a transmission frame generation unit 132, and a reception frame analysis unit 133.
[0198] また、送信フレーム生成部 132は、データ読み出し部 1321、フレーム通し番号付 加部 (通し番号付加手段) 1322、送信権委譲フラグ付加部 (送信権委譲フラグ付与 手段) 1323、フレーム構築部 1324および誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 1325を 備えている。  Further, the transmission frame generation unit 132 includes a data read unit 1321, a frame serial number addition unit (serial number addition unit) 1322, a transmission right transfer flag addition unit (transmission right transfer flag addition unit) 1323, a frame construction unit 1324 and An error detection or correction code adding unit 1325 is provided.
[0199] また、受信フレーム解析部 133は、再送要求判定部 1331およびフレーム通し番号 抽出部 1332を備えている。  Further, received frame analysis section 133 is provided with retransmission request determination section 1331 and frame serial number extraction section 1332.
[0200] 制御部 131は、 CPU11から転送要求を受けると、データ読み出し部 1321に対し て、データの読み出し要求を行うとともに、フレーム通し番号付加部 1322に通し番号 の通知、送信権委譲フラグ付加部 1323に相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かの通 知を行う。このとき、制御部 131は、データ読み出し部 1321が読み出すデータ長や、 読み出す間隔を制御することにより、フレーム長やフレーム間隔を制御する。なお、 制御部 131は、後述する誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 1325において検出できる データ容量力も求められる最大フレーム長以下となるようにフレーム長を制御する。 [0200] When the control unit 131 receives a transfer request from the CPU 11, the control unit 131 requests the data reading unit 1321 to read out the data, notifies the frame serial number adding unit 1322 of the serial number, and the transmission right transfer flag adding unit 1323. A notification as to whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the other station Do knowledge. At this time, the control unit 131 controls the frame length and the frame interval by controlling the data length read by the data reading unit 1321 and the reading interval. The control unit 131 controls the frame length so that the data capacity that can be detected by the error detection or correction code adding unit 1325 described later is equal to or less than the required maximum frame length.
[0201] また、制御部 131は、メモリ 12から読み出した転送データに対応する全てのフレー ムが送信器 14から送信されたことを検知して、転送データの送信が終了したことを表 す送信終了通知を CPU11に送る。  Also, the control unit 131 detects that all frames corresponding to the transfer data read from the memory 12 have been transmitted from the transmitter 14, and indicates that transmission of the transfer data has ended. Send an end notification to the CPU 11.
[0202] フレーム構築部 1324は、データ読み出し部 1321から受けたデータと、フレーム通 し番号付加部 1322から通知されたフレーム通し番号と、送信権委譲フラグ付加部 1 323から通知された送信権委譲行うかどうかの情報を基にフレームを生成する。なお 、フレーム構築部 1324が生成したフレームの転送速度は、制御部 131により制御さ れる。  Frame construction unit 1324 performs transfer of the transmission right notified from data transmission unit 1323, the data received from data reading unit 1321, the frame serial number notified from frame serial number addition unit 1322, and the transmission right notified from transmission right transfer flag addition unit 1323. Generate a frame based on the information of whether or not. The transfer rate of the frame generated by the frame construction unit 1324 is controlled by the control unit 131.
[0203] また、フレーム構築部 1324は、生成したフレームを順次誤り検出または訂正符号 付加部 1325に送る。このとき、フレーム構築部 1324は、各フレーム間の時間間隔を 、制御部 131から受けたフレーム間隔になるようにする。  Also, the frame construction unit 1324 sequentially sends the generated frames to the error detection or correction code addition unit 1325. At this time, the frame construction unit 1324 makes the time interval between each frame equal to the frame interval received from the control unit 131.
[0204] 誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 1325は、フレーム構築部 1324で生成されたフレ ームに対して、誤り検出符号 (または訂正符号)を付加して、後段の送信器 14に送る 。誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 1325は、誤り検出符号 (または訂正符号)をフレ ーム内の FCSに含ませる。  The error detection or correction code addition unit 1325 adds an error detection code (or a correction code) to the frame generated by the frame construction unit 1324 and sends the frame to the transmitter 14 in the subsequent stage. The error detection or correction code adding unit 1325 causes the error detection code (or correction code) to be included in the FCS in the frame.
[0205] なお、誤り検出符号は、例えば、 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)符号などの巡回 符号であり、訂正符号は、例えば、パリティ検査符号、ノ、ミング符号、リードソロモン符 号などの BCH符号などである。なお、 CRC符号は例えば 4ノ《イトにて設定されており 、該 4バイトで検出できるようにデータ容量が限られる。  The error detection code is, for example, a cyclic code such as a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and the correction code is, for example, a parity check code, a gray scale code, a BCH code such as a reed Solomon code, etc. It is. The CRC code is set, for example, at 4 bytes, and the data capacity is limited so that it can be detected by the 4 bytes.
[0206] 送信器 14は、赤外線通信路を介して、コントローラ 13から受信した複数のフレーム を所定の時間間隔で外部に送信する。また、受信器 15は、二次局から受信したレス ポンスフレームを順次、コントローラ 13内の受信フレーム解析部 133に送る。  [0206] The transmitter 14 transmits a plurality of frames received from the controller 13 to the outside at predetermined time intervals via an infrared communication path. Also, the receiver 15 sequentially sends response frames received from the secondary station to the received frame analysis unit 133 in the controller 13.
[0207] 受信フレーム解析部 133では、受信器 15から受信したフレームを、再送要求判定 部 1331およびフレーム通し番号抽出部 1332においてそれぞれ、二次局が再送を 要求している力、およびどのフレームに誤りがあつたかをフレーム番号を抽出すること により、制御部 131へそれぞれ通知を行う。 In the received frame analysis unit 133, the secondary station retransmits the frame received from the receiver 15 in the retransmission request determination unit 1331 and the frame serial number extraction unit 1332 respectively. The control unit 131 is notified of the force requested and which frame the error has been made by extracting the frame number.
[0208] ここで、制御部 131は、 CPU11に対して、送信したフレームに誤りがあつたか否か と、誤りがあった場合には、どのフレームに誤りがあつたかをそれぞれ通知する。 [0208] Here, the control unit 131 notifies the CPU 11 whether or not the transmitted frame has an error, and if there is an error, which frame the error has been detected.
[0209] CPU11では、エラーが発生しな力つた場合には、所定のフレーム数を再度二次局 に対し送信できるように、二次局から一次局に送信権の委譲を行うよう指示を二次局 に対して行っていく。このようにして、すべてのファイルデータを送信し終わるまで同 様の手順を繰り返す。 In the CPU 11, when an error does not occur, the secondary station instructs the primary station to transfer the transmission right so that a predetermined number of frames can be transmitted to the secondary station again. I will go to the next station. In this way, repeat the same procedure until all file data has been sent.
[0210] また、エラーが発生した旨の通知を受けた場合には、上記と同様の手順で、送信権 の委譲を行うまでに送信したフレーム数を再度送信する。また、ここで、 CPU11は、 エラーが発生したフレーム番号の通知を受けた場合には、その番号フレーム力 再 送を行ってもよい。  Also, when a notification indicating that an error has occurred is received, the number of frames transmitted before transfer of the transmission right is retransmitted in the same procedure as described above. Here, when the CPU 11 is notified of a frame number in which an error has occurred, it may retransmit the number frame.
[0211] 次に、本実施の形態の二次局について、図 2を参照しながら説明する。図 2は、二 次局の構成を示すブロック図である。図 2に示されるように、本実施の形態の二次局( 受信装置)は、 CPU21と、メモリ 22と、コントローラ 23と、受信器 24と、送信器 (送信 手段) 25とを備えている。  Next, a secondary station of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the secondary station. As shown in FIG. 2, the secondary station (reception device) of the present embodiment includes a CPU 21, a memory 22, a controller 23, a receiver 24, and a transmitter (transmission means) 25. .
[0212] 受信器 24は、赤外線通信路を介して、一次局から送信されたフレームを受信し、受 信したフレームをコントローラ 23に送る。コントローラ 23は、受信器 24から受けたフレ ームを基に、所定の制御処理を行うものである。コントローラ 23は、制御部 231、フレ ーム処理部 232、誤り検出または訂正回路 233、エラーフレーム番号保持部 234、レ スポンスフレーム生成部(レスポンスフレーム生成手段) 235および誤り検出または訂 正符号付加部 236を備えて 、る。  The receiver 24 receives the frame transmitted from the primary station via the infrared communication path, and sends the received frame to the controller 23. The controller 23 performs predetermined control processing based on the frame received from the receiver 24. The controller 23 includes a control unit 231, a frame processing unit 232, an error detection or correction circuit 233, an error frame number holding unit 234, a response frame generation unit (response frame generation means) 235, and an error detection or correction code addition unit. I will have 236.
[0213] フレーム処理部 232は、受信器 24力もフレームを受け、データフィールド、送信権 委譲フラグ、フレーム通し番号および FCS部分を抽出する。すなわち、フレーム処理 部 232は、受信器 24が受信したフレームのデータフィールドに含まれる情報と、送信 権委譲フラグ、受信したフレームのフレーム通し番号、該情報に対する誤り検出符号 (または訂正符号)とを抽出する。フレーム処理部 232は、抽出した情報および誤り検 出符号 (または訂正符号)を、制御部 231、誤り検出または訂正回路 233およびエラ 一フレーム番号保持部 234に送る。 [0213] The frame processing unit 232 receives the frame from the receiver 24 and extracts the data field, the transmission right transfer flag, the frame serial number and the FCS portion. That is, the frame processing unit 232 extracts the information contained in the data field of the frame received by the receiver 24, the transmission right transfer flag, the frame serial number of the received frame, and the error detection code (or correction code) for the information. Do. The frame processing unit 232 transmits the extracted information and the error detection code (or correction code) to the control unit 231, the error detection or correction circuit 233, and the error. Send to one frame number holding unit 234.
[0214] 例えば、フレーム処理部 232は、フレームを受けると、該フレームに含まれる送信デ ータ、送信権委譲フラグ、フレームの通し番号および誤り検出符号 (または訂正符号 )とを抽出し、抽出した送信データ、送信権委譲フラグ、フレームの通し番号および誤 り検出符号 (または訂正符号)を、制御部 231、誤り検出または訂正回路 233および エラーフレーム番号保持部 234に送る。誤り検出または訂正回路 233は、受けた情 報に対して誤り検出(または訂正)を行い、その結果を制御部 231、エラーフレーム番 号保持部 234に送る。 For example, when the frame processing unit 232 receives a frame, the frame processing unit 232 extracts and extracts transmission data, a transmission right transfer flag, a frame serial number, and an error detection code (or a correction code) included in the frame. The transmission data, the transmission right transfer flag, the serial number of the frame and the error detection code (or correction code) are sent to the control unit 231, the error detection or correction circuit 233 and the error frame number holding unit 234. The error detection or correction circuit 233 performs error detection (or correction) on the received information, and sends the result to the control unit 231 and the error frame number holding unit 234.
[0215] 制御部 231は、誤り検出または訂正回路 233から送られる結果に応じて、所定の処 理を行う。すなわち、誤り検出または訂正回路 233からの結果が受信データに誤り( エラー)がないことを示している場合、制御部 231は、該受信データをメモリ 22に書き 込み、 CPU21に対して受信完了通知を行う。  The control unit 231 performs predetermined processing in accordance with the result sent from the error detection or correction circuit 233. That is, when the result from the error detection or correction circuit 233 indicates that there is no error (error) in the received data, the control unit 231 writes the received data in the memory 22 and notifies the CPU 21 of the reception completion. I do.
[0216] 一方、誤り検出または訂正回路 233からの結果が受信データにエラーがあることを 示している場合、制御部 231は、該受信データを破棄して、エラーフレーム番号保持 部 234からエラーが発生したフレーム番号を読み出し、 CPU21に対して受信エラー がある旨とエラーが発生したフレームの番号の通知を行う。また、制御部 231は、フレ ーム処理部 232で抽出された送信権委譲フラグを基に、送信権の委譲が行われたか 否かの通知も合わせて行う。  On the other hand, when the result from the error detection or correction circuit 233 indicates that there is an error in the received data, the control unit 231 discards the received data, and an error is detected from the error frame number holding unit 234. The frame number that has occurred is read out, and the fact that there is a reception error and the number of the frame in which the error has occurred are notified to the CPU 21. Further, based on the transmission right transfer flag extracted by the frame processing unit 232, the control unit 231 also performs notification of whether or not the transmission right has been transferred.
[0217] メモリ 22は、受信器 24が受信データを記憶するものであり、制御部 231により誤り がな力つた受信データが書き込まれる。  The memory 22 is used by the receiver 24 to store the received data, and the control unit 231 writes the received data to which no error has occurred.
[0218] CPU21は、制御部 231からの通知に応じた処理を行う。すなわち、制御部 231送 信権の委譲が行われた旨の通知を受けた場合、それまで受信したすべてのフレーム について誤りがなかったときには、メモリ 22に格納されたすベての受信データを基に 、所定の受信データ後処理を行い、制御部 231へは、すべてのフレームを正常受信 した旨のレスポンスフレームを一次局へ返信する旨の送信通知を行う。また、制御部 231から送信権の委譲が行われた旨の通知を受けた場合、それまで受信したフレー ム中にエラーが発生した旨の通知を受けていた場合には、制御部 231へ、エラーが 発生したので再送を要求する旨の送信通知を行う。また、ここで、合わせてエラーが 発生したフレームのフレーム番号の通知も行う。 The CPU 21 performs processing in accordance with the notification from the control unit 231. That is, when the control unit 231 is notified that the transfer right of the control unit 231 has been transferred, if there is no error in all the frames received up to that time, all the received data stored in the memory 22 is used. Then, predetermined post-processing for received data is performed, and the control unit 231 is notified of transmission to the effect that a response frame to the effect that all frames have been normally received is returned to the primary station. When the control unit 231 is notified that transfer right has been transferred, the control unit 231 is notified if an error has occurred in a frame received up to that time. Since an error has occurred, a transmission notification is issued to request retransmission. Also here, the error is It also notifies the frame number of the generated frame.
[0219] 制御部 231では、 CPU21から送信要求を受けると、レスポンスフレーム生成部 235 に対して、レスポンスフレーム生成する旨の通知を行う。ここで、受信したフレームに エラーがあつたか否かの情報と、エラーがあった場合にっ 、てはそのエラーフレーム のフレーム番号の通知も合わせて行う。  When the control unit 231 receives a transmission request from the CPU 21, the control unit 231 notifies the response frame generation unit 235 that a response frame is to be generated. Here, information on whether or not there is an error in the received frame and notification of the frame number of the error frame when there is an error are also performed.
[0220] レスポンスフレーム生成部 235では、制御部 231からの通知を基に、レスポンスフレ ームを生成し、誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 236へフレームを送る。誤り検出また は訂正符号付加部 236では、レスポンスフレーム生成部 235で生成されたフレーム に誤り検出または訂正符号を付加して、送信器 25に送る。送信器 25は、赤外線通 信路を介して、誤り検出または訂正符号付加部 236から受信したフレームを外部に 送信する。  The response frame generation unit 235 generates a response frame based on the notification from the control unit 231, and sends the frame to the error detection or correction code addition unit 236. The error detection or correction code addition unit 236 adds an error detection or correction code to the frame generated by the response frame generation unit 235 and sends the frame to the transmitter 25. The transmitter 25 transmits the frame received from the error detection or correction code adding unit 236 to the outside via the infrared communication path.
[0221] 図 3に、 UIフレームおよび UIフレームに対するレスポンス(応答)フレームにフレー ムの通し番号、相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグ、およびそれまで受 信したフレーム中にエラーまたはフレーム抜けがあった力どうかを示すフラグを付与し た場合のフレーム構成を示す。ただし、ここで示すフレーム構成は一例であって、こ れに限るものではない。  [0221] In FIG. 3, the UI frame and the response (response) frame to the UI frame, the frame serial number, a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station, and an error or error in the frame received so far The frame configuration is shown when a flag is added to indicate whether the frame is missing or not. However, the frame configuration shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
[0222] ここでは、 UIフレームおよび UIフレームに対するレスポンスフレームに 3バイトのパ ラメータを付与し、相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグ、二次局が使用 する受信フレームにエラーがあった力どうかを示すフラグ、および残り 22ビットをフレ ームの通し番号で構成される。  Here, a 3-byte parameter is added to the UI frame and the response frame to the UI frame, a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station, and an error occurs in the received frame used by the secondary station. A flag indicating whether it was a force and the remaining 22 bits consist of a frame serial number.
[0223] 以下、相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグを BL、二次局が使用する受 信フレームにエラーがあつたかどうかを示すフラグを RS、フレームの通し番号を Sとす る。以下、このフレーム構成を用いて、一次局とに二次局との間にて、どのようにして データ転送が行われるかにつ 、て説明する。  Hereinafter, a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station is BL, a flag indicating whether the received frame used by the secondary station has an error is RS, and a serial number of the frame is S. Ru. Hereinafter, it will be described how data transfer is performed between the primary station and the secondary station using this frame configuration.
[0224] 一次局および二次局におけるデータ転送処理の手順について図 4、図 5の信号シ 一ケンス図を参照しながら説明する。なお、図 4は、双方向通信においてすベての受 信データにつ!、てエラーが発生しな力つた場合を示して!/、る。  Procedures of data transfer processing in the primary station and the secondary station will be described with reference to the signal sequence diagrams of FIG. 4 and FIG. Note that Fig. 4 shows the case where all received data in two-way communication is forceless and no errors occur! /.
[0225] まず、一次局において、操作部からの転送指示を受けた CPU11は、転送すべき転 送データをメモリ 12に格納し、コントローラ 13に対して、転送要求を出力する。ここで は、 nフレーム単位で二次局に送信権の委譲が行われるとする。また図 4、図 5に示 す S、 BL、 RSはそれぞれ、フレームの通し番号、送信権の委譲を行うかどうかを示す フラグ、再送が必要であるかどうかを示すフラグである。 First, in the primary station, the CPU 11 that has received the transfer instruction from the operation unit The transmission data is stored in the memory 12 and a transfer request is output to the controller 13. Here, it is assumed that the transfer right is transferred to the secondary station in units of n frames. In addition, S, BL, and RS shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5 respectively indicate a frame serial number, a flag indicating whether transfer right is to be transferred, and a flag indicating whether re-transmission is necessary.
[0226] 一次局では、まず n個のフレーム(通し番号が S = 0から S=n— 1まで)を、赤外線 通信路を介して二次局に送信する。ここでは nフレーム単位で送信権の委譲が行わ れるため、 S =n—1のフレームについては、 BL= 1にしてフレームの送信を行う。  The primary station first transmits n frames (serial numbers from S = 0 to S = n−1) to the secondary station via the infrared communication path. Here, since the transmission right is transferred in units of n frames, frame transmission is performed with BL = 1 for frames of S = n−1.
[0227] 二次局では、一次局が送信したフレーム S = 0から S=n— 1を順に受信する。その 後受信した n個のフレーム中にエラーがなく受信完了した場合には、一次局に対して は、受信フレーム中にエラーがなぐ再送が必要でないことを意味するよう、 RS = 1に してレスポンスフレームを送信する。  The secondary station sequentially receives frames S = 0 to S = n−1 transmitted by the primary station. After that, if reception is completed without errors in the n received frames, RS = 1 is set for the primary station, meaning that no error-free retransmission is required in the received frame. Send a response frame.
[0228] 一次局では、二次局から送信した n個のフレームを正常に受信した旨のレスポンス フレームを受信すると、上記処理と同様の処理を行う。また二次局でも上記処理と同 様の処理を行い、すべての受信フレームにエラーがなく受信完了通知を受けた CPU は、該受信データを基に所定の受信データ後処理を行う。  [0228] When the primary station receives a response frame indicating that the n frames transmitted from the secondary station have been normally received, the same process as described above is performed. Also, the secondary station performs the same processing as the above processing, and the CPU receiving no notification of reception completion without error in all the received frames performs predetermined received data post-processing based on the received data.
[0229] 次に、一次局および二次局におけるデータ転送処理の手順について図 5の信号シ 一ケンス図を参照しながら説明する。なお、図 5は、双方向通信においてフレーム通 信中にエラーが発生した場合を示して 、る。  Next, procedures of data transfer processing in the primary station and the secondary station will be described with reference to the signal sequence diagram of FIG. FIG. 5 shows the case where an error occurs during frame communication in two-way communication.
[0230] ここでは、 nフレーム単位で二次局に送信権の委譲が行われるとする。また、図 4と 同様、 S、 BL、 RSはそれぞれ、フレームの通し番号、送信権の委譲を行うかどうかを 示すフラグ、再送が必要であるかどうかを示すフラグである。  [0230] Here, it is assumed that the transfer right is transferred to the secondary station in units of n frames. Also, as in FIG. 4, S, BL, and RS are a frame serial number, a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right, and a flag indicating whether retransmission is necessary.
[0231] 一次局では、まず n個のフレーム(通し番号が S = 0から S=n— 1まで)を、赤外線 通信路を介して二次局に送信する。ここでは nフレーム単位で送信権の委譲が行わ れるため、 S =n—1のフレームについては、 BL= 1にしてフレームの送信を行う。  The primary station first transmits n frames (serial numbers from S = 0 to S = n−1) to the secondary station via the infrared communication path. Here, since the transmission right is transferred in units of n frames, frame transmission is performed with BL = 1 for frames of S = n−1.
[0232] ここで、二次局は、フレーム 0についてエラーがなぐフレーム 1についてエラーがあ ることを検出したとする。二次局では、一次局から送信権の委譲を示すフラグが委譲 を意味するフレームを受信すると、一次局に対して、受信したフレームにエラーが発 生したことを意味するフラグを有効にしてフレーム送信を行う。一次局では、二次局か らのエラーが発生した旨のフレームを受信し、エラーが発生したことを検知し、エラー が発生したフレームの再送を行う。 Here, it is assumed that the secondary station detects that there is an error in frame 1 in which no error occurs in frame 0. When the secondary station receives a frame from the primary station indicating that the flag indicating delegation of the transmission right means delegation, the primary station validates the flag indicating that an error has occurred in the received frame and makes the frame Send At the primary station, the secondary station It receives a frame indicating that an error has occurred, detects that an error has occurred, and retransmits the frame in which the error occurred.
[0233] 〔実施の第二形態〕  Second Embodiment of the Embodiment
本実施の形態では、上記実施の第一形態の変形例について説明する。なお、他の 実施の形態において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らな い限り本実施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  In this embodiment, a modification of the first embodiment will be described. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment in accordance with the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
[0234] 上記実施の第一形態では、一次局が二次局との間での送信権の委譲を nフレーム 毎に行う構成とした力 ここでは IrDA通信方式で行われる接続確立時に、接続確立 時に、前記一次局である自局力 送信される接続要求フレームと前記二次局である 相手局から自局へ送信される接続応答フレームにそれぞれ、各局の一度に送受信 可能なフレーム数を意味するフィールドを付与してフレーム交換を行い、各局におい て受信した相手局の一度に受信可能なフレーム数を参照して最適なフレーム数を算 出し、該フレーム数に応じて送信権の委譲を行う場合について説明を行う。上記フレ ーム数にっ 、ては任意数に設定できるものである。  In the first embodiment described above, the power of the primary station performs transfer of the transmission right with the secondary station every n frames. Here, connection establishment is established when the connection performed by the IrDA communication system is established. Sometimes, the number of frames that each station can transmit and receive at one time means in the connection request frame transmitted by its own station as the primary station and the connection response frame transmitted from the opposite station as the secondary station to the station. A field is added and frame exchange is performed, and the optimum number of frames is calculated with reference to the number of frames that can be received at the other station received at each station at one time, and transfer right is transferred according to the number of frames. Explain about The above number of frames can be set to any number.
[0235] IrDA通信方式では、一次局が二次局に対して、データ転送状態の確立を求めて 、まず、 SNRMフレームを送信する。これを受信した二次局は、通信不可能である場 合には DMフレームを返信し、通信可能である場合には承諾を意味する UAフレーム を一次局に対し返信する。 SNRMフレーム、 DMフレーム、 UAフレームは、いずれ も Uフレームの形態である。二次局が UAフレームを返信すると両局はデータ転送状 態が確立され、データ転送が可能となる。  [0235] In the IrDA communication system, the primary station requests the secondary station to establish a data transfer state, and first transmits an SNRM frame. The secondary station receiving this sends back a DM frame if communication is not possible, and if the communication is possible, it returns a UA frame meaning acceptance to the primary station. SNRM frames, DM frames, and UA frames are all in the form of U frames. When the secondary station returns a UA frame, both stations establish data transfer status and data transfer becomes possible.
[0236] 本実施の形態では、上記 SNRMフレームまたは U Aフレームに、自局の再送可能 データサイズを示すパラメータを付与して接続確立を行うようにしたものである。  [0236] In the present embodiment, a connection establishment is performed by adding a parameter indicating the retransmittable data size of the own station to the SNRM frame or UA frame.
[0237] 上記の構成によれば、一次局と二次局との両局間でサポートされているフレーム数 毎に必ず送信権の委譲が行われるので、各局に搭載されたメモリ容量に応じたフレ ーム交換を行うことができる。  According to the above configuration, since the transfer right is always transferred for each number of frames supported between the primary station and the secondary station, the number of frames corresponding to the memory capacity installed in each station is required. It is possible to exchange frames.
[0238] 図 6は、本実施の形態に係る通信システムに使用される送受信回路の構成を示す ブロック図である。図 6に示すように、本実施の形態の送受信回路は、 CPU61と、コ ントローラ 62と、送信器 63と、受信器 64とを備えている。 [0239] CPU61は、図示しない操作部に入力された利用者の相手局との接続指示を受け ると、コントローラ 62に対して接続要求を行う。コントローラ 62は、 CPU61からの接続 要求に応じて、接続処理を制御するものである。コントローラ 62は、制御部 621、送 信フレーム生成部 622および受信フレーム解析部 623を備えている。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a transmission / reception circuit used in the communication system according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 6, the transmission / reception circuit of this embodiment includes a CPU 61, a controller 62, a transmitter 63, and a receiver 64. When the CPU 61 receives an instruction to connect to the other station of the user input to the operation unit (not shown), the CPU 61 sends a connection request to the controller 62. The controller 62 controls connection processing in response to a connection request from the CPU 61. The controller 62 includes a control unit 621, a transmission frame generation unit 622, and a reception frame analysis unit 623.
[0240] また、送信フレーム生成部 622は、接続確立フレーム生成部 6221および再送可能 フレーム数付加部 6222を備えている。 CPU61から接続要求および、再送可能フレ ーム数の通知を受けた制御部 621は、接続確立フレーム生成部 6221に対して、接 続要求フレームの生成を要求し、再送可能フレーム数付加部 6222へ CPU61から 通知を受けた再送可能フレーム数を通知する。  Further, the transmission frame generation unit 622 is provided with a connection establishment frame generation unit 6221 and a number-of-retransmittable-frames addition unit 6222. The control unit 621 receives the connection request from the CPU 61 and the notification of the number of retransmittable frames, requests the connection establishment frame generation unit 6221 to generate a connection request frame, and sends the retransmittable frame number addition unit 6222 The number of retransmittable frames notified from the CPU 61 is notified.
[0241] 接続確立フレーム生成部 6221では、接続要求フレームを生成し、再送可能フレー ム数付加部 6222は、生成された接続要求フレームに再送可能フレームを示すフィ 一ルドを付加し、送信器 63に送る。送信器 63では、送信フレーム生成部 622から受 けたフレームを赤外線通信路により送信を行う。  The connection establishment frame generation unit 6221 generates a connection request frame, and the retransmittable frame number addition unit 6222 adds a field indicating a retransmittable frame to the generated connection request frame, and sends the transmitter 63 Send to The transmitter 63 transmits the frame received from the transmission frame generation unit 622 through the infrared communication channel.
[0242] 本送受信回路では、接続要求フレームを送信後、相手局である二次局からの接続 応答(レスポンス)フレームを受信器 64が受信する。接続応答フレームを受信した受 信器 64は、受信フレームをコントローラ 62内の受信フレーム解析部 623に送る。  In the transmission / reception circuit, after transmitting the connection request frame, the receiver 64 receives a connection response (response) frame from the secondary station which is the opposite station. Receiving the connection response frame, the receiver 64 sends the received frame to the received frame analysis unit 623 in the controller 62.
[0243] 受信フレーム解析部 623は、フレーム解析部 6231および再送可能フレーム数検 出部 6232を備えている。フレーム解析部 6231は、受信フレームの解析を行い、自 局の接続要求に対する相手局の応答結果を制御部 621へ通知する。  The reception frame analysis unit 623 includes a frame analysis unit 6231 and a retransmittable frame number detection unit 6232. The frame analysis unit 6231 analyzes the received frame and notifies the control unit 621 of the response result of the opposite station to the connection request of the own station.
[0244] また、再送可能フレーム数検出部 6232は、受信フレームから、再送可能フレーム 数を示すフィールドの抽出を行い、制御部 621へ通知する。  [0244] Further, the number-of-retransmittable-frames detecting unit 6232 extracts a field indicating the number of retransmittable frames from the received frame, and notifies the control unit 621 of the extracted field.
[0245] 制御部 621では、受信フレーム解析部 623からの通知結果と、自局の再送可能フ レーム数を比較することにより、両局での最大再送可能フレーム数を知ることができ、 その結果を CPU61に通知する。  The control unit 621 can know the maximum number of retransmittable frames in both stations by comparing the notification result from the reception frame analysis unit 623 with the number of retransmittable frames of the own station, and as a result To the CPU 61.
[0246] CPU61では、その結果を受けて、データ転送を行う際には、両局での最大再送可 能フレーム数毎に実施の第一形態で前述した方法で、相手局への送信権の委譲を 行えばよいことになる。  When the CPU 61 receives the result and performs data transfer, it transmits the transmission right to the opposite station by the method described in the first embodiment for each maximum number of retransmittable frames in both stations. It will be good if it transfers.
[0247] また、ここでは、一次局が両局の最大再送可能フレーム数を知るまでの手順を述べ たが、二次局でも同様に、一次局力も受信した接続要求フレーム中の再送可能フレ ーム数と、自局の再送可能フレーム数を比較することにより、両局の最大再送可能フ レーム数を知ることができるので、ここでは、説明を割愛する。 Also, here, we describe the procedure for the primary station to know the maximum number of retransmittable frames of both stations. However, in the secondary station as well, the number of retransmittable frames in the connection request frame received by the primary station is also compared with the number of retransmittable frames of the own station, the maximum number of retransmittable frames of both stations. I will omit the explanation here because I can know.
[0248] 図 7に、 SNRMフレームまたは UAフレームに自局の再送可能データサイズを示す ノ ラメータを付与した場合のフレーム構成を示す。ただし、ここで示すフレーム構成 は一例であって、これに限るものではない。  [0248] FIG. 7 shows a frame configuration when the SNRM frame or the UA frame is added with a parameter indicating the retransmittable data size of the own station. However, the frame configuration shown here is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
[0249] ここでは、 1バイトのパラメータを付与し、各ビットがそれぞれ自局の再送可能データ サイズを示しており、各局は自局がサポートしているデータサイズを示すビットをすベ て 1にして、フレームの交換を行う。ここで示す例では、ビット 0が lByte、ビット 1が 2B yte、ビット 2力 3Byte、ビット 3力 4Byte、ビット 4力 8Byte、ビット 5力 Sl6Byte、ビット 6 が 32Byte、ビット 7が 64Byteを意味するものとする。  Here, a 1-byte parameter is added, each bit indicates the retransmittable data size of its own station, and each station sets all bits indicating the data size supported by its own station to 1. Exchange frames. In the example shown here, bit 0 means lByte, bit 1 is 2B yte, bit 2 is 3 Byte, bit 3 is 4 Byte, bit 4 is 8 Byte, bit 5 is S6 6 Byte, bit 6 is 32 Byte and bit 7 is 64 Byte I assume.
[0250] 両局では、それぞれ受信したフレームを基に、対向局のパラメータ力 得られる対 向局の受信可能データサイズ以内で、フレームの送信権の委譲を行えばよいこととな る。  [0250] Both stations may transfer the transmission right of the frame within the receivable data size of the opposite station that can obtain the parameter power of the opposite station based on the received frame respectively.
[0251] 図 8に、本発明の実施の形態におけるフレームのやり取りを信号シークェンス図に て示す。ここでは一次局は再送可能データサイズ力 Byteであり、二次局では 3Byt eであるとする。一次局では、再送可能データサイズ力 Byteであるため、図 7に示す フレーム構成では、 "00001111"のデータを SNRMフレームに付与して SNRMフ レームの送信を行う。  [0251] FIG. 8 is a signal sequence diagram showing exchange of frames in the embodiment of the present invention. Here, it is assumed that the primary station is the retransmittable data size strength Byte, and that the secondary station is 3 Bet e. In the frame configuration shown in FIG. 7, the primary station adds the data of "00001111" to the SNRM frame and transmits the SNRM frame because the size is the retransmittable data size Byte.
[0252] また、二次局では、再送可能データサイズが 3Byteであるため、図 7に示すフレー ム構成では、 "00000111"のデータを U Aフレームに付与して UAフレームの送信を 行う。一次局では、二次局の最大受信可能データサイズが 3Byteであることが分かる ので、これ以降のフレームの送信では、実施の第一形態で前述した方法を用いること により、一次局では 3フレームを送信するごとに相手局に送信権の委譲を行う。  Further, since the retransmittable data size of the secondary station is 3 bytes, in the frame configuration shown in FIG. 7, the data of “00000111” is added to the UA frame to transmit the UA frame. Since the primary station knows that the maximum receivable data size of the secondary station is 3 bytes, in the subsequent frame transmission, the primary station uses three frames by using the method described in the first embodiment. Transfers the transmission right to the other station each time it transmits.
[0253] 〔実施の第三形態〕  Third Embodiment of the Embodiment
本実施の第三形態に係るデータの転送システム (通信システム)は、階層構造の各 通信プロトコルを用いて通信を行うシステムに関するものである。なお、他の実施の形 態において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本 実施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。 A data transfer system (communication system) according to a third embodiment of the present invention relates to a system that performs communication using hierarchical communication protocols. As to terms (including parts and functions) defined in other embodiments, this is a book unless otherwise stated. Also in the embodiment, it shall be used according to the definition.
[0254] 本実施の形態に係るデータの転送システムについて、図 12から図 17に基づいて 説明すると以下の通りである。  The data transfer system according to the present embodiment is described below with reference to FIGS. 12 to 17.
[0255] 図 12は、本実施の形態における局 (一次局 (送信装置)または二次局 (受信装置) ) の構成を示すブロック図である。また、図 13に、本発明におけるデータ転送システム のプロトコルスタックを示す。図 13では IrDAのプロトコルスタックの TinyTP層に位置 する通信プロトコル層で本実施の形態の機能を実現することとし、以下、該通信プロト コル層を SMP (Sequence Management Protocol)層と呼ぶこととする。もちろん、本発 明に係る通信システムを実現するためのプロトコルスタックはこれに限るものではな ヽ  [0255] FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a station (primary station (transmitting apparatus) or secondary station (receiving apparatus) according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 13 shows a protocol stack of the data transfer system in the present invention. In FIG. 13, the function of the present embodiment is realized by the communication protocol layer located in the TinyTP layer of the IrDA protocol stack, and the communication protocol layer is hereinafter referred to as an SMP (Sequence Management Protocol) layer. Of course, the protocol stack for realizing the communication system according to the present invention is not limited to this.
[0256] 図 12に示すように、一次局または二次局である局 12は、アプリケーション層処理部 121と、 OBEX層処理部 122と、 SMP層処理部 123と、 IrLMP層処理部 124と、 IrL AP層処理部 125と、送信器 126と、受信器 127とを備えている。 As shown in FIG. 12, the station 12 which is a primary station or a secondary station includes an application layer processing unit 121, an OBEX layer processing unit 122, an SMP layer processing unit 123, and an IrLMP layer processing unit 124. The IrL AP layer processing unit 125, a transmitter 126, and a receiver 127 are provided.
[0257] アプリケーション層処理部 121と、 OBEX層処理部 122と、 SMP層処理部 123と、 I rLMP層処理部 124と、 IrLAP層処理部 125とは、この順番にて階層構造を備えた 、複数種類の各通信プロトコルの機能を実現するブロックである。  The application layer processing unit 121, the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the SMP layer processing unit 123, the IrLMP layer processing unit 124, and the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 have a hierarchical structure in this order. It is a block that implements the functions of multiple types of communication protocols.
[0258] 一次局における二次局に対する要求フレーム送信時の各ブロックの機能について 説明すると以下の通りである。  The function of each block at the time of transmitting a request frame to the secondary station in the primary station will be described as follows.
[0259] アプリケーション層処理部 121は、図示しない操作部に入力された利用者の指示 に応じて、 OBEX層処理部 122に対して、外部との通信のための要求フレームの発 行を行うよう通知(制御)する。また、アプリケーション層処理部 121は、 OBEX層処理 部 122から応答フレームを受信した旨の通知を受けると、受信した応答フレームに応 じて、所定の処理を行う。  The application layer processing unit 121 issues a request frame for communication with the outside to the OBEX layer processing unit 122 according to the user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown). Notify (control). Further, when receiving the notification that the response frame has been received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the application layer processing unit 121 performs predetermined processing in response to the received response frame.
[0260] OBEX層処理部 122は、アプリケーション層処理部 121からの要求に応じて、要求 フレームの生成および SMP層処理部 123への要求フレームの発行を行うよう通知( 制御)する。また、 SMP層処理部 123からの応答フレームを受けて、アプリケーション 層処理部 121に対して受信結果の通知を行う。  In response to the request from the application layer processing unit 121, the OBEX layer processing unit 122 notifies (controls) generation of a request frame and issuance of the request frame to the SMP layer processing unit 123. Also, in response to the response frame from the SMP layer processing unit 123, the reception result is notified to the application layer processing unit 121.
[0261] SMP層処理部 123は、制御部 1231と、送信フレーム生成部 1232と、受信フレー ム解析部 1233とを備えている。 The SMP layer processing unit 123 includes a control unit 1231, a transmission frame generation unit 1232 and a reception frame. And an analysis unit 1233.
[0262] また、送信フレーム生成部 1232は、応答フレーム要求フラグ付加部 12321と、フレ ーム通し番号付加部(通し番号付加手段) 12322と、送信権委譲フラグ付加部(送信 権委譲フラグ付与手段) 12323と、再送要求フラグ付加部(レスポンスフレーム生成 手段) 12324と、フレーム構築部 12325とを備える。  Further, the transmission frame generation unit 1232 includes a response frame request flag addition unit 12321, a frame serial number addition unit (serial number addition unit) 12322, and a transmission right transfer flag addition unit (transmission right transfer flag addition unit) 12323 And a retransmission request flag addition unit (response frame generation means) 12324 and a frame construction unit 12325.
[0263] また、受信フレーム解析部 1233は、応答フレーム要求フラグ判定部 12331、フレ ーム通し番号解析部 12332と、送信権委譲フラグ判定部 12333と、再送要求判定 部 12334と、上位層データ抽出部 12335とを備える。  Further, the reception frame analysis unit 1233 includes a response frame request flag determination unit 12331, a frame serial number analysis unit 12332, a transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333, a retransmission request determination unit 12334, and an upper layer data extraction unit. And 12335.
[0264] 制御部 1231は、 OBEX層処理部 122からの転送要求を受けると、フレーム通し番 号付加部 12322に送信フレームの通し番号の通知、送信権委譲フラグ付加部 1232 3に相手局に送信権を委譲する力否かの通知を行う。また、 OBEX層処理部 122か らの転送要求が応答フレームを要求している力否かに応じて、制御部 1231は、応答 フレーム要求フラグ付加部 12321を制御する。また、本実施の形態では、一次局に おいて再送要求を行わないため、再送要求フラグ付加部 12324は、特に制御を行う 必要はない。なお、一次局において再送要求を行う場合は、再送要求フラグ付加部 12324にて再送要求フラグを付加することとなる。  When the control unit 1231 receives the transfer request from the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the control unit 1231 notifies the frame serial number addition unit 12322 of the serial number of the transmission frame, and the transmission right transfer flag addition unit 1232 To notify of the power or not. Further, the control unit 1231 controls the response frame request flag adding unit 12321 according to whether the transfer request from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 requests the response frame or not. Further, in the present embodiment, since the primary station does not make a retransmission request, retransmission request flag adding section 12324 does not need to perform any particular control. When the primary station makes a retransmission request, the retransmission request flag adding unit 12324 adds a retransmission request flag.
[0265] フレーム構築部 12325では、 OBEX層処理部 122から受けた要求フレームに対し て、応答フレーム要求フラグ付加部 12321から通知された、上位層が送信フレーム に対して応答フレームが要求されて ヽるか否かを示す情報と、フレーム通し番号付カロ 部 12322から通知されたフレームの通し番号と、送信権委譲フラグ付加部 12323か ら通知された、送信権の委譲を行うか否かを示す情報と、再送要求フラグ付加部 123 24からの再送要求を行うか否かを示す情報 (ただし、一次局では再送要求を行わな いので常に固定値)とに基づいてヘッダ情報を生成し、そのヘッダ情報を付加してフ レームを構築する。そして、フレーム構築部 12325は、構築したフレームを下位層で ある IrLMP層処理部 124へ出力する。  In the frame construction unit 12325, for the request frame received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122, the upper layer notified of the response frame request flag addition unit 12321 requests a response frame for the transmission frame, Information indicating whether or not to transmit, the serial number of the frame notified from the frame serial numbered caro unit 12322, and the information notified from the transmission right transfer flag adding unit 12323 indicating whether to transfer the transmission right or not. The header information is generated based on the information indicating whether or not to make a retransmission request from the retransmission request flag adding unit 12324 (however, the primary station does not always make a retransmission request, so it is always a fixed value), and the header information To build a frame. Then, the frame construction unit 12325 outputs the constructed frame to the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 which is the lower layer.
[0266] IrLMP層処理部 124では受信した要求フレームに所定のヘッダ情報を付カ卩して、 フレームを生成し、下位層である IrLAP層処理部 125へフレームを出力する。  [0266] The IrLMP layer processing unit 124 adds predetermined header information to the received request frame to generate a frame, and outputs the frame to the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 which is a lower layer.
[0267] 同様に、 IrLAP層処理部 125では、受信した要求フレームに所定のヘッダ情報を 付加してフレームを生成し、送信器 126へ出力する。 Similarly, in the IrLAP layer processing section 125, predetermined header information is added to the received request frame. An additional frame is generated and output to the transmitter 126.
[0268] 送信器 126は、赤外線通信路を介して、 IrLAP層処理部 125から受信した複数の フレームを所定の時間間隔で外部に送信する。 [0268] The transmitter 126 transmits a plurality of frames received from the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 to the outside at predetermined time intervals via an infrared communication path.
[0269] 次に、一次局における二次局力 送信される応答フレーム受信時の各ブロックの動 作にっ 、て説明すると以下の通りである。 [0269] Next, the operation of each block at the time of receiving the response frame to be transmitted by the secondary station at the primary station will be described as follows.
[0270] 受信器 127が、赤外線通信路を介して、二次局から送信される応答フレームを受 信すると、受信した応答フレームを IrLAP層処理部 125へ出力する。 When the receiver 127 receives the response frame transmitted from the secondary station via the infrared communication path, the receiver 127 outputs the received response frame to the IrLAP layer processing unit 125.
[0271] IrLAP層処理部 125、 IrLMP層処理部 124では、それぞれ受信した応答フレーム 力 ヘッダ情報の解析を行い、ヘッダ情報に基づいて所定の処理を行い、ヘッダ情 報の除去を行 、上位層に対して応答フレームが渡されて!/、く。 The IrLAP layer processing unit 125 and the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 analyze the received response frame power header information, perform predetermined processing based on the header information, and remove the header information, and the upper layer Response frame is passed! /.
[0272] SMP層処理部 123では、下位層である IrLMP層処理部 124から応答フレームを 受信し、受信フレーム解析部 1233にお 、て応答フレームの解析を行う。 The SMP layer processing unit 123 receives the response frame from the lower layer IrLMP layer processing unit 124, and analyzes the response frame in the reception frame analysis unit 1233.
[0273] 送信権委譲フラグ判定部 12333では、受信フレームの BL (後述する)ビットを参照 し、送信権の委譲が行われている力否かの判定結果を制御部 1231へ通知する。 The transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333 refers to the BL (described later) bit of the received frame and notifies the control unit 1231 of the determination result as to whether or not the transmission right is being transferred.
[0274] また、再送要求判定部 12334では、受信フレームの RS (後述する)ビットを参照し、 相手局からの再送要求が行われて 、る力否かの判定結果を制御部 1231へ通知す る。 In addition, retransmission request determination section 12334 refers to the RS (described later) bit of the received frame, and when the retransmission request is made from the opposite station, notifies control section 1231 of the determination result as to whether or not it has power. Ru.
[0275] また、フレーム通し番号解析部 12332において、受信フレームからフレーム番号を 抽出し、制御部 1231へ出力する。  Frame serial number analysis unit 12332 extracts a frame number from the received frame, and outputs the frame number to control unit 1231.
[0276] 制御部 1231では、再送要求判定部 12331からの判定結果の通知を受けて、相手 局が再送を要求している場合には、フレーム通し番号解析部 12332より通知された 通し番号のフレーム力も再送を行うように送信フレーム生成部 1232を制御する。また 、再送要求判定部 12331からの判定結果が相手局が再送を要求していないことを 示して 、る場合には、送信完了して 、な 、フレームを順次送信して 、く。  [0276] In response to the notification of the determination result from retransmission request determination unit 12331, control unit 1231 also retransmits the frame power of the serial number notified from frame serial number analysis unit 12332 if the other station requests retransmission. The transmission frame generation unit 1232 is controlled to perform. Also, if the determination result from the retransmission request determination unit 12331 indicates that the opposite station has not requested retransmission, the transmission is completed and the frames are sequentially transmitted.
[0277] また、上位層データ抽出部 12335では、下位層(ここでは IrLMP層処理部 124)か ら受信したフレームから、 SMP層のヘッダ情報の除去を行い、上位層(ここでは OBE X層処理部 122)へデータを出力する。  Also, the upper layer data extraction unit 12335 removes the header information of the SMP layer from the frame received from the lower layer (here, the IrLMP layer processing unit 124), and the upper layer (here, the OBE X layer processing). Output data to the part 122).
[0278] こうして、一次局では、転送データが送信完了するまで上記の手順で二次局へデ ータ転送を行っていく。 Thus, the primary station transfers data to the secondary station in the above-described procedure until transmission data is completely transmitted. Data transfer.
[0279] 次に、二次局における一次局力も送信される要求フレーム受信時の各ブロックの動 作にっ 、て説明すると以下の通りである。  [0279] Next, the operation of each block at the time of receiving a request frame in which the primary power is also transmitted at the secondary station will be described as follows.
[0280] 一次局と同様、二次局においても受信器 127がー次局力も送信される要求フレー ムを受信し、 IrLAP層処理部 125および IrLMP層処理部 124において、それぞれ ヘッダ情報の解析、ヘッダ情報の除去が行われ、上位層に要求フレームが渡されて いく。 As in the primary station, also in the secondary station, the receiver 127 receives a request frame to which the next station power is also transmitted, and the IrLAP layer processing unit 125 and the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 respectively analyze the header information, Header information is removed and the request frame is passed to the upper layer.
SMP層処理部 123では、 IrLMP層処理部 124から要求フレームを渡されると、 受信フレーム解析部 1233において受信フレームの解析を行う。  In the SMP layer processing unit 123, when the request frame is passed from the IrLMP layer processing unit 124, the reception frame analysis unit 1233 analyzes the reception frame.
[0281] フレーム通し番号解析部 12332では、受信フレームからフレーム通し番号の抽出 を行い、受信したフレームの通し番号のチェックを行い、正常であるか異常が(フレー ム抜け等)あるかの判定結果を制御部 1231に通知する。また、異常があった場合に は合わせてエラーがあったフレームの通し番号(再送してほし 、フレーム番号)を制 御部 1231へ通知する。 Frame serial number analysis unit 12332 extracts the frame serial number from the received frame, checks the serial number of the received frame, and determines whether the result is normal or abnormal (frame missing etc.). Notify 1231. Also, when there is an error, the control unit 1231 is notified of the serial number of the frame in which the error occurred (retransmission, frame number).
[0282] また、送信権委譲フラグ判定部 12333では、受信フレームの BL (後述する)ビットを 参照し、送信権の委譲が行われている力否かの判定結果を制御部 1231へ通知する  Also, the transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333 refers to the BL (described later) bit of the received frame and notifies the control unit 1231 of the determination result as to whether or not the transmission right is transferred.
[0283] また、応答フレーム要求フラグ判定部 12331では、受信フレームの DL (後述する) ビットを参照し、 DLビットが上位層の応答フレームを要求している力否かの判定結果 を制御部 1231へ通知する。 Further, the response frame request flag determination unit 12331 refers to the DL (described later) bit of the received frame and determines the result of determination as to whether the DL bit requests the response frame of the upper layer or not. To notify.
[0284] 制御部 1231では、送信権委譲フラグ判定部 12333から通知される判定結果をもと に、判定結果が相手局力 送信権の委譲が行われて 、ることを示して 、る場合には 、送信フレーム生成部 1232に対して、応答フレームの生成および送信を行うよう制 御(通知)する。  Based on the determination result notified from transmission right transfer flag determination unit 12333, control unit 1231 indicates that the determination result indicates that the transfer right of the other station has been transferred. The transmission frame generation unit 1232 controls (notifies) the transmission frame generation unit 1232 to generate and transmit a response frame.
[0285] この時、フレーム通し番号解析部 12332の解析結果を基にフレーム通し番号のェ ラーが発生していた場合には、制御部 1231は、再送要求フラグ付加部 12324に再 送要求を行うことを示すようフラグを設定することを通知し、フレーム通し番号付加部 12322に対しては、フレーム通し番号解析部 12332から通知されたエラーが発生し たフレーム通し番号を通知する。 At this time, if an error of the frame serial number is generated based on the analysis result of the frame serial number analysis unit 12332, the control unit 1231 requests the retransmission request flag addition unit 12324 to make a retransmission request. It indicates that the flag is set as shown, and an error notified from the frame serial number analysis unit 12332 occurs to the frame serial number addition unit 12322. Indicate the frame serial number.
[0286] また、フレーム通し番号解析部 12332の解析結果がエラーが発生していないことを 示している場合には、制御部 1231は、再送フラグ付加部 12324に対して再送要求 は行わず正常に受信が完了していることを示すようフラグを設定することを通知する。  Further, when the analysis result of the frame serial number analysis unit 12332 indicates that no error has occurred, the control unit 1231 does not make a retransmission request to the retransmission flag addition unit 12324 and normally receives it. Informs you to set a flag to indicate that it is complete.
[0287] ただし、制御部 1231では、応答フレーム要求フラグ判定部 12331の判定結果が 上位層の応答フレームを要求していること示している場合には、 OBEX層処理部 12 2が応答フレームの準備が完了するまで、応答フレームを返信せず、 OBEX層処理 部 122から応答フレームの準備が完了した旨の通知を受けた時点で、送信フレーム 生成部 1232へ応答フレームの生成を指示する。送信フレーム生成部 1232では、 O BEX層処理部 122から受信した応答フレームに、所定のヘッダ情報を付加してフレ ームを構築し、下位層である IrLMP層処理部 124へ出力する。  However, in the control unit 1231, when the determination result of the response frame request flag determination unit 12331 indicates that the response frame of the upper layer is requested, the OBEX layer processing unit 122 prepares the response frame. The response frame is not sent back until the completion of the response frame, and when it is notified from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 that the response frame has been prepared, the transmission frame generation unit 1232 is instructed to generate the response frame. The transmission frame generation unit 1232 adds predetermined header information to the response frame received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 to construct a frame, and outputs the frame to the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 which is a lower layer.
[0288] また、 OBEX層処理部 122が応答フレームの準備が完了するまでに、 SMP層処理 部 123において応答フレームを生成して送信しておいてもよい。ただし、この場合に は、制御部 1231は、送信権委譲フラグ付加部 12323に対して、一次局に送信権の 委譲を行わないように制御して、送信フレームを生成するように制御する。そして、 O BEX層処理部 122から応答フレームの準備が完了した旨の通知を受けた時点で、 送信フレーム生成部 1232へ応答フレームの生成を指示する。また、このとき送信権 委譲フラグ付加部 12323に対して一次局に送信権の委譲を行うようフラグを設定す るように制御する。送信フレーム生成部 1232では、 OBEX層処理部 122から受信し た応答フレームに、所定のヘッダ情報を付加してフレームを構築し、下位層である Ir LMP層処理部 124へ出力する。  Also, the response layer may be generated and transmitted in the SMP layer processing unit 123 until the preparation of the response frame is completed by the OBEX layer processing unit 122. However, in this case, the control unit 1231 controls the transmission right transfer flag addition unit 12323 not to transfer the transmission right to the primary station, and controls to generate a transmission frame. Then, when receiving the notification from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 that the preparation of the response frame is completed, the transmission frame generation unit 1232 is instructed to generate a response frame. Also, at this time, the transmission right transfer flag addition unit 12323 is controlled to set a flag so as to transfer the transmission right to the primary station. The transmission frame generation unit 1232 adds predetermined header information to the response frame received from the OBEX layer processing unit 122 to construct a frame, and outputs the frame to the Ir LMP layer processing unit 124 which is a lower layer.
[0289] 送信フレーム生成部 1232では、制御部 1231からの制御に応じて応答フレームを 生成し、下位層である IrLMP層処理部 124へ生成した応答フレームを出力する。  The transmission frame generation unit 1232 generates a response frame according to the control from the control unit 1231, and outputs the generated response frame to the IrLMP layer processing unit 124 which is the lower layer.
[0290] こうして、二次局においては、一次局からの要求フレームに対する応答フレームの 送信を、一次局から送信権の委譲が行われる毎に行っていく。  Thus, in the secondary station, transmission of a response frame to the request frame from the primary station is performed each time transfer of the transmission right is performed from the primary station.
[0291] 図 14に UIフレーム及び UIフレームに対するレスポンス(応答)フレームに、フレー ムの通し番号、相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグ、それまで受信したフ レーム中にエラーまたはフレーム抜けがあつたか否かを示すフラグ、および一次局の 上位層が要求フレームに対する応答フレームを要求している力否かを示すフラグを 付与した場合のフレーム構成を示す。ただし、ここで示すフレーム構成は一例であつ て、これに限るものではない。 [0291] FIG. 14 shows a UI frame and a response (response) frame to the UI frame, a frame serial number, a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station, an error or a frame in the frame received so far A flag indicating if it has been missed and the primary station This figure shows the frame configuration when the upper layer gives a flag indicating whether the response frame to the request frame requires a response frame or not. However, the frame configuration shown here is only an example and is not limited to this.
[0292] ここでは、 UIフレームおよび UIフレームに対するレスポンスフレームに 3バイトのへ ッダを付与し、相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグ、一次局の上位層が 要求フレームに対する応答フレームを要求して 、る力否かを示すフラグ、二次局が使 用する受信フレームにエラーがあった力否かを示すフラグ、および残り 21ビットが送 信フレームの通し番号として構成される。  Here, a 3-byte header is added to the UI frame and the response frame to the UI frame, and a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right to the other station, the upper layer of the primary station responds to the request frame A frame is requested and a flag indicating whether or not there is a power, a flag indicating whether or not the received frame used by the secondary station has an error, and the remaining 21 bits are configured as the serial number of the transmission frame.
[0293] 以下、一次局の上位層が要求フレームに対する応答フレームを要求している力否 かを示すフラグを DL、相手局に送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグを BL、二次 局が使用する受信フレームにエラーがあつたか否かを示すフラグを RS、フレームの 通し番号を Sとする。  [0293] Hereinafter, a flag indicating whether the upper layer of the primary station requests the response frame to the request frame is DL, a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right to the opposite station is BL, and the secondary station Let RS be a flag indicating whether the received frame used has errors or not, and let S be the serial number of the frame.
[0294] 以下、このフレーム構成を用いて、本実施の形態によって構成される一次局と二次 局との間にて、どのようにしてデータ転送が行われるかについて図 15を用いて説明 する。  Hereinafter, how data is transferred between the primary station and the secondary station configured according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 15 using this frame configuration. .
[0295] なお、図 15は、双方向通信においてすベての受信データについてエラーが発生し なかった場合を示す。  FIG. 15 shows the case where no error occurs in all received data in two-way communication.
[0296] まず、一次局において、図示しない操作部に入力された利用者の指示に応じて、 アプリケーション層処理部 121から要求フレーム転送要求が通知され、 OBEX層処 理部 122は下位層である SMP層に対して要求フレームを出力する。  First, in the primary station, the request layer transfer request is notified from the application layer processing unit 121 according to the user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown), and the OBEX layer processing unit 122 is a lower layer. Output request frame to SMP layer.
[0297] ここでは、 nフレーム単位で二次局に送信権の委譲が行われるとする。また、図 15 に示す S、 DL、 BL、 RSはそれぞれ、フレームの通し番号、一次局の上位層が要求 フレームに対する応答フレームを要求して ヽるか否かを示すフラグ、送信権の委譲を 行うか否かを示すフラグ、再送要求を行うか否かを示すフラグである。  Here, it is assumed that the transfer right is transferred to the secondary station in units of n frames. In addition, S, DL, BL, and RS shown in FIG. 15 respectively transfer the serial number of the frame, a flag indicating whether the upper layer of the primary station requests a response frame to the request frame, and transfer right of transmission. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is a flag indicating whether or not to make a retransmission request.
[0298] SMP層は、上位層である OBEX層力 受け渡された転送データを所定のデータサ ィズに分割し、通し番号を付けて下位層である IrLMP層に出力する。ここでは、 nフ レーム単位で送信権の委譲を行うこととしているので、 3 = !1—1のフレームは81^ = 1 にして下位層にデータを出力する。 [0299] SMP層の下位層である IrLMP層および IrLAP層は、 SMP層力も受けたフレーム に対してそれぞれ順次ヘッダを付加して ヽき、赤外線通信路を介して二次局にフレ ームの送信を行う。 [0298] The SMP layer divides the transferred data transferred to the upper layer OBEX layer into predetermined data sizes, assigns a serial number, and outputs the data to the lower layer IrLMP layer. Here, since it is assumed that the transmission right is transferred in units of n frames, the frame of 3 =! 1-1 is set to 81 ^ = 1 and the data is output to the lower layer. [0299] The IrLMP layer and the IrLAP layer, which are lower layers of the SMP layer, add a header sequentially to the frame which also receives the SMP layer force, and send the frame to the secondary station through the infrared communication path. Send
[0300] 一方、二次局では、赤外線通信路を介して一次局からフレームを受信する。二次 局は、 SMP層の下位層である IrLAP層、 IrLMP層においてそれぞれ受信フレーム から順次ヘッダ情報の解析を行 ヽ、ヘッダ情報を除去して上位層に対してデータを 出力していく。  [0300] On the other hand, the secondary station receives a frame from the primary station via the infrared communication path. The secondary station analyzes the header information sequentially from the received frame in the IrLAP layer and the IrLMP layer which are lower layers of the SMP layer, removes the header information, and outputs data to the upper layer.
[0301] SMP層は、下位層である IrLMP層力 フレームの受信を行い、受信フレームのへ ッダ情報(ここでは 3Byte)の解析を行う。そして、ヘッダ情報内のフレーム通し番号 を元にフレーム抜けなどのエラーが発生して ヽな ヽかをチェックし、エラーが発生して いない場合は、ヘッダ情報の除去を行い、 OBEX層(上位層)に順次データを渡して いく。ただし、 S =n—1のフレームについては、 BL= 1、 DL = 0であるので、一次局 から送信権の委譲が行われており、かつ上位層である OBEX層の応答が必要でな いので、 SMP層は、受信した n個のフレーム中にエラーがなぐ再送が必要でないこ とを意味するよう、 RS = 1にしてレスポンスフレームを送信する。  [0301] The SMP layer receives an IrLMP layer frame, which is a lower layer, and analyzes header information (3 bytes in this case) of the received frame. Then, based on the frame serial number in the header information, an error such as a missing frame occurs and checks whether there is an error or not. If no error occurs, the header information is removed and the OBEX layer (upper layer) Pass the data to the However, for a frame of S = n -1, BL = 1 and DL = 0, so the transmission authority is delegated from the primary station, and the response of the OBEX layer, which is the upper layer, is not necessary. Therefore, the SMP layer sends a response frame with RS = 1, which means that no error-free retransmission is required in the received n frames.
[0302] 一次局は、二次局から送信した n個のフレームを正常に受信した旨のレスポンスフ レームを受信すると、上記処理と同様の処理を行い、次の n個のフレームを送信する 。また、二次局も同様に、次の n個のフレームを受信し、 BL= 1のフレーム(図では S =m— 1)のフレームを受信すると、 n個のフレームを正常に受信した旨のレスポンス フレームを一次局に対して返信する。  [0302] When the primary station receives a response frame indicating that the n frames transmitted from the secondary station have been correctly received, it performs the same processing as the above processing, and transmits the next n frames. Similarly, when the secondary station receives the next n frames and receives the frame of the BL = 1 frame (S = m-1 in the figure), it indicates that the n frames have been successfully received. Send a response frame back to the primary station.
[0303] こうして、一次局は、順次 n個のフレーム単位毎に二次局に送信権の委譲を行いな がら、フレーム送信を行っていく力 転送データの最終フレームでは BL= 1、 DL= 1 として、一次局の上位層が要求フレームに対する応答フレームを要求するようにして 送信を行う。ここでは、 DLビットを一次局の上位層が要求フレームに対する応答フレ ームを要求していることを示すためのフラグとして利用している力 他の意味のフラグ と兼用して利用することも可能である。例えば、図 15で示す例の場合、転送データの 最終フレームを意味するフラグとして扱うことも可能である。  Thus, while the primary station sequentially transfers the transmission right to the secondary station every n frame units, the power of performing frame transmission is BL = 1, DL = 1 in the final frame of the transferred data. As the upper layer of the primary station requests the response frame for the request frame, it performs transmission. Here, the DL bit can be used in combination with a force that is used as a flag to indicate that the upper layer of the primary station requests a response frame to the request frame, and a flag of another meaning. It is. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 15, it is also possible to treat it as a flag that means the last frame of transfer data.
[0304] BL= 1、 DL= 1のフレームを受信した二次局の SMP層は、 DL= 1のため上位層 である OBEX層に対して、受信した要求フレームに対する応答フレームが要求され ている旨の通知を行う。 OBEX層では、 SMP層力もの通知を受けて、正常にすべて のデータ受信が完了したので、 SMP層に対して応答フレームの送信要求を行い、応 答フレームを渡す。 SMP層は、 OBEX層からの応答フレーム送信要求を受けて、 O BEX層から受け渡された応答フレームにヘッダ情報 (ここでは、再送が必要でな!、こ とを示すように RS = 1にし、 BL= 1、 DL= 1にする)を付カ卩して、下位層である IrLM P層にデータを渡す。下位層である IrLMP層、および IrLAP層は、それぞれ上位層 力も受け渡されたデータに所定のヘッダ情報を付加して、下位層に応答フレームを 渡していき、 IrLAP層では赤外線通信路を介して一次局に対して応答フレームの送 信を行う。 [0304] The SMP layer of the secondary station that has received a frame with BL = 1 and DL = 1 is an upper layer because DL = 1. It notifies the OBEX layer that a response frame to the received request frame is required. In the OBEX layer, after receiving notification from the SMP layer, all data has been successfully received, so a request to transmit a response frame is made to the SMP layer, and a response frame is passed. In response to the response frame transmission request from the OBEX layer, the SMP layer sets header information in the response frame received from the OBEX layer (here, RS = 1 to indicate that retransmission is necessary!). , BL = 1 and DL = 1), and pass data to the lower layer IrLM P layer. The IrLMP layer and the IrLAP layer, which are lower layers, add predetermined header information to the data that is also transferred to the upper layer as well, and pass the response frame to the lower layer, and the IrLAP layer passes the response frame via the infrared communication path. Sends a response frame to the primary station.
[0305] 二次局力 送信された応答フレームを受信した一次局は、下位層から順次ヘッダ 情報の解析および除去を行い、上位層に対してデータが受け渡していく。そして、 S MP層の上位層である OBEX層は、二次局から送信された OBEX応答フレームを受 信し、一次局の SMP層の上位層もデータ転送が正常に完了したことを認識できるこ とになる。  The secondary station receives the transmitted response frame, sequentially analyzes and removes header information from the lower layer, and delivers data to the upper layer. Then, the OBEX layer, which is an upper layer of the SMP layer, receives the OBEX response frame transmitted from the secondary station, and can recognize that the upper layer of the SMP layer of the primary station has also successfully completed the data transfer. It becomes.
[0306] また、図 16、図 17は、認証時などに上位層力 認証要求が発行される場合のデー タ転送の手順を示す信号シークェンス図である。  FIGS. 16 and 17 are signal sequence diagrams showing a data transfer procedure when an upper layer authentication request is issued at the time of authentication or the like.
[0307] 図 16に示されるように、上位層力も受け渡された認証用フレームに対して、 SMP層 において DL = 0、 BL= 1のヘッダ情報を付カ卩して、二次局にデータ転送を行った場 合には、二次局は、受信したフレームが BL= 1のため送信権が一次局から委譲され ており、 DL = 0であるので上位層からの応答を待つことなくレスポンスを返信するの で、二次局の上位層の応答フレームが返信できないため、両局間で認証が完了しな いことになる。  [0307] As shown in FIG. 16, with respect to the authentication frame to which upper layer power is also transferred, header information of DL = 0 and BL = 1 is added in the SMP layer, and data is transmitted to the secondary station. When transfer is performed, the secondary station receives a frame with BL = 1 and the transmission right is delegated from the primary station, and since DL = 0, the secondary station responds without waiting for a response from the upper layer. Because the response frame of the upper layer of the secondary station can not be sent back, the authentication between the two stations will not be completed.
[0308] 一方、本実施の形態による構成で、 DL= 1にして認証フレームを二次局に送信し た場合には、二次局の SMP層において DL= 1であるため、上位層が応答フレーム を準備完了した時点で、上位層から渡される応答フレームにヘッダ情報を付加して 認証フレームに対するレスポンスフレームの返信を行うので、両局間の上位層間の認 証が完了することになる。 [0309] また、図 17に示すように、 DL= 1、 BL= 1のパケットを受信した場合に、 SMP層は 、上位層である OBEX層に対して受信した要求フレームに対する応答フレームが要 求されて!、る旨の通知を行 、、 SMP層レベルでの応答フレームを先に返信してもよ い。ただし、この場合には、 BL = 0で返信を行い、相手局に送信権を委譲しないよう にしておく。そして、 OBEX層で応答フレームの送信準備が完了した時点で、再度 O BEXの応答フレームに SMP層のヘッダ情報を付カ卩して応答フレームを返信する。 On the other hand, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, when the authentication frame is transmitted to the secondary station with DL = 1, the upper layer responds as DL = 1 in the SMP layer of the secondary station. When the frame is prepared, header information is added to the response frame passed from the upper layer and the response frame is sent back to the authentication frame, so that the upper layer authentication between both stations is completed. [0309] Also, as shown in FIG. 17, when a packet with DL = 1 and BL = 1 is received, the SMP layer requests the response frame to the request frame received to the upper layer OBEX layer. It is possible to send a response frame at the SMP layer level first. However, in this case, reply with BL = 0 so as not to transfer the transmission right to the other station. Then, when the transmission of the response frame in the OBEX layer is completed, the header information of the SMP layer is added to the response frame of the OBEX again, and the response frame is returned.
[0310] こうすることにより、一次局の SMP層は、二次局の OBEX層において応答フレーム が準備されて力 応答フレームが返信されてくる前に、 SMP層レベルの応答フレー ム(OBEX層の応答フレームが包含されて!、な!/、)を受信することができる。これによ り、一次局の SMP層は、 OBEX層からの応答フレームが返信される前に、相手局が 正常にフレームを受信できた力否かを知ることができるので、あらかじめ次のデータ 転送の準備などを行っておくことができる。  [0310] By doing this, the SMP layer of the primary station receives the response frame at the SMP layer level (OBEX layer's response frame) before the response frame is prepared in the OBEX layer of the secondary station and the force response frame is returned. Response frames are included and can receive! /! As a result, since the SMP layer of the primary station can know whether or not the partner station has successfully received the frame before the response frame from the OBEX layer is sent back, the next data transfer is performed in advance. You can prepare for the
[0311] なお、上記各実施の形態では、送信機 (一次局)および受信機(二次局)が CPUを 備える構成とした力 CPUに限らず、マイコンなどの演算処理機能を有するものであ つてもよい。  In each of the above embodiments, the transmitter (primary station) and the receiver (secondary station) are not limited to a power CPU configured to include a CPU, and may have an arithmetic processing function such as a microcomputer. It may be connected.
[0312] また、上記各実施の形態では、 CPUからの指示を受けて、コントローラが転送デー タの転送を行うものとした。し力しながら、 CPUを介さずに、 DMA (ダイレクトメモリア クセス)によって、コントローラが転送データの転送を行ってもよい。この場合、 CPU 力 の指示を受けることなぐメモリから転送データの転送を行うことができる。これに より、 CPUの負担を低減することができる。  In each of the above-described embodiments, the controller transfers the transfer data in response to an instruction from the CPU. However, the controller may transfer the transfer data by DMA (direct memory access) without intervention of the CPU. In this case, transfer data can be transferred from memory that does not receive CPU power instructions. This can reduce the CPU load.
[0313] 〔実施の第四形態〕  Fourth Embodiment of the Embodiment
本実施の第四形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 31から図 33に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態におい て定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形 態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
[0314] 本実施の形態では、送信機のブロック図として図 31、受信機のブロック図として図 3 2、信号のシークェンス図として図 33を用いて説明する。  This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31 as a block diagram of a transmitter, FIG. 32 as a block diagram of a receiver, and FIG. 33 as a sequence diagram of signals.
[0315] 図 31は、本実施の形態に係る送信機 2001のブロック図である。なお、図 31は、送 信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェア であってもハードウ アであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。 [0315] FIG. 31 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2001 according to the present embodiment. Note that Figure 31 This is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and is not limited to this. In addition, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0316] 送信機 2001は、送信データを送信する側の機器である。ここで ヽぅ送信データとは 、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる力 これに限らない。  The transmitter 2001 is a device that transmits transmission data. Here, the transmission data may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
[0317] 図 31に示すように、送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2001は、制御部 (制御手段 ) 2002、メモリ(記憶手段) 2003、一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 (一括送信最終フラ グ生成手段) 2004、通し番号生成回路 (通し番号生成手段) 2005、送信フレーム生 成回路 (送信フレーム生成手段) 2006、送信部 (送信手段) 2007、受信部 (受信手 段) 2008、受信フレーム解析回路 (受信フレーム解析手段) 2009、エラー無しフラグ 解析回路 (エラー無しフラグ解析手段) 2010、エラー検出回路 (エラー検出手段) 20 11、通し番号解析回路 (通し番号解析手段) 2012を備えて構成されて 、る。  As shown in FIG. 31, a transmitter (primary station, client device) 2001 includes a control unit (control means) 2002, a memory (storage means) 2003, a batch transmission final flag generation circuit (collective transmission final flag generation) Means) 2004, serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means) 2005, transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means) 2006, transmission unit (transmission means) 2007, reception unit (reception means) 2008, reception frame analysis circuit (reception Frame analysis means) 2009, no error flag analysis circuit (no error flag analysis means) 2010, error detection circuit (error detection means) 20 11, serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means) 2012 comprising.
[0318] 制御部 2002は、送信機 2001の各構成要素の制御を行う。  A control unit 2002 controls each component of the transmitter 2001.
[0319] メモリ 2003には送信データが蓄えられる。このメモリ 2003は、揮発性のメモリ(例え ば SDRAMなど)であっても、不揮発性のメモリ(例えばフラッシュメモリ、 HDD, DV Dなど)であってもよい。また、図 31では、メモリ 2003は、送信機 2001内に配置され ているが、必ずしも送信機 2001内に存在する必要はなぐ送信機 2001の外部メモリ として送信機 2001に接続されて 、ても構わな 、。  The memory 2003 stores transmission data. This memory 2003 may be volatile memory (for example, SDRAM etc.) or non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD etc.). Further, in FIG. 31, the memory 2003 is disposed in the transmitter 2001, but may be connected to the transmitter 2001 as an external memory of the transmitter 2001 which is not necessarily present in the transmitter 2001. .
[0320] 一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2004は、送信機 2001があるまとまった単位でデー タ転送を行うときに、前記あるまとまった単位の最終データを含むフレームを送信する 際に、それを意味する値として設定する回路である。本実施の形態においては、 BL ( Block Last)という略語を定義し、 BLが 1である場合は、前記あるまとまった単位の最 終データを含むフレームであり、 BLが 0である場合は、前記あるまとまった単位の最 終データがフレームに含まれて 、な 、ものとする。  [0320] The batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 means, when transmitting data in a certain unit, the transmitter 2001, when transmitting a frame including the final data of the certain unit. It is a circuit set as a value. In this embodiment, the abbreviation BL (Block Last) is defined, and in the case where BL is 1, it is a frame including the final data of the certain unit, and in the case where BL is 0, The final data of a certain unit is included in the frame.
[0321] 後述する図 33のシークェンス図においても、同様の意味で BLという略語を用いて いる。また、本実施の形態においては、一括送信最終フラグと表現している力 例え ば通信確認要求フラグなどであっても、本質的には本実施の形態における一括送信 最終フラグと同様の意味を持っため、一括送信最終フラグと必ずしも同一の意味を 持ったフラグでなくても、同様の動作を行うフラグであれば、これに限らない。 [0322] 通し番号生成回路 2005は、予め定められたルールに従って、通し番号を増減し、 各送信フレームに付与する回路である。本実施の形態においては、 SEQ (Sequence number)という略語を定義し、 SEQが 1である場合は、通し番号が 1であることを示し ている。図 33のシークェンス図においても、同様の意味で SEQという略語を用いて いる。 Also in the sequence diagram of FIG. 33 described later, the abbreviation BL is used in the same meaning. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the force expressed as the batch transmission final flag, for example, the communication confirmation request flag, etc., it has essentially the same meaning as the batch transmission final flag in the present embodiment. Therefore, even if the flag does not necessarily have the same meaning as the batch transmission final flag, it is not limited to this as long as the flag performs the same operation. The serial number generation circuit 2005 is a circuit that increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and assigns it to each transmission frame. In this embodiment, the abbreviation SEQ (Sequence number) is defined, and when SEQ is 1, it is indicated that the serial number is 1. Also in the sequence diagram of FIG. 33, the abbreviation of SEQ is used in the same meaning.
[0323] 送信フレーム生成回路 2006は、予め定められたフォーマットにより、送信フレーム を生成する回路である。前述の一括送信最終フラグ BL、通し番号 SEQ、送信データ を予め定められたフォーマットに従って配置し、送信フレームを生成する。なお、本発 明においては、ウィンドウサイズの制限がない通信方式を用いているため、ウィンドウ サイズの制限がないフレームフォーマットでの送信フレームを生成する。例として、 Ir LAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol)における UI (Unnumbered Information)フレ ~~ ムがあげられるがこれに限らない。また、対向局がエラー検出を行うためのエラー検 出符号も合わせて付加される。エラー検出符号としては、例えば CRC (Cyclic Redun dancy Check)などがあるがこれに限らない。また、エラー訂正符号が付加されてもよ い。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2006 is a circuit that generates a transmission frame according to a predetermined format. The above-mentioned batch transmission final flag BL, serial number SEQ, transmission data are arranged according to a predetermined format to generate a transmission frame. Note that, in the present invention, since a communication method without window size limitation is used, a transmission frame in a frame format without window size limitation is generated. Examples include, but are not limited to, unnumbered information (UI) frames in Ir LAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol). In addition, an error detection code is also added to allow the opposite station to detect an error. The error detection code may be, for example, a cyclic redundancy check (CRC), but is not limited to this. Also, an error correction code may be added.
[0324] 送信部 2007は、送信フレーム生成回路 2006によって生成された送信フレームを 送信する回路である。例えば、通信媒体として赤外線を用いるならば、 LED (発光ダ ィオード)や LD (レーザダイオード)となるが、これに限らない。また、他の通信媒体を 用いる場合は、その通信媒体に応じた送信部となる。  The transmitting unit 2007 is a circuit for transmitting the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2006. For example, if infrared light is used as the communication medium, it may be an LED (light emitting diode) or an LD (laser diode), but it is not limited thereto. When another communication medium is used, the transmission unit corresponds to the communication medium.
[0325] 受信部 2008は、対向局が送信したフレームを受信する回路である。例えば、通信 媒体として赤外線を用いるならば、 PD (フォトダイオード)となるが、これに限らない。 また、他の通信媒体を用いる場合は、その通信媒体に応じた受信部となる。  The receiving unit 2008 is a circuit that receives a frame transmitted by the opposite station. For example, if infrared light is used as a communication medium, it becomes PD (photodiode), but it is not limited to this. When another communication medium is used, the reception unit corresponds to the communication medium.
[0326] 受信フレーム解析回路 2009は、受信部 2008により受信した受信フレームの解析 を行う。具体的には、受信フレーム内のエラー無しフラグを抽出し、エラー無しフラグ 解析回路 2010に渡す。また、受信フレーム内の通し番号を抽出し、通し番号解析回 路 2012に渡す。また、受信フレーム内にデータが存在する場合は、データを抽出し 、制御部 2002を介して、メモリ 2003に保存する。なお、メモリ 2003にデータを保存 する場合は、必ずしも制御部 2003を介さなくてもよい。 [0327] エラー無しフラグ解析回路 2010は、予め定められたフォーマットにより対向局に設 定されたエラー無しフラグを解析し、解析結果を制御部に通知する。本実施の形態 では、エラー無しフラグと表現している力 例えばエラーありフラグや再送要求フラグ 、再送要求無しフラグであっても構わない。 The reception frame analysis circuit 2009 analyzes the reception frame received by the reception unit 2008. Specifically, the no-error flag in the received frame is extracted and passed to the no-error flag analysis circuit 2010. Also, it extracts the serial number in the received frame and passes it to the serial number analysis circuit 2012. If data is present in the received frame, the data is extracted and stored in the memory 2003 via the control unit 2002. In the case of storing data in the memory 2003, the control unit 2003 may not necessarily be interposed. No-Error Flag Analysis Circuit 2010 analyzes the no-error flag set in the opposite station according to a predetermined format, and notifies the control unit of the analysis result. In the present embodiment, a force expressed as no error flag, for example, an error flag, a retransmission request flag, or a retransmission request no flag may be used.
[0328] エラー検出回路 2011は、受信フレームに付与されているエラー検出用の符号を解 祈し、受信フレームにエラーがないかどうかを判別し、解析結果を制御部に通知する 。エラー検出用の符号として、例えば、 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)符号などの 巡回符号があげられる力 これに限らない。また、エラー訂正符号が付与されている 場合は、エラー訂正を行うこととなる。  The error detection circuit 2011 interprets the error detection code attached to the received frame, determines whether or not there is an error in the received frame, and notifies the control unit of the analysis result. The code for error detection may be, for example, a cyclic code such as a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) code. If an error correction code is given, error correction will be performed.
[0329] 通し番号解析回路 2012は、受信した通し番号を解析し、解析結果を制御部 2002 に通知する。  [0329] The serial number analysis circuit 2012 analyzes the received serial number and notifies the control unit 2002 of the analysis result.
[0330] 図 32は、本実施の形態に係る受信機 2101のブロック図である。なお、図 32は、受 信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェア であってもハードウ アであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。  [0330] FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a receiver 2101 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0331] 受信機 2101は、対向機器からの送信データを受信する側の機器である。ここでい う送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる力 これに限 らない。  The receiver 2101 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device. The transmission data mentioned here is not limited to this, for example, text data, image data and the like.
[0332] 図 32に示すように、受信機(二次局、サーバ機器) 2101は、制御部(制御手段) 21 02、メモリ(記憶手段) 2103、エラー無しフラグ生成回路 (エラー無しフラグ生成手段 ) 2104、通し番号生成回路 (通し番号生成手段) 2105、送信フレーム生成回路 (送 信フレーム生成手段) 2106、送信部(送信手段) 2107、受信部(受信手段) 2108、 受信フレーム解析回路 (受信フレーム解析手段) 2109、一括送信最終フラグ解析回 路 (一括送信最終フラグ解析手段) 2110、エラー検出回路 (エラー検出手段) 2111 、通し番号解析回路 (通し番号解析手段) 2112を備えて構成されて 、る。  As shown in FIG. 32, a receiver (secondary station, server device) 2101 includes a control unit (control means) 21 02, a memory (storage means) 2103, and no error flag generation circuit (no error flag generation means 2104, serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means) 2105, transmission frame generation circuit (transmission frame generation means) 2106, transmission unit (transmission means) 2107, reception unit (reception means) 2108, reception frame analysis circuit (reception frame analysis Means) 2109, batch transmission final flag analysis circuit (batch transmission final flag analysis means) 2110, error detection circuit (error detection means) 2111, serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means) 2112
[0333] 制御部 2102は、受信機 2101の各構成要素の制御を行う。 The control unit 2102 controls each component of the receiver 2101.
[0334] メモリ 2103〖こは、受信データが蓄えられる。このメモリ 2103は、揮発性のメモリ(例 えば SDRAMなど)であっても、不揮発性のメモリ(例えばフラッシュメモリ、 HDD、 D VDなど)であってもよい。また、図 32では、メモリ 2103は、受信機 2101に配置され ているが、必ずしも受信機 2101内に存在する必要はなぐ受信機 2101の外部メモリ として受信機 2101に接続されて 、ても構わな 、。 The memory 2103 stores the received data. This memory 2103 may be a volatile memory (for example, SDRAM or the like) or a non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD or the like). Also, in FIG. 32, memory 2103 is located in receiver 2101. However, it does not have to be in the receiver 2101 but may be connected to the receiver 2101 as an external memory of the receiver 2101.
[0335] エラー無しフラグ生成回路 2104は、対向局から受信したフレーム内にエラーがあ つたかどうかを対向局に通知するためのエラー無しフラグを予め定められたフォーマ ットにより生成する回路である。本実施の形態では、エラー無しフラグと表現している 力 例えばエラーありフラグや再送要求フラグ、再送要求無しフラグであっても、本質 的には、エラー無しフラグと同様の意味を持っため、エラー無しフラグと同一の意味 を持たないフラグであっても同様の動作をするものであるフラグならばこれに限らない The no-error flag generation circuit 2104 is a circuit that generates an no-error flag according to a predetermined format to notify the opposite station whether or not there is an error in the frame received from the opposite station. . In the present embodiment, even if there is an error flag, for example, an error flag, a retransmission request flag, or a retransmission request no flag, the error flag is essentially the same as the error-free flag. There is no limitation to the flag as long as the flag does not have the same meaning as the no flag but the same operation is performed.
[0336] 通し番号生成回路 2105は、それまでに受信したフレームにエラーが検出された場 合に、対向局に再送要求を行う際に、再送して欲しい通し番号を設定する回路であ る。 [0336] The serial number generation circuit 2105 is a circuit for setting a serial number desired to be retransmitted when making a retransmission request to the opposite station when an error is detected in a frame received so far.
[0337] 送信フレーム生成回路 2106は、前述のエラー無しフラグ、通し番号を予め定めら れたフォーマットに従って配置し、送信フレームを生成する回路である。例として、 IrL AP (Infrared Link Access Protocol)におけ ϋΊ (Unnumbered Information; ~7 ~~ム があげられるがこれに限らな!、。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2106 is a circuit that arranges the above-mentioned no-error flag and serial number according to a predetermined format, and generates a transmission frame. For example, in IrL AP (Infrared Link Access Protocol), there may be mentioned (Unnumbered Information; ~ 7 ~ ~) but it is not limited to this.
[0338] 送信部 2107は、送信フレーム生成回路 2106によって生成された送信フレームを 送信する回路である。例えば、通信媒体として赤外線を用いるならば、 LED (発光ダ ィオード)や LD (レーザダイオード)となるが、これに限らない。また、他の通信媒体を 用いる場合は、その通信媒体に応じた送信部となる。  [0338] The transmitting unit 2107 is a circuit that transmits the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2106. For example, if infrared light is used as the communication medium, it may be an LED (light emitting diode) or an LD (laser diode), but it is not limited thereto. When another communication medium is used, the transmission unit corresponds to the communication medium.
[0339] 受信部 2108は、対向局が送信したフレームを受信する回路である。例えば、通信 媒体として赤外線を用いるならば、 PD (フォトダイオード)となるが、これに限らない。 また、他の通信媒体を用いる場合は、その通信媒体に応じた受信部となる。  [0339] The receiving unit 2108 is a circuit that receives a frame transmitted by the opposite station. For example, if infrared light is used as a communication medium, it becomes PD (photodiode), but it is not limited to this. When another communication medium is used, the reception unit corresponds to the communication medium.
[0340] 受信フレーム解析回路 2109は、受信部 2108により受信した受信フレームの解析 を行う。具体的には、受信フレーム内の一括送信最終フラグを抽出し、一括送信最 終フラグ解析回路に渡す。また、受信フレーム内の通し番号を抽出し、通し番号解析 回路に渡す。また、受信フレーム内にデータが存在する場合は、データを抽出し、制 御部を介して、メモリに保存する。メモリにデータを保存する場合は、必ずしも制御部 を介さなくてもよい。 The reception frame analysis circuit 2109 analyzes the reception frame received by the reception unit 2108. Specifically, the batch transmission final flag in the received frame is extracted and passed to the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit. It also extracts the serial number in the received frame and passes it to the serial number analysis circuit. If data is present in the received frame, the data is extracted and stored in memory via the control unit. When storing data in memory, the controller You do not have to go through.
[0341] 一括送信最終フラグ解析回路 2110は、受信フレーム解析回路 2109により渡され た一括送信最終フラグを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2102に通知する。  The batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 analyzes the batch transmission final flag passed by the reception frame analysis circuit 2109, and notifies the control unit 2102 of the analysis result.
[0342] エラー検出回路 2111は、受信フレームに付与されているエラー検出用の符号を解 祈し、受信フレームにエラーがないかどうかを判別し、解析結果を制御部 2102に通 知する。エラー検出用の符号として、例えば、 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)符号 などの巡回符号があげられるが、これに限らない。また、エラー訂正符号が付与され ている場合は、エラー訂正を行うこととなる。  The error detection circuit 2111 interprets the error detection code attached to the received frame, determines whether or not there is an error in the received frame, and notifies the control unit 2102 of the analysis result. Examples of codes for error detection include, but not limited to, cyclic codes such as cyclic redundancy check (CRC) codes. If an error correction code is given, error correction will be performed.
[0343] 通し番号解析回路 2112は、受信フレーム内に付与されている通し番号が予め定 められたルールによって増減しているかどうかを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2102に 通知する。例えば、通信路において、フレームが抜けた場合などは、この通し番号解 析回路 2112によりエラーと判断される。  The serial number analysis circuit 2112 analyzes whether or not the serial number given in the received frame is increased or decreased according to a predetermined rule, and notifies the control unit 2102 of the analysis result. For example, when a frame is missed in the communication path, the serial number analysis circuit 2112 determines that an error occurs.
[0344] 具体的には、送信フレーム生成回路 2106は、エラー検出回路 2111でデータのェ ラーが検出された場合に、エラー無しフラグをエラー有りに設定して、そのときの受信 フレームの通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成する。また、送信フレーム生成回路 2 106は、エラー検出回路 2111ではデータのエラーが検出されな力つた力 通し番号 解析回路 2112において通し番号のエラーが検出された場合、そのときの受信フレ ームの通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成する。  Specifically, when the error detection circuit 2111 detects an error in data, the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 sets an error-free flag to an error, and the serial number of the reception frame at that time is set. Generate a transmission frame that contains. In addition, transmission frame generation circuit 2 106 includes the serial number of the received frame at that time when an error of serial number is detected in error serial number analysis circuit 2112 in which error of data is not detected in error detection circuit 2111. Generate a transmission frame.
[0345] つづいて、図 31、図 32、および図 33のシークェンス図を参照しながら、本実施の 形態における各信号の流れを説明する。  [0345] Subsequently, the flow of each signal in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams of FIG. 31, FIG. 32, and FIG.
[0346] 送信機 2001は、自機器内もしくは外部から送信データの転送要求が発生すると、 制御部 2002がー括で送信するデータのサイズを定め、一括送信最終フラグ生成回 路 2003に通知する。  [0346] The transmitter 2001 determines the size of data to be transmitted by the control unit 2002 when a transfer request for transmission data is generated from the own device or from outside, and notifies the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2003 of the size.
[0347] 一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2003は、前記一括送信データサイズを内部に保持 し、制御部 2002もしくはメモリ 2003から渡されるデータのサイズの累計を計算し、累 計データサイズが、前記一括送信データサイズに達したならば、一括送信最終フラグ を予め定められたフォーマットにより最終の意味 (BL= 1)と設定し、また、前記一括 送信データサイズに達して 、な 、ならば、最終でな!、意味 (BL = 0)と設定し、送信 フレーム生成回路 2005に渡す。また、制御部 2002は、フレームを生成するごとに、 通し番号生成回路 2004に通し番号を生成するように通知する。 The batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2003 internally holds the batch transmission data size, calculates the total size of the data passed from the control unit 2002 or the memory 2003, and the cumulative data size is the batch transmission. If the data size is reached, the batch transmission final flag is set to the final meaning (BL = 1) according to a predetermined format, and the batch transmission data size is reached, if it is the last !, Set as meaning (BL = 0) and send Pass it to the frame generation circuit 2005. The control unit 2002 also notifies the serial number generation circuit 2004 to generate a serial number each time a frame is generated.
[0348] これを受けた通し番号生成回路 2004は、予め定められたルールにより通し番号を 増減し、送信フレーム生成回路 2005に渡す。  Upon receiving this, serial number generation circuit 2004 increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and passes it to transmission frame generation circuit 2005.
[0349] 送信フレーム生成回路 2005は、前記の一括送信最終フラグ、通し番号、データを 予め定められたフォーマットにより配置し、送信部 2006を介して送信する。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2005 arranges the batch transmission final flag, the serial number, and the data in a predetermined format, and transmits the data through the transmission unit 2006.
[0350] 図 33においては、 tl01、 tl02、 tl03、 tl04、 tl 10がー括送信最終フラグが最終 でないフレームであり、 tl05、 ti l lがー括送信最終フラグが最終のフレームである。 また、 tl01、 tl02、 tl03、 tl04、 tl05の各フレーム内の通し番号(SEQ)は、本実 施の形態にぉ 、ては、 1ずつ増えて 、くものとして記述して 、る。  [0350] In FIG. 33, tl01, tl02, tl03, tl04, tl10 is a frame whose final transmission final flag is not final, and tl05, til is a final transmission final flag. Also, the serial numbers (SEQs) in each frame of tl01, tl02, tl03, tl04, and tl05 are described in the present embodiment as increasing by one, and as a specific item.
[0351] 受信機 2101では、対向局力もフレームを受信部 2108を介して受信すると、受信フ レーム解析回路 2109にて受信フレーム内の各パラメータを抽出する。前記パラメ一 タとは、例えば一括送信最終フラグ、通し番号、データなどであり、一括送信最終フラ グは、一括送信最終フラグ解析回路 2110に渡され、通し番号は通し番号解析回路 2112に渡され、データは、必要ならば、制御部 2102を介して、メモリ 2103に保存さ れる。  In the receiver 2101, when the opposite station also receives a frame via the reception unit 2108, the reception frame analysis circuit 2109 extracts each parameter in the reception frame. The parameters are, for example, a batch transmission final flag, a serial number, data, etc. The batch transmission final flag is passed to the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110, and the serial number is passed to the serial number analysis circuit 2112. If necessary, they are stored in the memory 2103 via the control unit 2102.
[0352] また、同時にエラー検出回路 2111により、受信フレームにて、例えば CRCエラー がな 、かどうかのエラー検出が行われる。エラー検出もしくはエラー訂正符号が CRC 符号以外の場合は、それに従ったエラー検出もしくはエラー訂正が行われる。  At the same time, the error detection circuit 2111 performs error detection as to whether or not there is, for example, a CRC error in the received frame. If the error detection or error correction code is not a CRC code, error detection or error correction is performed accordingly.
[0353] また、一括送信最終フラグ解析回路 2110では、一括送信最終フラグの解析を行!ヽ 、解析結果を通知する。  In addition, the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 analyzes the batch transmission final flag, and notifies the analysis result.
[0354] 図 33のシークェンス図においては、 tl l3, tl l4, tl l5、 tl21のフレーム受信時 は、一括送信最終フラグは最終でなぐ tl l6、 tl22のフレーム受信時は、一括送信 最終フラグを最終としてそれぞれ制御部 2102に通知される。  [0354] In the sequence diagram of FIG. 33, when receiving frames of tl l3, tl l4, tl l5, tl21, the batch transmission final flag is the last. When receiving frames of tl l6, tl22, the batch transmission final flag is Each is notified to the control unit 2102 as the final.
[0355] また、通し番号解析回路 2112においては、受信フレーム中の通し番号が予め定め られたルールに従って、増減されているかどうかを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2102 に通知する。本実施の形態では、前記予め定められたルールとして通し番号はフレ ームごとに 1ずつ増加することとしている。 [0356] 図 33のシークェンス図では、送信機 2001が送信した通し番号 3のフレームが通信 路の異常により、受信機 2102において認識されず、次の通し番号 4のフレームを受 信した場合を示している。この場合は、通し番号 3のフレームがエラーが起きたフレー ムとして制御部 2102に通知される。 [0355] Further, serial number analysis circuit 2112 analyzes whether serial numbers in the received frame are increased or decreased according to a predetermined rule, and notifies analysis result to control unit 2102. In the present embodiment, as the predetermined rule, the serial number is incremented by one for each frame. The sequence diagram of FIG. 33 shows the case where the frame of serial number 3 transmitted by the transmitter 2001 is not recognized by the receiver 2102 due to a channel abnormality, and the next frame of serial number 4 is received. . In this case, the frame of serial number 3 is notified to the control unit 2102 as a frame in which an error has occurred.
[0357] 制御部 2102では、一括送信最終フラグが最終を意味するフレームを受信したこと を通知され、またエラーが起きたフレームとして通し番号 3が通知されているため、ェ ラー無しフラグ生成回路 2104に対して、エラーありを、また通し番号生成回路 2105 に対して、通し番号 3をそれぞれ通知し、送信フレーム生成回路 2106に送信フレー ムを生成するように通知する。  [0357] In control unit 2102, since the batch transmission final flag is notified that a frame meaning final is received, and serial number 3 is notified as a frame in which an error has occurred, errorless flag generation circuit 2104 is notified. On the other hand, the presence of an error is notified to serial number generation circuit 2105 and serial number 3 is notified, and transmission frame generation circuit 2106 is notified to generate a transmission frame.
[0358] これを受けたエラー無しフラグ生成回路 2104は、予め定められたフォーマットによ りエラーありの意味を示すフラグを生成し、送信フレーム生成回路 2106に渡す。  [0358] Upon receiving this, the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 generates a flag indicating the presence of an error according to a predetermined format, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
[0359] また、通し番号生成回路 2105は、制御部 2102より渡された通し番号 3を送信フレ ーム生成回路 2106に渡す。  [0359] Further, the serial number generation circuit 2105 transfers the serial number 3 passed from the control unit 2102 to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
[0360] これらのエラー無しフラグおよび通し番号を渡された送信フレーム生成回路 2106 は、予め定められたフォーマットによりこれらのパラメータを配置し、送信部 2107を介 して送信する。図 33のシークェンス図においては、 tl 17のフレームを指している。  [0360] The transmission frame generation circuit 2106 to which these error free flags and serial numbers are passed arranges these parameters according to a predetermined format, and transmits the parameters via the transmission unit 2107. In the sequence diagram of FIG. 33, the frame of tl 17 is pointed.
[0361] tl l7のフレームを tl06に受信部 2008を介して受信した送信機 2001は、受信フ レーム解析回路 2009にて、受信フレーム中の各パラメータの抽出を行い、抽出され たエラー無しフラグはエラー無しフラグ解析回路 2010へ、また通し番号は通し番号 解析回路 2012へそれぞれ渡す。  The transmitter 2001 which has received the frame of tl 1 7 at tl 06 through the receiving unit 2008 performs extraction of each parameter in the reception frame in the reception frame analysis circuit 2009, and the extracted no error flag is The error-free flag analysis circuit 2010 is passed on, and the serial number is passed on to the serial number analysis circuit 2012.
[0362] エラー無しフラグ解析回路 2010では、渡されたエラー無しフラグの解析を行う。こ の場合、受信機 2101が送信した tl 17のフレームはエラーありを示しているため、ェ ラーありとして解析され、その旨を制御部 2002へ通知する。  No Error Flag Analysis Circuit 2010 analyzes the passed no error flag. In this case, since the frame of tl 17 transmitted by the receiver 2101 indicates that there is an error, it is analyzed as having an error, and the control unit 2002 is notified of that.
[0363] また、通し番号解析回路 2012では、通し番号の解析を行い、解析結果を制御部 2 002へと通知する。この場合、通し番号 3が制御部 2002へ通知される。  The serial number analysis circuit 2012 analyzes the serial number and notifies the control unit 2 002 of the analysis result. In this case, the serial number 3 is notified to the control unit 2002.
[0364] また、同時にエラー検出回路 2011により、受信フレームにて、例えば CRCエラー がな 、かどうかのエラー検出が行われる。エラー検出もしくはエラー訂正符号が CRC 符号以外の場合は、それに従ったエラー検出もしくはエラー訂正が行われる。 [0365] 制御部 2002は、前述のエラー無しフラグの解析結果、通し番号、エラー検出結果 により、受信機 2101に正常に一括送信が行えたかどうかを判断し、送信データに未 送信の部分があるならば、それらのデータを一括送信する力 もしくはすでに送信し たデータの再送を行うかどうかを判断する。この場合、エラーがあり、通し番号が 3の フレームからの送信を受信機 2101が要求していると判断されるため、送信データを 前回の送信時において通し番号が 3の部分から、再送を行うようにする。具体的には 、一括送信最終フラグ回路 2004に再送を行う旨を通知するとともに、通し番号生成 回路 2005には開始番号として 3を通知する。 At the same time, the error detection circuit 2011 performs error detection as to whether or not there is, for example, a CRC error in the received frame. If the error detection or error correction code is not a CRC code, error detection or error correction is performed accordingly. [0365] Control section 2002 determines whether or not batch transmission can be normally performed by receiver 2101 based on the above analysis result of no error flag, serial number, and error detection result, and if there is an unsent portion in the transmission data For example, it is determined whether to transmit the data in a batch or to retransmit the data that has already been transmitted. In this case, it is determined that the receiver 2101 requests transmission from the frame with serial number 3 because there is an error, so that the transmission data is retransmitted from the part with serial number 3 at the previous transmission time. Do. Specifically, the batch transmission final flag circuit 2004 is notified that retransmission is to be performed, and the serial number generation circuit 2005 is notified of 3 as the start number.
[0366] 一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2004では、必要なら一括送信データサイズの再計 算を行う。前回の一括送信データサイズと同じ値を用いてもよいし、また、前回の一 括送信最終フラグを最終と意味するフレームを送信した際のフレームの通し番号で 一括送信最終フラグを最終としてもよい。具体的には、 1回目の一括送信にて、通し 番号が 1から 5のフレームを送信した際に、受信機力 通し番号 3からのフレームの再 送要求を受信した場合に、 2回目の一括送信において、通し番号 3から 7の一括送信 を行ってもょ 、し、通し番号 3から 5の一括送信を行ってもょ 、と 、うことである。  Batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 recalculates the batch transmission data size, if necessary. The same value as the previous batch transmission data size may be used, or the batch transmission last flag may be the last with the serial number of the frame when transmitting the frame meaning the last batch transmission final flag as the final. Specifically, when a frame with a serial number of 1 to 5 is transmitted in the first batch transmission, and a frame retransmission request from the receiver power serial number 3 is received, the second batch transmission is performed. In the above, it is recommended that the batch transmission of serial numbers 3 to 7 be performed, and that the batch transmission of serial numbers 3 to 5 be performed.
[0367] 通し番号生成回路 2005では、制御部 2002から通し番号 3からの再送を通知され ると、通し番号の開始番号を 3に再設定し、送信フレーム生成回路 2006へと渡す。  [0367] In serial number generation circuit 2005, when notified of retransmission from serial number 3 from control unit 2002, the start number of the serial number is reset to 3 and is passed to transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
[0368] 送信フレーム生成回路 2006は、送信フレームを生成し、送信部 2007を介して送 信する。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2006 generates a transmission frame, and transmits the transmission frame via the transmission unit 2007.
[0369] これらの再送の様子が、図 33の tl 17、 tl l0、 ti l lである。  [0369] The state of these retransmissions is tl17, tl10, and ti1ll in FIG.
[0370] これらの再送フレームを受信した受信機 2101は、エラー検出回路 2111および通 し番号解析回路 2112にてすべての受信フレームにエラーがないと判断されると、一 括送信最終フラグが最終を意味しているフレーム tl22を受信した後、制御部 2102 は、エラー無しフラグ生成回路 2104にエラー無しの通知をする。  [0370] The receiver 2101 having received these retransmission frames determines that the error detection circuit 2111 and the pass number analysis circuit 2112 indicate that there is no error in all the received frames, the final transmission final flag indicates the end. After receiving the frame tl22, the control unit 2102 notifies the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 that there is no error.
[0371] エラー無しフラグ生成回路 2104はこれを受けて、エラー無しフラグをエラー無しの 意味として設定し、送信フレーム生成回路 2106に渡す。  In response to this, the no-error flag generation circuit 2104 sets the no-error flag as a meaning of no error, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
[0372] 送信フレーム生成回路 2106はこれを受けて、エラー無しフラグをフレーム内に配 置し、送信部 2107を介して送信する。このときの通し番号については、説明を省略 する。 Receiving this, the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 places an error-free flag in the frame, and transmits it via the transmission unit 2107. Explanation of serial number at this time is omitted Do.
[0373] このエラー無しフラグがエラー無しを示すフレームを tl 12にて受信した送信機 200 1では、エラー無しフラグ解析回路 2010にて、エラー無しと判断され、制御部 2002 へと通知されると、一括送信が成功したことを制御部 2002が認識し、送信データに 未送信のデータがある場合は、引き続き一括送信を行うことが可能となる。  When the transmitter 2001 having received the frame indicating that there is no error in this error free flag at tl 12 is that the error free flag analysis circuit 2010 determines that there is no error and notifies the control unit 2002 When the control unit 2002 recognizes that the batch transmission has succeeded and there is unsent data in the transmission data, it is possible to continue the batch transmission.
[0374] 以上のように、送信機 2001および受信機 2101によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限 のな 、フレームを用いた通信方式にぉ 、ても、エラー発生時には再送処理を行うこと が可能となり、信頼性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0374] As described above, according to the transmitter 2001 and the receiver 2101, even if it is a communication method using a frame without limitation of window size, it is possible to perform retransmission processing when an error occurs, It becomes possible to perform reliable communication.
[0375] また、送信機 2001において、受信機 2101から、エラー無しフラグがエラーありを意 味する再送要求を受信したときに、同時に受信した通し番号からの再送を行うのでは なぐ送信データの開始力 の再送を行ってもよい。  [0375] Also, in the transmitter 2001, when receiving a retransmission request from the receiver 2101 indicating that there is an error, from the receiver 2101, it is not possible to perform retransmission from the received serial number at the same time. May be resent.
[0376] また、送信データの最初からの再送を行う場合は、付与される通し番号は予め定め られたルールによる初期値から (例えば、本実施の形態では 0から)送信されるのが 望ましい。  [0376] When retransmission of transmission data is to be performed from the beginning, it is desirable that the assigned serial number be transmitted from an initial value according to a predetermined rule (for example, from 0 in this embodiment).
[0377] また、送信データの再送を行う場合、再送回数に制限を設け、予め定められた値よ りも多くの再送を行っても、受信機 2101に正常に一括送信できない場合は、送信を 中断もしくは終了するようにしてもよい。こうすることで、通信路の品質が極端に悪い 場合、通信を中断もしくは終了しユーザに通知することが可能となり、品質の向上し た通信路での通信を行うことが可能となる、  [0377] Also, when retransmission of transmission data is performed, if the number of retransmissions is limited and retransmission is performed more than a predetermined value, transmission can not be normally performed to the receiver 2101. It may be interrupted or terminated. In this way, when the quality of the communication path is extremely poor, it is possible to interrupt or terminate the communication and notify the user, and it is possible to perform communication on the communication path with improved quality.
また、再送回数の制限を例えば 1回とした場合、カウンタではなぐフラグでの処理 も可能となり、回路の簡略化へとつながる。  Also, if the number of retransmissions is limited, for example, once, the counter can also process with flags that are not, which leads to simplification of the circuit.
[0378] また、受信機 2101からの再送要求での通し番号からの再送においても、再送回数 に制限を設けることで、通信路の品質が悪い場合に、送信を中断もしくは終了し、ュ 一ザに通知することで、通信路の品質が向上する可能性がある。  [0378] Also, even in the case of retransmission from the serial number in the retransmission request from the receiver 2101, by limiting the number of retransmissions, transmission may be interrupted or terminated if the quality of the communication path is poor. The notification may improve the quality of the communication path.
[0379] また、前記と同様、再送回数を例えば 1回とした場合、カウンタでなぐフラグでの処 理も可能となり、回路の簡略化へとつながる。  [0379] As described above, when the number of times of retransmission is one, for example, processing with flags that are napped with a counter becomes possible, which leads to simplification of the circuit.
[0380] また、送信機 2001は、一括送信データサイズを 1フレーム長とし、全てのフレーム において、一括送信最終フラグが最終となるようにしてもよい。この場合、全てのフレ ームにおいて、受信機 2101からの応答が必要となり、通信効率は低下するが、送信 機 2001が受信機 2101からの再送要求に対して、保持しておくべきデータの保存領 域を少なくすることが可能となり、メモリの確保が十分にできないような送信機 2001に おいては有効となる。 [0380] Further, the transmitter 2001 may set the batch transmission data size to one frame length, and the batch transmission final flag may be final in all the frames. In this case, all In the communication system, the response from the receiver 2101 is required, and the communication efficiency decreases. However, the transmitter 2001 should reduce the storage area of data to be held in response to the retransmission request from the receiver 2101. This is effective in the transmitter 2001 where the memory can not be sufficiently secured.
[0381] また、受信機 2101において、エラー検出回路 2111および通し番号検出回路 211 2により、受信フレームにエラーがあることが検出された場合、制御部 2102は、一括 送信最終フラグ解析回路 2110により、一括送信最終フラグが最終のフレームを受信 し、送信機 2001に再送を要求するまでのデータは、送信機 2001により再送される 予定のデータであることから、その間のデータをメモリ 2103に保存する処理を行わな いとしてもよい。こうすることにより、再送による再受信の予定のあるデータの保存にか 力る消費電力の削減につながる。  Further, in the receiver 2101, when the error detection circuit 2111 and the serial number detection circuit 211 2 detect that there is an error in the received frame, the control unit 2102 causes the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 to batch Since the data until the transmission final flag receives the final frame and requests the transmitter 2001 to retransmit is the data to be retransmitted by the transmitter 2001, processing for storing the data in the meantime in the memory 2103 is You may not do this. By doing this, it is possible to reduce power consumption for storing data that is scheduled to be re-received by retransmission.
[0382] また、受信機 2101において、送信機 2001からの受信フレームにエラーが検出さ れたときに行う再送要求の回数に制限を設け、予め定められた値よりも多くの再送要 求を行っても、受信機 2101において、正常に一括受信できない場合は、受信を中 断もしくは終了するようにしてもよい。こうすることで、通信路の品質が極端に悪い場 合、通信を中断もしくは終了しユーザに通知することが可能となり、品質の向上した 通信路での通信を行うことが可能となる。  Also, in the receiver 2101, a restriction is placed on the number of retransmission requests to be made when an error is detected in the received frame from the transmitter 2001, and more retransmission requests than a predetermined value are made. However, if the receiver 2101 can not perform batch reception normally, reception may be interrupted or terminated. In this way, when the quality of the communication path is extremely poor, it is possible to interrupt or terminate the communication and notify the user, and it is possible to perform communication on the communication path with improved quality.
[0383] また、再送要求回数の制限を例えば 1回とした場合、カウンタではなぐフラグでの 処理も可能となり、回路の簡略化へとつながる。  Also, if the number of retransmission requests is limited, for example, to one, processing with flags that are not available on the counter is also possible, leading to simplification of the circuit.
[0384] また、受信機 2101において、送信機 2001からの受信フレームにエラーが検出さ れたときに行う再送要求において、通し番号生成回路 2105に予め定められた初期 値 (例えば、本実施の形態では 0)を常に設定して、送信機 2001に再送要求フレー ムを送信してもよい。こうすることで、エラーが検出された場合の再送要求のための通 し番号を保持しておく必要がなり、回路の簡略ィ匕につながる。  Also, in the retransmission request to be made when an error is detected in the received frame from transmitter 2001 in receiver 2101, an initial value predetermined in serial number generation circuit 2105 (for example, in the present embodiment) The retransmission request frame may be transmitted to the transmitter 2001 by setting 0) at all times. By doing this, it is necessary to hold the serial number for the retransmission request when an error is detected, which leads to simplification of the circuit.
[0385] 〔実施の第五形態〕  [Fifth Embodiment of the Implementation]
本実施の第五形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 32、図 34から図 36に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態 において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実 施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。 The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are to be regarded as true unless otherwise stated. Also in the embodiment, it shall be used according to the definition.
[0386] 本実施の形態では、送信機のブロック図として図 34、受信機のブロック図として図 3 2、信号のシークェンス図として図 35および図 36を用いて説明する。  This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34 as a block diagram of a transmitter, FIG. 32 as a block diagram of a receiver, and FIGS. 35 and 36 as signal sequence diagrams.
[0387] 図 34は、本実施の形態における送信機 2201のブロック図である。なお、図 34は、 送信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトゥェ ァであってもハードウェアであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。  FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2201 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 shows an example of the configuration of the transmitter, and the present invention is not limited to this. Further, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0388] 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2201は、送信データを送信する側の機器であ る。ここでいう送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる 力 これに限らない。また、タイマ (計時手段) 2213以外の各構成要素は、上述した 実施の第四形態における送信機 2001 (図 31)の各構成要素と同一の機能を持った め、説明は省略する。  [0388] Transmitter (Primary station, client device) 2201 is a device that transmits transmission data. The transmission data mentioned here may be, for example, text data, image data and the like. Further, each component other than timer (clocking means) 2213 has the same function as each component of transmitter 2001 (FIG. 31) in the fourth embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.
[0389] タイマ 2213は、制御部 2002によって制御される。具体的には、一括送信最終フラ グを最終として送信を行った後、制御部 2002によりスタートされ、予め定められた時 間以内に、受信機 2101より応答フレームを正常受信しない場合、制御部 2002にタ ィムアウトを通知する。  The timer 2213 is controlled by the control unit 2002. Specifically, after transmission is performed with the batch transmission final flag as the final, the control unit 2002 is started, and when a response frame is not normally received from the receiver 2101 within a predetermined time, the control unit 2002 Informing time out.
[0390] このタイムアウトの通知を受けた制御部 2002は、通信路の異常により、直前に送信 した一括送信最終フラグが最終を示すフレームが受信機 2101にて正常に受信でき ていない(図 35の t205のフレーム)、もしくは、直前に送信した一括送信最終フラグ が最終を示すフレームは受信機にて正常に受信できているが、それに対して受信機 力も送信されたエラー無しフラグを含むフレームが通信路の異常により、送信機にて 正常に受信できていない(図 36の t312のフレーム)と判断し、一括送信最終フラグ 生成回路 2004、通し番号生成回路 2005、送信フレーム生成回路 2006にそれぞれ 通知する。  Having received this timeout notification, the control unit 2002 can not normally receive, at the receiver 2101, a frame whose last flag is the last in the batch transmission final flag transmitted immediately before due to an abnormality in the communication path (FIG. 35). (a frame of t205) or a frame whose last indication sent by the last transmission final flag transmitted immediately before is successfully received by the receiver, but a frame including the error-free flag to which the receiver power is also transmitted is communicated Due to the abnormality of the path, it is judged that the transmitter can not normally receive (frame of t312 in FIG. 36), and the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004, the serial number generation circuit 2005, and the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 are notified.
[0391] 前記通知を受けた一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2004は、一括送信最終フラグを 最終とし、送信フレーム生成回路 2006に渡す。  The batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 that has received the notification sets the batch transmission final flag as the final, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
[0392] また、前記通知を受けた通し番号生成回路 2005は、直前のフレームの通し番号を 再度設定して送信フレーム生成回路 2006に渡す。 Also, the serial number generation circuit 2005 that has received the notification re-sets the serial number of the immediately preceding frame and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
[0393] これらを受けた送信フレーム生成回路 2006は、直前に送信したフレームと同一の データを再度設定し、また、前記一括送信最終フラグおよび通し番号を設定し、送信 部 2007を介して送信する。 [0393] Upon receiving these, the transmission frame generation circuit 2006 receives the same frame as the frame transmitted immediately before. The data is set again, and the batch transmission final flag and the serial number are set and transmitted via the transmission unit 2007.
[0394] 以上のように、送信機 2201が構成されることにより、一括送信最終フラグが最終を 意味するフレームの再送信が可能となり、通信路の品質が悪い状態でも、再送処理 を行うことが可能となり、信頼性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。  As described above, by the transmitter 2201 being configured, it is possible to retransmit a frame whose batch transmission final flag means the final, and even if the quality of the communication path is poor, the retransmission processing may be performed. It becomes possible to perform reliable communication.
[0395] また、一括送信最終フラグが最終のフレームの再送を行う場合、再送回数に制限を 設け、予め定められた値よりも多くの再送を行っても、受信機 2101に正常に一括送 信できない場合は、送信を中断もしくは終了するようにしてもよい。こうすることで、通 信路の品質が極端に悪い場合、通信を中断もしくは終了しユーザに通知することが 可能となり、品質の向上した通信路での通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0395] Also, when the batch transmission final flag retransmits the final frame, the number of retransmissions is limited, and even if the number of retransmissions is larger than a predetermined value, batch transmission is normally performed to the receiver 2101. If this can not be done, the transmission may be interrupted or terminated. In this way, when the quality of the communication path is extremely poor, it is possible to interrupt or terminate the communication and notify the user, and it is possible to perform communication on the communication path with improved quality.
[0396] また、図 36のシークェンス図に示すように、一括送信最終フラグが最終を示す値と なっている t311のフレームに対して、返信フレーム t312を送信したにもかかわらず、 通信路に異常があり、返信フレーム t312が送信機にて正常に受信できな力つた場 合に、再び一括送信最終フラグが最終を示す値となっているフレーム t313を受信す る場合がある。  Also, as shown in the sequence diagram of FIG. 36, although the reply frame t312 is transmitted to the frame of t311 for which the batch transmission final flag is the value indicating the final, the communication path is abnormal. When the reply frame t312 can not be received normally by the transmitter, the frame t313 may be received again with the batch transmission final flag indicating the final value.
[0397] このような場合においては、受信機 2101では、制御部 2102において、直前の通し 番号を保持しておき、一括送信最終フラグ解析回路 2110にて、一括送信最終フラ グが最終のフレームを受信した通知を受けたときに、通し番号解析回路 2112からの 通し番号が直前の通し番号と同一であった場合は、通し番号解析回路 2112の解析 結果がエラーであったとしても、エラーとして処理を行わず、制御部 2102は、エラー 無しフラグ生成回路 2104に直前に送信したフレームと同一の値を設定し、また通し 番号生成回路 2105に同じく直前に送信したフレームの通し番号を設定し、送信する こととなる。エラー無しフラグ生成回路 2104にて設定される値がエラー無しを示して いるならば、通し番号は設定されなくてもよい。  In such a case, in the receiver 2101, the control unit 2102 holds the immediately preceding serial number, and the batch transmission final flag analysis circuit 2110 allows the batch transmission final flag to be the final frame. When the received notification is received, if the serial number from the serial number analysis circuit 2112 is the same as the previous serial number, even if the analysis result of the serial number analysis circuit 2112 is an error, no processing is performed as an error. The control unit 2102 sets the same value as the frame transmitted immediately before in the no-error flag generation circuit 2104, and also sets the serial number of the frame transmitted immediately before in the serial number generation circuit 2105 and transmits it. If the value set in the no error flag generation circuit 2104 indicates no error, the serial number may not be set.
[0398] こうすることで、通信路の品質が悪ぐ受信機の送信したフレームを送信機が正常 に受信できない場合でも、受信機力 のフレームの再送を行うことが可能となり、信頼 性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0398] In this way, even when the transmitter can not normally receive the frame transmitted by the receiver whose channel quality is poor, it is possible to retransmit the frame of the receiver power, and the reliability is high. It is possible to communicate.
[0399] また、受信機 2101では、上記のように一括送信最終フラグが最終を示し、かつ同 一の通し番号を持ったフレームを複数受信した場合は、 2つめ以降のフレームにつ いては、フレーム内データはすでにメモリ内に保存されているため、改めて保存しな いように、制御部 2102において制御してもよい。こうすることで、データの保存にかか る電力の消費を削減することが可能となる。 [0399] Further, in the receiver 2101, the batch transmission final flag indicates the final as described above, and the same When a plurality of frames having the same serial number is received, in the second and subsequent frames, since the in-frame data is already stored in the memory, the control unit 2102 does not store it again. You may control. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the power consumption for data storage.
[0400] 〔実施の第六形態〕  Sixth Embodiment of the Embodiment
本実施の第六形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 37から図 39に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態におい て定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形 態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
[0401] 本実施の形態では、送信機のブロック図として図 37、受信機のブロック図として図 3 8、信号のシークェンス図として図 39を用いて説明する。  This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37 as a block diagram of a transmitter, FIG. 38 as a block diagram of a receiver, and FIG. 39 as a signal sequence diagram.
[0402] 図 37は、本実施の形態に係る送信機 2301のブロック図である。なお、図 37は、送 信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェア であってもハードウ アであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。  [0402] FIG. 37 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2301 according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 37 is an example of the configuration of the transmitter, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0403] 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2301は、送信データを送信する側の機器であ る。ここでいう送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる 力 これに限らない。また、対向局バッファサイズ解析回路 (対向局バッファサイズ解 析手段) 2313以外の各構成要素は、上述した実施の第四形態における送信機 200 1 (図 31)の各構成要素と同一の機能を持っため、説明は省略する。  Transmitter (Primary Station, Client Device) 2301 is a device that transmits transmission data. The transmission data mentioned here may be, for example, text data, image data and the like. Also, each component other than the opposite station buffer size analysis circuit (opposite station buffer size analysis means) 2313 has the same function as each component of the transmitter 200 1 (FIG. 31) in the fourth embodiment described above. Description is omitted because it has.
[0404] 対向局バッファサイズ解析回路 2313は、受信機 2401 (図 38)力も受信したフレー ム内に含まれるバッファサイズパラメータを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2002に通知 する。  [0404] The opposing station buffer size analysis circuit 2313 analyzes buffer size parameters included in the received frame of the receiver 2401 (Fig. 38), and notifies the control unit 2002 of the analysis result.
[0405] 制御部 2002は、これを受けて一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2004に対して、一括 送信データサイズを、受信機 2401のバッファサイズよりも小さな値に設定し、一括送 信を行う。この受信機のバッファサイズは、一括送信を行う前に受信した方が望まし い。  In response to this, the control unit 2002 sets the batch transmission data size to a value smaller than the buffer size of the receiver 2401 to the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004, and performs batch transmission. The receiver's buffer size should be received before batch transmission.
[0406] 図 38は、本実施の形態に係る受信機 2401のブロック図である。なお、図 38は、受 信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェア であってもハードウ アであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。 [0406] FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a receiver 2401 according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 38 is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this. Also, each component circuit is software It may be hardware or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0407] 受信機 (二次局、サーバ機器) 2401は、対向機器からの送信データを受信する側 の機器である。ここでいう送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどが あげられるが、これに限らない。また、バッファサイズ生成回路 (バッファサイズ生成手 段) 2413以外の各構成要素は、上述した実施の第四形態における受信機 2101 (図 32)の各構成要素と同一の機能を持っため、説明は省略する。  [0407] Receiver (Secondary station, server device) 2401 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device. Examples of transmission data as used herein include, but are not limited to, text data and image data. In addition, each component other than the buffer size generation circuit (buffer size generation means) 2413 has the same function as each component of the receiver 2101 (FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment described above, I omit it.
[0408] 制御部 2102は、受信機 2401がー括で受信可能なバッファのサイズをバッファサイ ズ生成回路 2413に渡す。  The control unit 2102 passes the size of the buffer that can be received by the receiver 2401 to the buffer size generation circuit 2413.
[0409] バッファサイズ生成回路 2413は、制御部 2102から渡されたバッファサイズを予め 定められたフォーマットにより生成し、送信フレーム生成回路 2106に渡す。  The buffer size generation circuit 2413 generates the buffer size passed from the control unit 2102 according to a predetermined format, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
[0410] 送信フレーム生成回路 2106は、前記バッファサイズを送信フレーム内に配置し、 送信を行う。なお、前記バッファサイズを含むフレームは、一括送信を送信機が行う 前に、送信機に対して送信するのが望ましぐ例えば接続時に送信されるフレーム内 に前記バッファサイズを配置して送信するのが望ましいが、これに限らない。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2106 arranges the buffer size in the transmission frame and performs transmission. It is to be noted that the frame including the buffer size is preferably transmitted before the transmitter performs batch transmission, for example, the buffer size is arranged and transmitted in a frame transmitted at the time of connection. Is desirable but not limited to.
[0411] つづいて、図 39のシークェンス図を参照しながら、本実施の形態における各信号 の流れを説明する。  Next, the flow of each signal in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the sequence diagram of FIG.
[0412] 受信機 2401の制御部 2102は、例えば接続時に、バッファサイズ生成回路 2413 に対して、受信機 2101がー括で受信可能なバッファサイズを通知する。  At the time of connection, for example, the control unit 2102 of the receiver 2401 notifies the buffer size generation circuit 2413 of the buffer size that can be received by the receiver 2101 in brief.
[0413] これを受けたバッファサイズ生成回路 2413は、予め定められたフォーマットにより、 ノ ッファサイズパラメータを生成し、送信フレーム生成回路 2106に渡す。 [0413] Upon receiving this, buffer size generation circuit 2413 generates a knob size parameter according to a predetermined format, and passes it to transmission frame generation circuit 2106.
[0414] これを受けた送信フレーム生成回路 2106は、予め定められたフォーマットにより、 前記バッファサイズパラメータを送信フレーム内に配置し、送信する。これが図 39の tUpon receiving this, the transmission frame generation circuit 2106 arranges the buffer size parameter in the transmission frame according to a predetermined format, and transmits it. This is t in Figure 39.
408のフレームである。 There are 408 frames.
[0415] 送信機 2301力 ¾401にて、受信機 2401のバッファサイズパラメータを含むフレーム を受信すると、受信フレーム解析回路 2009にて、ノ ッファサイズパラメータが抽出さ れ、対向局バッファサイズ解析回路 2313に渡される。  When a frame including the buffer size parameter of the receiver 2401 is received by the transmitter 2301, the reception frame analysis circuit 2009 extracts the knocker size parameter, and the opposite station buffer size analysis circuit 2313 Passed to
[0416] 対向局バッファサイズ解析回路 2313では、ノ ッファサイズパラメータを解析し、解 析結果を制御部 2002に通知する。 [0417] 制御部 2002は、解析されたバッファサイズ以下のサイズを一括送信データサイズと して設定し、一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2004へと渡す。 The opposing station buffer size analysis circuit 2313 analyzes the buffer size parameter and notifies the control unit 2002 of the analysis result. The control unit 2002 sets a size equal to or less than the analyzed buffer size as the batch transmission data size, and passes the size to the batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004.
[0418] 一括送信最終フラグ生成回路 2004は、制御部 2002より渡された一括送信データ サイズを元に、一括送信最終フラグを設定し、一括送信を行う。  The batch transmission final flag generation circuit 2004 sets the batch transmission final flag based on the batch transmission data size passed from the control unit 2002, and performs batch transmission.
[0419] 上記のようにすることで、受信機 2401がー括で受信可能なバッファサイズを送信機 2301に通知することが可能となり、また送信機 2301により、受信機 2401からの一括 受信可能バッファサイズを元に一括送信データサイズを再計算し、一括送信最終フ ラグの制御に反映させることで、受信機 2401の一括受信可能バッファサイズを越え た一括送信を送信機 2301が行うことを未然に防ぐことが可能となる。  [0419] By doing as described above, it becomes possible for the receiver 2401 to notify the transmitter 2301 of the buffer size that can be received in a batch, and the transmitter 2301 can simultaneously receive all the receivable buffers from the receiver 2401. By recalculating the batch transmission data size based on the size and reflecting it in the control of the batch transmission final flag, it is possible for the transmitter 2301 to perform batch transmission exceeding the batch receivable buffer size of the receiver 2401. It is possible to prevent.
[0420] また、事前に一括受信可能バッファサイズのデフォルト値を送信機 2301と受信機 2 401の間で定めておき、また、一括受信可能バッファサイズを送信機 2301が受信し ていない場合は、デフォルトの値が採用されると定めておくことで、受信機 2401にお V、て、一括受信可能バッファサイズのデフォルト値が受信機 2401の一括受信可能 ノ ッファサイズ以下であるならば、一括受信可能バッファサイズを送信機 2301に通 知しなくとも、送信機 2301がデフォルトの一括受信可能バッファサイズを用いて、一 括送信を行うようにすれば、やはり受信機の一括受信可能バッファサイズを超えた一 括送信を送信機が行うことを未然に防ぐことが可能となる。また、この場合は、受信機 2401が送信機 2301に一括送信可能バッファサイズを通知するためのフレームを送 信する必要がなくなり、帯域の効率ィ匕につながる。  In addition, a default value of the batch receivable buffer size is determined in advance between the transmitter 2301 and the receiver 2401, and if the batch receivable buffer size is not received by the transmitter 2301, By defining that the default value is adopted, if the default value of the batch receivable buffer size in the receiver 2401 is equal to or less than the batch receivable knocker size of the receiver 2401, batch receivable is possible. Even if the buffer size is not notified to the transmitter 2301, if the transmitter 2301 performs batch transmission using the default batch receivable buffer size, the size of the batch receivable buffer of the receiver is also exceeded. It is possible to prevent the transmitter from performing batch transmission in advance. Also, in this case, it is not necessary for the receiver 2401 to transmit a frame for notifying the transmitter 2301 of the batch transmittable buffer size, which leads to bandwidth efficiency.
[0421] 〔実施の第七形態〕  [Seventh Embodiment of the Implementation]
本実施の第七形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 40から図 42に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態におい て定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形 態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
[0422] 本実施の形態では、送信機のブロック図として図 40、受信機のブロック図として図 4 1、信号のシークェンス図として図 42を用いて説明する。  This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40 as a block diagram of a transmitter, FIG. 41 as a block diagram of a receiver, and FIG. 42 as a sequence diagram of signals.
[0423] 図 40は、本実施の形態に係る送信機 2501のブロック図である。なお、図 40は、送 信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェア であってもハードウ アであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。 [0423] FIG. 40 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2501 according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 40 is an example of the configuration of the transmitter, and the present invention is not limited to this. Also, each component circuit is software It may be hardware or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0424] 送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2501は、送信データを送信する側の機器であ る。ここでいう送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる 力 これに限らない。また、データ最終フラグ生成回路 (データ最終フラグ生成手段) 2513以外の各構成要素は、上述した実施の第四形態における送信機 2001 (図 31 )の各構成要素と同一の機能を持っため、説明は省略する。  Transmitter (primary station, client device) 2501 is a device that transmits transmission data. The transmission data mentioned here may be, for example, text data, image data and the like. In addition, since each component other than the data final flag generation circuit (data final flag generation means) 2513 has the same function as each component of the transmitter 2001 (FIG. 31) in the fourth embodiment described above, Is omitted.
[0425] データ最終フラグ生成回路 2513は、送信フレームに送信データの最終が含まれる 力どうかを判別し、最終データが含まれる場合は、その意味を示す予め定められたフ ォーマットにより、データ最終フラグを生成し、また、最終データが含まれない場合は 、その意味を示す予め定められたフォーマットにより、データ最終フラグを生成し、送 信フレーム生成回路 2006に渡す。  Data final flag generation circuit 2513 determines whether or not the transmission frame includes the last of the transmission data, and if the final data is included, the data final flag is determined according to a predetermined format indicating its meaning. If the final data is not included, the data final flag is generated according to a predetermined format indicating its meaning, and is sent to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
[0426] 送信機 2501の制御部 2002は、送信フレームを生成する際に、データ最終フラグ 生成回路 2513に対して、送信フレーム生成回路 2006にて送信フレームに配置され るデータが送信データの最終データがそうでないかを通知する。  When the control unit 2002 of the transmitter 2501 generates a transmission frame, the control unit 2002 of the data final flag generation circuit 2513 transmits the final data of transmission data in the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2006. Inform if it is not.
[0427] データ最終フラグ生成回路 2513は、これを受けて、予め定められたフォーマットに より、データ最終フラグを生成し、送信フレーム生成回路 2006に渡す。本実施の形 態においては、 DL (Data Last)という略語を定義し、 DLが 0の場合は、送信データの 最終データがフレーム内に含まれていない、また DLが 1の場合は、送信データの最 終データが含まれていることを意味する。本実施の形態においては、 DLという略語 で表現している力 別の表現であっても構わない。また、送信データの最終データを 含むフレームを送信する場合に DLを 1としている力 例えば、対向局からレスポンス として、ある種のレスポンスデータを必要とする場合は、本フラグは、レスポンス要求フ ラグとしての意味を持ち、その意味で、本フラグがレスポンス要求フラグとして、本実 施の形態における送信データの最終データを意味するフラグ DLと同様の動作を行う ものであるならば、本フラグは、レスポンス要求フラグであってもよい。  Data final flag generation circuit 2513 receives this, generates a data final flag according to a predetermined format, and passes it to transmission frame generation circuit 2006. In the present embodiment, the abbreviation DL (Data Last) is defined. If DL is 0, the last data of transmission data is not included in the frame, and if DL is 1, transmission data is omitted. Means that the final data of is included. In the present embodiment, it may be another expression of force represented by the abbreviation DL. Also, when transmitting a frame including the final data of transmission data, the force of setting DL to 1 For example, when a certain type of response data is required as a response from the opposite station, this flag is a response request flag. If this flag has the same meaning as the response request flag and performs the same operation as the flag DL meaning the final data of the transmission data in the present embodiment, the flag It may be a request flag.
[0428] 送信フレーム生成回路 2006は、データ最終フラグおよび一括送信最終フラグ、通 し番号、データを送信フレーム内に配置し、送信部 2007を介して、送信する。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2006 arranges the data final flag, the batch transmission final flag, the pass number, and the data in the transmission frame, and transmits the data through the transmission unit 2007.
[0429] 図 42のシークェンス図においては、 t501、 t502、 t503、 t504のフレームはデータ 最終フラグ DLが 0で、フレーム内に送信データの最終データが含まれておらず、 t50 5のフレームはデータ最終フラグ DLが 1で、フレーム内に送信データの最終データ が含まれて 、ることを示して 、る。 In the sequence diagram of FIG. 42, the frames at t501, t502, t503, and t504 are data. The final flag DL is 0, and the final data of transmission data is not included in the frame, and the frame of t505 has the data final flag DL of 1 and the final data of transmission data is included in the frame, Show me.
[0430] 次に、図 41は、本実施の形態に係る受信機 2601のブロック図である。なお、図 41 は、受信機の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフト ウェアであってもハードウエアであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。  [0430] Next, FIG. 41 is a block diagram of a receiver 2601 according to the present embodiment. Note that Figure 41 is an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0431] 受信機 (二次局、サーバ機器) 2601は、対向機器からの送信データを受信する側 の機器である。ここでいう送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどが あげられるが、これに限らない。また、データ最終フラグ解析回路 (データ最終フラグ 解析手段) 2613以外の各構成要素は、上述した実施の第四形態における受信機 2 101 (図 32)の各構成要素と同一の機能を持っため、説明は省略する。  Receiver (Secondary Station, Server Device) 2601 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device. Examples of transmission data as used herein include, but are not limited to, text data and image data. Also, each component other than the data final flag analysis circuit (data final flag analysis means) 2613 has the same function as each component of the receiver 2 101 (FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment described above, The description is omitted.
[0432] データ最終フラグ解析回路 2613は、受信フレーム内に配置されたデータ最終フラ グを解析し、受信フレームに送信機が送信する送信データの最終データが含まれて いるかどうかを制御部 2102へと通知する。  Data final flag analysis circuit 2613 analyzes the data final flag arranged in the received frame, and sends to control unit 2102 whether or not the received data includes the final data of the transmission data to be transmitted by the transmitter. And notify.
[0433] 受信機 2601では、受信部 2108を介して受信した受信フレームは、受信フレーム 解析回路 2109にて、データ最終フラグが抽出され、データ最終フラグ解析回路 261 3に渡される。また、同時に一括送信最終フラグ、通し番号も抽出され、各解析回路 にて解析される。  In the receiver 2601, the received frame analysis circuit 2109 extracts a data final flag from the reception frame received via the reception unit 2108, and passes the data final flag analysis circuit 2613 to the data final flag analysis circuit 2613. At the same time, the batch transmission final flag and serial number are also extracted and analyzed by each analysis circuit.
[0434] データ最終フラグ解析回路 2613では、受信フレーム中に、送信機 2501の送信デ ータの最終データが含まれるかどうかが解析され、その結果が制御部 2102へと通知 される。  Data final flag analysis circuit 2613 analyzes whether or not the final data of the transmission data of transmitter 2501 is included in the reception frame, and the result is notified to control section 2102.
[0435] 制御部 2102では、送信機 2501の送信データの最終データが含まれている場合、 予め定められた処理(例えば、受信データが圧縮され^ JPEG (Joint Photographic E xperts Group)データである場合、 JPEGのデコードを開始するなど)を開始するなど の処理を行うことが可能である。  [0435] In the control unit 2102, when the final data of the transmission data of the transmitter 2501 is included, a predetermined process (for example, the case where the reception data is compressed and it is ^ JPEG (Joint Photographic Exteriors Group) data It is possible to perform processing such as starting JPEG decoding, etc.).
[0436] また、送信データの最終データを含むフレームにおいて、一括送信最終フラグが最 終を示している場合は、エラー無しフラグを適当な値に設定し、送信を行うことが可能 となる。 [0437] また、このとき、送信機 2501からの送信データに対して、レスポンスデータを返す 必要がある場合は、データを送信フレームに配置するときに、合わせてエラー無しフ ラグを配置して送信することで、帯域の効率ィ匕を図ることが可能となる。これが、図 42 の t512のフレームとなる。 Also, in the frame including the final data of the transmission data, when the batch transmission final flag indicates the end, it is possible to set the no error flag to an appropriate value and perform transmission. Also, at this time, if it is necessary to return response data to the transmission data from the transmitter 2501, an error-free flag is also arranged and transmitted when the data is arranged in the transmission frame. By doing this, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the band. This is the frame of t512 in FIG.
[0438] このフレーム t512を t506にて受信した送信機 2501は、受信フレーム内のデータ を解析することにより、受信機 2601からのレスポンスデータを受信することが可能と なる。  The transmitter 2501 having received this frame t512 at t506 can receive the response data from the receiver 2601 by analyzing the data in the received frame.
[0439] 〔実施の第八形態〕  [Eighth Embodiment of the Implementation]
本実施の第八形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 43に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態において定義し た用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形態におい てもその定義に則って用いるものとする。なお、本実施の形態に係るシークェンスは 、上述した送信機 2001 (図 31)、受信機 2101 (図 32)、送信機 2201 (図 34)、受信 機 2301 (図 37)、受信機 2401 (図 38)、送信機 2501 (図 40)、受信機 2601 (図 41) に実装可能な付加的な機能である。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified. The sequence according to the present embodiment includes the transmitter 2001 (FIG. 31), the receiver 2101 (FIG. 32), the transmitter 2201 (FIG. 34), the receiver 2301 (FIG. 37), and the receiver 2401 (FIG. 38), transmitter 2501 (Fig. 40) and receiver 2601 (Fig. 41) are additional functions that can be implemented.
[0440] 図 43は、本実施の形態に係るシークェンス図である。  FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram according to the present embodiment.
[0441] 本実施の形態においては、送信機と受信機の間では、ウィンドウサイズの制限のな ヽ通 f 力式として、 IrDA (Infrared Data Association)の IrLAP (Infrared Link Access protocol)の UI (Unnumbered Information)フレームを用いて、通信を行つ。また、送信 機および受信機は OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)をサポートしており、 Putオペ レーシヨンによりデータを送信するものとする。  In the present embodiment, the IrDA (Infrared Data Association) IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol) UI (Unnumbered) is used as a universal f-force equation that does not limit the window size between the transmitter and the receiver. Communication is performed using the Information) frame. In addition, transmitters and receivers support Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX), and data shall be transmitted by the Put operation.
[0442] 図 43においては、 OBEXの Put Finalコマンドに送信データが配置され、 IrLAP の UIフレームを用いて、フレーム送信が行われる。  [0442] In Fig. 43, transmission data is arranged in the Put Final command of OBEX, and frame transmission is performed using the UI frame of IrLAP.
[0443] Put Finalコマンドは、 dataOから data7によって構成され、 dataO力ら data7を全 て連結すると Put Finalコマンドとなるように分割されて 、る。  [0443] The Put Final command is composed of dataO to data7, and dataO force and so on are all divided into data so that they become Put Final commands.
[0444] また、送信機の一括送信データサイズは、 dataOから data3を連結したサイズであり 、通し番号が 3になった時点で、一括送信最終フラグ BLを 1としたフレーム t604を送 信する。このとき、 OBEXの Put Finalコマンドで構成された送信データの最終デー タである data7は、送信フレームに含まれていないため、データ最終フラグ DLは 0で ある。 [0444] Also, the batch transmission data size of the transmitter is a size obtained by concatenating data3 from dataO, and when the serial number becomes 3, a frame t604 with the batch transmission final flag BL set to 1 is transmitted. At this time, the final data of transmission data configured with the OBEX Put Final command The data final flag DL is 0 because the data7 which is a data is not included in the transmission frame.
[0445] t614にて前記一括送信最終フラグ BL力^のフレームを受信した受信機は、それま での受信フレームにエラーが検出されな力つたため、エラー無しフラグをエラー無しと し、 t615にて送信する。また、受信したフレームのデータ最終フラグが 0であるため、 この時点では、 OBEXの Put Finalコマンドに対する正常受信を意味する SUCCE SSレスポンスは送信フレームには含まれない。  [0445] The receiver that received the frame of the batch transmission final flag BL power ^ at t 614 does not detect an error in the frame received so far, so the no error flag indicates no error, and at t 615 To send. In addition, since the data final flag of the received frame is 0, at this point, the SUCCE SS response, which means normal reception for the Put Final command of OBEX, is not included in the transmission frame.
[0446] t605にて、前記エラー無しフラグがエラー無しを示すフレームを受信した送信機は 、受信機が通し番号 0から 3の一括送信を正常受信したと判断し、引き続き data4力も data7を一括送信する。 t609にて通し番号 7のフレーム送信を行う際には、一括送 信最終フラグを 1としている。また、 t609にて通し番号 7のフレームには、送信データ の最終データである data7が含まれるため、データ最終フラグ DLを 1としている。  [0446] At t605, the transmitter that receives the frame indicating that the error-free flag indicates no error determines that the receiver has successfully received batch transmission of serial numbers 0 to 3, and subsequently transmits data4 as well as data7 collectively. . When frame transmission of serial number 7 is performed at t609, the batch transmission final flag is set to 1. Further, at t609, since the frame of serial number 7 includes data7 which is the final data of the transmission data, the data final flag DL is set to 1.
[0447] t619にて、データ最終フラグが 1のフレームを受信した受信機は、通し番号 4から 7 のフレームを正常に受信しており、また、送信機からの Put Finalコマンドを全て正 常受信できたため、 Put Finalコマンドに対する正常受信を意味する SUCCESSレ スポンスを生成する。また、一括送信最終フラグが 1であるため、 SUCCESSレスポン スに合わせて、エラー無しフラグをエラー無しの意味とし、 t620にて合わせて送信す る。  [0447] At t619, the receiver that received the frame with the data final flag 1 has received frames with serial numbers 4 to 7 correctly, and can correctly receive all Put Final commands from the transmitter. Therefore, a SUCCESS response is generated, which means normal reception for the Put Final command. In addition, since the batch transmission final flag is 1, according to the SUCCESS response, the no-error flag is regarded as having no error, and is sent together at t620.
[0448] t610にて、前記エラー無しフラグがエラー無しを示すフレームを受信した送信機は 、通し番号 4カゝら通し番号 7までの一括送信が正常に終了したことを認識するとともに 、前記受信フレーム内に、送信機が送信した Put Finalコマンドに対する SUCCES Sレスポンスが含まれているため、 Putオペレーションも正常に終了したことを認識す ることが可能となる。  The transmitter having received the frame indicating that the error free flag indicates no error at t610 recognizes that the batch transmission up to the serial number 4 and the serial number 7 has ended normally, and the inside of the received frame is received. Since the SUCCES response to the Put Final command sent by the transmitter is included, it is possible to recognize that the Put operation has also completed successfully.
[0449] 以上のように、本実施の形態の通信方法によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限のな!、Ir LAPの UIフレームを用いた場合でも、送信機と受信機の間で、通信の確認およびデ ータの交換が確実に行われることが可能となる。  As described above, according to the communication method of the present embodiment, there is no limitation on the window size! Even when the Ir LAP UI frame is used, confirmation of communication between the transmitter and the receiver And exchange of data can be performed reliably.
[0450] 〔実施の第九形態〕  [Ninth embodiment of the invention]
本実施の第九形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 44から図 46に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態におい て定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形 態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。 The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention is shown in FIG. It is as follows when it demonstrates based on 44 to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
[0451] 本実施の形態では、送信機のブロック図として図 44、受信機のブロック図として図 4 5、信号のシークェンス図として図 46を用いて説明する。  This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44 as a block diagram of a transmitter, FIG. 45 as a block diagram of a receiver, and FIG. 46 as a signal sequence diagram.
[0452] 図 44は、本実施の形態に係る送信機 2701のブロック図である。図 44は、送信機 の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェアであ つてもハードウエアであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。  [0452] FIG. 44 is a block diagram of a transmitter 2701 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows an example of the transmitter configuration, and the present invention is not limited to this. Further, each component circuit may be software or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0453] 送信機 2701は、送信データを送信する側の機器である。ここで ヽぅ送信データとは 、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる力 これに限らない。  The transmitter 2701 is a device that transmits transmission data. Here, the transmission data may be, for example, text data, image data and the like.
[0454] 図 44に示すように、送信機 (一次局、クライアント機器) 2701は、制御部 (制御手段 ) 2702、メモリ(記憶手段) 2703、通し番号生成回路 (通し番号生成手段) 2705、送 信フレーム生成回路 (送信フレーム生成手段) 2706、送信部 (送信手段) 2707、デ ータ最終フラグ生成回路 (データ最終フラグ生成手段) 2713を備えて構成されてい る。  As shown in FIG. 44, a transmitter (primary station, client device) 2701 includes a control unit (control means) 2702, a memory (storage means) 2703, a serial number generation circuit (serial number generation means) 2705, a transmission frame A generation circuit (transmission frame generation means) 2706, a transmission unit (transmission means) 2707, and a data final flag generation circuit (data final flag generation means) 2713 are provided.
[0455] 制御部 2702は、送信機 2701の各構成要素の制御を行う。  The control unit 2702 controls each component of the transmitter 2701.
[0456] メモリ 2703には送信データが蓄えられる。このメモリ 2703は、揮発性のメモリ(例え ば SDRAMなど)であっても、不揮発性のメモリ(例えばフラッシュメモリ、 HDD, DV Dなど)であってもよい。また、図 44では、メモリ 2703は、送信機 2701に配置されて いるが、必ずしも送信機 2701内に存在する必要はなぐ送信機 2701の外部メモリと して送信機 2701に接続されて 、ても構わな 、。  [0456] The memory 2703 stores transmission data. This memory 2703 may be volatile memory (for example, SDRAM or the like) or non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD or the like). Also, in FIG. 44, the memory 2703 is disposed in the transmitter 2701, but it is necessary to be connected to the transmitter 2701 as an external memory of the transmitter 2701 which is not necessarily present in the transmitter 2701. OK.
[0457] 通し番号生成回路 2705は、予め定められたルールに従って、通し番号を増減し、 各送信フレームに付与する回路である。本実施の形態においては、 SEQ (Sequence number)という略語を定義し、 SEQが 1である場合は、通し番号が 1であることを示し ている。図 46のシークェンス図においても、同様の意味で SEQという略語を用いて いる。  [0457] The serial number generation circuit 2705 is a circuit that increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and assigns it to each transmission frame. In this embodiment, the abbreviation SEQ (Sequence number) is defined, and when SEQ is 1, it is indicated that the serial number is 1. Also in the sequence diagram of FIG. 46, the abbreviation of SEQ is used in the same meaning.
[0458] データ最終フラグ生成回路 2713は、送信フレームに送信データの最終が含まれる 力どうかを判別し、最終データが含まれる場合は、その意味を示す予め定められたフ ォーマットにより、データ最終フラグを生成し、また、最終データが含まれない場合は 、その意味を示す予め定められたフォーマットにより、データ最終フラグを生成し、送 信フレーム生成回路 2706に渡す。本実施の形態においては、 DL (Data Last)という 略語を定義し、 DLが 0の場合は、送信データの最終データがフレーム内に含まれて いない、また DLが 1の場合は、送信データの最終データが含まれていることを意味 する。なお、本実施の形態においては、 DLという略語で表現している力 別の表現 であっても構わない。また、送信機 2701と受信機 2801の間で、事前に取り決めが行 われているならば、本データ最終フラグは、必ずしも送信データの最終データを含む 送信フレームにおいてのみ、最終を示す値をとる必要はなぐ予め定められたルール に従い、例えば、送信データの最終データでない特定のデータを送信する際に、本 データ最終フラグを最終を示す値に設定してもよい。その際は、データ最終フラグと 異なる名称となる可能性もある。本実施の形態においては、データ最終フラグとして DLと 、う略語を用いることとする。 [0458] Data final flag generation circuit 2713 determines whether or not the transmission frame includes the last of the transmission data, and if the final data is included, a predetermined frame indicating the meaning thereof. The data final flag is generated by the format, and if the final data is not included, the data final flag is generated according to a predetermined format indicating its meaning, and is sent to the transmission frame generation circuit 2706. In the present embodiment, the abbreviation DL (Data Last) is defined, and in the case where DL is 0, the last data of transmission data is not included in the frame, and in the case where DL is 1, transmission data It means that the final data is included. In the present embodiment, it may be a force-based expression represented by the abbreviation DL. Also, if an agreement has been made in advance between the transmitter 2701 and the receiver 2801, this data final flag needs to have a value indicating the final only in the transmission frame that necessarily includes the final data of the transmission data. According to a predetermined rule, for example, when transmitting specific data that is not the final data of the transmission data, the final data flag may be set to a value indicating the final. In that case, it may be different from the data final flag. In this embodiment, DL and abbreviations are used as the data final flags.
[0459] 送信フレーム生成回路 2706は、予め定められたフォーマットにより、送信フレーム を生成する回路である。前述のデータ最終フラグ DL、通し番号 SEQ、送信データを 予め定められたフォーマットにしたがって配置し、送信フレームを生成する。なお、本 発明においては、ウィンドウサイズの制限がない通信方式を用いているため、ウィンド ゥサイズの制限がないフレームフォーマットでの送信フレームを生成する。本実施の 形態においては、 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol)における UI (Unnumbered I nformation)フレームを用いる。また、対向局がエラー検出を行うためのエラー検出符 号も合わせて付加される。エラー検出符号としては、例えば CRC (Cyclic Redundanc y Check)などがあるがこれに限らない。また、エラー訂正符号が付加されてもよい。  The transmission frame generation circuit 2706 is a circuit that generates a transmission frame according to a predetermined format. The above-mentioned data final flag DL, serial number SEQ, and transmission data are arranged according to a predetermined format to generate a transmission frame. Note that, in the present invention, since a communication method with no restriction on the window size is used, a transmission frame in a frame format having no restriction on the window size is generated. In this embodiment, a UI (Unnumbered Information) frame in IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol) is used. In addition, an error detection code is also added to allow the opposite station to detect an error. The error detection code includes, for example, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), but is not limited thereto. Also, an error correction code may be added.
[0460] 送信部 2707は、送信フレーム生成回路 2706によって生成された送信フレームを 送信する回路である。例えば、通信媒体として赤外線を用いるならば、 LED (発光ダ ィオード)や LD (レーザダイオード)となるが、これに限らない。また、他の通信媒体を 用いる場合は、その通信媒体に応じた送信部となる。  The transmitting unit 2707 is a circuit that transmits the transmission frame generated by the transmission frame generation circuit 2706. For example, if infrared light is used as the communication medium, it may be an LED (light emitting diode) or an LD (laser diode), but it is not limited thereto. When another communication medium is used, the transmission unit corresponds to the communication medium.
[0461] 図 45は、本実施の形態に係る受信機 2801のブロック図である。図 45は、受信機 の構成の一例であり、これに限るものではない。また、各構成回路はソフトウェアであ つてもハードウエアであっても構わない。以下に各構成要素の説明を行う。 FIG. 45 is a block diagram of a receiver 2801 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 shows an example of the configuration of the receiver, and the present invention is not limited to this. Also, each component circuit is software It may be hardware or hardware. The following explains each component.
[0462] 受信機 2801は、対向機器からの送信データを受信する側の機器である。ここでい う送信データとは、例えばテキストデータ、画像データなどがあげられる力 これに限 らない。  The receiver 2801 is a device that receives transmission data from the other device. The transmission data mentioned here is not limited to this, for example, text data, image data and the like.
[0463] 図 45に示すように、受信機(二次局、サーバ機器) 2801は、制御部(制御手段) 28 02、メモリ(記憶手段) 2803、受信部(受信手段) 2808、受信フレーム解析回路 (受 信フレーム解析手段) 2809、エラー検出回路 (エラー検出手段) 2811、通し番号解 析回路 (通し番号解析手段) 2812、データ最終フラグ解析回路 (データ最終フラグ 解析手段) 2813を備えて構成されて 、る。  As shown in FIG. 45, a receiver (secondary station, server device) 2801 includes a control unit (control unit) 28 02, a memory (storage unit) 2803, a receiving unit (reception unit) 2808, and a reception frame analysis. Circuit (reception frame analysis means) 2809, error detection circuit (error detection means) 2811, serial number analysis circuit (serial number analysis means) 2812, data final flag analysis circuit (data final flag analysis means) 2813 .
[0464] 制御部 2802は、受信機 2801の各構成要素の制御を行う。  The control unit 2802 controls each component of the receiver 2801.
[0465] メモリ 2803には受信データが蓄えられる。このメモリ 2803は、揮発性のメモリ(例え ば SDRAMなど)であっても、不揮発性のメモリ(例えばフラッシュメモリ、 HDD, DV Dなど)であってもよい。また、図 45では、メモリ 2803は、受信機 2801内に配置され ているが、必ずしも受信機 2801内に存在する必要はなぐ受信機 2801の外部メモリ として受信機 2801に接続されて 、ても構わな 、。  The memory 2803 stores received data. This memory 2803 may be volatile memory (for example, SDRAM or the like) or non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, HDD, DVD or the like). In FIG. 45, the memory 2803 is disposed in the receiver 2801 but may be connected to the receiver 2801 as an external memory of the receiver 2801 which is not necessarily present in the receiver 2801. .
[0466] 受信部 2808は、対向局が送信したフレームを受信する回路である。例えば、通信 媒体として赤外線を用いるならば、 PD (フォトダイオード)となるが、これに限らない。 また、他の通信媒体を用いる場合は、その通信媒体に応じた受信部となる。  [0466] The receiving unit 2808 is a circuit that receives a frame transmitted by the opposite station. For example, if infrared light is used as a communication medium, it becomes PD (photodiode), but it is not limited to this. When another communication medium is used, the reception unit corresponds to the communication medium.
[0467] 受信フレーム解析回路 2809は、受信部 2808により受信した受信フレームの解析 を行う。具体的には、受信フレーム内のデータ最終フラグを抽出し、データ最終フラ グ解析回路 2813に渡す。また、受信フレーム内の通し番号を抽出し、通し番号解析 回路 2812に渡す。また、受信フレーム内にデータが存在する場合は、データを抽出 し、制御部 2802を介して、メモリ 2803に保存する。メモリ 2803にデータを保存する 場合は、必ずしも制御部 2802を介さなくてもよ ヽ。  A received frame analysis circuit 2809 analyzes the received frame received by the receiving unit 2808. Specifically, the data final flag in the received frame is extracted and passed to the data final flag analysis circuit 2813. Also, it extracts the serial number in the received frame and passes it to the serial number analysis circuit 2812. If data is present in the received frame, the data is extracted and stored in the memory 2803 via the control unit 2802. When storing data in the memory 2803, it does not have to be via the control unit 2802.
[0468] エラー検出回路 2811は、受信フレームに付与されているエラー検出用の符号を解 祈し、受信フレームにエラーがないかどうかを判別し、解析結果を制御部 2802に通 知する。エラー検出用の符号として、例えば、 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)符号 などの巡回符号があげられるが、これに限らない。また、エラー訂正符号が付与され ている場合は、エラー訂正を行うこととなる。 The error detection circuit 2811 interprets the error detection code attached to the received frame, determines whether or not there is an error in the received frame, and notifies the control unit 2802 of the analysis result. Examples of codes for error detection include, but not limited to, cyclic codes such as cyclic redundancy check (CRC) codes. Also, an error correction code is given. If this is the case, error correction will be performed.
[0469] 通し番号解析回路 2812は、受信フレーム内に付与されている通し番号が予め定 められたルールによって増減しているかどうかを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2802に 通知する。例えば、通信路において、フレームが抜けた場合などは、この通し番号解 析回路 2812によりエラーと判断される。  The serial number analysis circuit 2812 analyzes whether or not the serial numbers assigned in the received frame increase or decrease according to a predetermined rule, and notifies the control unit 2802 of the analysis result. For example, when a frame is missed in the communication path, the serial number analysis circuit 2812 determines that an error occurs.
[0470] データ最終フラグ解析回路 2813は、受信フレーム解析回路 2809により渡された データ最終フラグを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2802に通知する。 The data final flag analysis circuit 2813 analyzes the data final flag passed by the reception frame analysis circuit 2809 and notifies the control unit 2802 of the analysis result.
[0471] つづいて、図 44、図 45、および図 46のシークェンス図を参照しながら、本実施の 形態における各信号の流れを説明する。なお、送信機 2701および受信機 2801はNext, the flow of each signal in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams of FIG. 44, FIG. 45, and FIG. The transmitter 2701 and the receiver 2801
OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)をサポートしており、 Putオペレーションによりデ ータを送信するものとする。 It supports Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX) and sends data by Put operation.
[0472] 図 46においては、 OBEXの Put Finalコマンドに送信データが配置され、 IrLAP の UIフレームを用いて、フレーム送信が行われる。 In FIG. 46, transmission data is arranged in the Put Final command of OBEX, and frame transmission is performed using the UI frame of IrLAP.
[0473] Put Finalコマンドは、 dataOから data7によって構成され、 dataO力ら data7を全 て連結すると Put Finalコマンドとなるように分割されている。また、 data7力Put Fi nalコマンドの最終データである。 [0473] The Put Final command is composed of dataO to data7. When all data7 and data7 are concatenated, it is divided so that it becomes a Put Final command. Also, it is the final data of data7 Force Put Final command.
[0474] 送信機 2701では、自機器内もしくは外部から送信データの転送要求が発生すると[0474] In the transmitter 2701, when a transfer request for transmission data occurs from within the own device or from outside.
、制御部 2702が通し番号生成回路 2705に対して通し番号の生成を通知する。またThe control unit 2702 notifies the serial number generation circuit 2705 of the generation of the serial number. Also
、データ最終フラグ生成回路 2713に対してデータ最終フラグの生成を通知する。 The data final flag generation circuit 2713 is notified of the generation of the data final flag.
[0475] 通し番号生成回路 2705は、予め定められたルールにより通し番号を増減し、送信 フレーム生成回路 2006に渡す。 [0475] The serial number generation circuit 2705 increases or decreases the serial number according to a predetermined rule, and passes it to the transmission frame generation circuit 2006.
[0476] また、データ最終フラグ生成回路 2713は、送信フレームに送信データの最終デー タが含まれるかどうかを判別し、含まれる場合は最終を示し、含まれない場合は、最 終でないを示す予め定められたフォーマットによるデータ最終フラグを作成し、送信 フレーム生成回路 2706に渡す。 Further, data final flag generation circuit 2713 determines whether or not the transmission data includes the final data of the transmission data, and indicates the final if it is included, and indicates the not final if it is not included. A data final flag in a predetermined format is created and passed to a transmission frame generation circuit 2706.
[0477] 送信フレーム生成回路 2706は、前記データ最終フラグ、通し番号、データを予め 定められたフォーマットにより配置し、送信部 2706を介して送信する。 [0477] The transmission frame generation circuit 2706 arranges the data final flag, serial number, and data in a predetermined format, and transmits the data via the transmission unit 2706.
[0478] 図 46にお!/ヽて ίま、 t701、 t702、 t703、 t704、 t705、 t706、 t707力 ^データ最終フ ラグが最終でないフレーム、 t708がデータ最終フラグが最終のフレームである。 t70 1力 t708の各フレーム内の通し番号(SEQ)は、本実施の形態においては、 1ずつ 増えて 、くものとして記述して 、る。 [0478] In Fig. 46! / ヽ t, t701, t702, t703, t704, t705, t706, t707 force ^ Data final data The frame whose lag is not final, t 708 is the final frame whose data final flag is final. In the present embodiment, the serial number (SEQ) in each frame of t70 1 force t 708 is described as a spider by being incremented by one.
[0479] 次に、受信機 2801では、対向局力もフレームを受信部 2808を介して受信すると、 受信フレーム解析回路 2809にて受信フレーム内の各パラメータを抽出する。前記パ ラメータとは、例えばデータ最終フラグ、通し番号、データなどであり、データ最終フラ グは、データ最終フラグ解析回路 2813に渡され、通し番号は通し番号解析回路 28 12に渡され、データは、必要ならば、制御部 2802を介して、メモリ 2803に保存され る。また、同時にエラー検出回路 2811により、受信フレームにて、例えば CRCエラー がな 、かどうかのエラー検出が行われる。エラー検出もしくはエラー訂正符号が CRC 符号以外の場合は、それに従ったエラー検出もしくはエラー訂正が行われる。  [0479] Next, in the receiver 2801, when the opposing station also receives the frame via the receiving unit 2808, the reception frame analysis circuit 2809 extracts each parameter in the reception frame. The parameters are, for example, data final flag, serial number, data, etc. The data final flag is passed to the data final flag analysis circuit 2813, and the serial number is passed to the serial number analysis circuit 2812, and the data is For example, it is stored in the memory 2803 via the control unit 2802. At the same time, the error detection circuit 2811 performs error detection as to whether or not there is, for example, a CRC error in the received frame. If the error detection or error correction code is not a CRC code, error detection or error correction is performed accordingly.
[0480] また、データ最終フラグ解析回路 2813では、データ最終フラグの解析を行い、解 析結果を通知する。図 46のシークェンス図【こお!ヽて ίま、 t701、 t702、 t703、 t704 、 t705、 t706、 t707のフレーム受信時は、データ最終フラグは最終でなぐ t708の フレーム受信時は、データ最終フラグを最終としてそれぞれ制御部 2802に通知され る。  [0480] Further, the data final flag analysis circuit 2813 analyzes the data final flag and notifies the analysis result. In the sequence diagram in Fig. 46, when the frame of t701, t702, t703, t704, t705, t706, t707 is received, the data final flag is not the last. When the frame of t708 is received, the data final flag is not received. Is notified to the control unit 2802 as the final.
[0481] また、通し番号解析回路 2812においては、受信フレーム中の通し番号が予め定め られたルールに従って、増減されているかどうかを解析し、解析結果を制御部 2802 に通知する。本実施の形態では、前記予め定められたルールとして通し番号はフレ ームごとに 1ずつ増加することとしている。図 46のシークェンス図においては、送信機 2701が送信した 8つのフレームは、全て正常受信し、送信機 2701との間で予め通 し番号は 1ずつ増えていくと定められている状態で、全てのフレームの通し番号が 1 つ前のフレームの通し番号と比べて 1だけ増加しているため、全ての受信フレームに おいて、正常受信として、受信機 2801の制御部 2802に通知される。  Further, serial number analysis circuit 2812 analyzes whether serial numbers in the received frame are increased or decreased according to a predetermined rule, and notifies control unit 2802 of the analysis result. In the present embodiment, as the predetermined rule, the serial number is incremented by one for each frame. In the sequence diagram of FIG. 46, all eight frames transmitted by the transmitter 2701 are normally received, and it is determined that the transmission number is incremented by one with the transmitter 2701 in advance. Since the serial number of the frame is increased by one compared to the serial number of the previous frame, the control unit 2802 of the receiver 2801 is notified as a normal reception in all the received frames.
[0482] 制御部 2802では、全ての受信フレームにおいて、エラーが検出されず、またデー タ最終フラグを含むフレームを受信した場合は、予め定められた処理 (例えば、受信 データが圧縮され^ JPEGデータである場合、 JPEGのデコードを開始するなど)を開 始するなどの処理を行うことが可能である。 [0483] また、受信機 2801において、エラー検出回路 2811および通し番号検出回路 281 2により、受信フレームにエラーがあることが検出された場合、以降のデータをメモリ 2 103に保存する処理を行わないとしてもよい。こうすることにより、エラーが検出された 場合の以降のデータ保存に力かる消費電力の削減が可能となる。 If no error is detected in all received frames, and a frame including a data final flag is received, control unit 2802 performs a predetermined process (for example, received data is compressed ^ JPEG data In this case, it is possible to perform processing such as starting JPEG decoding etc.). Further, in the receiver 2801, when the error detection circuit 2811 and the serial number detection circuit 2812 detect that there is an error in the received frame, it is assumed that the process of storing the subsequent data in the memory 2 103 is not performed. It is also good. By doing this, it is possible to reduce power consumption, which helps save data after an error is detected.
[0484] 以上のように、送信機 2701および受信機 2801によれは、ウィンドウサイズの制限 のない IrLAPの UIフレームを用いた通信方式において、片方向通信においても、フ レームの抜けを検出することが可能となり、信頼性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる 。また、片方向通信時には、送信機 2701において、 OBEXの Put Finalコマンドに 対する SUCCESSレスポンスの受信ができないが、送信機 2701の制御部 2702に おいて、片方向通信時には、 Put Finalを送信完了した時点で、 Putオペレーション の終了を行うように定めていれば、片方向通信においても、 Putオペレーションによる データ転送を正常に行うことが可能となる。  [0484] As described above, according to the transmitter 2701 and the receiver 2801, in the communication method using the UI frame of IrLAP without limitation of window size, detection of frame omission also in one-way communication It is possible to perform reliable communication. In one-way communication, the transmitter 2701 can not receive a SUCCESS response to the Put Final command of OBEX. However, in the control unit 2702 of the transmitter 2701, in one-way communication, transmission of the Put Final is completed. Then, if it is determined to end the Put operation, data transfer by the Put operation can be performed normally even in one-way communication.
[0485] 〔実施の第十形態〕  Tenth Embodiment of the Invention
本実施の第十形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)について、図 47から図 51に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態におい て定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形 態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIGS. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definitions, unless otherwise specified.
[0486] 本実施の形態では、一括して送信するデータのサイズの決め方について説明する 。本発明の通信システムでは、送信機が一括して送信する一括送信データのサイズ を、データの再送および受信機でのデータ処理に都合の良いように決めることができ る。なお、一括送信データのサイズは、送信するデータの種類や通信路の状態等に 応じて、送信機のアプリケーション等が決定してもよいし、受信機から一括送信デー タのサイズある ヽは該サイズを決定するための情報 (例えば、受信機のノ ッフアサイ ズ)を送信機に送信してもよ 、。  In this embodiment, a method of determining the size of data to be transmitted collectively will be described. In the communication system of the present invention, the size of batch transmission data transmitted collectively by the transmitter can be determined for convenience of data retransmission and data processing in the receiver. Note that the size of the batch transmission data may be determined by the application of the transmitter or the like according to the type of data to be transmitted, the state of the communication path, etc. The size of the batch transmission data from the receiver You may send information to the transmitter to determine the size (for example, receiver sniff size).
また、データの分割は、通常 SMP層が行うが、その他の層において行ってもよい。  Also, data division is usually performed by the SMP layer, but may be performed by other layers.
[0487] 本実施の形態では、一例として、 JPEG画像を転送する場合について記述する。 In the present embodiment, the case of transferring a JPEG image will be described as an example.
[0488] 図 47は、送信機における JPEGエンコーダおよび受信機における JPEGデコーダの 構成を示すブロック図である。 [0489] 図 47に示すように、 JPEG画像を転送する際には、送信機の JPEGエンコーダ 91に おいて、まず原画像をブロック(mcu: minimum coded unit)単位で DCT変換を行う。 mcuとは、 JPEG変換を行ううえでの最小単位であり、圧縮方式により、 8X8、 8X16 、 16X8、 16 16の4種類がぁる(図48(&)〜((1))。 [0488] FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a JPEG encoder in a transmitter and a JPEG decoder in a receiver. [0489] As shown in FIG. 47, when transferring a JPEG image, DCT conversion is first performed on the original image in units of blocks (mcu: minimum coded unit) in the JPEG encoder 91 of the transmitter. mcu is the minimum unit for JPEG conversion, and there are four types of 8x8, 8x16, 16x8, and 1616 depending on the compression method (Fig. 48 (&) to (1)).
[0490] 8X8(図 48(a))では、すべての画素において、輝度成分 (Y)、色度成分 (Cb、 Cr )が 1対 1の関係となる。 8 X 16 (図 48(b))では、 1つの縦長の単位内(1)に Yが 2つ( 8 X 8における 1と 9に相当)と Cb (8X8における 1と 9の平均)、 Cr (8X8における 1と 9の平均)がそれぞれ 1つずつ入っている。 16 X 8 (図 48(c))では、 1つの横長の単 位内に Yが 2つ(8X8における 1と 2に相当)と、 Cb(8X8における 1と 2の平均)、 Cr( 8 X 8における 1と 2の平均)がそれぞれ 1つずつ入って!/、る。 16 X 16 (図 48 (d) )で は、 1つの単位内(1)に Y力 つ(8X8における 1、 2、 9、 10に相当)と Cb (8X8にお ける 1、 2、 9、 16の平均)、 Cr (8X8における 1、 2、 9、 16の平均)がそれぞれ 1つず つ入っている。  In 8 × 8 (FIG. 48A), the luminance component (Y) and the chromaticity components (Cb, Cr) have a one-to-one relationship in all pixels. In 8 x 16 (Fig. 48 (b)), in one vertical unit (1), Y is 2 (corresponding to 1 and 9 in 8 x 8), Cb (average of 1 and 9 in 8 x 8), Cr There is one each (average of 1 and 9 in 8x8). In 16 x 8 (Fig. 48 (c)), two Y (corresponding to 1 and 2 in 8 x 8), Cb (average of 1 and 2 in 8 x 8), Cr (8 x 8) in one horizontally long unit 1) and the average of 2 in 8)! In 16 x 16 (Fig. 48 (d)), in one unit (1) Y force (equivalent to 1, 2, 9, 10 in 8 X 8) and Cb (1, 2, 9, 8 in 8 X 8) There are 16 averages) and 1 Cr (average of 1, 2, 9 and 16 in 8x8).
[0491] 上述のように、 8X8が最も圧縮率が低ぐ復号後の画像が原画像と近くなるがデー タ量が多くなる。これは一般に 4:4;4と呼ばれている。また、 16X16ブロックが最も 圧縮率が高ぐデータ量が少なくなるが、平均している部分が多くなるため、原画像と 異なる復号画像が得られる可能性が高くなる。  As described above, the 8 × 8 has the lowest compression ratio, and the decoded image is closer to the original image, but the amount of data is larger. This is generally called 4: 4; 4. In addition, although the amount of data with the highest compression ratio in the 16 × 16 block is small, the number of averaged parts is large, so the possibility of obtaining a decoded image different from the original image is high.
[0492] そして、 DCT変換においては、前述のブロック単位での入力を元に、 DCT変換( 離散コサイン変換)を行う。この変換は、 2次元マトリクスの乗算として計算され、ブロッ ク内の画素数と同じ数である 64個の変換係数が得られる。得られた変換係数は、左 上に近いほど、周波数成分が低くなり、右下に近いほど、周波数成分が高くなる。一 般に画像は、隣接する画素との相関が大きいため、周波数成分の高い変換係数ほど 、出現確率は少なくなる。  Then, in the DCT transform, DCT transform (discrete cosine transform) is performed based on the input in block units described above. This transformation is calculated as a multiplication of a two-dimensional matrix to obtain 64 transformation coefficients, the number of which is the same as the number of pixels in the block. The closer to the upper left, the lower the frequency component, and the closer to the lower right, the higher the frequency component. Generally, in an image, the correlation with adjacent pixels is large, so the higher the conversion coefficient of the frequency component, the lower the appearance probability.
[0493] 次に、量子化においては、前述の変換係数を予め定められた量子化テーブルによ り除算する。前述のとおり、一般的に周波数の高い変換係数の出現確率は低いため 、変換テーブルの周波数の高い部分を大きくすると、周波数成分の高い変換係数は 、量子化を行うことによりほとんどが 0となる。  Next, in the quantization, the above-mentioned transform coefficient is divided by a predetermined quantization table. As described above, since the appearance probability of high frequency transform coefficients is generally low, if the high frequency portion of the conversion table is enlarged, most of the high transform coefficients of frequency components become 0 by performing quantization.
[0494] 最後に、エントロピー符号ィ匕においては、予め定められたエントロピー符号ィ匕テ一 ブルを元にエントロピー符号ィ匕を行う。前述の通り、量子化により 0に変換された変換 係数は、エントロピー符号ィ匕により 0の連続数として表現され、この時点で圧縮が可 能となる。つまり、原画像において、周波数成分が低い(隣接する色の変化が激しく な 、)画像は、 JPEG圧縮の圧縮効率が高くなる傾向がある。 [0494] Finally, in the entropy code 符号, a predetermined entropy code 匕 The entropy code is performed based on the bull. As described above, the transform coefficient converted to 0 by quantization is expressed as a continuous number of 0 by the entropy code 、, and compression is possible at this point. That is, in the original image, an image with a low frequency component (a change in adjacent color is severe) tends to have a high compression efficiency of JPEG compression.
[0495] そして、エントロピー符号ィ匕された画像データが、通信路に伝送される。 [0495] Then, the entropy coded image data is transmitted to the communication channel.
[0496] 一方、通信路から前述のエントロピー符号化された画像データを受信した受信機で は、 JPEGデコーダ 92にお 、て、送信機で行われた作業と全く逆の作業を行うことに より、 JPEG復号を行う。 On the other hand, in the receiver that has received the above-described entropy-coded image data from the communication channel, the operation performed by the JPEG decoder 92 is completely reverse to the operation performed by the transmitter. , JPEG decoding.
[0497] まず、エントロピー復号ィ匕において、予め定められたエントロピー符号ィ匕テーブルを 元にエントロピー復号を行う。そして、エントロピー復号を行って得られたデータは、 逆量子化により、予め定められた逆量子化テーブルを用いて、逆量子化される。逆 量子化後のデータは、逆 DCT変換により、輝度成分 Y、色度成分 Cb、 Crに変換さ れる。また、このとき、 8 X 8、 8 X 16、 16 X 8、 16 X 16それぞれの圧縮方式によって 、輝度成分 Y、平均化された色度成分 Cb、 Crを用いて、画像が復元される。  [0497] First, in entropy decoding 匕, entropy decoding is performed based on a predetermined entropy code 04 table. Then, the data obtained by performing the entropy decoding is dequantized by dequantization using a predetermined dequantization table. The data after inverse quantization is converted to luminance component Y and chromaticity components Cb and Cr by inverse DCT transformation. Also, at this time, the image is restored using the luminance component Y and the averaged chromaticity components Cb and Cr according to the 8 × 8, 8 × 16, 16 × 8, and 16 × 16 compression methods, respectively.
[0498] 上述のように、 JPEG画像の転送においては、圧縮画像生成、復号において、ブロ ック単位 (mcu)単位で、データの処理が行われている。また、復号後の表示におい ては、前述の mcuが 1列分並んだ 1ライン単位での処理や、 1フレーム単位(1画像単 位)での処理を行うことで都合がよいことがある。これは、映像信号において、 1ライン ごとに水平同期信号が存在し、また 1フレームごとに垂直同期信号が存在し、それら の同期信号ごとに、ラインバッファや、フレームバッファを更新することで、ビデオメモ リの更新タイミングを処理することが可能となるからである。なお、このことは、ブロック 単位での処理を行う MPEGなどの動画処理においても同様である。  As described above, in the transfer of JPEG images, data processing is performed in block units (mcu) in compressed image generation and decoding. Further, in the display after decoding, it may be convenient to perform the above-mentioned processing in units of one line in which the mcu are arranged in one column, or processing in units of one frame (one image unit). This means that in the video signal, there is a horizontal sync signal for each line, and a vertical sync signal for each frame, and by updating the line buffer and frame buffer for each of these sync signals, video This is because it is possible to process the memory update timing. This is also true for moving picture processing such as MPEG that performs processing in block units.
[0499] つづ 、て、データの分割再送処理の具体例として、 mcu単位で分割再送する場合 、ライン単位で分割再送する場合、ファイル単位で分割再送する場合について、それ ぞれ説明する。  [0499] Next, as a specific example of the data division retransmission process, the case of division retransmission in mcu units, the case of division retransmission in lines, and the case of division retransmission in files will be described.
[0500] 図 49は、本発明の通信システムにおける mcu単位での分割、再送処理の説明図 である。  [0500] FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram of division and retransmission processing in units of mcu in the communication system of the present invention.
[0501] 送信機では、前述の DCT、量子化、エントロピー符号ィ匕を行った mcu単位での転 送を行っている。具体的には、 mculつ分のデータに相当する単位で送信用一時バ ッファにデータを転送し、送信用一時バッファのデータを転送し終えると、一括送信 終了フラグを 1としている。 [0501] At the transmitter, the above-mentioned DCT, quantization, and entropy coding are performed in mcu units. I am sending. Specifically, when the data is transferred to the temporary transmission buffer in units corresponding to mcul data, and the data of the temporary transmission buffer is transferred, the batch transmission end flag is set to 1.
[0502] 受信機では、一括送信終了フラグが 1であるフレームを受信するごとに、受信用一 時バッファのデータを例えばアプリケーションに転送し、アプリケーションにおいて JP EGデコードする。 [0502] Every time a frame is received with the batch transmission end flag set to 1, the receiver transfers data in the reception temporary buffer to, for example, the application, and the application performs JP EG decoding.
[0503] このように mcu単位で分割再送を行う場合、送信機の送信用一時バッファおよび受 信機の受信用一時バッファは、 mculつ分だけ (通常、数 10バイトから数百バイト程 度)確保すればよい。それゆえ、一時的なメモリの確保が困難な通信機においては、 有効な分割再送方式となる。  [0503] When dividing and transmitting in units of mcu in this way, the transmitter's temporary buffer for transmission and the receiver's temporary buffer for reception are only mcul (several tens of bytes to hundreds of bytes). You should secure it. Therefore, in a communication device where it is difficult to secure temporary memory, it is an effective split retransmission method.
[0504] 図 50は、本発明の通信システムにおけるライン単位での分割、再送処理の説明図 である。  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of line-by-line division and retransmission processing in the communication system of the present invention.
[0505] 送信機では、送信用一時バッファに、 1列分 (8 X 8の場合、 8ライン分に相当)のデ ータを転送し、 1列分の送信が終わった時点で、一括送信終了フラグを 1としている。  [0505] The transmitter transfers one column's worth of data (corresponding to 8 lines in the case of 8 × 8) to the temporary buffer for transmission, and when transmission of one column's worth of transmission is complete, batch transmission The end flag is set to 1.
[0506] 受信機では、一括送信終了フラグ力^のフレームを受信した時点で、例えばアプリ ケーシヨンに受信データを転送し、アプリケーションにおいて JPEGデコードを行う。  [0506] When the receiver receives a frame of batch transmission end flag force ^, for example, it transfers received data to the application and performs JPEG decoding in the application.
[0507] このようにライン単位で分割再送を行う場合、アプリケーションにデータが転送され た時点で、 1列分 (8 X 8の場合、 8ライン分)のデータがそろっていることになり、受信 データを列単位で処理する場合での処理を簡略ィ匕することが可能となる。また、エラ 一発生時には、エラーが発生していない部分だけを表示する表示系においては、デ コード後のデータが列単位であるため、列の途中で表示データが切れることがない。 なお、この方式の場合、送信機の送信用一時バッファおよび受信機の受信用一時バ ッファは、数キロバイトから数百キロバイト程度が必要になると予想される。  [0507] As described above, in the case of performing divisional retransmission in units of lines, when data is transferred to the application, data for one column (eight lines for 8 × 8) is prepared, and reception is performed. It is possible to simplify the processing in the case of processing data in units of columns. Also, in the display system that displays only the part where an error has not occurred when an error occurs, the display data is not cut off in the middle of the column because the data after decoding is in units of columns. In this case, it is expected that the transmission temporary buffer of the transmitter and the reception temporary buffer of the receiver will require several kilobytes to several hundred kilobytes.
[0508] 図 51は、本発明の通信システムにおけるファイル単位での分割、再送処理の説明 図である。  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of the division and retransmission processing in units of files in the communication system of the present invention.
[0509] 送信機では、送信用一時バッファに、送信画像 1つ分を渡し、送信用一時バッファ 内のデータを全て送信し終わった時点で、一括送信終了フラグを 1としている。  [0509] The transmitter passes one transmission image to the transmission temporary buffer, and sets the batch transmission end flag to 1 when transmission of all the data in the transmission temporary buffer is completed.
[0510] 受信側では、一括送信終了フラグ力^のフレームを受信した時点で、例えばアプリ ケーシヨンに受信データを渡し、アプリケーションにおいて JPEGデコード処理を行つ ている。 On the receiving side, when the frame of batch transmission end flag force ^ is received, for example, the application The received data is passed to Caseion, and JPEG decoding processing is performed in the application.
[0511] このようにファイル単位で分割再送を行う場合、画像 1枚分のデータ単位での分割 再送処理を行うことができるため、アプリケーションの JPEGデコーダでは、 1枚の画 像単位での JPEGデコードを行うこととなり、 1枚の画像のデコードが完了した時点で 、表示用のフレームメモリを更新するなどの処理が簡単に行える。なお、この方式の 場合、送信機の送信用一時バッファおよび受信機の受信用一時バッファは、数 100 kB力 数 MB程度となることが予想される。また、 MPEGなどのように、静止画像を連 続して送信するような、処理系において、通信によりエラーが発生した場合に、直前 の画像を完全な状態で表示し続けるなどの処理が簡単に行えるため、有効である。  As described above, when divisional retransmission is performed in file units, divisional retransmission processing can be performed in data units of one image, and thus the JPEG decoder of the application can perform JPEG decoding in units of one image. When the decoding of a single image is completed, processing such as updating a frame memory for display can be easily performed. In this case, it is expected that the transmission temporary buffer of the transmitter and the reception temporary buffer of the receiver will be about several hundred kB power MB. In addition, in processing systems that continuously transmit still images, such as MPEG, when an error occurs due to communication, processing such as continuing to display the previous image in a complete state is simplified. It is effective because it can be done.
[0512] また、受信機からの応答を待つ時間に関しては、一括送信終了フラグ力^のフレー ムにエラーが発生した場合には、直ちに再送することが望ましい。ただし、エラーが発 生しておらず、受信機での受信データの処理に時間が力かっている場合などのよう に、応答が返せない場合がある。その場合には、受信データ処理時間よりも大きいが 、大きすぎないような時間を送信機が設定し、前述の時間を待っても応答が返ってこ ないときには、一括送信終了フラグが 1のフレームを再送してもよい。これにより、受信 機でのデータ処理時間が保証され、かつ最適な再送処理を行うことが可能となる。  [0512] With regard to the time to wait for a response from the receiver, it is desirable to retransmit immediately if an error occurs in the frame of the batch transmission end flag ^. However, there may be cases where a response can not be returned, as in the case where an error has not occurred and the processing of received data in the receiver is time-consuming. In this case, if the transmitter sets a time that is longer than the reception data processing time but not too large, and the response does not return after waiting for the above time, a frame with the batch transmission end flag set to 1 is selected. It may be resent. As a result, the data processing time in the receiver can be guaranteed, and optimal retransmission processing can be performed.
[0513] 〔実施の第十一形態〕  Eleventh Embodiment of the Implementation
本発明の実施の第十一形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)のク ライアント機器 (通信装置)について説明すると以下のとおりである。なお、他の実施 の形態において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り 本実施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The client device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
[0514] まず、図 52は、従来の OBEXプロトコルを用いて通信を行うクライアント機器のブロ ック図である。  First, FIG. 52 is a block diagram of a client device that performs communication using the conventional OBEX protocol.
[0515] 図 52に示すように、従来のクライアント機器 (通信装置) 3200は、アプリケーション 層処理部 3210と、 OBEX層処理部 (オブジェクト交換層処理部) 3220と、下位層処 理部 3230と、送信部 3240と、受信部 3250とを少なくとも備えている。  As shown in FIG. 52, the conventional client device (communication device) 3200 includes an application layer processing unit 3210, an OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3220, and a lower layer processing unit 3230. At least a transmitting unit 3240 and a receiving unit 3250 are provided.
[0516] アプリケーション層処理部 3210は、図示しない操作部に入力された利用者の指示 に応じて、 OBEX層処理部 3220に対して、要求コマンドの発行処理を要求する。 [0516] The application layer processing unit 3210 receives a user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown). In response to this, it requests the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 to issue a request command.
[0517] OBEX層処理部 3220は、制御部 3221と、要求通知部 3222と、応答受信部 3223 とを備えている。 The OBEX layer processing unit 3220 includes a control unit 3221, a request notification unit 3222, and a response reception unit 3223.
[0518] 制御部 3221は、アプリケーション層処理部 3210からの要求に応じて、要求通知部 3222に対して要求コマンドの生成および下位層へ要求コマンドの発行を行うよう通 知する。また、応答受信部 3223からの応答コマンド受信結果通知を受けて、アプリケ ーシヨン層処理部 3210へ応答コマンドの受信結果を通知する。  In response to a request from the application layer processing unit 3210, the control unit 3221 notifies the request notification unit 3222 to generate a request command and issue a request command to the lower layer. Also, upon receiving the notification of the reception result of the response command from the response receiving unit 3223, the application layer processing unit 3210 is notified of the reception result of the response command.
[0519] 要求通知部 3222は、制御部 3221からの要求コマンド発行通知を受けて、要求コ マンドを生成し、下位層処理部 3230へ出力する。応答受信部 3223は、下位層処理 部 3230から出力される応答コマンドを受信し、受信した応答コマンドの解析を行い、 制御部 3221に対して、コマンド解析結果および応答コマンドを受信した旨の通知を 行う。  The request notification unit 3222 receives the request command issuance notification from the control unit 3221, generates a request command, and outputs the request command to the lower layer processing unit 3230. The response receiving unit 3223 receives the response command output from the lower layer processing unit 3230, analyzes the received response command, and notifies the control unit 3221 that the command analysis result and the response command have been received. Do.
[0520] 下位層処理部 3230は、 OBEX層処理部 3220からの要求コマンドに適当な下位 層のヘッダを付加して送信部 3240に渡すとともに、受信部 3250からの受信応答コ マンドから、適当な下位層のヘッダを除去して、 OBEX層処理部 3220に渡す。  The lower layer processing unit 3230 adds an appropriate lower layer header to the request command from the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 and passes it to the transmitting unit 3240 and, from the reception response command from the receiving unit 3250, an appropriate one. Remove the lower layer header and pass it to the OBEX layer processing unit 3220.
[0521] 送信部 3240は、赤外線通信路を介して、下位層処理部 3230から受信した要求コ マンドを外部に送信する。  [0521] The transmitting unit 3240 transmits the request command received from the lower layer processing unit 3230 to the outside through the infrared communication path.
[0522] 受信部 3250は、赤外線通信路を介して、相手機器 (サーバ機器)から送信された 応答コマンドを受信し、受信した応答コマンドを下位層処理部 3230に出力する。  The receiving unit 3250 receives the response command transmitted from the other device (server device) via the infrared communication path, and outputs the received response command to the lower layer processing unit 3230.
[0523] 次に、図 53に示すフローチャートを用いて、図 52の OBEX層処理部 3220の制御 部 3221の動作を説明する。  Next, the operation of the control unit 3221 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 shown in FIG. 52 will be described using the flowchart shown in FIG.
[0524] ステップ S51は、クライアント機器 3200のアプリケーション層処理部 3210および O BEX層処理部 3220の制御部 3221において、サーバ機器への要求コマンドが発生 しているかどうかを判別するステップである。発生している場合は、ステップ S52へ、 また発生して 、な 、場合は、再びステップ S51へそれぞれ遷移する。  Step S 51 is a step in which the application layer processing unit 3210 of the client device 3200 and the control unit 3221 of the OB layer processing unit 3220 determine whether or not a request command to the server device has been generated. If it is generated, the process proceeds to step S52, and if it is generated, the process proceeds to step S51 again.
[0525] ステップ S52は、サーバ機器への要求コマンドを下位層処理部 3230へ送信するス テツプである。送信終了後、ステップ S53へと遷移する。  Step S52 is a step of transmitting a request command to the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3230. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S53.
[0526] ステップ S53は、サーノ機器からの応答コマンドを下位層処理部 3230から受信し たがどうかを判別するステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S54へ、また受信し ていない場合は、再びステップ S53へ、それぞれ遷移する。 Step S53 receives a response command from the Sano device from the lower layer processing unit 3230. It is a step to determine whether or not. If it has been received, the process goes to step S54, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S53 again.
[0527] ステップ S54は、受信した応答コマンドを解析するステップである。解析終了後、ス テツプ S55へと遷移する。 Step S 54 is a step of analyzing the received response command. After analysis, the process transitions to step S55.
[0528] ステップ S55は、通信終了力どうかを判別するステップである。通信終了でない場 合は、再びステップ S51へと遷移する。 [0528] Step S55 is a step of determining whether or not the communication end capability. If the communication has not ended, the process returns to step S51 again.
[0529] 以上の動作により、従来のクライアント機器 3200の OBEX層処理部 3220は、要求 コマンドを発行し、それに対する応答コマンドを解析し、次の要求コマンドを再び発行 することで通信を行うことが可能となる。 [0529] With the above operation, the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 of the conventional client device 3200 can issue a request command, analyze a response command to it, and perform communication by issuing the next request command again. It becomes possible.
[0530] し力し、前述の従来のクライアント機器 3200の OBEX層処理部 3220の動作では、 サーバ機器力 応答コマンドを受信しない限り、次の要求コマンドの送信ができない といった問題がある。 However, in the operation of the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 of the conventional client device 3200 described above, there is a problem that the next request command can not be sent unless the server device power response command is received.
[0531] これを解決するために、図 55のフローチャートに示すとおり、本実施の形態に係る クライアント機器 3300 (図 54)では、サーバ機器へ要求コマンドを発行した後、サー バ機器からの応答コマンドを受信しなくとも次の要求コマンドを発行することを可能と する。具体的には以下のとおりとなる。  In order to solve this, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, in the client device 3300 (FIG. 54) according to the present embodiment, after issuing a request command to the server device, the response command from the server device is issued. It is possible to issue the next request command without receiving. Specifically, it is as follows.
[0532] ステップ S61は、クライアント機器 3300のアプリケーション層処理部 3310および O BEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321において、サーバへの要求コマンドが発生して いるかどうかを判別するステップである。発生している場合は、ステップ S62へ、また 発生して 、な 、場合は、再びステップ S61へそれぞれ遷移する。  Step S 61 is a step of determining whether or not a request command to the server is generated in the application layer processing unit 3310 of the client apparatus 3300 and the control unit 3321 of the OB layer processing unit 3320. If it is generated, the process proceeds to step S62, or if it is generated, the process proceeds to step S61 again.
[0533] ステップ S62は、サーバ機器への要求コマンドを下位層処理部 3330へと送信する ステップである。送信終了後、ステップ S65へと遷移する。  Step S62 is a step of transmitting a request command for the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3330. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S65.
[0534] ステップ S65は、通信終了力どうかを判別するステップである。通信終了でない場 合は、再びステップ S61へと遷移する。  [0534] Step S65 is a step of determining whether or not the communication termination capability. If the communication has not ended, the process returns to step S61 again.
[0535] 以上の動作をクライアント機器 3300の OBEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321が行 うことにより、クライアント機器 3300から、要求コマンドを送信した後、サーバ機器から の応答コマンドを受信しなくても、次の要求コマンドを送信することが可能となる。  [0535] The control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 performs the above-described operation to send the request command from the client device 3300 and then receive no response command from the server device. , The next request command can be sent.
[0536] ここで、図 54は、本実施の形態に係るクライアント機器 3300のブロック図である。 [0537] OBEX層処理部 (オブジェクト交換層処理部) 3320の通信方向選択部 3324以外 の各ブロックは、図 52を用いて上述した従来のクライアント機器 3200の OBEX層処 理部 3220の各ブロックと同じ機能を持っため説明を省略する。 Here, FIG. 54 is a block diagram of the client device 3300 according to the present embodiment. The blocks other than the communication direction selection unit 3324 of the OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3320 are the blocks of the OBEX layer processing unit 3220 of the conventional client device 3200 described above with reference to FIG. 52. Description is omitted because it has the same function.
[0538] 通信方向選択部 3324は、通信が片方向通信か双方向通信かを選択する機能を 有する。ここでいう片方向通信とは、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンドに対して、サ ーバ機器からの応答コマンドを必要としな 、通信である。サーバ機器に送信部が存 在しない場合、もしくは、クライアント機器に受信部が存在しない場合は、必然的に片 方向通信となるが、送信部と受信部をクライアント機器およびサーノ機器がそれぞれ 有しているが、信号の流れがクライアント機器力 サーバ機器への片方向である場合 は、やはり片方向通信となる。また、双方向通信とは、クライアント機器力も送信され た要求コマンドに対して、応答コマンドをサーバ機器が送信し、前記応答コマンドの 解析後に、再びクライアント機器が次の要求コマンドを送信する通信方式である。こ の場合、すべての要求コマンドに対して、応答コマンドが必要になるわけでなぐクラ イアント機器の OBEX層とサーノ機器の OBEX層の双方で、事前に取り決めがなさ れて 、れば、特定の要求コマンドに対する応答コマンドは必ずしも必要でな!、。  The communication direction selection unit 3324 has a function of selecting whether the communication is one-way communication or two-way communication. Here, one-way communication is communication that requires a response command from the server device in response to a request command from the client device. When the transmitting unit does not exist in the server device, or when the receiving unit does not exist in the client device, although the communication is necessarily one-way communication, the transmitting device and the receiving device are respectively provided by the client device and the Sano device. However, if the signal flow is one-way to the client device server device, it will still be one-way communication. Also, two-way communication is a communication method in which a server device transmits a response command in response to a request command to which client device power is also transmitted, and after analysis of the response command, the client device transmits the next request command again. is there. In this case, for all request commands, response commands are not required, and arrangements have been made in advance in both the client device's OBEX layer and the Sano device's OBEX layer, if specific. The response command to the request command is not necessary!,.
[0539] 次に、図 56のフローチャートを用いて、本実施の形態に係るクライアント機器 3300 の OBEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321の動作を説明する。  Next, the operation of the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 according to the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.
[0540] ステップ S70は、通信方向選択部 3324にて、双方向通信か片方向通信かを選択 するステップである。双方向通信の場合は、ステップ S71へ、また片方向通信の場合 は、 S81へそれぞれ遷移する。  Step S70 is a step in which the communication direction selection unit 3324 selects bidirectional communication or unidirectional communication. In the case of two-way communication, the process transitions to step S71, and in the case of one-way communication, the process transitions to step S81.
[0541] ステップ S71は、双方向通信において、アプリケーション層処理部 3310もしくは OB EX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321において、サーバ機器への要求コマンドが発生し ているかどうかを判別するステップである。発生している場合は、ステップ S72へ、発 生して 、な 、場合は、再びステップ S71へそれぞれ遷移する。  Step S 71 is a step of determining whether or not a request command to the server device has been generated in the application layer processing unit 3310 or the control unit 3321 of the OB EX layer processing unit 3320 in two-way communication. If it is generated, the process proceeds to step S72, and if it is generated, the process transitions to step S71 again.
[0542] ステップ S72は、双方向通信において、サーバ機器への要求コマンドを下位層処 理部 3330へ送信するステップである。送信終了後、ステップ S73へ遷移する。  Step S 72 is a step of transmitting a request command for the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3330 in two-way communication. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S73.
[0543] ステップ S73は、双方向通信において、サーバ機器力もの応答コマンドを受信した 力どうかを判別するステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S74へ、受信していな い場合は、再びステップ S73へそれぞれ遷移する。 Step S73 is a step of determining whether or not the server device power response command has been received in the two-way communication. If received, go to step S74. If not, the process transitions to step S73 again.
[0544] ステップ S74は、双方向通信において、サーバ機器力もの応答コマンドを解析する ステップである。解析終了後、ステップ S75へ遷移する。  [0544] Step S74 is a step of analyzing the server device power response command in the two-way communication. After analysis, the process moves to step S75.
[0545] ステップ S75は、双方向通信において、通信を終了するかどうかを判別するステツ プである。終了でない場合は、ステップ S71へ再び遷移する。  [0545] Step S75 is a step of determining whether or not to end communication in two-way communication. If not, the process returns to step S71.
[0546] 一方、ステップ S81は、片方向通信において、アプリケーション層処理部 3310もし くは OBEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321にお!/、て、サーバ機器への要求コマンド が発生しているかどうかを判別するステップである。発生している場合は、ステップ S8 2へ、発生していない場合は、再びステップ S81へそれぞれ遷移する。  On the other hand, in step S 81, whether or not a request command to the server device is generated in the control unit 3321 of the application layer processing unit 3310 or the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 in one-way communication. Is a step of determining If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S82. If not, the process proceeds to step S81 again.
[0547] ステップ S82は、片方向通信において、サーバ機器への要求コマンドを下位層処 理部 3330へ送信するステップである。送信終了後、ステップ S85へ遷移する。  Step S 82 is a step of transmitting a request command for the server device to the lower layer processing unit 3330 in one-way communication. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S85.
[0548] ステップ S85は、片方向通信において、通信を終了するかどうかを判別するステツ プである。終了でない場合は、ステップ S81へ再び遷移する。  Step S85 is a step of determining whether or not to end communication in one-way communication. If not, the process returns to step S81.
[0549] 以上の動作を、クライアント機器 3300の OBEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321が 行うことにより、双方向通信では、サーバ機器からの応答コマンドを待って力 次の要 求コマンドを送信し、片方向通信では、サーバ機器力もの応答コマンドを受信しなく ても次の要求コマンドを送信することが可能となる。  [0549] The control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 performs the above-described operation to send a next request command after waiting for a response command from the server device in two-way communication. In one-way communication, it is possible to send the next request command without receiving the server device's response command.
[0550] 〔実施の第十二形態〕  Twelfth Embodiment of the Implementation
本発明の実施の第十二形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)のク ライアント機器 (通信装置)について説明すると以下のとおりである。なお、他の実施 の形態において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り 本実施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The client device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
[0551] 図 54が本実施の形態のクライアント機器 3300のブロック図である。すなわち、上述 した実施の第 ^—形態と同一であり、また、 OBEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321以 外の各ブロックの動作も基本的に実施の第十一形態における各ブロックの動作と同 じであるため、説明を省略する。  [0551] FIG. 54 is a block diagram of the client device 3300 according to the present embodiment. That is, the operation of each block other than the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 is basically the same as the operation of each block in the eleventh embodiment. The explanation is omitted.
[0552] 図 57に示すフローチャートを用いて、本実施の形態に係る OBEX層処理部 3320 の制御部 3321の動作を説明する。 [0553] ステップ S91は、アプリケーション層処理部 3310もしくは OBEX層処理部 3320の 制御部 3321にお 、て、サーバ機器への Put要求コマンドが発生して 、るかどうかを 判別するステップである。発生している場合は、ステップ S92へ、発生していない場 合は、再びステップ S 91へそれぞれ遷移する。 The operation of the control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 according to the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart shown in FIG. Step S 91 is a step of determining whether or not a Put request command to the server device is generated in the control unit 3321 of the application layer processing unit 3310 or the OBEX layer processing unit 3320. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S92. If not, the process proceeds to step S91 again.
[0554] ステップ S92は、サーノ機器へ Put要求コマンドを送信するステップである。送信終 了後、ステップ S 93へ遷移する。  Step S92 is a step of transmitting a Put request command to the Sano device. After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S93.
[0555] ステップ S93は、送信した Put要求コマンドが最終の Put要求コマンドがそうでない かを判別するステップである。最終である場合は、ステップ S94へ、また最終でない 場合は、ステップ S91へそれぞれ遷移する。  [0555] Step S93 is a step of determining whether the sent Put request command is not the final Put request command. If it is final, the process goes to step S94, and if it is not final, the process goes to step S91.
[0556] ステップ S94は、サーノ機器からの応答コマンドを受信した力どうかを判別するステ ップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S95へ、受信していない場合は、再びステップ S 94へそれぞれ遷移する。  Step S 94 is a step of determining whether or not the response command from the Sano device has been received. If it has been received, the process goes to step S95, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S94 again.
[0557] ステップ S95は、サーノ機器からの応答コマンドを解析するステップである。解析終 了後、ステップ S96へと遷移する。このとき、最終の Put要求コマンドに対する SUCC ESS応答コマンドを受信した力どうかを判別することとなる。  Step S95 is a step of analyzing a response command from the Sano device. After analysis, the process moves to step S96. At this time, it is determined whether or not the SUCC ESS response command to the final Put request command has been received.
[0558] ステップ S96は、通信が終了かどうかを判別するステップである。終了でない場合 は、再びステップ S91へと遷移する。  [0558] Step S96 is a step of determining whether the communication has ended. If not ended, the process returns to step S91 again.
[0559] 以上の動作を、クライアント機器 3300の OBEX層処理部 3320の制御部 3321が 行うことにより、最終でない Put要求コマンドに対しては、サーバ機器力 の CONTI NUE応答コマンドを待つことなぐ次の Put要求コマンドを送信することが可能となり 、通信の効率をあげることが可能となる。また、最終の Putコマンドに対するサーバ機 器からの SUCCESS応答コマンドに対してはクライアント機器 3300にお!/、て、確認 を行うため、クライアント機器 3300において、サーバ機器に正常にデータ転送を行え た力どうかを判別することが可能となる。  [0559] The control unit 3321 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3320 of the client device 3300 performs the above-described operation to respond to a non-final Put request command without waiting for the server device's CONTI NUE response command. It becomes possible to send a Put request command, and it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of communication. In addition, the client device 3300 can execute data transfer successfully to the server device 3300 because the client device 3300 checks the response to the SUCCESS response command from the server device in response to the final Put command. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.
[0560] また、図 56に示したように、通信方向選択部 3324による双方向通信、片方向通信 の切り替えと組合わせることで、双方向通信時は、最終の Putコマンドのみ SUCCE SS応答コマンドを必要とし、片方向通信時は、全ての要求コマンドに対して応答コマ ンドを必要としな ヽと 、つた動作を行うことが可能となる。 [0561] 〔実施の第十三形態〕 Further, as shown in FIG. 56, by combining it with the switching between the two-way communication and the one-way communication by the communication direction selection unit 3324, only the final Put command, the SUCCE SS response command, is selected in two-way communication. If necessary, in one-way communication, it is possible to perform the operation without requiring a response command for all request commands. [Embodiment 13 of Implementation]
本発明の実施の第十三形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)のサ ーバ機器 (通信装置)について説明すると以下のとおりである。なお、他の実施の形 態において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本 実施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The server device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in this embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
[0562] まず、図 58に、従来の OBEXプロトコルを用いて通信を行うサーバ機器のブロック 図を示す。 First, FIG. 58 shows a block diagram of a server device that performs communication using the conventional OBEX protocol.
[0563] 図 58に示すよう、にサーノ機器 (通信装置) 3400は、アプリケーション層処理部 34 As shown in FIG. 58, the Sano device (communication device) 3400 has an application layer processing unit 34.
10と、 OBEX層処理部(オブジェクト交換層処理部) 3420と、下位層処理部 3430と10, OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3420, lower layer processing unit 3430,
、送信部 3440と、受信部 3450とを少なくとも備えている。 , A transmitting unit 3440 and a receiving unit 3450 at least.
[0564] アプリケーション層処理部 3410は、図示しない操作部に入力された利用者の指示 に応じて、 OBEX層処理部 3420に対して、受信要求コマンド処理および応答コマン ド発行を要求する。 The application layer processing unit 3410 requests the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 to process a reception request command and issue a response command according to the user's instruction input to the operation unit (not shown).
[0565] OBEX層処理部 3420は、制御部 3421と、応答通知部 3422と、要求解析部 3423 とを備えている。  The OBEX layer processing unit 3420 includes a control unit 3421, a response notification unit 3422, and a request analysis unit 3423.
[0566] 制御部 3421は、アプリケーション層処理部 3410からの要求に応じて、応答通知部 3422に対して応答コマンドの生成および下位層へ応答コマンドの発行を行うよう通 知する。また、要求解析部 3423からの要求コマンド受信結果通知を受けて、アプリケ ーシヨン層処理部 3410へ要求コマンドの受信結果を通知する。  [0566] In response to the request from the application layer processing unit 3410, the control unit 3421 notifies the response notifying unit 3422 to generate a response command and issue a response command to the lower layer. Also, in response to the request command reception result notification from the request analysis unit 3423, the application layer processing unit 3410 is notified of the reception result of the request command.
[0567] 応答通知部 3422は、制御部 3421からの応答コマンド発行通知を受けて、応答コ マンドを生成し、下位層処理部 3430へ出力する。要求解析部 3423は、下位層処理 部 3430から出力される要求コマンドを受信し、受信した要求コマンドの解析を行い、 制御部 3421に対して、コマンド解析結果および要求コマンドを受信した旨の通知を 行う。  In response to the response command issuance notification from control unit 3421, response notification unit 3422 generates a response command and outputs the generated response command to lower layer processing unit 3430. The request analysis unit 3423 receives the request command output from the lower layer processing unit 3430, analyzes the received request command, and notifies the control unit 3421 that the command analysis result and the request command have been received. Do.
[0568] 下位層処理部 3430は、 OBEX層処理部 3420からの応答コマンドに適当な下位 層のヘッダを付加して送信部 3440に渡すとともに、受信部 3450からの受信要求コ マンドから、適当な下位層のヘッダを除去して、 OBEX層処理部 3420に渡す。  The lower layer processing unit 3430 adds an appropriate lower layer header to the response command from the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 and passes it to the transmitting unit 3440 and, from the reception request command from the receiving unit 3450, an appropriate one. Remove the lower layer header and pass it to the OBEX layer processing unit 3420.
[0569] 送信部 3440は、赤外線通信路等を介して、下位層処理部 3430から受信した要求 コマンドを外部に送信する。 Transmission unit 3440 is a request received from lower layer processing unit 3430 via an infrared communication path or the like. Send a command to the outside.
[0570] 受信部 3450は、赤外線通信路等を介して、相手機器 (クライアント機器)から送信 された要求コマンドを受信し、受信した要求コマンドを下位層処理部 3430に出力す る。  [0570] The receiving unit 3450 receives the request command transmitted from the other device (client device) via the infrared communication path or the like, and outputs the received request command to the lower layer processing unit 3430.
[0571] 次に、図 59に示すフローチャートを用いて、図 58に示した従来の OBEXサーバ機 器 3400における OBEX層処理部 3420の制御部 3421の動作を説明する。  Next, the operation of the control unit 3421 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 in the conventional OBEX server apparatus 3400 shown in FIG. 58 will be described using the flowchart shown in FIG.
[0572] ステップ S101は、クライアント機器力も要求コマンドを受信した力かどうかを判別す るステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S 102へ、また受信していない場合は、 再びステップ S 101へそれぞれ遷移する。 Step S101 is a step of determining whether the client device power is also the power that has received the request command. If it has been received, the process goes to step S102, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S101 again.
[0573] ステップ S 102は、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンドを解析するステップである。 [0573] Step S102 is a step of analyzing the client device power request command.
解析終了後、ステップ S 103へ遷移する。  After analysis, the process moves to step S103.
[0574] ステップ S103は、クライアント機器への応答コマンドを作成するステップである。応 答コマンド作成終了後、ステップ S 104へと遷移する。 Step S103 is a step of creating a response command to the client device. After creating the response command, the process proceeds to step S104.
[0575] ステップ S 104は、前記応答コマンドをクライアント機器に送信するステップである。 Step S 104 is a step of transmitting the response command to the client device.
送信終了後、ステップ S 105へ遷移する。  After the end of transmission, the process proceeds to step S105.
[0576] ステップ S105は、通信を終了するかどうかを判別するステップである。終了でない 場合、再びステップ S101へ遷移する。 Step S105 is a step of determining whether to end communication. If the process is not ended, the process returns to step S101 again.
[0577] 以上の動作により、従来のサーバ機器 3400の OBEX層処理部 3420は、要求コマ ンドを受信解析し、それに対する応答コマンドを生成し送信することで通信を行うこと が可能となる。 [0577] With the above operation, the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 of the conventional server device 3400 can perform communication by receiving and analyzing the request command and generating and transmitting a response command thereto.
[0578] し力し、前述の従来のサーバ機器 3400の OBEX層処理部 3420の動作では、クラ イアント機器からの要求コマンドに対して、応答コマンドを生成し、送信してしまうため 、例えば片方向通信のように、サーバ機器 3400からの送信が不必要な通信におい ては、応答コマンドの生成に力かる電力は無駄なものとなっている。  However, in the operation of the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 of the above-described conventional server device 3400, a response command is generated and transmitted in response to a request command from the client device. In communication where transmission from the server device 3400 is unnecessary, such as communication, power for generating a response command is wasted.
[0579] これを解決するために、図 61のフローチャートに示すとおり、本実施の形態に係る サーバ機器 3500 (図 60)においては、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンドを受信、 解析した後、クライアント機器への応答コマンドを生成、送信を行うこととなぐ次の要 求コマンドを受信することが可能とする。具体的には以下のとおりとなる。 [0580] ステップ SI 11は、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンドを受信したかどうかを判別す るステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S 112へ、また受信していない場合は、 再びステップ S 111へそれぞれ遷移する。 [0579] In order to solve this, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, server device 3500 (FIG. 60) according to the present embodiment receives the request command of the client device and analyzes it, and then sends it to the client device. It is possible to generate and send a response command and to receive the next request command. Specifically, it is as follows. Step SI 11 is a step of determining whether or not the client device power request command has been received. If it has been received, the process goes to step S112, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S111 again.
[0581] ステップ S112は、受信した要求コマンドを解析するステップである。解析終了後、 ステップ S 115へ遷移する。  Step S112 is a step of analyzing the received request command. After analysis, the process moves to step S115.
[0582] ステップ S115は、通信が終了したかどうかを判別するステップである。終了でない 場合は、再びステップ S 111へ遷移する。  Step S115 is a step of determining whether communication has ended. If not ended, the process returns to step S111.
[0583] 以上の動作を、サーノ機器 3500の OBEX層処理部 3520の制御部 3521力行うこ とで、受信した要求コマンドに対する応答コマンドの生成、送信を行わず、次の要求 コマンドの受信を行うことが可能となる。  By performing the above operations in the control unit 3521 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3520 of the Sano device 3500, a response command to the received request command is not generated and transmitted, but the next request command is received. It becomes possible.
[0584] ここで、図 60は、本実施の他の形態に係るサーバ機器 3500のブロック図である。  Here, FIG. 60 is a block diagram of a server device 3500 according to another embodiment of the present embodiment.
[0585] OBEX層処理部 (オブジェクト交換層処理部) 3520の通信方向選択部 3524以外 の各ブロックは、図 58を用いて上述した従来のサーバ機器 3400の OBEX層処理部 3420の各ブロックと同じ機能を持っため説明を省略する。  The blocks other than the communication direction selection unit 3524 of the OBEX layer processing unit (object exchange layer processing unit) 3520 are the same as the blocks of the OBEX layer processing unit 3420 of the conventional server device 3400 described above with reference to FIG. Description is omitted because it has a function.
[0586] 通信方向選択部 3524は、通信が片方向通信か双方向通信かを選択する機能を 有する。ここでいう片方向通信とは、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンドに対して、サ ーバ機器からの応答コマンドを必要としな 、通信である。サーバ機器に送信部が存 在しない場合、もしくは、クライアント機器に受信部が存在しない場合は、必然的に片 方向通信となるが、送信部と受信部をクライアント機器およびサーノ機器がそれぞれ 有しているが、信号の流れがクライアント機器力 サーバ機器への片方向である場合 は、やはり片方向通信となる。また、双方向通信とは、クライアント機器力も送信され た要求コマンドに対して、応答コマンドをサーバ機器が送信し、前記応答コマンドの 解析後に、再びクライアント機器が次の要求コマンドを送信する通信方式である。こ の場合、すべての要求コマンドに対して、応答コマンドが必要になるわけでなぐクラ イアント機器側の OBEX層とサーノ機器側の OBEX層の双方で、事前に取り決めが なされて!/、れば、特定の要求コマンドに対する応答コマンドは必ずしも必要でな!、。  The communication direction selection unit 3524 has a function of selecting whether the communication is one-way communication or two-way communication. Here, one-way communication is communication that requires a response command from the server device in response to a request command from the client device. When the transmitting unit does not exist in the server device, or when the receiving unit does not exist in the client device, although the communication is necessarily one-way communication, the transmitting device and the receiving device are respectively provided by the client device and the Sano device. However, if the signal flow is one-way to the client device server device, it will still be one-way communication. Also, two-way communication is a communication method in which a server device transmits a response command in response to a request command to which client device power is also transmitted, and after analysis of the response command, the client device transmits the next request command again. is there. In this case, for all request commands, a response command is not required, and arrangements are made in advance in both the client device's OBEX layer and the Sano device's OBEX layer! / Not necessary to respond to specific request commands!
[0587] 次に、図 62のフローチャートを用いて、本実施の形態に係るサーバ機器 3500の O BEX層処理部 3520の制御部 3521の動作を説明する。 [0588] ステップ S120は、通信方向選択部 3524にて、双方向通信か片方向通信かを選 択するステップである。双方向通信の場合は、ステップ S121へ、また片方向通信の 場合は、 S131へそれぞれ遷移する。 [0587] Next, the operation of the control unit 3521 of the O BEX layer processing unit 3520 of the server device 3500 according to the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart in FIG. Step S120 is a step in which the communication direction selection unit 3524 selects two-way communication or one-way communication. In the case of two-way communication, the process transitions to step S121, and in the case of one-way communication, the process transitions to step S131.
[0589] ステップ S121は、双方向通信において、クライアント機器からの要求コマンドを受 信した力どうかを判別するステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S 122へ、また 受信して!/ヽな 、場合は、再びステップ S121へそれぞれ遷移する。 Step S121 is a step of determining whether or not the request command from the client device has been received in the two-way communication. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S122, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S121 again.
[0590] ステップ S122は、双方向通信において、クライアント機器からの要求コマンドを解 析するステップである。解析終了後、ステップ S 123へ遷移する。 Step S122 is a step of analyzing a request command from the client device in two-way communication. After analysis, the process moves to step S123.
[0591] ステップ S123は、双方向通信において、クライアント機器への応答コマンドを作成 するステップである。応答コマンド作成終了後、ステップ S 124へ遷移する。 Step S123 is a step of creating a response command to the client device in two-way communication. After creating the response command, the process proceeds to step S124.
[0592] ステップ S124は、双方向通信において、前記作成した応答コマンドをクライアント 機器に送信するために、下位層処理部 3530に通知するステップである。通知終了 後、ステップ S 125へ遷移する。 Step S 124 is a step of notifying the lower layer processing unit 3530 in order to transmit the created response command to the client device in two-way communication. After the notification ends, the process transitions to step S125.
[0593] ステップ S125は、通信を終了するかどうかを判別するステップである。終了でない 場合は、再びステップ S121へ遷移する。 Step S125 is a step of determining whether or not to end communication. If it has not ended, the process returns to step S121 again.
[0594] 一方、ステップ S131は、片方向通信において、クライアント機器からの要求コマンド を受信したかどうかを判別するステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S 132へ、 また受信して ヽな 、場合は、再びステップ S 131へそれぞれ遷移する。 [0594] On the other hand, step S131 is a step of determining whether or not a request command from a client device has been received in one-way communication. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S132, and if it is received, the process proceeds to step S131 again.
[0595] ステップ S132は、片方向通信において、クライアント機器からの要求コマンドを解 析するステップである。解析終了後、ステップ S 135へ遷移する。 Step S132 is a step of analyzing a request command from the client device in one-way communication. After analysis, the flow proceeds to step S135.
[0596] ステップ S135は、片方向通信において、通信が終了した力どうかを判別するステツ プである。終了でない場合は、再びステップ S 131へ遷移する。 Step S135 is a step of determining whether or not the communication has ended in one-way communication. If not ended, the process goes back to step S131.
[0597] 以上の動作を、サーノ機器 3500の OBEX層処理部 3520の制御部 3521力行うこ とにより、双方向通信では、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンド受信時には、応答コ マンドを生成、送信し、また、片方向通信では、クライアント機器力もの要求コマンド 受信後、応答コマンドを生成、送信せず、次の要求コマンドを受信することが可能と なる。 By performing the above operation in the control unit 3521 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3520 of the Sano device 3500, a response command is generated and transmitted when receiving a request command of the client device in bidirectional communication. Also, in one-way communication, it is possible to receive the next request command without generating or transmitting a response command after receiving a request command from the client device.
[0598] 〔実施の第十四形態〕 本発明の実施の第十四形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)のサ ーバ機器 (通信装置)について説明すると以下のとおりである。なお、他の実施の形 態において定義した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本 実施の形態においてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。 [Fourteenth Embodiment of Implementation] The server device (communication device) of the transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
[0599] 図 60が本実施の形態のサーバ機器 3500のブロック図である。すなわち、上述した 実施の第十三形態と同一であり、また、 OBEX層処理部 3520の制御部 3521以外 の各ブロックの動作も基本的に実施の第十三形態における各ブロックの動作と同じ であるため、説明を省略する。  [0599] FIG. 60 is a block diagram of the server device 3500 according to the present embodiment. That is, it is the same as the thirteenth embodiment described above, and the operation of each block other than the control unit 3521 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3520 is basically the same as the operation of each block in the thirteenth embodiment. Description is omitted because there is.
[0600] 図 63に示すフローチャートを用いて、本実施の形態に係る OBEX層処理部 3520 の制御部 3521の動作を説明する。 [0600] The operation of the control unit 3521 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3520 according to the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart shown in FIG.
[0601] ステップ S141は、クライアント機器力もの Putコマンドを受信したかどうかを判別す るステップである。受信した場合は、ステップ S 142へ、また受信していない場合は、 再びステップ S141へそれぞれ遷移する。 Step S141 is a step of determining whether or not a Put command of the client device has been received. If it has been received, the process goes to step S142, and if it has not been received, the process goes to step S141 again.
[0602] ステップ S142は、受信した Putコマンドを解析するステップである。解析終了後、ス テツプ S 143へ遷移する。 Step S142 is a step of analyzing the received Put command. After analysis, the process transitions to step S143.
[0603] ステップ S143は、解析された Putコマンドが最終の Putコマンドが最終でない Put コマンドかどうかを判別するステップである。最終の Putコマンドである場合は、ステツ プ S144へ、また最終でない Putコマンドの場合は、再びステップ S 141へそれぞれ 遷移する。 Step S143 is a step of determining whether the analyzed Put command is the final Put command but not the final Put command. If it is the final Put command, the process goes to Step S144, and if it is not the final Put command, the process goes to Step S141 again.
[0604] ステップ S 144は、クライアント機器への応答コマンドを生成するステップである。応 答コマンド生成終了後、ステップ S 145へ遷移する。なお、このステップ S 144におい て、生成される応答コマンドは、クライアント機器からの Putコマンドを全て正常に終 了した場合は、例えば SUCCESS応答コマンドとなる。また、それ以外の場合につい ては、本実施の形態では、言及しない。  [0604] Step S144 is a step of generating a response command to the client device. After completing the generation of the response command, the process transitions to step S145. In this step S144, the generated response command is, for example, a SUCCESS response command when all of the Put commands from the client device have ended normally. Also, in other embodiments, this embodiment does not mention.
[0605] ステップ S145は、前述の応答コマンドをクライアント機器に送信するために、下位 層処理部 3530に通知するステップである。通知終了後、ステップ S 146へ遷移する  [0605] Step S145 is a step of notifying the lower layer processing unit 3530 to transmit the above-mentioned response command to the client device. After the notification ends, transition to step S 146
[0606] ステップ S146は、通信が終了かどうかを判別するステップである。終了でない場合 は、ステップ S 141へ遷移する。 [0606] Step S146 is a step of determining whether the communication has ended. If not end The process transitions to step S141.
[0607] 以上の動作を、サーノ機器 3500の OBEX層処理部 3520の制御部 3521力行うこ とにより、最終でない Put要求コマンドに対しては、従来の OBEX層処理部で生成し ていた CONTINUE応答コマンドの生成、送信を行わず、最終の Put要求コマンドに 対しては、 SUCCESS応答コマンドを生成、送信することが可能となり、通信の効率 を上げることが可能となる。また、最終の Putコマンドに対する SUCCESS応答コマン ドをクライアント機器に送信するため、クライアント機器において、サーバ機器 3500に 正常にデータ転送を行えたかどうかを判別することが可能となる。  [0607] By performing the above operation in the control unit 3521 of the OBEX layer processing unit 3520 of the Sano device 3500, the CONTINUE response generated in the conventional OBEX layer processing unit for a non-final Put request command It is possible to generate and transmit a SUCCESS response command in response to the final Put request command without generating or transmitting a command, which makes it possible to improve communication efficiency. Also, since the SUCCESS response command to the final Put command is sent to the client device, it is possible to determine whether the client device has successfully transferred data to the server device 3500 or not.
[0608] また、図 62に示したように、通信方向選択部 3524による双方向通信、片方向通信 の切り替えと組合わせることで、双方向通信時は、最終の Putコマンドのみ SUCCE SS応答コマンドを生成、送信し、片方向通信時は、全ての要求コマンドに対して応 答コマンドの生成、送信を行わな 、動作を行うことが可能となる。  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, by combining it with switching between two-way communication and one-way communication by the communication direction selection unit 3524, at the time of two-way communication, only the final Put command receives the SUCCE SS response command. During one-way communication, it is possible to perform operations without generating and transmitting response commands for all request commands.
[0609] 〔実施の第十五形態〕  [Fifteenth Embodiment of the Implementation]
本実施の第十五形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)につ 、て、 図 64に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態において定義 した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形態にお Vヽてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
[0610] 本実施の形態では、図 64を用いて、携帯電話間での通信例にっ 、て説明する。な お、送信機と受信機に携帯電話を用いているが、送信機もしくは受信機のどちらか一 方が携帯電話であればよぐ本発明のいずれかの方式により赤外線等にてデータの 送信もしくは受信が可能であるならば、対向機器が携帯電話でなくても構わない。  In this embodiment, an example of communication between mobile phones will be described using FIG. Although a mobile phone is used as a transmitter and a receiver, if either the transmitter or the receiver is a mobile phone, data can be transmitted by infrared rays according to any of the present invention methods. Alternatively, if the reception is possible, the opposite device may not be a mobile phone.
[0611] 図 64では、赤外線を用いて、携帯電話 A内のデータを携帯電話 Bに送信している 。携帯電話 Bでは、携帯電話 Aから送信されたデータを受信すると、携帯電話 B内の メモリもしくは接続された外部メモリ内に受信データを保存する。前述のデータとは、 テキストデータ、画像データ、音声データ、電話帳データ、システム情報などであり、 特定のフォーマットに限定されるものではない。また、携帯電話 A内のデータとは、携 帯電話 Aの内部メモリ内のデータ、携帯電話 Aに接続されている外部メモリ(SDカー ドなどの不揮発性メモリ)内のデータのどちらでもよい。 [0612] 例えば、双方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)においては、前述の各実施の形 態のいずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のない IrLAPの UIフレームに通 し番号を付与して送信し、受信側 (携帯電話 B)の返信フレームの内容により、必要な らば再送を行い、受信側 (携帯電話 B)においては、エラー検出および通し番号の解 析を行い、必要ならば再送要求を行うことで、品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる In FIG. 64, data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to the mobile phone B using infrared rays. When the mobile phone B receives the data transmitted from the mobile phone A, the received data is stored in the memory in the mobile phone B or in the connected external memory. The aforementioned data is text data, image data, voice data, telephone directory data, system information, etc., and is not limited to a specific format. The data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A. For example, at the time of two-way communication, the transmitting side (mobile phone A) assigns a serial number to the IrLAP UI frame with no restriction on the window size by the method of any of the above-described embodiments. Transmit, and retransmit if necessary according to the contents of the reply frame of the receiver (mobile phone B), perform error detection and serial number analysis on the receiver (mobile phone B), if necessary, and By making a retransmission request, high quality communication can be performed.
[0613] また、例えば、片方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)にお 、ては、前述の各実 施の形態の 、ずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のな ヽ IrLAPの UIフレー ムに通し番号を付与して送信し、受信側 (携帯電話 B)においては、エラー検出及び 通し番号の解析を行うことで、品質の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。 Also, for example, at the time of one-way communication, on the transmitting side (mobile phone A), the window size is not limited according to any of the methods of the above-described embodiments. The frame is given a serial number and transmitted, and the receiving side (mobile phone B) can perform high-quality communication by performing error detection and serial number analysis.
[0614] これにより、 UIフレームを用いることで、従来の Iフレームでのウィンドウサイズの制 限以内での対向局との確認に比べ、少なくすることが可能となり、転送効率が高ぐ かつ品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0614] With this, by using the UI frame, it is possible to reduce the number compared with the opposite station within the limitation of the window size in the conventional I frame, and the transfer efficiency is high and the quality is high. It is possible to perform high communication.
[0615] 特に、携帯電話に SMPを用いる場合、送信するファイルごとに、適切な送信機のタ ィムアウト時間を決定することで、エラー発生時での通信効率の高!、通信路を提供 するこが可能となる。具体的には、受信機において、データ処理に時間が力かると思 われるファイル(例え «JPEG画像や MPEG動画などのデコード処理を行わなけれ ばならないファイル)については、 BL= 1のフレーム送信後の RSが含まれるフレーム の待ち時間を長くし、テキストファイルなどデータ処理に時間が力からないと思われる ファイル送信時には、待ち時間を短くすればょ ヽ。  [0615] In particular, when using SMP in a mobile phone, by determining an appropriate transmitter time-out time for each file to be transmitted, communication efficiency is high when an error occurs, and a communication path is provided. Is possible. Specifically, for files that are considered to be time-consuming for data processing in the receiver (for example, «files that must be decoded such as JPEG images and MPEG moving images), the frame after BL = 1 has been transmitted. Increase the latency of frames that contain RS, and reduce the latency when sending files such as text files that do not seem to take much time to process data.
[0616] 〔実施の第十六形態〕  Sixteenth Form of Implementation
本実施の第十六形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)につ 、て、 図 65に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態において定義 した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形態にお Vヽてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
[0617] 本実施の形態では、図 65を用いて、携帯電話と表示装置との間での通信例につい て説明する。なお、送信機として携帯電話を用いているが、本発明のいずれかの方 式により赤外線等にてデータの送信が可能であるならば、送信機器が携帯電話でな くても構わない。また、表示装置が送信側となっても構わない。 In this embodiment, an example of communication between a mobile phone and a display device will be described with reference to FIG. Although a mobile phone is used as a transmitter, if the data can be transmitted by infrared rays etc. by any of the methods of the present invention, the transmitter is not a mobile phone. It does not matter. In addition, the display device may be the transmission side.
[0618] 図 65では、赤外線を用いて、携帯電話 A内のデータを表示装置 B (TVやモニタな ど)に送信している。表示装置 Bでは、携帯電話 Aから送信されたデータに対して適 切な処理を行い、例えば、画像データであった場合は、必要ならば圧縮されたデー タを解凍するなどして、表示を行うが、これに限らない。また、前述のデータとは、テキ ストデータ、画像データ、音声データ、電話帳データ、システム情報などであり、特定 のフォーマットに限定されるものではない。また、携帯電話 A内のデータとは、携帯電 話 Aの内部メモリ内のデータ、携帯電話 Aに接続されている外部メモリ(SDカードな どの不揮発性メモリ)内のデータのどちらでもよい。  In FIG. 65, data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to a display device B (such as a TV or a monitor) using infrared light. The display device B performs appropriate processing on the data transmitted from the mobile phone A. For example, in the case of image data, display is performed by decompressing compressed data if necessary. But it is not limited to this. Further, the above-mentioned data are text data, image data, voice data, telephone directory data, system information and the like, and are not limited to a specific format. Further, the data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
[0619] 例えば、双方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)においては、前述の各実施の形 態のいずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のない IrLAPの UIフレームに通 し番号を付与して送信し、受信側(表示装置 B)の返信フレームの内容により、必要な らば再送を行い、受信側(表示装置 B)においては、エラー検出および通し番号の解 析を行い、必要ならば再送要求を行うことで、品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる  For example, at the time of two-way communication, the transmitting side (mobile phone A) assigns a serial number to the IrLAP UI frame with no window size restriction by any of the methods described in the above embodiments. Then, it retransmits if necessary according to the contents of the reply frame on the receiving side (display device B), and performs error detection and serial number analysis on the receiving side (display device B), if necessary. By making a retransmission request, high quality communication can be performed.
[0620] また、例えば、片方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)にお 、ては、前述の各実 施の形態の 、ずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のな ヽ IrLAPの UIフレー ムに通し番号を付与して送信し、受信側(表示装置 B)においては、エラー検出及び 通し番号の解析を行うことで、品質の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。 Also, for example, at the time of one-way communication, on the transmitting side (mobile phone A), the window size is not limited according to any of the methods of the above-described embodiments. It is possible to perform communication with high quality by performing error detection and analysis of the serial number on the receiving side (display device B) by assigning the serial number to the frame and transmitting it.
[0621] これにより、 UIフレームを用いることで、従来の Iフレームでのウィンドウサイズの制 限以内での対向局との確認に比べ、少なくすることが可能となり、転送効率が高ぐ かつ品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0621] As a result, by using the UI frame, it is possible to reduce the number compared with the opposite station within the limitation of the window size in the conventional I frame, and the transfer efficiency is high and the quality is high. It is possible to perform high communication.
[0622] 特に、表示装置に SMPを用いる場合、接続時に表示装置が送信機に通知する受 信バッファサイズを、 JPEG画像の画像サイズ (数 100KB力も数 MB程度)に設定す ることで、送信機の一括送信データサイズを、 JPEG画像 1枚が一度に送信できる程 度のサイズに設定することができる。  In particular, when using SMP as the display device, transmission is performed by setting the reception buffer size notified to the transmitter by the display device at the time of connection to the image size of JPEG images (about several hundreds of KB and several MB). The batch transmission data size of the machine can be set to a size that allows one JPEG image to be transmitted at one time.
[0623] これにより、例えば、表示装置が受信バッファを 2つ持ち、 1つの受信バッファに JPE G画像データを受信し終わった時点で、受信バッファの切り替えを行い、 2つめの受 信バッファに次の JPEG画像を受信して ヽる間に 1つめの受信バッファ内の JPEGデ ータのデコードを行うなどの処理が簡単に行える。 Thus, for example, when the display apparatus has two reception buffers and reception of JPE G image data to one reception buffer is completed, the reception buffer is switched, and the second reception is performed. While receiving the next JPEG image in the reception buffer, processing such as decoding of the JPEG data in the first reception buffer can be easily performed.
[0624] 〔実施の第十七形態〕  [Seventeenth Form of Implementation]
本実施の第十七形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)につ 、て、 図 66に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態において定義 した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形態にお Vヽてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
[0625] 本実施の形態では、図 66を用いて、携帯電話と印刷装置との間での通信例につい て説明する。なお、送信機として携帯電話を用いているが、本発明のいずれかの方 式により赤外線等にてデータの送信が可能であるならば、送信機器が携帯電話でな くても構わない。また、印刷装置が送信側となっても構わない。  [0625] In this embodiment, an example of communication between a mobile phone and a printing apparatus will be described using FIG. Although a mobile phone is used as a transmitter, the transmission device may not be a mobile phone as long as data can be transmitted by infrared rays or the like according to any method of the present invention. Also, the printing apparatus may be the transmission side.
[0626] 図 66では、赤外線を用いて、携帯電話 A内のデータを印刷装置 Bに送信している 。印刷装置 Bでは、携帯電話 Aから送信されたデータに対して適切な処理を行い、例 えば、画像データであった場合は、必要ならば圧縮されたデータを解凍するなどして 、印刷を行うが、これに限らない。また、前述のデータとは、テキストデータ、画像デー タ、電話帳データ、システム情報などであり、特定のフォーマットに限定されるもので はない。また、携帯電話 A内のデータとは、携帯電話 Aの内部メモリ内のデータ、携 帯電話 Aに接続されている外部メモリ(SDカードなどの不揮発性メモリ)内のデータ のどちらでもよい。  [0626] In Fig. 66, data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to the printing apparatus B using infrared rays. The printing device B performs appropriate processing on the data transmitted from the mobile phone A. For example, if it is image data, printing is performed by decompressing compressed data if necessary. But it is not limited to this. Also, the above-mentioned data are text data, image data, telephone directory data, system information, etc., and it is not limited to a specific format. The data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
[0627] 例えば、双方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)にお 、ては、前述の各実施の形 態のいずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のない IrLAPの UIフレームに通 し番号を付与して送信し、受信側(印刷装置 B)の返信フレームの内容により、必要な らば再送を行い、受信側(印刷装置 B)においては、エラー検出および通し番号の解 析を行い、必要ならば再送要求を行うことで、品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる  [0627] For example, at the time of two-way communication, the transmitting side (mobile phone A) transmits an IrLAP UI frame having no window size limitation by any of the methods described in the above embodiments. A number is added and transmitted, and if necessary, retransmission is performed according to the contents of the reply frame on the receiving side (printing device B), and on the receiving side (printing device B), error detection and serial number analysis are performed. It is possible to perform high quality communication by making a retransmission request if necessary.
[0628] また、例えば、片方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)にお 、ては、前述の各実 施の形態の 、ずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のな ヽ IrLAPの UIフレー ムに通し番号を付与して送信し、受信側(印刷装置 B)においては、エラー検出及び 通し番号の解析を行うことで、品質の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。 [0628] Also, for example, at the time of one-way communication, on the transmitting side (mobile phone A), the window size is not limited according to any of the methods of the above-described embodiments. The frame is assigned a serial number and transmitted, and the receiving side (printing apparatus B) detects an error and By analyzing the serial number, it is possible to communicate with high quality!
[0629] これにより、 UIフレームを用いることで、従来の Iフレームでのウィンドウサイズの制 限以内での対向局との確認に比べ、少なくすることが可能となり、転送効率が高ぐ かつ品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。 [0629] Thus, by using the UI frame, it is possible to reduce the number compared with the opposite station within the limitation of the window size in the conventional I frame, and the transfer efficiency is high and the quality is high. It is possible to perform high communication.
[0630] 特に、印刷装置に SMPを用いる場合、接続時に印刷装置が送信機に通知する受 信バッファサイズを、 JPEG画像の画像サイズ (数 100KB力も数 MB程度)に設定す ることで、一次局の一括送信データサイズを、 JPEG画像 1枚が一度に送信できる程 度のサイズに設定することができる。 [0630] In particular, when using SMP as the printing apparatus, the primary size can be set by setting the reception buffer size that the printing apparatus notifies the transmitter at connection time to the image size of JPEG images (about several hundred KB and several MB). The batch transmission data size of the station can be set to a size that allows one JPEG image to be transmitted at one time.
[0631] これにより、例えば、印刷装置が受信バッファを 2つ持ち、 1つの受信バッファに JPE G画像データを受信し終わった時点で、受信バッファの切り替えを行い、 2つめの受 信バッファに次の JPEG画像を受信して ヽる間に 1つめの受信バッファ内の JPEGデ ータのデコードを行うなどの処理が簡単に行える。また、印刷装置は、印刷中で次の データを受信できない状態の場合、エラーが発生していない状況でも、擬似的にェ ラーが発生していると送信機に通知し、送信機力もの再送を行わせるなどして、時間 稼ぎを行うことが可能となる。 Thus, for example, when the printing apparatus has two reception buffers and one reception buffer receives JPE G image data, the reception buffer is switched, and the second reception buffer is next received. While receiving a JPEG image, it is easy to perform processing such as decoding JPEG data in the first reception buffer. In addition, when printing is in a state where it is not possible to receive the next data during printing, the printer notifies the transmitter that a error has occurred in a pseudo manner even if no error has occurred, and the transmitter power is retransmitted. It is possible to earn time, for example, by
[0632] 〔実施の第十八形態〕  Eighteenth Form of Implementation!
本実施の第十八形態に係る転送データの転送システム (通信システム)につ 、て、 図 67に基づいて説明すると以下の通りである。なお、他の実施の形態において定義 した用語 (部材及び機能を含む)については、特に断らない限り本実施の形態にお Vヽてもその定義に則って用いるものとする。  The transfer data transfer system (communication system) according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIG. The terms (including members and functions) defined in the other embodiments are used in accordance with the definition of V in the present embodiment unless otherwise specified.
[0633] 本実施の形態では、図 67を用いて、携帯電話と記録装置との間での通信例につい て説明する。なお、送信機として携帯電話を用いているが、本発明のいずれかの方 式により赤外線等にてデータの送信が可能であるならば、送信機器が携帯電話でな くても構わない。また、記録装置が送信側となっても構わない。  In this embodiment, an example of communication between a mobile phone and a recording device will be described with reference to FIG. Although a mobile phone is used as a transmitter, the transmission device may not be a mobile phone as long as data can be transmitted by infrared rays or the like according to any method of the present invention. Also, the recording apparatus may be the transmission side.
[0634] 図 67では、赤外線を用いて、携帯電話 A内のデータを記録装置 Bに送信している 。記録装置 Bでは、携帯電話 Aから送信されたデータに対して適切な処理を行い、例 えば、画像データであった場合は、記録装置 B内のメモリまたは記録装置 Bに接続さ れた外部メモリに記録を行う。記録装置 B内のメモリとは、 SDRAMなどの揮発性メモ リでも、フラッシュメモリなどの不揮発性メモリ、記録可能な DVD、 HDDドライブなど、 一時的または半永久的に記録できる媒体であれば何でもよい。また、前述のデータと は、テキストデータ、画像データ、音声データ、電話帳データ、システム情報などであ り、特定のフォーマットに限定されるものではない。また、携帯電話 A内のデータとは 、携帯電話 Aの内部メモリ内のデータ、携帯電話 Aに接続されている外部メモリ(SD カードなどの不揮発性メモリ)内のデータのどちらでもよい。 [0634] In Fig. 67, data in the mobile phone A is transmitted to the recording device B using infrared light. The recording device B performs appropriate processing on the data transmitted from the mobile phone A. For example, when it is image data, the memory in the recording device B or the external memory connected to the recording device B Record on Memory in the recording device B is a volatile memo such as SDRAM It is also possible to use any non-volatile memory such as flash memory, recordable DVD, HDD drive, etc. as long as it can record temporarily or semi-permanently. Further, the above-mentioned data are text data, image data, voice data, telephone directory data, system information and the like, and are not limited to a specific format. The data in the mobile phone A may be either data in the internal memory of the mobile phone A or data in an external memory (nonvolatile memory such as an SD card) connected to the mobile phone A.
[0635] 例えば、双方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)にお 、ては、前述の各実施の形 態のいずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のない IrLAPの UIフレームに通 し番号を付与して送信し、受信側(記録装置 B)の返信フレームの内容により、必要な らば再送を行い、受信側(記録装置 B)においては、エラー検出および通し番号の解 析を行い、必要ならば再送要求を行うことで、品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる [0635] For example, at the time of two-way communication, the transmitting side (mobile phone A) transmits an IrLAP UI frame having no window size limitation by any of the methods described in the above embodiments. A number is added and transmitted, and if necessary, retransmission is performed according to the contents of the reply frame on the receiving side (recording device B), and on the receiving side (recording device B), error detection and serial number analysis are performed. It is possible to perform high quality communication by making a retransmission request if necessary.
[0636] また、例えば、片方向通信時には、送信側 (携帯電話 A)にお 、ては、前述の各実 施の形態の 、ずれかの方法により、ウィンドウサイズの制限のな ヽ IrLAPの UIフレー ムに通し番号を付与して送信し、受信側(記録装置 B)においては、エラー検出及び 通し番号の解析を行うことで、品質の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。 [0636] Also, for example, at the time of one-way communication, on the transmitting side (mobile phone A), the window size is not limited according to one of the methods of the above-described embodiments. The frame is assigned a serial number and transmitted, and the receiving side (recording apparatus B) can perform high-quality communication by performing error detection and serial number analysis.
[0637] これにより、 UIフレームを用いることで、従来の Iフレームでのウィンドウサイズの制 限以内での対向局との確認に比べ、少なくすることが可能となり、転送効率が高ぐ かつ品質の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0637] With this, by using the UI frame, it is possible to reduce the number compared with the opposite station within the limitation of the window size in the conventional I frame, and the transfer efficiency is high and the quality is high. It is possible to perform high communication.
[0638] 特に、記録装置に SMPを用いる場合、接続時に記録装置が送信機に通知する受 信バッファサイズを、 MPEG動画のフレームサイズ(数 100KBから数 MB程度)に設 定することで、送信機の一括送信データサイズを、フレーム 1枚が一度に送信できる 程度のサイズに設定することができる。  [0638] In particular, when using SMP as a recording device, transmission is performed by setting the reception buffer size notified to the transmitter by the recording device at connection time to the frame size (about several hundred KB to several MB) of the MPEG moving image. The batch transmission data size of the machine can be set to a size that allows one frame to be transmitted at one time.
[0639] これにより、例えば、記録装置が受信バッファを 2つ持ち、 1つの受信バッファにフレ ームデータ 1枚分を受信し終わった時点で、受信バッファの切り替えを行い、 2つめ の受信バッファに次のフレームデータを受信している間に 1つめの受信バッファ内の フレームデータのデコードを行うなどの処理が簡単に行える。  Thus, for example, when the recording apparatus has two reception buffers and one frame of reception data has been received in one reception buffer, the reception buffer is switched, and the second reception buffer is switched to the next reception buffer. Processing such as decoding frame data in the first reception buffer can be performed easily while receiving frame data.
[0640] 〔実施の第十九形態〕 本発明の他の実施の形態について図 68から図 90に基づいて説明すれば、以下の とおりである。なお、本実施の形態で説明する通信プロトコルは、実施の第一形態〜 第十八形態に適用されるものである。よって、実施の第一形態〜第十八形態におい て定義した用語については、特に断らない限り本実施の形態においてもその定義に 則って用いるものとする。 Nineteenth Form of Implementation! Another embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 90. The communication protocol described in the present embodiment is applied to the first to eighteenth embodiments. Therefore, the terms defined in the first to eighteenth embodiments are also used in the present embodiment according to the definition unless otherwise specified.
[0641] (1)通信層  [0641] (1) Communication layer
図 68は、 OSI7階層モデルと、 IrDAの階層および本発明に係る通信システムの階 層の対応関係を示す模式図である。  FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the OSI 7 hierarchical model, the hierarchy of IrDA, and the hierarchy of the communication system according to the present invention.
[0642] 本実施の形態に係る通信システムの各通信層も、上記 OSI7層モデルの対応する 階層と同等の機能を有する。ただし、図 68に示すように、上記通信システムは、セッ シヨン層とプレゼンテーション層とを 1つにした、 6階層の構造となって!/、る。  [0642] Each communication layer of the communication system according to the present embodiment also has the same function as that of the corresponding layer of the OSI seven-layer model. However, as shown in FIG. 68, the communication system has a six-layer structure in which the session layer and the presentation layer are one!
[0643] 本実施の形態では、説明の便宜上、本発明の一適用例である IrSimpleに基づ 、 て説明する。し力し、本発明は IrSimpleに限定されるものではない。なお、 IrSimple とは、従来の IrDAの一部機能を改良したものである。  In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, description will be made based on IrSimple, which is an application example of the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to IrSimple. Note that IrSimple is an improvement on some of the functions of the conventional IrDA.
[0644] 本実施の形態では、 IrSimpleに則って、データリンク層、ネットワーク層、トランスポ ート層、セッション層 +プレゼンテーション層を、それぞれ、 LAP, LAMP, SMP、 O BEXと表記することがある。また、通信層を送信機、受信機で区別する場合に、送信 機 (一次局)に" P"、受信機 (二次局)に" S"と付記する。例えば、 "LAP (P) "とは、送 信機のデータリンク層を意味する。  In the present embodiment, in accordance with IrSimple, the data link layer, the network layer, the transport layer, and the session layer + the presentation layer may be referred to as LAP, LAMP, SMP, and OBEX, respectively. In addition, when the communication layer is distinguished by transmitters and receivers, "P" is added to the transmitter (primary station) and "S" to the receiver (secondary station). For example, "LAP (P)" means the data link layer of the transmitter.
[0645] (2)送信機 受信機間のシーケンス  [0645] (2) Sequence between transmitter and receiver
(2— 1)接続シーケンス  (2-1) Connection sequence
〔A〕レスポンス有り  [A] With response
図 69 (a)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の接続シーケンスを示すシーケンス図 である。また、図 69 (c)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の接続シーケンスの際の 通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 69 (a) is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 69 (c) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
[0646] 本実施の开態(レスポンス有り)では、 SNRMの Destination Device Addressにグロ 一バルアドレスを使用することにより、サーチと同様の機能を SNRMコマンドに持た せることができる(図 69 (c)の SNRM command)。 [0647] また、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)では、データリンク層の接続パケットである SN RMコマンドおよび UAレスポンスの中に、ネットワーク層、トランスポート層、セシヨン 層、プレゼンテーション層等の上位層の接続に必要なパラメータおよびコマンドを揷 入する。これにより、従来の IrDAでは必要であった上位層それぞれを接続するため の接続パケットを 1つのパケットに凝縮することができる。 [0646] In the present embodiment (with response), the same function as the search can be provided to the SNRM command by using the global address for the Destination Device Address of the SNRM (Fig. 69 (c) SNRM command). Also, in the present embodiment (with response), in the SN RM command and UA response that are connection packets of the data link layer, upper layers such as the network layer, transport layer, session layer, presentation layer, etc. are included. Insert parameters and commands required for connection. As a result, it is possible to condense connection packets for connecting the upper layers required in the conventional IrDA into one packet.
[0648] それゆえ、従来、複数のパケットが必要であった、サーチと接続シーケンスを 1つの パケット対で行うことができる。  [0648] Therefore, search and connection sequences can be performed with one packet pair, which conventionally required multiple packets.
[0649] 〔B〕レスポンス無し  [0649] [B] No response
図 69 (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の接続シーケンスを示すシーケンス図 である。また、図 69 (c)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の接続シーケンスの際の 通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。なお、本実施の形態 (レスポンス無し )では、 UAレスポンス(図 69 (c)の UA response for SNRM)は不要である。  FIG. 69 (b) is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 69 (c) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (no response). In the present embodiment (no response), the UA response (UA response for SNRM in FIG. 69 (c)) is unnecessary.
[0650] ユーザまたはアプリケーションおよびデータ種類によっては、受信機からのレスポン スを省略した通信方式を選択できる。この場合、図 38 (b)に示すように、 SNRMコマ ンドのみでサーチおよび接続が終了したものとできる。  [0650] Depending on the user or application and data type, it is possible to select a communication scheme in which the response from the receiver is omitted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), it can be assumed that the search and connection have been completed only by the SNRM command.
[0651] このように、本実施の形態の接続シーケンスは、複数の通信層の接続リクエストをま とめることにより、接続に要する時間を短縮するものであるため、通信路が切断した場 合でも再接続が容易である。よって、通信路が切断しやすい、例えば赤外線による無 線通信に特に適している。ただし、 IEEE802.i l無線、 Bluetoothを含む他の無線通信 、および、有線通信においても効果的である。  As described above, the connection sequence of this embodiment shortens the time required for connection by putting together the connection requests of a plurality of communication layers. Easy to connect. Therefore, the communication path is easily disconnected, and it is particularly suitable for, for example, infrared communication. However, it is also effective in other wireless communications including IEEE802.11 wireless, Bluetooth, and wired communications.
[0652] また、本実施の形態では、すべての通信層の接続を 1回の通信で接続する例につ いて説明するが、本発明はこれに限定されない。例えば、 1つの通信層を接続した後 、残りの複数の通信層を接続するようにしてもよい。また、 1つの通信層の接続が複数 回の通信によって行われてもよい。例えば、ネットワーク層の接続が 2回の通信を要 する場合、データリンク層の接続とネットワーク層の 1回目の接続とを 1つの接続リクェ ストにまとめ、ネットワーク層の 2回目の接続とトランスポート層の接続とを 1つの接続リ タエストにまとめてもよい。  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which connection of all communication layers is connected by one communication will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after connecting one communication layer, the remaining plural communication layers may be connected. Also, connection of one communication layer may be performed by multiple times of communication. For example, if the network layer connection requires two communications, combine the data link layer connection and the first connection of the network layer into one connection request, and the second connection of the network layer and the transport layer You may combine the connections in one connection request into one.
[0653] (2— 2)データ交換シーケンス [A]レスポンス有り (2-2) Data exchange sequence [A] There is a response
図 70 (a) (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)のデータ交換シーケンスを示すシ 一ケンス図である。また、図 70 (a)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)のデータ交換 シーケンスの際の通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  Figs. 70 (a) and 70 (b) are sequence diagrams showing a data exchange sequence according to the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 70 (a) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
[0654] 本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)では、 1つのデータ間毎の下位層及び上位層のレ スポンスを極力減らし、多くのデータを送信した後にエラーがあつたか無力ゝったかを 返信する。 In the present embodiment (with response), the responses of the lower layer and the upper layer for each piece of data are reduced as much as possible, and after transmitting a large amount of data, whether or not an error or helplessness is sent back is sent.
[0655] 送信機は、データ通信時に、シーケンシャルなパケット番号および受信データに問 題がな力つたかを問うためのフラグと、上記データをパケットのサイズに合わせて分割 した分割データで構築されたパケットを用いる。  [0655] At the time of data communication, the transmitter is constructed of a sequential packet number, a flag for asking whether a problem has occurred with received data, and divided data obtained by dividing the above data according to the size of the packet. Use a packet.
[0656] 図 70 (a)に示すように、送信機は、所定数のパケット数を送信した後に上記フラグ をオンにしたパケットの送信を行う。これに対し、受信機は、以前のデータの始めから 、もしくは上記フラグがオンであったパケットを受信し、返信を行ってから、エラーを検 出しな力つた場合は、正常に受信した旨を送信機に通知する。また、受信機は、以前 のデータの始めから、もしくは上記フラグがオンであったパケットを受信し、返信を行 つてから、エラーを検出した場合は、受信することができな力つたパケット以降の上記 分割データ部分を無視し、上記フラグのみを確認し、上記フラグがオンであった場合 に、エラーにより受信できな力つたパケット番号を送信機へ通知する。  [0656] As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the transmitter transmits a predetermined number of packets and then transmits a packet with the flag turned on. On the other hand, when the receiver receives a packet from the beginning of the previous data or the above flag is turned on and sends back a response, it indicates that it has received successfully if it detects no error. Notify the transmitter. Also, when the receiver receives a packet from the beginning of the previous data or the above flag is turned on and sends back a reply, if an error is detected, the subsequent packets that can not be received are received. The divided data portion is ignored, only the flag is checked, and if the flag is on, the transmitter is notified of a packet number that can not be received due to an error.
[0657] さらに、送信機は、正常に受信した旨を受信機力 受けた場合、次のパケットから送 信を行う。また、送信機は、エラーがあつたという通知を受けた場合、受信できなかつ たパケット番号から、上記フラグをオンにしたパケットまでを再送信する。  [0657] Furthermore, when the transmitter receives a signal indicating that it has been correctly received, the transmitter transmits from the next packet. Also, when the transmitter is notified that an error has occurred, it retransmits from the packet number which could not be received to the packet with the above flag turned on.
[0658] これにより、パケット間を詰めることができ、効率のよい通信が可能となる。  [0658] Thereby, packets can be packed and efficient communication can be performed.
[0659] 図 70 (a)に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)では、 UIフレーム(図 71 (b) )を使用する。このため、データリンク層(LAP層)ではパケットの抜けが認識できず、 トランスポート層で検出する。  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), a UI frame (FIG. 71 (b)) is used in the present embodiment (with response). For this reason, the packet link can not be recognized in the data link layer (LAP layer), and is detected in the transport layer.
[0660] UIフレームのトランスポート層のデータ部分にシーケンシャルナンバーとデータ確 認用フラグ、データの最後のパケットかどうか、受信したデータが正常であつたかを示 すフラグを設け、それらのフラグによってデータの送信を行う。 [0661] 〔B〕レスポンス無し [0660] The data portion of the transport layer of the UI frame is provided with a sequential number, a flag for data confirmation, a flag indicating whether it is the last packet of data, whether the received data was normal, and these flags Send [0661] [B] No response
図 72 (a) (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)のデータ交換シーケンスを示すシ 一ケンス図である。また、図 72 (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)のデータ交換 シーケンスの際の通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) are sequence diagrams showing a data exchange sequence according to the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (no response).
[0662] 本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)では、受信機のレスポンスを必要としな 、場合、デ ータの完全性のみを確認する。そのため、送信機はパケットにシーケンスナンバーを 振り、全てのデータを連続で送信する。  [0662] In this embodiment (no response), only the data integrity is checked in the case where the receiver response is not required. Therefore, the transmitter assigns a sequence number to the packet and transmits all data continuously.
[0663] そして、受信機は、エラーがあった力どうかを確認するのみであり、正常に受信した 場合には全てのデータを受けた後、受信機内で正常受信であることを認識し、次の 動作を行う。この場合の次の動作とは、例えば受信したデータを表示したり、印刷し たり、保存したりすることである。一方、エラーを検出した場合、受信機内で正常受信 できな力つたことを認識し、次の動作を行う。この場合の次の動作とは、失敗したこと をユーザーに知らせるためのインジケートや、次の受信待ち状態になることである。  [0663] Then, the receiver only confirms whether or not there is an error, and if it is received normally, after receiving all the data, it recognizes that the reception is normal within the receiver, and Perform the action of The next operation in this case is, for example, to display, print, or save the received data. On the other hand, when an error is detected, the receiver recognizes that the reception was not successful and performs the following operation. The next action in this case is an indication to notify the user of the failure or to be in the state of waiting for the next reception.
[0664] なお、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)でも、図 72 (b)に示す UIフレーム(図 71 (b) ) を使用する。 Also in the present embodiment (without response), the UI frame (FIG. 71 (b)) shown in FIG. 72 (b) is used.
[0665] (2— 3)切断シーケンス [0665] (2— 3) Disconnection Sequence
〔A〕レスポンス有り  [A] With response
図 73 (a)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の切断シーケンスを示すシーケンス図 である。また、図 73 (c)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の切断シーケンスの際の 通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 73 (a) is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 73 (c) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
[0666] 図 73 (c)に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)では、ネットワーク層、トラン スポート層、セシヨン層、プレゼンテーション層等の上位層の切断に必要なパラメータ およびコマンドを、 DISCコマンドおよび U Aレスポンスの中に挿入した。  [0666] As shown in FIG. 73 (c), in the present embodiment (with response), the parameters and commands necessary to disconnect the upper layers such as the network layer, transport layer, session layer, and presentation layer are displayed in DISC. Inserted in the command and UA response.
[0667] これにより、従来、複数のパケットが必要であった、切断シーケンスを 1つのパケット 対で行うことができる。  [0667] This allows the disconnection sequence to be performed with one packet pair, which conventionally required a plurality of packets.
[0668] 〔B〕レスポンス無し  [0668] [B] No response
図 73 (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の切断シーケンスを示すシーケンス図 である。また、図 73 (c)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の切断シーケンスの際の 通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。なお、本実施の形態 (レスポンス無しFIG. 73 (b) is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 73 (c) shows the case of the disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). It is explanatory drawing which shows the data structure of communication data. In addition, this embodiment (No response
)では、 UAレスポンス(図 73 (c)の UA response)は不要である。 Does not require a UA response (the UA response in Figure 73 (c)).
[0669] 図 73 (b)に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)では、受信機のレスポンス を必要としな ヽとして接続した場合、 DISCコマンドのみでサーチおよび切断が終了 したものとできる。 [0669] As shown in FIG. 73 (b), in the present embodiment (without response), when connection is made without requiring a response from the receiver, it is possible to conclude that search and disconnection have been completed only by the DISC command. .
[0670] (3)送信機、受信機内のシーケンス (0) Transmitter, sequence in receiver
図 74〜図 90では、説明の便宜上、データリンク層を LAP、ネットワーク層を LAMP For convenience of explanation, in Figure 74 to Figure 90, the data link layer is LAP, and the network layer is LAMP.
、トランスポート層を TTPまたは SMP、セッション層およびプレゼンテーション層を O, Transport layer TTP or SMP, session layer and presentation layer
BEXと表記する。また、通信層を送信機と受信機とで区別するために、送信機に" P"Indicated as BEX. Also, in order to distinguish the communication layer between transmitter and receiver, the transmitter "P"
、受信機に" S"と付記する。例えば、 "LAP (P) "とは、送信機のデータリンク層を意 味する。 , Add "S" to the receiver. For example, "LAP (P)" means the data link layer of the transmitter.
[0671] (3— 1)接続シーケンス  [0671] (3-1) Connection Sequence
〔A〕レスポンス有り  [A] With response
図 74は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の接続シーケンスを示すシーケンス図であ る。また、図 75 (a)、図 75 (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の接続シーケンスの 際の通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 74 is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are explanatory diagrams showing data structures of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
[0672] 図 74に示すように、本実施の形態 (レスポンス有り)では、送信機、受信機とも、接 続準備を行う。その後、送信機は、上位層のリクエストをそのまま下位層に渡していき 、 1つのパケット(SNRM)として送信する。一方、受信機は、 SNRMパケットを受けて 、そのまま上位層へ接続できた旨の通知を行った後、 OBEX (S)のレスポンスをその まま下位層に渡していき、 1つのパケット (UA)として送信する。送信機は、 UAを受 けたことで接続完了とし、上位層に通知(Connect. confirm)を上げて!/、く。  As shown in FIG. 74, in the present embodiment (with response), connection preparation is performed for both the transmitter and the receiver. After that, the transmitter passes the upper layer request as it is to the lower layer and transmits it as one packet (SNRM). On the other hand, the receiver receives the SNRM packet and reports that it can connect to the upper layer as it is, then passes the response of OBEX (S) to the lower layer as it is, and as one packet (UA) Send. The transmitter concludes the connection by receiving the UA, and sends notification (Connect. Confirm) to the upper layer!
[0673] このときの、送信機、受信機内のシーケンスは以下のとおりである。  The sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
[0674] まず、送信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。  First, each communication layer of the transmitter will be described.
[0675] OBEX(P)は、アプリケーション力もの接続要求が来た場合に、速やかに下位層 (S MP (P) )に対して接続要求コマンドをデータに入れて接続要求関数 (Primitive)を発 生する。また、 OBEX(P)は、 SMP (P)から接続確認関数を受けた場合に、そのデ ータの中から OBEX接続のレスポンスを確認し、問題ない(Success)というレスポンス であれば、接続完了とする。 [0675] When OBEX (P) receives an application connection request, it immediately sends a connection request command to the lower layer (S MP (P)) and issues a connection request function (Primitive). Produce. Also, when OBEX (P) receives the connection confirmation function from SMP (P), OBEX (P) confirms the response of the OBEX connection from the data, and responds that there is no problem (Success). If it is the connection is complete.
[0676] SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)からの接続要求関数を受けて、速やかに OBEX (P)の接 続要求関数のデータに、受信機の SMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して 、下位層 (LMP (P) )に対して接続要求関数を発生する。また、 SMP (P)は、 LMP ( P)から接続確認関数を受けた場合、関数のデータカゝら受信機の SMP (S)が生成し たパラメータを抜き取り、値を確認して、 SMP (S)とのネゴシエーションを終了する。 また、 SMP (P)は、接続確認関数のデータ力も SMP (S)のパラメータを取り除いた データを OBEX (P)に対して接続確認関数として送信する。  [0676] The SMP (P) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (P) and immediately transmits the data of the OBEX (P) connection request function to the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a connection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the connection check function from LMP (P), it extracts the parameters generated by the receiver's SMP (S) from the data data of the function, checks the value, and End the negotiation with). In addition, SMP (P) also transmits the data strength of the connection check function with the parameters of SMP (S) removed as the connection check function to OBEX (P).
[0677] LMP (P)は、 SMP (P)からの接続要求関数を受けて、速やかに SMP (P)の接続 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 下位層 (LAP (P) )に対して接続要求関数を発生する。また、 LMP (P)は、 LAP (P) から接続確認関数を受けた場合、関数のデータから受信機の LMP (S)が生成した ノ ラメータを抜き取り、値を確認して、 LMP (S)とのネゴシエーションを終了する。ま た、 LMP (P)は、接続確認関数のデータ力も LMP (S)のパラメータを取り除いたデ ータを、 SMP (P)に対して接続確認関数として送信する。  [0677] The LMP (P) receives the connection request function from the SMP (P) and promptly sends the data of the connection request function of the SMP (P) to the parameters required for communication with the LMP (S) of the receiver. And generate a connection request function for the lower layer (LAP (P)). Also, when LMP (P) receives the connection check function from LAP (P), it extracts the nolometer generated by LMP (S) of the receiver from the data of the function, and confirms the value, and LMP (S) End the negotiation with Also, LMP (P) transmits the data obtained by removing the parameter of LMP (S) from the data strength of the connection confirmation function as a connection confirmation function to SMP (P).
[0678] なお、通常は論理ポートを管理するために LSAP (Link Service Access Point)が定 義される。そして、 1対 1で 1つの接続をする場合には LMPを使用する必要がない。 この場合、 LSAPにコネクションレスの値を固定値として使用する。このため、 LMPの 接続パラメータ交換は不要となって 、る。  [0678] Normally, a Link Service Access Point (LSAP) is defined to manage logical ports. And there is no need to use LMP when making one-to-one connection. In this case, use a connectionless value as a fixed value for LSAP. This eliminates the need to exchange LMP connection parameters.
[0679] LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)からの接続要求関数を受けて、速やかに LMP (P)の接続 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LAP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 受信機の物理層に対して SNRMコマンドを出力する。また、 LAP (P)は、受信機の 物理層力 U Aレスポンスを受けた場合、 UAレスポンスのデータから受信機の LAP ( S)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、値を確認して、 LAP (S)とのネゴシエーションを 終了する。また、 LAP (P)は、 UAレスポンスのデータから LAP (S)のパラメータを取 り除いたデータを、 LMP (P)に対して接続確認関数として送信する。  [0679] LAP (P) receives the connection request function from LMP (P), promptly transmits the data of LMP (P) connection request function, and the parameters necessary for communication with LAP (S) of the receiver. And output an SNRM command to the physical layer of the receiver. Also, when the LAP (P) receives the physical layer strength UA response of the receiver, it extracts the parameters generated by the LAP (S) of the receiver from the data of the UA response, confirms the values, and checks the LAP (S) End the negotiation with. Also, LAP (P) transmits data obtained by removing the parameter of LAP (S) from the data of UA response as a connection confirmation function to LMP (P).
[0680] つづ 、て、受信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。  [0680] Next, each communication layer of the receiver will be described.
[0681] OBEX(S)は、アプリケーション力も接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる 。また、 OBEX(S)は、下位層(SMP (S) )力も接続通知関数 (Indication)を受けた場 合に、そのデータの中から OBEX接続コマンドを確認し、問題が無ければ Successと いうレスポンスを接続返答関数 (Response)として SMP (S)に対して出力し、接続完 了とする。 [0681] OBEX (S) receives the connection request function from the application and enters the reception standby state . Also, when OBEX (S) receives the connection notification function (Indication) also for the lower layer (SMP (S)) power, it checks the OBEX connection command from the data, and if there is no problem, the response says Success. Is output to SMP (S) as a connection response function (Response), and connection is completed.
[0682] SMP (S)は、 OBEX (S)からの接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる。ま た、 SMP (S)は、下位層(SMP (S) )から接続通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデ ータから送信機の SMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、それに対しての返答の パラメータを作成し、上記関数のデータから SMP (P)のパラメータを除 、たデータを 入れた接続要求関数を OBEX (S)に発した後、 OBEX (S)からの接続返答関数を待 つ。また、 SMP (S)は、 OBEX (S)からの接続返答関数を受けた場合に、 LMP (S) に対して OBEX (S)の接続返答関数のデータに上記返答のパラメータを付加して、 LMP (S)に対して接続返答関数を発生し、 SMP層のネゴシエーションを終了する。  The SMP (S) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (S), and stands by for reception. Also, when SMP (S) receives the connection notification function from the lower layer (SMP (S)), it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function, Create the response parameter of the above, remove the parameter of SMP (P) from the data of the above function, issue the connection request function containing the data to OBEX (S), and then return the connection response function from OBEX (S) I will wait. When SMP (S) receives the connection response function from OBEX (S), it adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of the connection response function of OBEX (S) for LMP (S), Generate a connection reply function to LMP (S) and complete the SMP layer negotiation.
[0683] LMP (S)は、 SMP (S)からの接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる。また 、 LMP (S)は、下位層(LAP (S) )カゝら接続通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデータ から送信機の LMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、それに対しての返答のパラ メータを作成し、上記関数のデータ力 LMP (P)のパラメータを除 、たデータを入れ た接続要求関数を SMP (S)に発した後、 SMP (S)からの接続返答関数を待つ。ま た、 LMP (S)は、 SMP (S)からの接続返答関数を受けた場合に、 LAP (S)に対して SMP (S)の接続返答関数のデータに上記返答のパラメータを付加して、 LAP (S)に 対して接続返答関数を発生し、 LMP層のネゴシエーションを終了する。  The LMP (S) receives the connection request function from the SMP (S) and stands by for reception. When LMP (S) receives a connection notification function from the lower layer (LAP (S)), it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter LMP (P) from the data of the function, Create a response parameter, remove the parameter of data function LMP (P) of the above function, issue a connection request function containing the data to SMP (S), and then connect response function from SMP (S) wait. When LMP (S) receives a connection response function from SMP (S), LMP (S) adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of SMP (S) connection response function. , Generate a connection reply function to LAP (S), and complete the LMP layer negotiation.
[0684] なお、通常は論理ポートを管理するために LSAP (Link Service Access Point)が定 義される。そして、 1対 1で 1つの接続をする場合には LMPを使用する必要がない。 この場合、 LSAPにコネクションレスの値を固定値として使用する。このため、 LMPの 接続パラメータ交換は不要となって 、る。  [0684] Note that, usually, LSAP (Link Service Access Point) is defined to manage logical ports. And there is no need to use LMP when making one-to-one connection. In this case, use a connectionless value as a fixed value for LSAP. This eliminates the need to exchange LMP connection parameters.
[0685] LAP (S)は、 LMP (S)力もの接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる。また、 LAP (S)は、物理層力 SNRMコマンドを受けた場合に、 SNRMコマンドのデータ から送信機の LAP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、 SNRMコマンドのデータか ら LAP (P)のパラメータを除 、たデータを入れた接続要求関数を LMP (S)に発した 後、それに対しての返答のパラメータを作成し、 LMP (S)からの接続返答関数を待 つ。また、 LAP (S)は、 LMP (S)からの接続返答関数を受けた場合に、 LMP (S)の 接続返答関数のデータに上記返答のパラメータを付加して、物理層に対して UAレ スポンスを出力し、 LAP層のネゴシエーションを終了する。 [0685] The LAP (S) receives the connection request function of the LMP (S) and enters the reception standby state. Also, when the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength SNRM command, it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter LAP (P) from the data of the SNRM command, and the parameter of the LAP (P) from the data of the SNRM command. Issued a connection request function containing the data to LMP (S) After that, create a response parameter for it and wait for the connection response function from LMP (S). Also, when the LAP (S) receives the connection response function from the LMP (S), it adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of the LMP (S) connection response function to Output the speech and complete the LAP layer negotiation.
[0686] 〔B〕レスポンス無し  [0686] [B] No response
図 76は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の接続シーケンスを示すシーケンス図で ある。また、図 75 (a)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の接続シーケンスの際の通 信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 76 is a sequence diagram showing a connection sequence of this embodiment (no response). Further, FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the connection sequence of the present embodiment (without response).
[0687] 図 76に示すように、本実施の形態 (レスポンス無し)では、送信機、受信機とも、接 続準備を行う。その後、送信機は、上位層のリクエストをそのまま下位層に渡していき 、 1つのパケット(SNRM)として送信する。そして、送信機は、 SNRMパケットを送信 した時点で接続完了として、 LAP (P)から上位層に通知(Connect. confirm)を上げて いく。一方、受信機は、 SNRMパケットを受けて、そのまま上位層へ接続できた旨の 通知を行い、 OBEX(S)に通知した時点で接続完了とする。  [0687] As shown in FIG. 76, in the present embodiment (without response), connection preparation is performed for both the transmitter and the receiver. After that, the transmitter passes the upper layer request as it is to the lower layer and transmits it as one packet (SNRM). Then, when the transmitter transmits the SNRM packet, the LAP (P) raises the notification (Connect. Confirm) from the LAP (P) to the upper layer as the connection completion. On the other hand, the receiver, upon receiving the SNRM packet, notifies that the connection to the upper layer has been made as it is, and completes the connection when notified to the OBEX (S).
[0688] このときの、送信機、受信機内のシーケンスは以下のとおりである。  The sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
[0689] まず、送信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。  First, each communication layer of the transmitter will be described.
[0690] OBEX(P)は、アプリケーション力 の接続要求が来た場合に、速やかに下位層 (S MP (P) )に対して接続要求コマンドをデータに入れて接続要求関数 (Primitive)を発 生する。また、 OBEX(P)は、 SMP (P)から接続確認関数を受けた場合に、接続完 了とする。  [0690] OBEX (P) immediately generates connection request function (Primitive) by putting connection request command into lower layer (S MP (P)) data when application connection request is received. Produce. Also, if OBEX (P) receives the connection confirmation function from SMP (P), the connection will be completed.
[0691] SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)からの接続要求関数を受けて、速やかに OBEX (P)の接 続要求関数のデータに、受信機の SMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して 、下位層 (LMP (P) )に対して接続要求関数を発生する。また、 SMP (P)は、 LMP ( P)カゝら接続確認関数を受けた時点で、送信したパラメータでネゴシエーションができ たとして、 SMP層のネゴシエーションを終了する。また、この時、 SMP (P)は、 OBE X(P)に対して接続確認関数を送信する。  [0691] The SMP (P) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (P) and immediately transmits the data of the OBEX (P) connection request function to the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a connection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the connection confirmation function from LMP (P), it concludes the SMP layer negotiation, assuming that the transmitted parameters can negotiate. Also, at this time, SMP (P) sends a connection confirmation function to OBE X (P).
[0692] LMP (P)は、 SMP (P)からの接続要求関数を受けて、速やかに SMP (P)の接続 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 下位層 (LAP (P) )に対して接続要求関数を発生する。また、 LMP (P)は、 LAP (P) 力も接続確認関数を受けた時点で、送信したパラメータでネゴシエーションができた として、 LMP層のネゴシエーションを終了する。また、この時、 LMP (P)は、 SMP (P )に対して接続確認関数を送信する。 [0692] The LMP (P) receives the connection request function from the SMP (P) and promptly sends the data of the connection request function of the SMP (P) to the parameters required for communication with the LMP (S) of the receiver. Add Generate a connection request function to the lower layer (LAP (P)). Also, LMP (P) ends negotiation of LMP layer assuming that negotiation can be performed using the transmitted parameters when LAP (P) force also receives the connection confirmation function. Also, at this time, LMP (P) sends a connection confirmation function to SMP (P).
[0693] なお、通常は論理ポートを管理するために LSAP (Link Service Access Point)が定 義される。そして、 1対 1で 1つの接続をする場合には LMPを使用する必要がない。 この場合、 LSAPにコネクションレスの値を固定値として使用する。このため、 LMPの 接続パラメータ交換は不要となって 、る。  [0693] Usually, a Link Service Access Point (LSAP) is defined to manage logical ports. And there is no need to use LMP when making one-to-one connection. In this case, use a connectionless value as a fixed value for LSAP. This eliminates the need to exchange LMP connection parameters.
[0694] LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)からの接続要求関数を受けて、速やかに LMP (P)の接続 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LAP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 受信機の物理層に対して SNRMコマンドを出力する。また、 LAP (P)は、 SNRMコ マンドを出力した時点で、送信したパラメータでネゴシエーションができたとして、 LA p層のネゴシエーションを終了する。また、この時、 LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)に対して接 続確認関数を送信する。  [0694] The LAP (P) receives the connection request function from the LMP (P), promptly transmits the data of the LMP (P) connection request function, and the parameters necessary for communication with the LAP (S) of the receiver. And output an SNRM command to the physical layer of the receiver. Also, when the LAP (P) outputs the SNRM command, it concludes the negotiation of the LA p layer, assuming that the transmitted parameters can be negotiated. At this time, LAP (P) sends a connection confirmation function to LMP (P).
[0695] つづ 、て、受信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。 [0695] Next, each communication layer of the receiver will be described.
[0696] OBEX(S)は、アプリケーション力も接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる 。また、 OBEX(S)は、下位層(SMP (S) )力も接続通知関数 (Indication)を受けた場 合に、そのデータの中力も OBEX接続コマンドを確認し、問題が無ければ、接続完 了とする。  [0696] The OBEX (S) receives the connection request function also from the application power and stands by for reception. Also, if OBEX (S) receives lower layer (SMP (S)) power as well as the connection notification function (Indication), the middle power of the data also confirms the OBEX connection command, and if there is no problem, the connection is completed. I assume.
[0697] SMP (S)は、 OBEX (S)からの接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる。ま た、 SMP (S)は、下位層(SMP (S) )から接続通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデ ータから送信機の SMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、そのパラメータを使用 してネゴシエーションを完了させる。そして、 SMP (S)は、上記関数のデータから SM P (P)のパラメータを除!ヽたデータを入れた接続要求関数を OBEX (S)に発する。  [0697] The SMP (S) receives the connection request function from the OBEX (S) and stands by for reception. Also, when SMP (S) receives the connection notification function from the lower layer (SMP (S)), it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function, and extracts that parameter. Use to complete the negotiation. And SMP (S) removes the parameter of SMP (P) from the data of the above function! Sends a connection request function containing overwhelmed data to OBEX (S).
[0698] LMP (S)は、 SMP (S)からの接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる。また 、 LMP (S)は、下位層(LAP (S) )カゝら接続通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデータ から送信機の LMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、そのパラメータを使用して ネゴシエーションを完了させる。そして、 LMP (S)は、上記関数のデータ力 LMP ( P)のパラメータを除!ヽたデータを入れた接続要求関数を SMP (S)に発する。 [0698] The LMP (S) receives the connection request function from the SMP (S) and stands by for reception. When LMP (S) receives a connection notification function from the lower layer (LAP (S)), it extracts the parameter generated by LMP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the function, and uses that parameter And complete the negotiation. And LMP (S) is the data power of the above function LMP ( Remove the parameters of P)! Send a connection request function containing the overwhelmed data to SMP (S).
[0699] なお、通常は論理ポートを管理するために LSAP (Link Service Access Point)が定 義される。そして、 1対 1で 1つの接続をする場合には LMPを使用する必要がない。 この場合、 LSAPにコネクションレスの値を固定値として使用する。このため、 LMPの 接続パラメータ交換は不要となって 、る。 [0699] Usually, a Link Service Access Point (LSAP) is defined to manage logical ports. And there is no need to use LMP when making one-to-one connection. In this case, use a connectionless value as a fixed value for LSAP. This eliminates the need to exchange LMP connection parameters.
[0700] LAP (S)は、 LMP (S)力もの接続要求関数を受けて、受信待機状態になる。また、 LAP (S)は、物理層力 SNRMコマンドを受けた場合に、 SNRMコマンドのデータ から送信機の LAP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、そのパラメータを使用してネ ゴシエーシヨンを完了させる。そして、 LAP (S)は、上記関数のデータ力も LAP (P) のパラメータを除 ヽたデータを入れた接続要求関数を LMP (S)に発する。 [0700] The LAP (S) receives the connection request function of LMP (S) and enters the reception standby state. Also, when the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength SNRM command, it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter LAP (P) from the data of the SNRM command, and uses that parameter to complete the negotiation. Then, the LAP (S) issues a connection request function to the LMP (S) including the data strength of the above function and the data excluding the parameter of the LAP (P).
[0701] (3— 2)データ交換シーケンス [0701] (3-2) Data exchange sequence
〔A〕レスポンス有り  [A] With response
図 77は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)のデータ交換シーケンスを示すシーケンス 図である。また、図 78は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)のデータ交換シーケンスの 際の通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 77 is a sequence diagram showing a data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (with response). Further, FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
[0702] 図 77に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)では、送信機が、 PUTコマンド を発生し、それが下位層まで伝わり、 UIフレーム(図 71 (b) )として出力される。 [0702] As shown in FIG. 77, in the present embodiment (with response), the transmitter generates a PUT command, which is transmitted to the lower layer, and is output as a UI frame (FIG. 71 (b)). .
[0703] 一方、受信機は、データを受け取り、上位層へ通知を上げていく。このとき、 SMP (On the other hand, the receiver receives the data and raises the notification to the upper layer. At this time, SMP (
S)では、上位層の OBEX(S)に対して、データが続くことを通知する(status=truncat ed)。 In S), the upper layer OBEX (S) is notified that data will continue (status = truncated).
[0704] 送信機は、ある一定数のパケットを送信した後に、データがきちんと届いているかど うかを確認するフラグを ONにして送信する。これを受けて、受信機では、 SMP (S)が 、エラーがあつたかな力つた力、あった場合にはエラーが発生した番号を送信機に通 知する。  [0704] The transmitter transmits a certain number of packets, and then transmits the flag with a check to confirm that the data has arrived properly. In response to this, in the receiver, the SMP (S) notifies the transmitter of the error force or, if there is an error, the number in which the error occurred.
[0705] 送信機は、エラーが無ければ次のパケット群を出力し、エラーがあればエラーがあ つたパケット以降のパケットを再送信する。  [0705] The transmitter outputs the next packet group if there is no error, and if there is an error, it retransmits the packet after the packet having the error.
[0706] 送信機は、データの最後になったときに、データの最後であることを示すフラグを O[0706] The transmitter, when the end of data is reached, indicates that the flag indicating the end of data is O.
Nにして送信する。これに対して、受信機は、 SMP (S)が、このフラグが ONであれば 、 OBEX(S)にデータがそろったことを通知し(status=OK)、 OBEX(S)のレスポンス を待つ。そして、 OBEX (S)のレスポンスが発生したとき、そのデータを下位層へ伝え ていき、 UIフレームとして出力する。 Set to N and send. On the other hand, if the receiver is SMP (S) and this flag is ON , Notify OBEX (S) that the data is complete (status = OK), and wait for OBEX (S) response. Then, when a response of OBEX (S) is generated, the data is transmitted to the lower layer and output as a UI frame.
[0707] 送信機は、受けたレスポンスが Successであれば、正常終了する。 [0707] The transmitter ends normally if the received response is Success.
[0708] このときの、送信機、受信機内のシーケンスは以下のとおりである。 The sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
[0709] 送信機では、 OBEX(P)が下位層に対して PUTコマンドをデータ送信関数として 出力する。ただし、 OBEX(P)は、 PUT Final (最後の PUT)コマンド以外の PUTコマ ンドのレスポンス(正常の場合は Continueが返る)を必要とせずに SMP (P)で送信可 能である場合には、次のコマンドを出力していく。 PUT Finalコマンドもしくは PUTコマ ンド以外のコマンドの場合には、下位層からのデータ通知関数を待ち、そのデータ内 のレスポンスをみてコマンドを終了する。 [0709] At the transmitter, OBEX (P) outputs a PUT command to the lower layer as a data transmission function. However, if OBEX (P) can be sent by SMP (P) without requiring PUT command responses (continuing return if normal) other than PUT Final (last PUT) command. , Output the next command. In the case of commands other than PUT Final command or PUT command, wait for the data notification function from the lower layer, and finish the command seeing the response in the data.
[0710] ここで、データ送信関数とは、下位層に対してデータ送信を要求する関数 (Data Re quest)である。また、データ通知関数とは、下位層力 データを受信したことを知らせ る関数(Data Indicate)である。  Here, the data transmission function is a function (Data Request) that requests data transmission from the lower layer. Also, the data notification function is a function (Data Indicate) that notifies that lower layer strength data has been received.
[0711] 受信機では、 OBEX(S)が下位層力もデータ通知関数を受けて、データを受ける。  [0711] At the receiver, the OBEX (S) receives the lower layer power as well as the data notification function to receive data.
ただし、 OBEX(S)は、 PUT Finalコマンド以外の PUTコマンドに対しては、レスポンス を返さず、 PUT Finalコマンドもしくは PUTコマンド以外のコマンドの場合はデータ送 信関数としてレスポンスを返す。  However, OBEX (S) does not return a response to PUT commands other than PUT Final command, and returns a response as a data transmission function for commands other than PUT Final command or PUT command.
[0712] ここで、送信機、受信機に共通する、上位層と下位層のデータ送信関数およびデ ータ通知関数でのヘッダ等について説明する。  Here, the headers and the like of the data transmission function and data notification function of the upper layer and the lower layer, which are common to the transmitter and the receiver, will be described.
[0713] SMPは、 OBEXからデータ送信関数を受けると、 LMPに対して、(a)LMPで送信 可能なサイズがデータ送信関数内のデータのサイズよりも小さいときには、該データ を LMPが送信可能なサイズに分割し、(b)LMPで送信可能なサイズがデータ送信関 数内のデータのサイズよりも大きいときには、いくつかのデータを結合して、送信可能 なサイズ以下の、より大きなデータを作成する。また、 SMPは、シーケンシャルな番 号、相手機器にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数、データの最後を示す引数、相 手機器の SMPが OBEXのレスポンスが必要であることを示す引数、受信したデータ が正常であったかどうかを示す引数などを入れた SMPヘッダを作成する。そして、こ の SMPヘッダを、上記分割または結合したデータに付カ卩したデータを入れたデータ 送信関数を LMPに対して発する。 [0713] When the SMP receives the data transmission function from the OBEX, (a) the LMP can transmit the data to the LMP when the size that can be transmitted by the LMP is smaller than the size of the data in the data transmission function. (B) When the size that can be transmitted by LMP is larger than the size of data in the data transmission function, combine some data and combine larger data below the size that can be transmitted. create. In addition, the SMP has a sequential number, an argument for inquiring the other device about the data reception status, an argument indicating the end of the data, an argument indicating that the SMP of the other device requires an OBEX response, and the received data is normal. Create an SMP header with an argument indicating whether it was. And this The data transmission function including the data obtained by adding the SMP header of the above to the divided or combined data is issued to the LMP.
[0714] さらに、 SMPは、 LMP力 データ通知関数を受けると、該関数内のデータから SM Pヘッダを抜き出し、シーケンス番号が正常である力 (すなわち、抜けなく順番に来て いる力 )を確認する。そして、正常であった場合には、 OBEXへデータ通知関数を発 する。このとき、データ通知関数は、下位層からのデータ通知関数ごとに出力してもよ Vヽし、 V、くつかの下位層からのデータ通知関数のデータをあわせて出力してもよ!/、。  [0714] Further, when the SMP receives the LMP force data notification function, it extracts the SMP header from the data in the function, and confirms the force with which the sequence number is normal (that is, the force coming in order without missing). Do. Then, if it is normal, it issues a data notification function to OBEX. At this time, the data notification function may output V for each data notification function from the lower layer, or may output V and the data notification function data from several lower layers together! / ,.
[0715] 送信機の SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)力 のデータ送信関数を LMP (P)へのデータ 送信関数に変換して、規定して ヽるある一定数のデータ量のデータ送信関数を発す る。その後、 SMP (P)は、受信機にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数を Trueにし てデータ送信関数を発して、 LMP (P)のデータ通知関数を待つ。  [0715] The SMP (P) of the transmitter converts the data transmission function of OBEX (P) into the data transmission function to LMP (P), and specifies data transmission of a certain number of data amounts. Issue a function. After that, SMP (P) sets the argument for inquiring data reception status to the receiver to True, issues a data transmission function, and waits for the data notification function of LMP (P).
[0716] SMP (P)は、 LMP (S)力 のデータ通知関数内の SMPヘッダを解析し、受信した データが正常であったかどうかを示す引数が正常に受信していたことを示していた場 合、次のデータを送信する準備ができたとして、 OBEX(P)に対して送信可能である ステートになる。すなわち、この状態で OBEX (P)からのデータを受け付けることがで きる。  [0716] The SMP (P) analyzes the SMP header in the data notification function of LMP (S) power, and indicates that an argument indicating whether the received data was normal was received correctly. If it is ready to send the next data, it is ready to send to OBEX (P). That is, data from OBEX (P) can be received in this state.
[0717] これに対して、 SMP (P)は、 LMP (S)力 の受け取ったデータ通知関数の SMPへ ッダを解析して受信したデータが正常であった力どうかを示す引数が正常に受信し ていな力つたことを示していた場合、正常に受信できな力つたと通知されたデータ送 信関数力 相手機器にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数を Trueにしたデータ送 信関数までを再度発生する。 SMP (P)は、全てのデータ送信関数によるデータが受 信機に通知されるまで、もしくはある規定回数再発生を繰り返す。  [0717] On the other hand, SMP (P) analyzes the SMP header of the received data notification function of LMP (S) power, and the argument indicating whether the received data was normal or not is normal. If it indicates that the power has not been received, the data transmission function power notified that the power could not be received normally Generates up to the data transmission function with the argument True asking the data reception status to the external device Do. The SMP (P) repeats regenerating for a specified number of times until data from all data transmission functions are notified to the receiver.
[0718] さらに、 SMP (P)は、 OBEX(P)からデータの最後であるとした引数が Trueである データ送信関数を受けた場合、そのデータ送信関数の最後のデータを入れた、 LM P (P)へのデータ送信関数を、このデータ送信関数がデータの最後であることを示す 引数、または、受信機の OBEX(S)のレスポンスが必要であることを示す引数を True にして発する。  Furthermore, when SMP (P) receives a data transmission function whose argument is True from OBEX (P) is True, it enters the last data of the data transmission function, LM P The data transmission function to (P) is issued with an argument indicating that this data transmission function is the end of data or an argument indicating that a response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is required.
[0719] これに対して、受信機の SMP (S)は、 LMP (S)からデータ通知関数を受けた際に 、データの最後または受信機の OBEX (S)のレスポンスが必要であることを示す引数 が Trueであった場合に、 OBEX(S)へ SMP (S)のヘッダを外したデータを入れたデ ータ通知関数を発する。 On the other hand, when the receiver SMP (S) receives the data notification function from LMP (S), , The data indicating that the header of the SMP (S) is removed from the OBEX (S) when the argument indicating that the response of the end of data or the receiver's OBEX (S) is required is True. Issue a notification function.
[0720] また、 SMP (S)は、データ通知関数を LMP (S)力 受けた場合に、そのデータ通 知関数内のデータから SMPヘッダを解析し、シーケンシャルな番号を確認する。 S MP (S)は、受信機にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数が Trueであるヘッダを受 けるまで正常に受信できていれば、受信したデータが正常であったかどうかを示す引 数を正常に受信できたことを示すものにして SMPヘッダを作成し、それをデータとし て LMP (S)に対してデータ送信関数を発する。  In addition, when the SMP (S) receives a data notification function LMP (S), the SMP (S) analyzes the SMP header from the data in the data notification function, and confirms the sequential number. The SMP (S) can normally receive an argument indicating whether the received data was normal or not, if it can receive normally until the header for which the argument asking the data reception state to the receiver is True is received. To create an SMP header to indicate that the data is sent to LMP (S) as a data transmission function.
[0721] 一方、 SMP (S)は、正常に受信できな力つたことを検出した場合には、正常に受信 できなかったと予測される SMPヘッダの番号を記憶する。例えば、 0, 1, 2, 3, 5と受 けたとき、 5個目は 4となるべきなのに 4を受けな力つた場合には、正常に受信できな 力つたと予測される番号は 4となる。そして、それ以降、 SMP (S)は、 SMPヘッダの 受信機にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数が Trueであるかどうかのみを調べて、 OBEX (S)へのデータ通知関数の出力を停止する。  On the other hand, when the SMP (S) detects that the reception has failed normally, it stores the number of the SMP header expected to be not received properly. For example, if 0, 1, 2, 3, 5 is received, if the 5th should be 4 and if 4 is not received, the number expected to be not successfully received is 4 and so on. Become. Then, after that, SMP (S) checks only if the argument asking the receiver of the SMP header for data reception is True and stops the output of the data notification function to OBEX (S).
[0722] SMP (S)は、受信機にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数が Trueであるデータ通 知関数を受けた場合に、受信したデータが正常であったかどうかを示す引数を正常 に受信できな力つたことを示すものにし、正常に受信できな力つた SMPヘッダの番号 をシーケンシャル番号を入れるフィールドに挿入した SMPヘッダを作成して、それを データとして LMP (S)に向けてデータ送信関数を発する。  [0722] The SMP (S) can not normally receive an argument indicating whether the received data is normal or not when it receives a data notification function whose argument for inquiring data reception status from the receiver is True. And an SMP header number inserted into the sequential number entry field to create an SMP header, and direct it as LMP (S) as data to issue a data transmission function .
[0723] また、 SMP (S)は、データの最後であることを示す引数、または受信機の OBEX(S )のレスポンスが必要であることを示す引数が Trueであったデータ通知関数を受けた 場合、 OBEX(S)へデータ通知関数を出力した後、 OBEX (S)からのデータ送信要 求を待つ。  In addition, SMP (S) receives a data notification function whose argument indicating that it is the end of data or that an argument indicating that a response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is necessary is True. In this case, after outputting the data notification function to OBEX (S), wait for a data transmission request from OBEX (S).
[0724] SMP (S)は、 OBEX(S)からのデータ送信要求を受けた場合には、受信したデー タが正常であったかどうかを示す引数に正常に受信できたとする SMPヘッダを作成 し、それを OBEX(S)のデータ送信要求のデータに付カ卩して、 LMP (S)に対してデ ータ送信関数を発する。なお、エラーがあった場合には、 OBEX (S)への通知は止 まるため、待つときは正常であったときのみとなる。 [0724] When the SMP (S) receives a data transmission request from the OBEX (S), it creates an SMP header which is assumed to be successfully received as an argument indicating whether the received data was normal, It is added to the data of the data transmission request of OBEX (S), and the data transmission function is issued to LMP (S). If there is an error, the notification to OBEX (S) will stop. In order to wait, it will be only when it was normal when waiting.
[0725] つぎに、 LMPは上位層力 データ送信要求関数を受けたときには、その関数内の データに LMPヘッダをつけてデータを作成し、 LAPにそのデータが入ったデータ送 信要求関数を発する。また、 LMPは、 LAP力 データ通知関数を受けた場合には、 その関数内のデータから LMPヘッダを除いたデータを作成し、 SMPにそのデータ が入ったデータ通知関数を発する。 Next, when the LMP receives the upper layer power data transmission request function, it adds an LMP header to the data in the function to create data, and issues a data transmission request function containing the data to the LAP. . Also, when LMP receives the LAP force data notification function, it creates data from the data in the function excluding the LMP header, and issues a data notification function containing the data in SMP.
[0726] なお、 1対 1で 1つの接続をする場合には LMPを使用する必要がない。この場合、[0726] It is not necessary to use LMP when making one-to-one connection. in this case,
LMPヘッダにはコネクションレスの値が入った LSAPが入る。 The LMP header contains an LSAP with a connectionless value.
[0727] LAPは、 LMPからデータ送信要求関数を受けたとき、その関数内のデータに LAP ヘッダをつけてデータを作成し、物理層にそのデータがはいった UIフレームを発す る。また、 LAPは、物理層からデータ受信通知を受けた場合には、その UIフレーム のデータから LAPヘッダを除 、たデータを作成し、 LMPにそのデータが入ったデー タ通知関数を発する。なお、本実施の形態では、 LAPヘッダ〖こは、接続アドレスと UI インジケータが含まれる。 [0727] When the LAP receives a data transmission request function from the LMP, it adds a LAP header to the data in the function to create data, and issues a UI frame containing the data to the physical layer. Also, when the LAP receives a data reception notification from the physical layer, it generates the data obtained by removing the LAP header from the data of the UI frame, and issues a data notification function including the data in the LMP. In the present embodiment, the LAP header includes a connection address and a UI indicator.
[0728] 〔B〕レスポンス無し [0728] [B] No response
図 79は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)のデータ交換シーケンスを示すシーケン ス図である。また、図 78は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)のデータ交換シーケンス の際の通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 79 is a sequence diagram showing a data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (without response). Further, FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the case of the data exchange sequence of the present embodiment (without response).
[0729] 図 79に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)では、送信機が、 PUTコマンド を発生し、それが下位層まで伝わり、 UIフレームとして出力される。 [0729] As shown in FIG. 79, in the present embodiment (without response), the transmitter generates a PUT command, which is transmitted to the lower layer and output as a UI frame.
[0730] 一方、受信機は、データを受け取り、上位層へ通知を上げていく。このとき、 SMP (On the other hand, the receiver receives the data and raises the notification to the upper layer. At this time, SMP (
S)では、上位層の OBEX(S)に対して、データが続くことを通知する(status=truncat ed)。 In S), the upper layer OBEX (S) is notified that data will continue (status = truncated).
[0731] そして、送信機は、データの最後になったときに、データの最後であることを示すフ ラグを ONにして送信する。これに対して、受信機は、 SMP (S)が、このフラグが ON であれば、 OBEX(S)にデータがそろったことを通知して(status=OK)、データ交換 シーケンスを終了する。  [0731] Then, the transmitter turns on a flag indicating that it is the end of data when it is the end of data, and transmits it. On the other hand, the receiver, when the SMP (S) turns on this flag, notifies the OBEX (S) that the data is complete (status = OK), and ends the data exchange sequence.
[0732] このときの、送信機、受信機内のシーケンスは以下のとおりである。 [0733] 送信機では、 OBEX(P)が下位層に対して PUTコマンドをデータ送信関数として 出力する。ただし、 OBEX(P)は、すべてのコマンドに対するレスポンスを必要とせず に、コマンドを終了することができる。そして、 OBEX(P)は、 SMP (P)で送信可能で ある場合に、次のコマンドを出力していく。 The sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows. [0733] At the transmitter, OBEX (P) outputs a PUT command to the lower layer as a data transmission function. However, OBEX (P) can terminate commands without requiring responses to all commands. Then, OBEX (P) outputs the next command when transmission is possible with SMP (P).
[0734] 受信機では、 OBEX(S)が下位層力もデータ通知関数を受けて、すべてのコマンド に対してレスポンスを返さずに、データのみを受け取る。  [0734] At the receiver, the OBEX (S) receives the lower layer power as well as the data notification function, and receives only data without returning a response to all commands.
[0735] ここで、送信機、受信機に共通する、上位層と下位層のデータ送信関数およびデ ータ通知関数でのヘッダ等について説明する。  [0735] Here, headers and the like in the data transmission function and data notification function of the upper layer and the lower layer, which are common to the transmitter and the receiver, will be described.
[0736] SMPは、 OBEXからデータ送信関数を受けると、 LMPに対して、(a)LMPで送信 可能なサイズがデータ送信関数内のデータのサイズよりも小さいときには、該データ を LMPが送信可能なサイズに分割し、(b)LMPで送信可能なサイズがデータ送信関 数内のデータのサイズよりも大きいときには、いくつかのデータを結合して、送信可能 なサイズ以下の、より大きなデータを作成する。また、 SMPは、シーケンシャルな番 号、相手機器にデータ受信状態を問い合わせる引数、データの最後を示す引数、相 手機器の SMPが OBEXのレスポンスが必要であることを示す引数、受信したデータ が正常であったかどうかを示す引数などを入れた SMPヘッダを作成する。そして、こ の SMPヘッダを、上記分割または結合したデータに付カ卩したデータを入れたデータ 送信関数を LMPに対して発する。  [0736] When the SMP receives the data transmission function from the OBEX, (a) the LMP can transmit the data to the LMP when the size that can be transmitted by the LMP is smaller than the size of the data in the data transmission function. (B) When the size that can be transmitted by LMP is larger than the size of data in the data transmission function, combine some data and combine larger data below the size that can be transmitted. create. In addition, the SMP has a sequential number, an argument for inquiring the other device about the data reception status, an argument indicating the end of the data, an argument indicating that the SMP of the other device requires an OBEX response, and the received data is normal. Create an SMP header with an argument indicating whether it was. Then, a data transmission function including this SMP header added with the above divided or combined data is issued to the LMP.
[0737] さらに、 SMPは、 LMP力 データ通知関数を受けると、該関数内のデータから SM Pヘッダを抜き出し、シーケンス番号が正常である力 (すなわち、抜けなく順番に来て いる力 )を確認する。そして、正常であった場合には、 OBEXへデータ通知関数を発 する。このとき、データ通知関数は、下位層からのデータ通知関数ごとに出力してもよ Vヽし、 V、くつかの下位層からのデータ通知関数のデータをあわせて出力してもよ!/、。  Furthermore, when the SMP receives the LMP force data notification function, it extracts the SMP header from the data in the function, and confirms the force with which the sequence number is normal (that is, the force coming in order without missing). Do. Then, if it is normal, it issues a data notification function to OBEX. At this time, the data notification function may output V for each data notification function from the lower layer, or may output V and the data notification function data from several lower layers together! / ,.
[0738] 送信機の SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)力 のデータ送信関数を LMP (P)へのデータ 送信関数に変換する。そして、 OBEX (P)からデータの最後であるとした引数が False であるデータ送信関数を受けた場合には、そのデータに SMPヘッダを付けたデータ を、 LMP (P)へ発する。これに対して、 SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)からデータの最後で あるとした引数が Trueであるデータ送信関数を受けた場合には、そのデータ送信関 数の最後のデータを入れた、 LMP (P)へのデータ送信関数を、このデータ送信関数 がデータの最後であることを示す引数、または、受信機の OBEX (S)のレスポンスが 必要であることを示す引数を Trueにして発する。 [0738] The transmitter's SMP (P) converts the data transmission function of OBEX (P) into a data transmission function to LMP (P). Then, when it receives a data transmission function in which the argument that is the end of the data is False from OBEX (P), the data with the SMP header added to the data is emitted to LMP (P). On the other hand, if SMP (P) receives a data transmission function whose argument that is the end of the data is True from OBEX (P), SMP (P) receives that data transmission function. Data transmission function to LMP (P) containing the last data of the number, an argument indicating that this data transmission function is the end of data, or a response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is required. Make an argument indicating True and issue.
[0739] 一方、受信機の SMP (S)は、データ通知関数を下位層から受けた場合に、そのデ ータ通知関数内のデータから SMPヘッダを解析し、シーケンシャルな番号を確認す る。そして、 SMP (S)は、 SMPヘッダを解析して、正常に受信できていることを確認 できた場合、 LMP (S)に対してデータ送信関数を発する。 On the other hand, when the SMP (S) of the receiver receives the data notification function from the lower layer, it analyzes the SMP header from the data in the data notification function, and confirms the sequential number. Then, if the SMP (S) analyzes the SMP header and confirms that the reception is normal, it issues a data transmission function to the LMP (S).
[0740] これに対して、 SMP (S)は、正常に受信できな力つたことを検出した場合には、 OB[0740] On the other hand, if the SMP (S) detects that the power can not be received normally, OB
EX(S)にエラーとして通知する。例えば、 0, 1, 2, 3, 5と受けたとき、 5個目は 4とな るべきなのに 4を受けなかった場合である。 Notify EX (S) as an error. For example, when 0, 1, 2, 3, 5 is received, the 5th is 4 when it should be 4 but not received.
[0741] そして、それ以降、 SMP (S)は、 SMPヘッダのデータの最後を示す引数、または 受信機の OBEX (S)のレスポンスが必要であることを示す引数が Trueであることを待 ち、 Trueであるデータ通知関数を受ける力 (なお、受けても OBEX(S)へは通知はし ない)、切断通知関数を受ける力、もしくはある一定時間経つまで、 OBEX(S)へデ ータ通知を行わな 、ようにする。 [0741] Then, from then on, SMP (S) waits for the argument indicating the end of the data in the SMP header or the argument indicating that the response of OBEX (S) of the receiver is required to be True. The ability to receive a data notification function that is True (but not notify OBEX (S) upon reception), the ability to receive a disconnection notification function, or data to OBEX (S) until a certain period of time has passed. Don't give notice, like.
[0742] つぎに、送信機の LMP (P)は、 SMP (S)からデータ送信要求関数を受けたときに は、その関数内のデータに LMPヘッダをつけてデータを作成し、 LAP (P)にそのデ ータが入ったデータ送信要求関数を発する。 Next, when the LMP (P) of the transmitter receives the data transmission request function from the SMP (S), the LMP header is attached to the data in the function to create data, and LAP (P Issues a data transmission request function containing the data in
[0743] 一方、受信機の LMP (S)は、 LAP (S)力もデータ通知関数を受けた場合には、そ の関数内のデータから LMPヘッダを除いたデータを作成し、 SMP (S)にそのデータ が入ったデータ通知関数を発する。 On the other hand, when the LMP (S) of the receiver receives the data notification function also for the LAP (S) power, it creates data in which the LMP header is removed from the data in the function, and SMP (S) Issues a data notification function containing the data in.
[0744] なお、 1対 1で 1つの接続をする場合には LMPを使用する必要がない。この場合、[0744] It is not necessary to use LMP when making one-to-one connection. in this case,
LMPヘッダにはコネクションレスの値が入った LSAPが入る。 The LMP header contains an LSAP with a connectionless value.
[0745] 送信機の LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)力もデータ送信要求関数を受けたとき、その関数 内のデータに LAPヘッダをつけてデータを作成し、物理層にそのデータが入った UI フレームを発する。 [0745] When the LAP (P) of the transmitter receives the LMP (P) power as well as the data transmission request function, the LAP header is attached to the data in the function to create data, and the data is input to the physical layer Emits a UI frame.
[0746] 一方、受信機の LAP (S)は、物理層からデータ受信通知を受けた場合には、その UIフレームのデータから LAPヘッダを除いたデータを作成し、 LMP (S)にそのデー タが入ったデータ通知関数を発する。なお、本実施の形態では、 LAPヘッダには、 接続アドレスと UIインジケータが含まれる。 On the other hand, when the LAP (S) of the receiver receives the data reception notification from the physical layer, it creates data obtained by removing the LAP header from the data of the UI frame, and generates the data in the LMP (S). Issue a data notification function containing the data. In the present embodiment, the LAP header includes a connection address and a UI indicator.
[0747] (3— 3)切断シーケンス [0747] (3— 3) Disconnection Sequence
〔A〕レスポンス有り  [A] With response
図 80は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の切断シーケンスを示すシーケンス図であ る。また、図 81 (a) ,図 81 (b)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の切断シーケンスの 際の通信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 80 is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response). FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are explanatory diagrams showing the data structure of communication data in the disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (with response).
[0748] 図 80に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)では、送信機の切断コマンドが 下位層に伝わっていき、 DISCコマンドが発生する。受信機は、その DISCコマンドを 受けて上位層へ通知していき、そのレスポンスが返り、 UAレスポンスが発生する。そ の後、送信機の上位層まで、 UAレスポンスを受信したことを通知して終了する。  As shown in FIG. 80, in the present embodiment (response is sent), a disconnection command of the transmitter is transmitted to the lower layer, and a DISC command is generated. The receiver receives the DISC command and notifies the upper layer, and the response is returned and a UA response is generated. After that, the upper layer of the transmitter is notified that the UA response has been received, and the process ends.
[0749] このときの、送信機、受信機内のシーケンスは以下のとおりである。  [0749] The sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
[0750] まず、送信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。  [0750] First, each communication layer of the transmitter will be described.
[0751] OBEX(P)は、アプリケーション力もの切断要求が来た場合に、速やかに下位層 (S MP (P) )に対して切断要求コマンドをデータに入れて切断要求関数 (Primitive)を発 生する。また、 OBEX(P)は、 SMP (P)から切断確認関数を受けた場合に、そのデ ータの中から OBEX切断のレスポンスを確認し、問題ない(Success)というレスポンス であれば、切断完了とする。  [0751] OBEX (P) immediately sends a disconnection request command to the lower layer (S MP (P)) in the data and issues a disconnection request function (Primitive) when an application disconnect request is received. Produce. Also, when OBEX (P) receives a disconnection confirmation function from SMP (P), it confirms the response of OBEX disconnection from the data, and if it is a response that there is no problem (Success), the disconnection is completed. I assume.
[0752] SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)からの切断要求関数を受けて、速やかに OBEX (P)の切 断要求関数のデータに、受信機の SMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して 、下位層(LMP (P) )に対して切断要求関数を発生する。また、 SMP (P)は、 LMP ( P)から切断確認関数を受けた場合、関数のデータ力 受信機の SMP (S)が生成し たパラメータを抜き取り、値を確認して、 SMP (S)との切断処理を終了する。また、 S MP (P)は、切断確認関数のデータ力も SMP (S)のパラメータを取り除いたデータを OBEX(P)に対して切断確認関数として送信する。ただし、通常、切断時に SMP (P )で新たに追加するパラメータは無 、。  [0755] SMP (P) receives the disconnection request function from OBEX (P) and immediately needs the data of OBEX (P) disconnection request function to communicate with the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a disconnection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the disconnection confirmation function from LMP (P), it extracts the parameters generated by the data source of the function's data receiver SMP (S), confirms the value, and End the disconnection process with In addition, SMP (P) also transmits data of the disconnection confirmation function from which the parameters of SMP (S) have been removed as a disconnection confirmation function to OBEX (P). However, normally, there are no parameters newly added by SMP (P) at disconnection.
[0753] LMP (P)は、 SMP (P)力 の切断要求関数を受けて、速やかに SMP (P)の切断 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 下位層 (LAP (P) )に対して切断要求関数を発生する。また、 LMP (P)は、 LAP (P) から切断確認関数を受けた場合、関数のデータから受信機の LMP (S)が生成した ノ ラメータを抜き取り、値を確認して、 LMP (S)との切断処理を終了する。また、 LM P (P)は、切断確認関数のデータ力も LMP (S)のパラメータを取り除いたデータを、 SMP (P)に対して切断確認関数として送信する。ただし、通常、切断時に LMP (P) で新たに追加するパラメータは無 、。 [0753] The LMP (P) receives the SMP (P) power disconnection request function, and immediately transmits the data of the SMP (P) disconnection request function to the data required for communication with the receiver LMP (S). Add Generate a disconnection request function to the lower layer (LAP (P)). In addition, when LMP (P) receives a disconnection confirmation function from LAP (P), it extracts the nolometer generated by LMP (S) of the receiver from the data of the function, confirms the value, and End the disconnection process with Also, LM P (P) transmits the data strength of the disconnection confirmation function as well as the data from which the parameter of LMP (S) is removed as the disconnection confirmation function to SMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter added in LMP (P) at disconnection.
[0754] LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)力 の切断要求関数を受けて、速やかに LMP (P)の切断 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LAP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 受信機の物理層に対して DISCコマンドを出力する。また、 LAP (P)は、受信機の物 理層力 U Aレスポンスを受けた場合、 UAレスポンスのデータから受信機の LAP (S )が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、値を確認して、 LAP (S)との接続を終了する。ま た、 LAP (P)は、 UAレスポンスのデータから LAP (S)のパラメータを取り除いたデー タを、 LMP (P)に対して切断確認関数として発する。ただし、通常、切断時に LAP ( P)で新たに追加するパラメータは無 、。  [0754] The LAP (P) receives the LMP (P) power disconnection request function, and promptly transmits the LMP (P) disconnection request function data to the receiver, and the parameters necessary for communication with the LAP (S). And output a DISC command to the physical layer of the receiver. When the LAP (P) receives the physical layer strength UA response of the receiver, it extracts the parameter generated by the LAP (S) of the receiver from the data of the UA response, confirms the value, and Close the connection with). Also, LAP (P) issues data obtained by removing the parameter of LAP (S) from the data of UA response as a disconnection confirmation function to LMP (P). However, normally, there are no parameters newly added in LAP (P) at disconnection.
[0755] つづ 、て、受信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。  [0755] Next, each communication layer of the receiver will be described.
[0756] OBEX(S)は、下位層(SMP (S) )力も切断通知関数 (Indication)を受けた場合に 、そのデータの中力 OBEX切断コマンドを確認し、問題が無ければ Successというレ スポンスを切断返答関数 (Response)として SMP (S)に対して出力し、切断完了とす る。  [0756] When OBEX (S) receives a lower layer (SMP (S)) power or a disconnection notification function (Indication), it checks the intermediate power OBEX disconnection command of the data, and if there is no problem, the response named Success is detected. Is output to SMP (S) as a disconnection response function (Response), and disconnection is completed.
[0757] SMP (S)は、下位層 (SMP (S) )力も切断通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデー タから送信機の SMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、それに対しての返答のパ ラメータを作成し、上記関数のデータから SMP (P)のパラメータを除 、たデータを入 れた切断要求関数を OBEX (S)に発した後、 OBEX (S)からの切断返答関数を待つ 。また、 SMP (S)は、 OBEX (S)からの切断返答関数を受けた場合に、 LMP (S)に 対して OBEX(S)の切断返答関数のデータに上記返答のパラメータを付加して、 L MP (S)に対して切断返答関数を発生し、 SMP層の切断処理を終了する。ただし、 通常、切断時に SMP (S)で新たに追加するパラメータは無!、。  [0757] The SMP (S) extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function when the lower layer (SMP (S)) force also receives the disconnection notification function, Create a response parameter, remove the SMP (P) parameter from the data of the above function, issue a disconnection request function containing the data to OBEX (S), and then disconnect response function from OBEX (S) Wait for When SMP (S) receives the disconnection response function from OBEX (S), it adds the parameter of the response to the data of the disconnection response function of OBEX (S) to LMP (S), Generate a disconnection response function for L MP (S) and terminate the SMP layer disconnection process. However, normally, there is no new parameter to add in SMP (S) at disconnection.
[0758] LMP (S)は、下位層 (LAP (S) )力も切断通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデータ から送信機の LMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、それに対しての返答のパラ メータを作成し、上記関数のデータ力 LMP (P)のパラメータを除 、たデータを入れ た切断要求関数を SMP (S)に発した後、 SMP (S)からの切断返答関数を待つ。ま た、 LMP (S)は、 SMP (S)からの切断返答関数を受けた場合に、 LAP (S)に対して SMP (S)の切断返答関数のデータに上記返答のパラメータを付加して、 LAP (S)に 対して切断返答関数を発生し、 LMP層の切断処理を終了する。ただし、通常、切断 時に LMP (S)で新たに追加するパラメータは無!、。 [0758] LMP (S) is the data of the function when lower layer (LAP (S)) power is also subjected to the disconnection notification function The parameter generated by LMP (P) of the transmitter is extracted from the parameter, the parameter of the response is created, the parameter of data power LMP (P) of the above function is removed, and the disconnection request function containing the data is stored. After issuing to SMP (S), wait for disconnection response function from SMP (S). When LMP (S) receives the disconnection response function from SMP (S), it adds the above-mentioned response parameter to the data of the disconnection response function of SMP (S) for LAP (S). , Generates a disconnection response function for LAP (S), and terminates the disconnection process of the LMP layer. However, there is usually no new parameter added in LMP (S) at disconnection!
[0759] LAP (S)は、物理層力 DISCコマンドを受けた場合に、 DISCコマンドのデータか ら送信機の LAP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、 DISCコマンドのデータ力も L AP (P)のパラメータを除 、たデータを入れた切断要求関数を LMP (S)に発した後、 それに対しての返答のパラメータを作成し、 LMP (S)からの切断返答関数を待つ。 また、 LAP (S)は、 LMP (S)からの切断返答関数を受けた場合に、 LMP (S)の切断 返答関数のデータに上記返答のパラメータを付加して、物理層に対して UAレスボン スを出力し、 LAP層の切断処理を終了する。ただし、通常、切断時に LAP (S)で新 たに追加するパラメータは無 、。  [0759] When the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength DISC command, it extracts the parameter generated by the LAP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the DISC command, and the data strength of the DISC command is also L AP (P) After issuing a disconnection request function containing the data to LMP (S), create a response parameter to it and wait for the disconnection response function from LMP (S). Also, when LAP (S) receives the disconnection response function from LMP (S), the parameter of the response is added to the data of LMP (S) disconnection response function, and Output the LAP layer cutting process. However, normally, there are no new parameters added to LAP (S) at disconnection.
[0760] 〔B〕レスポンス無し  [0760] [B] No response
図 82は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の切断シーケンスを示すシーケンス図で ある。また、図 81 (a)は、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の切断シーケンスの際の通 信データのデータ構造を示す説明図である。  FIG. 82 is a sequence diagram showing a disconnection sequence of the present embodiment (no response). Further, FIG. 81 (a) is an explanatory view showing a data structure of communication data in the disconnection sequence of this embodiment (no response).
[0761] 図 82に示すように、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)では、送信機の切断コマンドが 下位層に伝わっていき、 DISCコマンドが発生する。送信機では、この時点で切断処 理が終了する。一方、受信機は、その DISCコマンドを受けて上位層へ伝えていき、 上位層まで通知した時点で切断処理が終了する。  [0761] As shown in FIG. 82, in the present embodiment (without response), the disconnection command of the transmitter is transmitted to the lower layer, and the DISC command is generated. The transmitter ends the disconnection process at this point. On the other hand, the receiver receives the DISC command and transmits it to the upper layer, and the disconnection process ends when the upper layer is notified.
[0762] このときの、送信機、受信機内のシーケンスは以下のとおりである。  The sequence in the transmitter and the receiver at this time is as follows.
[0763] まず、送信機の各通信層につ!/、て説明する。  First, each communication layer of the transmitter will be described.
[0764] OBEX(P)は、アプリケーション力 の切断要求が来た場合に、速やかに下位層 (S MP (P) )に対して切断要求コマンドをデータに入れて切断要求関数 (Primitive)を発 生する。また、 OBEX(P)は、 SMP (P)から切断確認関数を受けた場合に、切断完 了とする。 [0764] When OBEX (P) receives an application power disconnection request, it immediately enters a disconnection request command to the lower layer (S MP (P)) and issues a disconnection request function (Primitive). Produce. In addition, OBEX (P) is completely disconnected when it receives a disconnection confirmation function from SMP (P). I will finish.
[0765] SMP (P)は、 OBEX (P)からの切断要求関数を受けて、速やかに OBEX (P)の切 断要求関数のデータに、受信機の SMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して 、下位層(LMP (P) )に対して切断要求関数を発生する。また、 SMP (P)は、 LMP ( P)から切断確認関数を受けた時点で、送信したパラメータで切断できたとして、 SM P層の切断処理を終了する。また、 SMP (P)は、 OBEX(P)に対して切断確認関数 を送信する。ただし、通常、切断時に SMP (P)で新たに追加するパラメータは無い。  [0765] The SMP (P) receives the disconnection request function from the OBEX (P) and promptly transmits the data of the OBEX (P) disconnection request function to the communication with the receiver SMP (S). Add a parameter to generate a disconnection request function for the lower layer (LMP (P)). Also, when SMP (P) receives the disconnection confirmation function from LMP (P), it terminates the disconnection process of the SMP layer, assuming that it has been disconnected by the transmitted parameter. Also, SMP (P) sends a disconnection confirmation function to OBEX (P). However, normally, there is no new parameter added by SMP (P) at the time of disconnection.
[0766] LMP (P)は、 SMP (P)力 の切断要求関数を受けて、速やかに SMP (P)の切断 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LMP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 下位層 (LAP (P) )に対して切断要求関数を発生する。また、 LMP (P)は、 LAP (P) カゝら切断確認関数を受けた時点で、送信したパラメータで切断できたとして、 LMP層 の切断処理を終了する。また、 LMP (P)は、 SMP (P)に対して切断確認関数を送信 する。ただし、通常、切断時に LMP (P)で新たに追加するパラメータは無い。  [0766] The LMP (P) receives the SMP (P) power disconnection request function, and immediately transmits the data of the SMP (P) disconnection request function to the data necessary for communication with the receiver LMP (S). To generate a disconnection request function for the lower layer (LAP (P)). Also, when LMP (P) receives the LAP (P) cutting confirmation function, it concludes that the LMP layer has been disconnected, assuming that it has been disconnected by the transmitted parameters. LMP (P) also sends a disconnection confirmation function to SMP (P). However, normally, there is no new parameter added by LMP (P) at the time of disconnection.
[0767] LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)力 の切断要求関数を受けて、速やかに LMP (P)の切断 要求関数のデータに、受信機の LAP (S)との通信に必要なパラメータを付加して、 受信機の物理層に対して DISCコマンドを出力する。また、 LAP (P)は、 DISCコマン ドを出力した時点で、送信したパラメータで切断できたとして、 LAP層の切断処理を 終了する。また、 LAP (P)は、 LMP (P)に対して切断確認関数を発する。ただし、通 常、切断時に LAP (P)で新たに追加するパラメータは無!、。  [0767] The LAP (P) receives the LMP (P) power disconnection request function, and promptly transmits the LMP (P) disconnection request function data to the receiver. The parameters necessary for communication with the LAP (S) And output a DISC command to the physical layer of the receiver. In addition, when LAP (P) outputs the DISC command, it concludes that the LAP layer disconnection processing is concluded, because it can be disconnected by the transmitted parameters. Also, LAP (P) issues a disconnection confirmation function to LMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter to add in LAP (P) at disconnection.
[0768] つづ 、て、受信機の各通信層につ 、て説明する。  [0768] Next, each communication layer of the receiver will be described.
[0769] OBEX(S)は、下位層(SMP (S) )力も切断通知関数 (Indication)を受けた場合に 、そのデータの中力 OBEX切断コマンドを確認し、問題が無ければ、切断完了とす る。  [0769] If OBEX (S) receives a lower layer (SMP (S)) force and also a disconnection notification function (Indication), it checks the medium power OBEX disconnection command of the data, and if there is no problem, the disconnection is completed. It will
[0770] SMP (S)は、下位層 (SMP (S) )力 切断通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデー タから送信機の SMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、そのパラメータを使用して 切断を完了させる。また、 SMP (S)は、上記関数のデータ力も SMP (P)のパラメータ を除いたデータを入れた切断要求関数を OBEX(S)に発する。ただし、通常、切断 時に SMP (S)で新たに追加するパラメータは無!、。 [0771] LMP (S)は、下位層 (LAP (S) )カゝら切断通知関数を受けた場合に、関数のデータ から送信機の LMP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、そのパラメータを使用して 切断を完了させる。また、 LMP (S)は、上記関数のデータ力も LMP (P)のパラメータ を除いたデータを入れた切断要求関数を SMP (S)に発する。ただし、通常、切断時 に LMP (S)で新たに追加するパラメータは無!、。 [0770] When SMP (S) receives the lower layer (SMP (S)) power disconnection notification function, it extracts the parameter generated by the transmitter SMP (P) from the data of the function, and uses that parameter And complete the disconnection. In addition, SMP (S) issues a disconnection request function to OBEX (S) in which the data strength of the above function is also data excluding the parameter of SMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter added in SMP (S) when disconnected! When LMP (S) receives the lower layer (LAP (S)) cut notification function, it extracts the parameter generated by LMP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the function, and extracts that parameter Use to complete the disconnect. In addition, LMP (S) issues a disconnection request function to SMP (S) including data in which the data strength of the above function is also removed from the parameters of LMP (P). However, there is usually no new parameter added in LMP (S) at disconnection!
[0772] LAP (S)は、物理層力 DISCコマンドを受けた場合に、 DISCコマンドのデータか ら送信機の LAP (P)が生成したパラメータを抜き取り、そのパラメータを使用して切断 を完了させる。また、 LAP (S)は、 DISCコマンドのデータから LAP (P)のパラメータ を除いたデータを入れた切断要求関数を LMP (S)に発する。ただし、通常、切断時 に LAP (S)で新たに追加するパラメータは無!、。  [0772] When the LAP (S) receives the physical layer strength DISC command, it extracts the parameter generated by the LAP (P) of the transmitter from the data of the DISC command, and uses this parameter to complete the disconnection. . Also, LAP (S) issues a disconnection request function to LMP (S) in which data obtained by removing the parameter of LAP (P) from the data of DISC command is inserted. However, there is usually no new parameter added to LAP (S) at disconnection.
[0773] (4)レスポンスの有無の切換え  [0773] (4) Switching of presence / absence of response
図 83〜図 90を参照しながら、送信機および受信機の通信層間におけるデータお よびパラメータの流れを説明する。  The flow of data and parameters between the transmitter and receiver communication layers will be described with reference to FIGS. 83-90.
[0774] 本実施の形態では、送信機および受信機の各通信層 LAP、 LMP、 SMP、 OBEX は、接続要求関数、接続通知関数、接続応答関数、接続確認関数を持っている。こ れらの関数は、上位層(つまり、 LMP層)から LAP層へアクセスするための関数であ る。  [0774] In the present embodiment, the communication layers LAP, LMP, SMP, and OBEX of the transmitter and the receiver have a connection request function, a connection notification function, a connection response function, and a connection confirmation function. These functions are functions for accessing the LAP layer from the upper layer (ie, the LMP layer).
[0775] そして、上記関数は、引数として、 Data (以下、データと記す)と Requested-Qosまた は Returned-QoSが指定できる。上記データは、上述したように、各通信層において 設定される。  [0775] The above function can specify Data (hereinafter referred to as data) and Requested-Qos or Returned-QoS as arguments. The above data is set in each communication layer as described above.
[0776] 一方、 Qosは、 LAPで決定されたボーレート等のネゴシエーションパラメータの指定 やネゴシエーション結果を、 OBEXを含めた上位層に通知する。なお、 Qosは従来の IrDAでも使用されている。  [0776] On the other hand, Qos notifies the upper layer including the OBEX to the specification of negotiation parameters such as the baud rate determined by the LAP and the negotiation result. Qos is also used in conventional IrDA.
[0777] 例えば、送信機のアプリケーションもしくは OBEX (P)力 レスポンスが必要 Z不要 というパラメータの入った QoSを発すると、それが下位層へ順に LAP (P)まで伝わる。 そして、 LAP (P)は、その QoSの値をネゴシエーションパラメータ(Ack Less Connect )の値として反映させ、受信機へ送信する。  [0777] For example, if a transmitter application or an OBEX (P) force response is required and a QoS including a parameter of Z unnecessary is issued, it is transmitted to the lower layer in order to the LAP (P). Then, the LAP (P) reflects the QoS value as the negotiation parameter (Ack Less Connect) value, and transmits it to the receiver.
[0778] その結果、送信機および受信機の各通信層が、送信機のアプリケーションもしくは OBEX(P)によるレスポンス必要 Z不要の指定に従って動作するため、双方向 Z片 方向の接続ができることになる。 [0778] As a result, each communication layer of the transmitter and the receiver corresponds to the transmitter application or Response by OBEX (P) Since it operates according to the specification of Z-less, it is possible to connect in both directions and one direction.
[0779] 図 83〜図 87は、本実施の形態(レスポンス有り)の接続シーケンス(図 74)のときの 、通信層間のデータおよびパラメータの流れを示す説明図である。なお、 OBEX— S MP間、 SMP— LMP間、 LMP— LAP間の QoSのパラメータは、同一であってもよい 力 異なっていてもよい。それゆえ、図中では、 -a,-b,-cを付して区別している。  FIGS. 83 to 87 are explanatory diagrams showing flows of data and parameters between communication layers in the connection sequence (FIG. 74) of the present embodiment (with response). The parameters of QoS between OBEX-SMP, SMP-LMP, and LMP-LAP may be identical or different. Therefore, in the figure, -a, -b and -c are added to distinguish.
[0780] 送信機では、図 83に示すように、 con.req(data) (図 74)によって、受信機へ送信す る Dataと QoS-1 (送信機の要求する QoS)のデータとを上位層から下位層に渡す。  [0780] In the transmitter, as shown in FIG. 83, the data to be sent to the receiver and the data of QoS-1 (QoS requested by the transmitter) are sent to the receiver using con.req (data) (FIG. 74). Pass from layer to lower layer.
[0781] 一方、受信機では、図 84に示すように、 con.reqによって、 QoS- 2 (受信機の要求す る QoS)のデータのみを上位層から下位層にそれぞれ渡す。  On the other hand, in the receiver, as shown in FIG. 84, only the data of QoS-2 (QoS requested by the receiver) is passed from the upper layer to the lower layer by con. Req.
[0782] その後、受信機では、 LAP (S)が SNRMコマンドを受けた時点で、送信機の QoS- 1と自機の QoS-2を比較して、共通でネゴシエートしたパラメータとして QoS-3を作成 する。そして、図 85に示すように、 LAP (S)は、 con.ind(data)によって、 QoS- 3を送信 機からのデータと一緒に上位層へ通知する。各上位層は、この QoS-3を記憶して、接 続時における接続パラメータとして保持する。  [0782] After that, when the LAP (S) receives the SNRM command, the receiver compares QoS-1 of the transmitter with QoS-2 of its own device, and QoS-3 is used as a commonly negotiated parameter. create. Then, as shown in FIG. 85, LAP (S) notifies QoS-3 together with data from the transmitter to the upper layer by con.ind (data). Each upper layer stores this QoS-3 and holds it as a connection parameter at connection time.
[0783] つづ!/、て、受信機では、 con.resp(data)を通知する際、 QoSが不要となって!/、る。よ つて、図 86に示すように、 con.resp(data)ではデータのみが上位層から下位層に渡さ れていく。そして、 LAP (S)が con.resp(data)を受けると、 UAレスポンスに QoS-3を入 れて、 UAレスポンスを発する。  [0783] In the receiver !, when notifying con.resp (data), the QoS becomes unnecessary! /. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 86, in con.resp (data), only data is passed from the upper layer to the lower layer. Then, when LAP (S) receives con.resp (data), it enters QoS-3 in the UA response and issues a UA response.
[0784] つづ!/、て、送信機では、 LAP (P)が UAレスポンスを受けて QoS-3をネゴシエートし たパラメータとして記憶する。そして、 LAP (P)は、図 87に示すように、 con.conKdata) によって、 QoS-3を受信機のデータと一緒に上位層へ通知する。各通信層は、この Q ◦S-3を、確立させた接続における接続パラメータとして保持する。  [0784] At the transmitter, the LAP (P) receives the UA response and stores QoS-3 as a negotiated parameter. Then, as shown in FIG. 87, LAP (P) notifies QoS-3 to the upper layer together with the data of the receiver by using con.conKdata). Each communication layer holds this Q S S-3 as a connection parameter in the established connection.
[0785] 本実施の形態では、例えば、 con.reqの QoSとして、 Requested- QoS:Baud- Rate + M ax-Turn- Around-Time + Disconnect— Threshold + Databize + Ack less connection + Min- Packet- Intervalを使用する。また、 Con.ind,con.confの 0 とし" 、 Resultant— oS:Baua- Rate + Disconnect- Threshold + DataSize + Ack less connection (indication primitive only)、を使用する。 [0786] また、本実施の形態(レスポンス無し)の接続シーケンス(図 76)のときには、通信層 間のデータおよびパラメータの流れは次のようになる。 In this embodiment, for example, as QoS of con.req, Requested-QoS: Baud-Rate + Max-Turn-Around-Time + Disconnect-Threshold + Databize + Ack less connection + Min-Packet- Interval Use In addition, Con. Ind, con. Conf 0 as ", Resultant-oS: Baua-Rate + Disconnect-Threshold + DataSize + Ack less connection (indication primitive only). Further, in the case of the connection sequence (FIG. 76) of the present embodiment (no response), the flow of data and parameters between communication layers is as follows.
[0787] 送信機では、図 83に示すように、 con.req(data) (図 76)によって、受信機へ送信す る Dataと QoS-1 (送信機の要求する QoS)のデータとを上位層から下位層に渡す。 [0787] In the transmitter, as shown in FIG. 83, using the con.req (data) (FIG. 76), the Data transmitted to the receiver and the data of QoS-1 (QoS requested by the transmitter) are upper Pass from layer to lower layer.
[0788] そして、送信機の LAP (P)は、 QoS-1をそのまま QoS-3として記憶する。そして、 LA[0788] Then, the LAP (P) of the transmitter stores QoS-1 as QoS-3 as it is. And LA
P (P)は、図 87に示すように、 con.confによって QoS- 3を上位層へ通知する。各通信 層は、この QoS-3を、確立させた接続における接続パラメータとして保持する。 P (P) notifies QoS-3 to the upper layer by con.conf as shown in Figure 87. Each communication layer holds this QoS-3 as a connection parameter in the established connection.
[0789] 一方、受信機では、図 84に示すように、 con.reqによって、 QoS- 2 (受信機の要求す る QoS)のデータのみを上位層から下位層にそれぞれ渡す。 On the other hand, in the receiver, as shown in FIG. 84, only the data of QoS-2 (QoS requested by the receiver) is passed from the upper layer to the lower layer by con. Req.
[0790] その後、受信機では、 LAP (S)が SNRMコマンドを受けた時点で、送信機の QoS-[0790] Thereafter, at the receiver, when the LAP (S) receives the SNRM command, the transmitter QoS-
1をもって、 QoS-3とする。なお、 QoS-2のパラメータが QoS-1との組み合わせで満足 しな 、場合には受信できな 、。 Set 1 to QoS-3. In addition, the parameters of QoS-2 are not satisfied in combination with QoS-1, and can not be received.
[0791] つづいて、図 85に示すように、 LAP (S)は、 con.ind(data)によって、 QoS- 3を送信 機からのデータと一緒に上位層へ通知する。各上位層は、この QoS-3を記憶して、接 続時における接続パラメータとして保持する。 [0791] Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 85, LAP (S) notifies QoS-3 and the data from the transmitter to the upper layer by con.ind (data). Each upper layer stores this QoS-3 and holds it as a connection parameter at connection time.
[0792] これにより、レスポンス有り/無しを、アプリケーションが上記 QoS-1と QoS-2を上位層 [0792] Thus, the application can use the above QoS-1 and QoS-2 as the upper layer with or without the response.
(アプリケーション)操作することで、切り替えることができる。  (Application) It is possible to switch by operating.
[0793] ここで、レスポンス有り/無しの切換えの基準としては、送信するファイルのファイル 形式、アプリケーション、ユーザの選択等が考えられる。 Here, the file format of the file to be transmitted, the application, the selection of the user, and the like can be considered as the criteria for switching the presence / absence of response.
[0794] 具体的には、ファイル形式を基準とする場合、例えば、マルチメディア関連ファイル の場合にはレスポンス有り/無し両方選べるようにし、電話帳、メール、スケジュール 等のファイルであってデータが受信されたことを確認したい場合にはレスポンス有り が自動的に選択されるようにしてもよい。また、アプリケーションを基準とする場合、例 えば、スライドショーの場合にはレスポンス無しが自動的に選択されるようにしてもよ い。また、ユーザの選択による場合、例えば、レスポンス有り/無しのメニュー表示から ユーザに選択させるようにしてもよ 、。 [0794] Specifically, when the file format is used as a reference, for example, in the case of a multimedia related file, both presence / absence of response can be selected, and the file is a phonebook, mail, schedule, etc. and data is received. If you want to confirm that it has been done, you may choose to have a response automatically. Also, when using an application as a reference, for example, in the case of a slide show, no response may be automatically selected. Also, if the user's selection is made, for example, the user may be made to select from a menu display with / without response.
[0795] 図 88〜図 90は、本実施の形態の接続シーケンスのときの、通信層間のデータおよ びパラメータの流れの変形例を示す説明図である。 [0796] 送信機にお!、て最初の SNRMコマンドにすべての通信層の情報が含まれる場合 に(図 74)、データやパラメータを各通信層でリレーしながら伝達する(図 83)のでは なぐ図 88のように、各通信層から LAP層へ直接渡すように構成することもできる。 [0795] FIG. 88 to FIG. 90 are explanatory diagrams showing a modification of the flow of data and parameters between communication layers in the connection sequence of the present embodiment. When the first SNRM command includes information on all communication layers in the transmitter (Fig. 74), data and parameters are relayed and transmitted in each communication layer (Fig. 83). It can also be configured to pass directly from each communication layer to the LAP layer as shown in Fig. 88.
[0797] また逆に、図 89のように、受信機において、 SNRMコマンドに含まれるデータゃパ ラメータをすベて取り出し、宛先である各通信層へ LAP層から直接渡すように構成す ることちでさる。  [0797] On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, in the receiver, all data and parameters included in the SNRM command should be extracted and sent directly to the destination communication layers from the LAP layer. I'm sorry.
[0798] また、図 90のように、送信機において、 OBEX(P)、 SMP (P)、 LMP (P)のデータ やパラメータを LMP (P)で統合し、さらに、 LAP (P)にて、上記統合したデータゃパ ラメータに LAP (P)のパラメータを追カ卩して SNRMコマンドを生成するように構成す ることちでさる。  Further, as shown in FIG. 90, in the transmitter, data and parameters of OBEX (P), SMP (P), LMP (P) are integrated by LMP (P), and further, by LAP (P) The above integrated data and parameters should be configured to generate the SNRM command by adding the parameters of LAP (P).
[0799] なお、上記各実施の形態における送信機 (一次局)としては、例えば、携帯電話機 、 PDA (Personal Digital Assistants)、デジタルカメラ、パーソナルコンピュータなどが 挙げられる。また、受信機 (二次局)としては、例えば、携帯電話機、テレビ、 AV機器 、 DVDレコーダ、 HDDレコーダなどの記録装置、プリンタ、パーソナルコンピュータ などの電子機器が挙げられる。  [0799] As a transmitter (primary station) in each of the above embodiments, for example, a cellular phone, a PDA (Personal Digital Assistants), a digital camera, a personal computer and the like can be mentioned. Also, as the receiver (secondary station), for example, electronic apparatuses such as mobile phones, televisions, recording apparatuses such as AV equipment, DVD recorders, HDD recorders, printers, personal computers, etc. may be mentioned.
[0800] また、前述した送信機 (一次局)または受信機 (二次局)の各ブロックは、ハードゥエ ァロジック (通信回路)によって構成してもよいし、次のように CPUなどの演算処理装 置を用いてソフトウェアによって実現してもよ 、。  [0800] Each block of the transmitter (primary station) or receiver (secondary station) described above may be configured by hardware logic (communication circuit), or an arithmetic processing unit such as a CPU as follows. It may be realized by software using
[0801] すなわち、前述した送信機または受信機は、各機能を実現する制御プログラムの命 令を実行する CPU (central processing unit)、上記プログラムを格納した ROM (read only memory)、上己プログフムを展 する RAM (random access memory;、上己フ—口 グラムおよび各種データを格納するメモリ等の記憶装置 (記録媒体)などを備えて 、 る。  [0801] That is, the above-mentioned transmitter or receiver executes a control program instruction for realizing each function, CPU (central processing unit), ROM (read only memory) storing the above program, A storage device (recording medium) such as a random access memory (RAM) to be displayed, a memory for storing various data, and a memory (recording medium) are provided.
[0802] そして、本発明の目的は、上述した機能を実現するソフトウェアである送信機または 受信機の通信プログラムのプログラムコード(実行形式プログラム、中間コードプログ ラム、ソースプログラム)をコンピュータで読み取り可能に記録した記録媒体を、上記 送信機または受信機に供給し、そのコンピュータ (または CPUや MPU)が記録媒体 に記録されて 、るプログラムコードを読み出し実行することによっても、達成可能であ る。 [0802] Then, the object of the present invention is to make a computer readable program code (executable program, intermediate code program, source program) of a communication program of a transmitter or a receiver that is software that realizes the functions described above. This can also be achieved by supplying the recorded recording medium to the transmitter or the receiver, and the computer (or CPU or MPU) recording the recording medium on the recording medium and reading out and executing the program code. Ru.
[0803] 上記記録媒体としては、例えば、磁気テープやカセットテープ等のテープ系、フロッ ピー(登録商標)ディスク Zハードディスク等の磁気ディスクや CD— ROMZMOZ MD/DVD/CD—R等の光ディスクを含むディスク系、 ICカード (メモリカードを含 む) Z光カード等のカード系、あるいはマスク ROMZEPROMZEEPROMZフラッ シュ ROM等の半導体メモリ系などを用いることができる。  [0803] Examples of the recording medium include tape systems such as magnetic tape and cassette tape, magnetic disks such as floppy (registered trademark) disk Z hard disk, and optical disks such as CD-ROM ZMOZ MD / DVD / CD-R. A disk system, an IC card (including a memory card), a card system such as a Z optical card, or a semiconductor memory system such as a mask ROMZEPROMZEEPROM Z flash ROM can be used.
[0804] また、送信機または受信機を通信ネットワークと接続可能に構成し、上記プログラム コードを通信ネットワークを介して供給してもよい。この通信ネットワークとしては、特 に限定されず、例えば、インターネット、イントラネット、エキストラネット、 LAN, ISDN 、 VAN, CATV通信網、仮想専用網(virtual private network)、電話回線網、移動 体通信網、衛星通信網等が利用可能である。なお、本発明は、上記プログラムコード が電子的な伝送で具現化された搬送波あるいはデータ信号列の形態でも実現され 得る。 [0804] Further, the transmitter or the receiver may be configured to be connectable to a communication network, and the program code may be supplied via the communication network. The communication network is not particularly limited, and, for example, the Internet, intranet, extranet, LAN, ISDN, VAN, CATV communication network, virtual private network, telephone network, mobile communication network, satellite A communication network etc. can be used. The present invention can also be realized in the form of a carrier wave or a data signal sequence in which the program code is embodied by electronic transmission.
[0805] 以上のように、本発明に係る通信機器は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限が ない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲せずに、データを一括送信する通信機器であ つて、一括送信する一括送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成する送信フレー ム生成手段と、上記送信フレームに通し番号を付与する通し番号生成手段と、上記 一括送信データの最終の送信フレームに、一括送信データの最終の送信フレーム であることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定する一括送信最終フラグ生成手段と、上 記送信フレームを送信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴として 、る。  As described above, the communication device according to the present invention is a communication device for collectively transmitting data without delegating the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. Transmission frame generation means for dividing transmission data to be transmitted collectively to generate a transmission frame, serial number generation means for adding a serial number to the transmission frame, and the final transmission frame of the transmission data for collective transmission A batch transmission final flag generation unit that sets a batch transmission final flag indicating that it is a final transmission frame, and a transmission unit that transmits the above-described transmission frame are characterized.
[0806] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲せずに、データを一括送信する通信方法であって、一 括送信する一括送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成し、上記送信フレームに 通し番号を付与し、上記一括送信データの最終の送信フレームには、一括送信デー タの最終の送信フレームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定して、上記送信 フレームを送信することを特徴として!/、る。  [0806] Further, the communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for collectively transmitting data without delegating transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. Batch transmission data is divided to generate a transmission frame, and a serial number is assigned to the transmission frame, and the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data is a batch to indicate that it is the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data. It is characterized in that the transmission final flag is set and the transmission frame is transmitted! /.
[0807] さらに、本発明に係る通信機器は、受信した受信フレーム力 エラー無しフラグおよ び通し番号を抽出する受信フレーム解析手段と、上記エラー無しフラグを解析してェ ラーの有無を判定するエラー無しフラグ解析手段と、上記エラー無しフラグがエラー 有りを示して!/、る場合、上記通し番号に対応する送信フレームを再送する制御手段 と、を備えることを特徴としている。 [0807] Furthermore, the communication device according to the present invention is not limited to the received frame analysis means for extracting the received frame strength no-error flag and the serial number, and the above-mentioned no-error flag. It is characterized by comprising: no error flag analysis means for determining presence / absence of error, and control means for retransmitting a transmission frame corresponding to the serial number when the error absence flag indicates presence / absence of error. .
[0808] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲されずに、データを一括受信する通信機器であって、 上記受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号のエラーがな ヽかどうか を判別する通し番号解析手段と、上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグ 力 当該受信フレームが送信機によって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信 された一括送信データの最終の送信フレームであることを示しているとき、上記通し 番号解析手段によって、それまでに受信した受信フレームにエラーが検出された場 合、エラー有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラグおよびエラー発生時の通し番 号を含む送信フレームを生成する送信フレーム生成手段と、上記送信フレームを送 信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴としている。  [0808] Further, the communication device according to the present invention is a communication device that collectively receives data without transfer of the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. The serial number analysis means for analyzing the serial number included in the serial number to determine whether or not the serial number error is present, and the batch transmission final flag included in the received frame. The received frame is divided into a plurality of transmitted frames by the transmitter. When an error is detected in the received frame received so far by the serial number analysis means when it is indicated that it is the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data transmitted in a batch, it indicates that there is an error. Transmission frame generation means for generating a transmission frame including an error free flag set in the frame and a serial number upon occurrence of an error; Is characterized by comprising a transmitting means for sending the frame.
[0809] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲されずに、データを一括受信する通信方法であって、 上記受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号のエラーがな ヽかどうか を判別し、上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレーム が送信機によって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データ の最終の送信フレームであることを示しているとき、それまでに受信した受信フレーム にエラーが検出された場合、エラー有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラグおよび エラー発生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成し、上記送信フレームを送信す ることを特徴としている。  [0809] The communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for collectively receiving data without transfer of transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. The serial number included in the frame is analyzed to determine whether or not there is an error in the serial number, and the batch transmission final flag included in the received frame is divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and the batch transmission is performed. No error flag set to indicate that there is an error and an error occurs if an error is detected in the previously received frame when it indicates that it is the last transmission frame of the batch transmission data that has been sent. A transmission frame including a serial number is generated, and the transmission frame is transmitted.
[0810] また、本発明に係る通信システムは、上記の送信機としての通信機器と、上記の受 信機としての通信機器とを含むことを特徴として!/ヽる。  [0810] Further, the communication system according to the present invention is characterized by including the communication device as the transmitter and the communication device as the receiver. / Scold.
[0811] 上記の構成および方法により、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方 式に従って、送信権を委譲せずに、データを一括送信する際に、送信機では、一括 送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成し、送信フレームに通し番号を付与すると ともに、さらに、一括送信データの最終の送信フレームには、一括送信データの最終 の送信フレームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定して、送信フレームを送 信する。一方、受信機では、受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号 のエラーがないかどうかを判別し、受信フレームにエラーが検出された場合、エラー 有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラグおよびエラー発生時の通し番号を含む送 信フレームを生成して、送信機へ送信する。そして、送信機は、受信機から、エラー 発生時の通し番号を含むフレームを受信すると、その通し番号に対応する送信フレ ームを再送する。 [0811] With the above configuration and method, according to a communication method in which there is no limit on the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time, the transmitter transmits batch transmission data in batch transmission of data without delegating transmission right. The transmission frame is divided to generate a transmission frame, and a serial number is assigned to the transmission frame. Furthermore, in the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data, the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data The transmission frame is transmitted by setting the batch transmission final flag indicating that the frame is a transmission frame. On the other hand, in the receiver, the serial number included in the received frame is analyzed to determine whether there is an error in the serial number, and if an error is detected in the received frame, the no error flag set to indicate that there is an error and Generate a transmission frame including the serial number at the time of error occurrence and transmit it to the transmitter. Then, when the transmitter receives a frame including a serial number at the time of occurrence of an error from the receiver, the transmitter retransmits a transmission frame corresponding to the serial number.
[0812] ここで、受信機は、送信機が一括送信データを分割した送信フレームの内の最終 の送信フレームを受信したことが、受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグによ つて判明するまで、上記エラー発生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを送信しない。 つまり、エラーの通知を一括送信データ単位で行う。  [0812] Here, until the receiver finds that the transmitter has received the final transmission frame of the transmission frames into which the batch transmission data has been divided, according to the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame, The transmission frame including the serial number when the error occurs is not transmitted. That is, error notification is performed in batch transmission data units.
[0813] よって、一度に送信または受信可能なフレーム数 (ウィンドウサイズ)の制限がない 通信方式を用いても、フレームの抜け等を検出して、再送することができるため、信 頼性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。また、エラーの通知を一括送信データ単位 で行うため、データ転送の効率がよい。  [0813] Therefore, even if a communication method without limitation on the number of frames (window size) that can be transmitted or received at one time is used, frame omission etc. can be detected and retransmitted, so it is highly reliable. It is possible to communicate. In addition, since error notification is performed in batch transmission data units, data transfer efficiency is high.
[0814] さらに、本発明に係る通信機器は、 1つの送信データを複数の上記一括送信デー タに分割して送信する際、当該送信データの最終の送信フレームに、送信データの 最終の送信フレームであることを示すデータ最終フラグを設定するデータ最終フラグ 生成手段を備えることを特徴として 、る。  Furthermore, in the communication device according to the present invention, when one transmission data is divided into a plurality of batch transmission data and transmitted, the final transmission frame of the transmission data is transmitted in the final transmission frame of the transmission data. And a data final flag generation unit configured to set a data final flag indicating that
[0815] 上記の構成によれば、さらに、受信機に送信データの終わりを知らせることができる 。それゆえ、受信機では、例えば受信バッファ内のデータの処理を効率よく開始する ことが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further inform the receiver of the end of transmission data. Therefore, in the receiver, for example, it becomes possible to start processing of the data in the reception buffer efficiently.
[0816] さらに、本発明に係る通信機器は、上記通信方式が、 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access  [0816] Furthermore, in the communication device according to the present invention, the communication method is IrLAP (Infrared Link Access).
Protocol)の UI (Unnumbered Information)フレームを用いた通信であることを特徴と している。  It is characterized in that it is communication using a UI (Unnumbered Information) frame of Protocol).
[0817] 上記の構成によれば、さらに、一度に送信または受信可能なフレーム数 (ウィンドウ サイズ)の制限がない通信方式として、 IrLAPの UIフレームを用いることができる。す なわち、 IrLAPの UIフレームを用いて、再送を行うことが可能となる。 [0818] さらに、本発明に係る通信機器は、上記送信フレームには、 OBEX (Object Exchan ge Protocol)の最終の PUTコマンドまたは最終でない PUTコマンドの少なくとも一部 が含まれて 、ることを特徴として!/、る。 According to the above configuration, the UI frame of IrLAP can be used as a communication method without limitation of the number of frames (window size) that can be transmitted or received at one time. That is, it becomes possible to perform retransmission using the UI frame of IrLAP. [0818] Further, the communication device according to the present invention is characterized in that the transmission frame includes at least a part of a final PUT command of OBEX (Object Exclusion Protocol) or a non-final PUT command. ! /.
[0819] 上記の構成によれば、さらに、 OBEXPUTコマンドを用いて、品質および転送効率 の高 、再送を行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform retransmission with high quality and high transfer efficiency by using the OBEXPUT command.
[0820] さらに、本発明に係る通信機器は、上記送信フレームには、 OBEX(Object Exchan ge Protocol)の SUCCESSレスポンスの一部もしくは全てが含まれていることを特徴 としている。 [0820] Furthermore, the communication device according to the present invention is characterized in that the transmission frame includes a part or all of a SUCCESS response of Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX).
[0821] 上記の構成によれば、送信機から OBEXの Putコマンドでのデータ転送が行われ た場合、 OBEXの SUCCESSレスポンスを送信することが可能となり、 OBEXの Put オペレーションを用いた通信が可能となる。  According to the above configuration, when data is transferred from the transmitter using the OBEX Put command, it is possible to transmit the SUCCESS response of the OBEX, and communication using the OBEX Put operation is possible. Become.
[0822] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信 方式に従って、送信権を委譲されずに、データを一括受信する通信機器であって、 受信した受信フレームにエラーがないかどうかを判別するためのエラー検出手段と、 上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレームが送信機に よって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データの最終の送 信フレームであることを示しているとき、上記エラー検出手段によって、それまでに受 信した受信フレームにエラーが検出されている力否かに応じて、エラーの有無を示す ように設定したエラー無しフラグを含む送信フレームを生成する送信フレーム生成手 段と、上記送信フレームを送信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴としている。  Further, the communication device according to the present invention is a communication device for collectively receiving data without being transferred to the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited. An error detection unit for determining whether or not there is an error in the frame, a batch transmission final flag included in the received frame, the batch in which the received frame is divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and batch transmitted. When it is indicated that it is the final transmission frame of transmission data, the error detection means indicates the presence or absence of an error depending on whether or not the error has been detected in the reception frame received so far. A transmission frame generation means for generating a transmission frame including the error-free flag set as described above; and a transmission means for transmitting the transmission frame. It is characterized.
[0823] 上記の構成によれば、送信機に対してエラーの有無を通知することが可能となる。  [0823] According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the transmitter of the presence or absence of an error.
それゆえ、これを受けた送信機が再送を行うことが可能となる。  Therefore, it is possible for the transmitter that received this to perform retransmission.
[0824] よって、一度に送信または受信可能なフレーム数 (ウィンドウサイズ)の制限がな!ヽ 通信方式を用いても、フレームの抜け等を検出して、再送することができるため、信 頼性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。また、エラーの通知を一括送信データ単位 で行うため、データ転送の効率がよい。  Therefore, there is no restriction on the number of frames (window size) that can be transmitted or received at one time! ヽ Even if a communication method is used, it is possible to detect missing frames and retransmit, so reliability can be achieved. Communication can be performed. In addition, since error notification is performed in batch transmission data units, data transfer efficiency is high.
[0825] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(0Bject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、オブジェクトを送信する通信機器であって、 OBEXコマン ドを送信後、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンド を送信する OBEX層処理部を備えることを特徴としている。 [0825] Further, the communication device according to the present invention is a communication device that transmits an object using the object exchange protocol OBEX (0 Bject EXc hange protocol), and the OBEX command It is characterized by comprising an OBEX layer processing unit that transmits the next OBEX command that does not receive an OBEX response from the receiver after transmitting the
[0826] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、オブジェクトを送信する通信方法であって、 OBEXコマン ドを送信後、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンド を送信することを特徴として 、る。  [0826] The communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for transmitting an object using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and, after transmitting an OBEX command, an OBEX from the receiver. It is characterized by sending the following OBEX command which does not receive a response.
[0827] 上記の構成および方法によれば、送信機は、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受 信しなくても、次の OBEXコマンドを送信することができる。よって、送信機からの要 求コマンドに対する応答コマンドを受信機が送信しない場合、あるいは、受信機に送 信機能がない場合においても、 OBEXによってオブジェクトを転送することが可能と なる。すなわち、 OBEXを用いた片方向通信が実現できる。  According to the above configuration and method, the transmitter can transmit the next OBEX command without receiving the OBEX response from the receiver. Therefore, even if the receiver does not transmit a response command to the request command from the transmitter, or if the receiver does not have the transmission function, it becomes possible to transfer the object by means of OBEX. That is, one-way communication using OBEX can be realized.
[0828] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、オブジェクトを送信する通信機器であって、 OBEXの最終 でな!/、Putコマンドを送信後のみ、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなく 、次の OBEXの最終でな!、Putコマンドもしくは最終の Putコマンドを送信する OBE X層処理部を備えることを特徴として 、る。  Further, the communication device according to the present invention is a communication device that transmits an object using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and transmits a! /, Put command at the end of OBEX. Only afterward, it is characterized by including an OBE X layer processing unit that transmits a Put command or a Put command at the end of the next OBEX without receiving an OBEX response from the receiver.
[0829] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、オブジェクトを送信する通信方法であって、 OBEXの最終 でな!/、Putコマンドを送信後のみ、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなく 、次の OBEXの最終でな!、Putコマンドもしくは最終の Putコマンドを送信することを 特徴としている。  [0829] The communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for transmitting an object using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and transmits the! /, Put command at the end of OBEX. Only after that, without receiving an OBEX response from the receiver, it is characterized in that it sends a Put command or a Final Put command at the end of the next OBEX.
[0830] 上記の構成および方法によれば、最終でない Putコマンドのレスポンス(CONTIN UE応答コマンド)を省略することによって、効率のよいデータ転送を実現することが できる。  According to the above configuration and method, efficient data transfer can be realized by omitting a response of a non-final Put command (CONTIN UE response command).
[0831] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、送信機力らオブジェクトを受信する通信機器であって、 O BEXコマンドを受信後に、 OBEXレスポンスを常に送信しない OBEX層処理部を備 えることを特徴としている。 [0832] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、送信機力 オブジェクトを受信する通信方法であって、 O BEXコマンドを受信後に、 OBEXレスポンスを常に送信しないことを特徴としている。 [0831] The communication device according to the present invention is a communication device that receives an object such as a transmitter device using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and after receiving an OBEX command, the OBEX It is characterized by being equipped with an OBEX layer processing unit that does not always send a response. Further, a communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for receiving a transmitter device using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and an OBEX response after receiving an OBEX command. It is characterized by not always transmitting.
[0833] 上記の構成および方法によれば、送信機が受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信 しなくても、次の OBEXコマンドを送信することができる場合、受信機において、不必 要な応答コマンドの生成および送信を行わな 、と 、う制御を行うことが可能となる。よ つて、 OBEXを用いた片方向通信が実現できる。  [0833] According to the above configuration and method, in the case where the transmitter can transmit the next OBEX command without receiving the OBEX response from the receiver, in the receiver, an unnecessary response command may be transmitted. It is possible to perform control without generation and transmission. Thus, one-way communication using OBEX can be realized.
[0834] また、本発明に係る通信機器は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、送信機力らオブジェクトを受信する通信機器であって、 O BEXの最終でない Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXレスポンスの送信を行わず、最 終の Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXのレスポンスの送信を行う OBEX層処理部を 備えることを特徴としている。  Further, the communication device according to the present invention is a communication device that receives an object such as a transmitter device using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and receives a Put command that is not the end of OBEX. Sometimes, it is characterized by including an OBEX layer processing unit that transmits an OBEX response when the final Put command is received without transmitting the OBEX response.
[0835] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX(OBject EXc hange protocol)を用いて、送信機力 オブジェクトを受信する通信方法であって、 O BEXの最終でない Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXレスポンスの送信を行わず、最 終の Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXのレスポンスの送信を行うことを特徴として!/、る  [0835] The communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for receiving a transmitter device using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and receiving a Put command that is not the final of OBEX. , When sending the final Put command without sending the OBEX response, it is characterized by sending the OBEX response! /,
[0836] 上記の構成および方法によれば、最終でない Putコマンドのレスポンス(CONTIN UE応答コマンド)を省略することによって、効率のよいデータ転送を実現することが できる。 [0836] According to the above configuration and method, efficient data transfer can be realized by omitting the response of the non-final Put command (CONTIN UE response command).
[0837] なお、上記通信機器は、コンピュータによって実現してもよぐこの場合には、コンビ ユータを上記通信機器の各部として動作させることにより上記通信機器をコンビユー タにて実現させる通信機器の通信プログラム、およびそれを記録したコンピュータ読 み取り可能な記録媒体も、本発明の範疇に入る。  In this case, the communication device may be realized by a computer. In this case, communication of the communication device which causes the communication device to be realized by the computer by operating the computer as each part of the communication device. The program and a computer readable recording medium recording the same also fall within the scope of the present invention.
[0838] また、上記通信機器は、上記の各部として機能する通信回路によって実現してもよ い。  [0838] Further, the communication device may be realized by a communication circuit that functions as the above-described units.
[0839] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって通信を行う携帯電話に好適である。上 記携帯電話によれば、品質および Zある 、は転送効率の高 、通信を行うことが可能 となる。 [0839] Further, the communication device is suitable for a mobile phone that performs communication by the communication device. According to the above mobile phone, it is possible to communicate with quality and Z, with high transfer efficiency. It becomes.
[0840] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって受信したデータに基づ 、て表示する 表示装置に好適である。このような表示装置によれば、品質および Zあるいは転送 効率の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0840] Further, the communication device is suitable for a display device that displays based on data received by the communication device. According to such a display device, communication can be performed with high quality and high Z or transfer efficiency.
[0841] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって受信したデータに基づ 、て印刷する 印刷装置に好適である。このような印刷装置によれば、品質および Zあるいは転送 効率の高!、通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0841] Further, the above-mentioned communication device is suitable for a printing device that prints based on data received by the communication device. According to such a printing apparatus, communication can be performed with high quality and high Z or transfer efficiency.
[0842] また、上記通信機器は、該通信機器によって受信したデータを記録する記録装置 に好適である。このような記録装置によれば、品質および Zあるいは転送効率の高い 通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0842] Further, the communication device is suitable for a recording device for recording data received by the communication device. According to such a recording apparatus, communication with high quality and Z or transfer efficiency can be performed.
[0843] さらに、本発明は以下のように構成してもよい。  Further, the present invention may be configured as follows.
[0844] 〔一次局〕  [0844] [Primary station]
(1.一次局が LAP層の UIフレームに通し番号及び BLフラグをつけて送信) 本発明に係る通信機器〔1〕は、ウィンドウサイズ (一度に送信または受信可能なフレ ーム数)の制限がない通信方式を用いて、あるまとまったサイズのデータを、送信権 を委譲せずに、一括送信する通信機器であって、送信フレームに通し番号、一括送 信データの終わりを示すフラグ、および送信データを付与して送信フレームを生成す る回路と、前記、送信フレームを送信する回路とを有し、データ転送時において、前 記、一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを示す値を設定して送 信するまで、前記通し番号を予め定められた値だけ増減していくことを特徴とする。  (1. Primary station sends serial number and BL flag to UI frame in LAP layer and sends it) The communication device [1] according to the present invention is limited in window size (number of frames that can be sent or received at one time). A communication device that transmits data of a certain size in a batch without delegating transmission rights using a non-communication method, including a serial number in a transmission frame, a flag indicating the end of batch transmission data, and transmission data And a circuit for generating a transmission frame, and the circuit for transmitting a transmission frame, and at the time of data transfer, the flag indicating the end of batch transmission data indicates a value indicating the end of data. It is characterized in that the serial number is increased or decreased by a predetermined value until it is set and transmitted.
[0845] 上記の構成によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限がな 、通信方式を用いても、上記フ レームを受信した通信機器は、フレームのぬけを検出することができ、信頼性の高い 通信を行うことが可能となる。  [0845] According to the above configuration, even if there is no restriction on the window size, the communication device that has received the above frame can detect a missing frame even when using a communication method, and communication can be performed with high reliability. It will be possible to do.
[0846] (2.二次局力 再送要求がきたら、すべて再送)  [0846] (2. Retransmission of all secondary powers when requested)
本発明に係る通信機器〔2〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕において、対向局から受信した フレーム内のエラー無しフラグがエラー有りを示している場合は、最初からデータを 再送することを特徴とする。  The communication device [2] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the above-mentioned communication device [1], when the error free flag in the frame received from the opposite station indicates that there is an error, the data is retransmitted from the beginning. Do.
[0847] 上記の構成によれば、対向局がエラーにより再送要求を行っている場合は、再送を 行うことが可能となる。 [0847] According to the above configuration, if the opposite station has made a retransmission request due to an error, retransmission is performed. It will be possible to do.
[0848] (3.すべて再送時に通し番号を 0からにする)  [0848] (3. Change serial number from 0 when all retransmissions)
本発明に係る通信機器〔3〕は、上記通信機器〔2〕において、前記再送する際に、 1 つめのフレーム送信時に通し番号を予め定められたルールでの初期値とすることを 特徴とする。  The communication device [3] according to the present invention is characterized in that the serial number is set to an initial value according to a predetermined rule at the time of the first frame transmission at the time of the retransmission in the communication device [2].
[0849] 上記の構成によれば、これを受信した通信機器は、再送が最初から行われて 、るこ とを知ることが可會となる。  [0849] According to the above configuration, it is possible for the communication device that has received this to know that retransmission has been performed from the beginning.
[0850] (4.すべて再送は 1回のみ) [0850] (4. All retransmissions are only once)
本発明に係る通信機器〔4〕は、上記通信機器〔2〕において、前記再送は 1回のみ であることを特徴とする。  The communication device [4] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the communication device [2], the retransmission is performed only once.
[0851] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質が悪い場合の再送による消費電力の削減を 行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce power consumption by retransmission when the quality of the communication path is poor.
[0852] (5.すべて再送に回数の制限を設ける) [0852] (5. Make a limit on the number of all retransmissions)
本発明に係る通信機器〔5〕は、上記通信機器〔2〕において、前記再送は予め定め られた値以下であることを特徴とする。  The communication device [5] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the communication device [2], the retransmission is equal to or less than a predetermined value.
[0853] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質によって、再送回数の制限を変更することが 可能となり、より効率の高い消費電力の低減を行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the limit of the number of retransmissions according to the quality of the communication path, and it is possible to perform power consumption reduction with higher efficiency.
[0854] (6.二次局から再送要求された通し番号からの再送) [0854] (6. Retransmission from the serial number requested to be retransmitted from the secondary station)
本発明に係る通信機器〔6〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕において、対向局から受信した フレーム内のエラー無しフラグがエラー有りを示している場合は、それまでに送信し たフレームのうち、受信したフレーム内の通し番号に相当するフレームから再送を行 うことを特徴とする。  In the communication device [6] according to the present invention, in the communication device [1], when the no-error flag in the frame received from the opposite station indicates that there is an error, among the frames transmitted so far, It is characterized in that retransmission is performed from the frame corresponding to the serial number in the received frame.
[0855] 上記の構成によれば、対向局から要求された通し番号力 の再送が可能となり、ェ ラー時の転送効率が高くなる。  According to the above configuration, retransmission of the serial number power requested from the opposite station becomes possible, and the transfer efficiency at error becomes high.
[0856] (7.二次局から再送要求された通し番号からの再送 (通し番号も戻す))  [0856] (7. Retransmission from serial number requested to be retransmitted from secondary station (serial number is also returned))
本発明に係る通信機器〔7〕は、上記通信機器〔6〕において、前記再送する際に、 1 つめのフレーム送信時に通し番号を直前に受信したフレーム内の通し番号とすること を特徴とする。 [0857] 上記の構成によれば、対向局がデータの再送開始場所を知ることが可能となる。 The communication device [7] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the above-mentioned communication device [6], the serial number is the serial number in the frame received immediately before transmitting the first frame when the retransmission is performed. [0857] According to the above configuration, it is possible for the opposite station to know the retransmission start point of data.
[0858] (8.二次局が指定した通し番号からの再送は 1回のみ) [0858] (8. Retransmission from serial number designated by secondary station only once)
本発明に係る通信機器〔8〕は、上記通信機器〔6〕において、前記再送は 1回のみ であることを特徴とする。  The communication device [8] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the communication device [6], the retransmission is performed only once.
[0859] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質が悪い場合の再送による消費電力の削減を 行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce power consumption by retransmission when the quality of the communication path is poor.
[0860] (9.二次局が指定した通し番号からの再送に回数の制限を設ける) [0860] (9. A limit is imposed on the number of retransmissions from the serial number designated by the secondary station)
本発明に係る通信機器〔9〕は、上記通信機器〔6〕において、前記再送は予め定め られた値以下であることを特徴とする。  The communication device [9] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the communication device [6], the retransmission is equal to or less than a predetermined value.
[0861] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質によって、再送回数の制限を変更することが 可能となり、より効率の高い消費電力の低減を行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the limit of the number of retransmissions according to the quality of the communication path, and it is possible to carry out more efficient reduction of power consumption.
[0862] (10.二次局力も再送要求がな力つたら、通し番号を増やして送信) [0862] (10. If there is no resending request for the secondary power, the serial number is increased and sent)
本発明に係る通信機器〔10〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕において、対向局から受信した フレーム内のエラー無しフラグがエラー無しを示して 、る場合は、前回送信したフレ ームの通し番号を予め定められた値だけ増やした値を、通し番号として付与し、送信 を行うことを特徴とする。  In the communication device [10] according to the present invention, in the communication device [1], when the no error flag in the frame received from the opposite station indicates no error, the serial number of the previously transmitted frame is used. It is characterized in that a value increased by a predetermined value is assigned as a serial number and transmission is performed.
[0863] 上記の構成によれば、対向局から再送要求がない場合は、引き続きデータの送信 を行うことが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, when there is no retransmission request from the opposite station, it becomes possible to continue to transmit data.
[0864] (11. BL=1とするデータサイズの単位は受信側のバッファサイズで決まる)  [0864] (11. The unit of data size with BL = 1 is determined by the buffer size on the receiving side)
本発明に係る通信機器〔 11〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕にお ヽて、接続時に対向局か ら受信した対向局の一括受信可能データサイズを保持し、送信フレーム内の送信デ ータの累計が前記接続時に対向局力 受信したデータサイズ以下で、前記一括送 信データの終わりを示すフラグをデータの終わりの意味する値として設定し、送信す ることを特徴とする。  The communication device [11] according to the present invention holds the batch receivable data size of the opposite station received from the opposite station at the time of connection in the communication device [1], and transmits data in the transmission frame. A flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data is set as a value representing the end of the data, and is transmitted, with a total of 以下 being less than the data size received by the opposing station at the time of connection.
[0865] 上記の構成によれば、受信側のバッファがあふれてオーバーランエラーが起きる状 態を未然に防ぐことが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent an overrun error from occurring in a situation where the buffer on the receiving side overflows.
[0866] (12.ブロックサイズパラメータを受信しなかった場合は、デフォルト値をブロックサ ィズとする) 本発明に係る通信機器〔12〕は、上記通信機器〔11〕において、接続時に対向局か ら対向局の一括受信可能データサイズを受信しな力つた場合は、予め定められた値 以下で一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグをデータの終わりの意味する値として設 定し、送信することを特徴とする。 [0866] (12. If the block size parameter is not received, the default value will be the block size) In the communication device [12] according to the present invention, when the communication device [11] does not receive the batch receivable data size of the opposite station from the opposite station at the time of connection, the predetermined range is less than a predetermined value. It is characterized in that a flag indicating the end of transmission data is set as a value indicating the end of data and transmitted.
[0867] 上記の構成によれば、対向局との間で、デフォルト値を定めていれば、対向局はデ フォルト値での通信が可能であるならば、接続時に受信バッファを対向局に対して通 知する必要がなくなる。 [0867] According to the above configuration, if a default value is defined between the opposite station and the opposite station, if the opposite station can communicate with the default value, the reception buffer is set to the opposite station at the time of connection. Need not be notified.
[0868] (13.一次局が BL=1として送信した後、タイムアウトしたら直前の送信フレームを再 送する)  [0868] (13. After the primary station transmits as BL = 1, when the time out times out, transmit the previous transmission frame again)
本発明に係る通信機器〔13〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕において、特にタイマを持ち、 前記、一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグをデータの終わりの意味として設定して フレームを送信後、予め定められた一定時間、対向局力もフレームを受信しな力つた 場合、直前に送信したフレームのみを再送することを特徴とする。  The communication device [13] according to the present invention particularly has a timer in the communication device [1], and the flag indicating the end of batch transmission data is set as the meaning of the end of data to transmit a frame in advance, It is characterized in that, when the opposing station also does not receive a frame for a predetermined time, only the frame transmitted immediately before is retransmitted.
[0869] 上記の構成によれば、一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグを含むフレームにエラ 一が発生し、対向局にて正常に受信できない場合に、再送することが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, when an error occurs in a frame including a flag indicating the end of batch transmission data and reception can not be normally performed by the opposite station, retransmission is possible.
[0870] (14.一次局が BL=1のフレームを再送するのは 1回のみ) [0870] (14. The primary station retransmits a BL = 1 frame only once)
本発明に係る通信機器〔14〕は、上記通信機器〔13〕において、前記再送は 1回の みであることを特徴とする。  The communication device [14] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the communication device [13], the retransmission is performed only once.
[0871] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質が悪い場合の再送による消費電力の削減を 行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce power consumption by retransmission when the quality of the communication path is poor.
[0872] (15.一次局が BL=1のフレームを再送するのに制限を設ける) [0872] (15. There is a limit for the primary station to resend a frame with BL = 1)
本発明に係る通信機器〔15〕は、上記通信機器〔13〕において、前記再送は予め定 められた回数以下であることを特徴とする。  The communication device [15] according to the present invention is characterized in that, in the communication device [13], the number of retransmissions is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times.
[0873] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質によって、再送回数の制限を変更することが 可能となり、より効率の高い消費電力の低減を行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the limit of the number of retransmissions according to the quality of the communication path, and it is possible to carry out more efficient reduction of power consumption.
[0874] (16.一次局が全てのフレーム送信時に BL=1とする) [0874] (16. The primary station sets BL = 1 when transmitting all frames)
本発明に係る通信機器〔16〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕において、全ての送信フレーム において、前記一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグをデータの終わりを示す値とし て設定して送信することを特徴とする。 The communication device [16] according to the present invention, in the communication device [1], sets a flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data to a value indicating the end of the data in all the transmission frames. Setting and sending.
[0875] 上記の構成によれば、再送のために必要とする送信バッファのサイズを小さく抑え ることが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the size of the transmission buffer required for retransmission.
[0876] (17.一次局が上位層からのデータの終わりを示すフラグを設定する)  [0876] (17. The primary station sets a flag indicating the end of data from the upper layer)
本発明に係る通信機器〔17〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕において、特に自局の送信デ ータの終わりを示すフラグを設定する回路を有し、自局の送信データの終わりを送信 する場合、前記自局の送信データの終わりを示すフラグをデータの終わりを意味する 値に設定し、送信することを特徴とする。  The communication device [17] according to the present invention, in the communication device [1], particularly has a circuit for setting a flag indicating the end of transmission data of its own station, and transmits the end of its transmission data. In this case, a flag indicating the end of the transmission data of the own station is set to a value that means the end of the data, and transmission is performed.
[0877] 上記の構成によれば、対向局は、送信データの終わりを知ることが可能となる。 [0877] According to the above configuration, the opposite station can know the end of transmission data.
[0878] (18.一次局が IrDAの UIフレームによる双方向通信を行う) [0878] (18. The primary station performs bi-directional communication with the IrDA UI frame)
本発明に係る通信機器〔18〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕〜〔17〕のいずれかにおいて、 前記ウィンドウサイズの制限がない通信方式とは、 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Proto col)の UIフレームを用いた通信であることを特徴とする。  In the communication device [18] according to the present invention, in any one of the communication devices [1] to [17], the communication method without limitation of the window size is a UI frame of IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol). It is characterized by the communication used.
[0879] 上記の構成によれば、 IrLAPの UIフレームを用いて、再送を行うことが可能となる。 [0879] According to the above configuration, retransmission can be performed using the UI frame of IrLAP.
[0880] (19.一次局が片方向送信で LAP層の UIフレームに通し番号をつけて送信) [0880] (19. The primary station transmits the LAP layer UI frame with serial number in one-way transmission)
本発明に係る通信機器〔19〕は、 IrLAP(Infrared Link Access Protocol)の UIフレー ムを用いて、対向局からのレスポンスを必要としない通信を行う場合において、 UIフレ ームに通し番号および送信データを付与して送信フレームを生成する回路と、前記、 送信フレームを送信する回路とを有し、データ転送時において、前記通し番号を予 め定められた値だけ増減して 、くことを特徴とする。  The communication device [19] according to the present invention uses the UI frame of IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol) to perform communication without requiring a response from the opposite station. , And the circuit for transmitting the transmission frame, and at the time of data transfer, the serial number is increased or decreased by a predetermined value, .
[0881] 上記の構成によれば、 IrDAの UIフレームを用いても、片方向通信において、受信し たフレームに抜けがあるかどうかを検出することが可能となり、通信の品質の向上に つながる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to detect whether or not there is a dropout in a received frame in one-way communication using the UI frame of IrDA, which leads to improvement in communication quality.
[0882] (20.一次局が片方向通信で UIフレームに通し番号にカ卩えて DLフラグをつけて送 信)  [0882] (20. The primary station transmits a serial number to the UI frame in one-way communication with the DL flag attached)
本発明に係る通信機器〔20〕は、上記通信機器〔19〕において、特に送信データの 終わりを示すフラグを生成する回路を有し、前記送信データの終わりを示すフラグを 設定して送信することを特徴とする。 [0883] 上記の構成によれば、受信側が前記送信データの終わりを示すフラグを受信した 時点で、所望の処理を行うことが可能である。 The communication device [20] according to the present invention, in the communication device [19], has a circuit that generates a flag that particularly indicates the end of transmission data, and sets and transmits a flag that indicates the end of the transmission data. It is characterized by According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform desired processing when the receiving side receives the flag indicating the end of the transmission data.
[0884] (21.一次局が送信するデータは OBEXの PUTコマンドである)  [0884] (21. The data transmitted by the primary station is the OBEX PUT command)
本発明に係る通信機器〔21〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕〜〔20〕の 、ずれかにお 、て、 前記送信データには、 OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)の Put(Finalもしくは not Fin al)コマンドの一部もしくは全てが含まれて 、ることを特徴とする。  The communication device [21] according to the present invention is located in any one of the communication devices [1] to [20], and the transmission data includes the Put (Final or not Final) of Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX). ) Characterized in that part or all of the command is included.
[0885] 上記の構成によれば、 OBEXの Putコマンドを用いた通信が可能となる。  [0885] According to the above configuration, communication using the Put command of OBEX becomes possible.
[0886] 〔二次局〕  [0886] [Secondary station]
(22.二次局が BL=1のフレームを受信したらエラーの有無を一次局に通知) 本発明に係る通信機器〔22〕は、ウィンドウサイズ (一度に送信または受信可能なフ レーム数)の制限がない通信方式を用いて、あるまとまったサイズのデータを、送信 権が委譲されずに、一括受信する通信機器であって、受信フレームにエラーがない 力どうかを判別するための誤り検出回路と、受信フレーム内のデータを受信バッファ に保存する回路と、受信バッファ内のデータを処理する回路と、一括送信データの終 わりを示すフラグを判別する回路と、エラー無しフラグを付与して、送信フレームを生 成する回路と、前記送信フレームを送信する回路とを有し、データ転送時において、 受信フレーム中の前記一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意 味している場合に、それまでに受信したフレームにおいてエラーが検出されな力つた 場合は、前記エラー無しフラグをエラー無しの意味とし、エラーが検出された場合は 、前記エラー無しフラグをエラーありの意味としてフレームを生成し、送信することを 特徴とする。  (22. When the secondary station receives a frame of BL = 1, it notifies the primary station of the presence or absence of an error) The communication device [22] according to the present invention has a window size (the number of frames that can be transmitted or received at one time). An error detection circuit that determines whether there is no error in received frames or not, which is a communication device that batch-receives data of a certain size without transfering transmission rights using a communication method that does not have limitations. A circuit for storing data in the reception frame in the reception buffer, a circuit for processing the data in the reception buffer, a circuit for determining the flag indicating the end of batch transmission data, and a no error flag are provided. The circuit has a circuit for generating a transmission frame and a circuit for transmitting the transmission frame, and at the time of data transfer, a flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data in the reception frame is the end of data. If no error is detected in the frame received so far, meaning no error, the no error flag means no error, and if an error is detected, the no error flag It is characterized in that a frame is generated and transmitted with an error meaning.
[0887] 上記の構成によれば、対向局に対してエラーの有無を通知することが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the opposite station of the presence or absence of an error.
これを受けた対向局は再送を行うことが可能となる。  The opposite station that has received this can perform retransmission.
[0888] (23.二次局が BL=1のフレームを受信したら、エラーの有無とエラー時の通し番号 を一次局に通知) [0888] (23. When the secondary station receives a frame with BL = 1, notify the primary station of the presence or absence of an error and the serial number at the time of the error)
本発明に係る通信機器〔23〕は、ウィンドウサイズ (一度に送信または受信可能なフ レーム数)の制限がない通信方式を用いて、あるまとまったサイズのデータを、送信 権が委譲されずに、一括受信する通信機器であって、受信フレームにエラーがない 力どうかを判別するための誤り検出回路と、受信すべき通し番号を算出する回路と、 受信すべき通し番号と受信したフレームの通し番号を比較する回路と、受信フレーム 内のデータを受信バッファに保存する回路と、受信バッファ内のデータを処理する回 路と、エラーを検出したフレームの通し番号を保持する回路と、一括送信データの終 わりを示すフラグを判別する回路と、エラー無しフラグおよび、エラーがある場合は、 エラー発生時の通し番号を合わせて付与して送信フレームを生成する回路と、前記 送信フレームを送信する回路とを有し、データ転送時において、受信フレーム中の前 記一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意味している場合に、そ れまでに受信したフレームにおいて、前記、誤り検出回路および通し番号比較回路 において、エラーが検出されな力つた場合は、前記エラー無しフラグをエラー無しの 意味とし、エラーが検出された場合は、前記エラー無しフラグをエラーありの意味とす るとともに、 1つめのエラーが検出されたフレームの通し番号を、あわせて送信するこ とを特徴とする。 The communication device [23] according to the present invention uses a communication method in which there is no restriction on the window size (the number of frames that can be transmitted or received at one time), so that data of a certain size can not be transferred. , Communication devices that receive at once, and there are no errors in received frames Power error detection circuit, circuit for calculating serial number to be received, circuit for comparing serial number to be received with serial number of received frame, circuit for storing data in received frame in reception buffer There is a circuit that processes data in the reception buffer, a circuit that holds the serial number of the frame in which an error is detected, a circuit that determines a flag that indicates the end of batch transmission data, a no error flag, and an error. In this case, it has a circuit that assigns a serial number when an error occurs and generates a transmission frame, and a circuit that transmits the transmission frame, and at the time of data transfer, the end of the batch transmission data in the reception frame. In the frame received so far, when the flag indicating the end of data indicates the end of the data, the error detection circuit If no error is detected in the serial number comparison circuit, the no error flag means no error, and if an error is detected, the no error flag means no error. 1 It is characterized in that the serial number of the frame in which the second error is detected is sent together.
[0889] 上記の構成によれば、対向局に対してエラーの有無を通知することが可能となる。  With the above configuration, it is possible to notify the opposite station of the presence or absence of an error.
また、再送して欲しい通し番号を通知することが可能となり、効率のよい再送を行うこ とが可能となる。  In addition, it becomes possible to notify of the serial number desired to be retransmitted, and it becomes possible to carry out efficient retransmission.
[0890] (24.二次局がエラー検出後のフレーム受信時に、受信フレーム内データの処理を 行わない)  [0890] (24. The secondary station does not process the data in the received frame when receiving a frame after error detection)
本発明に係る通信機器〔24〕は、上記通信機器〔22〕または〔23〕において、前記誤 り検出回路および通し番号比較回路にて、エラーが検出された場合は、少なくとも、 前記一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意味する値となってい るフレームを受信するまで、受信フレーム内のデータを受信バッファに保存することを 行わないことを特徴とする。  In the communication device [24] according to the present invention, in the communication device [22] or [23], when an error is detected by the error detection circuit and the serial number comparison circuit, at least the batch transmission data It is characterized in that the data in the received frame is not stored in the reception buffer until the frame is received with the flag indicating the end indicating the end of the data.
[0891] 上記の構成によれば、エラー発生時には、対向局に再送要求するまでのデータ処 理に力かる電力の消費を削減することが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, when an error occurs, it is possible to reduce the consumption of power for data processing until a retransmission request is made to the opposite station.
[0892] (25.二次局が再送要求をするのは 1回だけ)  25. (The secondary station makes a retransmission request only once)
本発明に係る通信機器〔25〕は、上記通信機器〔22〕または〔23〕において、前記誤 り検出回路および通し番号比較回路において、受信フレームにエラーが検出された 場合に、前記エラー無しフラグをエラーありの意味として送信するのは 1回のみである ことを特徴とする。 In the communication device [25] according to the present invention, in the communication device [22] or [23], an error is detected in the received frame in the error detection circuit and the serial number comparison circuit. In this case, it is characterized in that the no-error flag is transmitted only once as the meaning of the presence of an error.
[0893] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質が悪い場合の再送による消費電力の削減を 行うことが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce power consumption by retransmission when the quality of the communication path is poor.
[0894] (26.二次局が再送要求をするのに制限を設ける) [0894] (26. A restriction is imposed on the secondary station to make a retransmission request)
本発明に係る通信機器〔26〕は、上記通信機器〔22〕または〔23〕において、前記誤 り検出回路および通し番号比較回路において、受信フレームにエラーが検出された 場合に、前記エラー無しフラグをエラーありの意味として送信するのは予め定められ た回数以下であることを特徴とする。  In the communication device [26] according to the present invention, in the communication device [22] or [23], when an error is detected in the received frame in the error detection circuit and the serial number comparison circuit, the error free flag is It is characterized in that the number of times of error transmission is less than a predetermined number of times.
[0895] 上記の構成によれば、通信路の品質によって、再送回数の制限を変更することが 可能となり、より効率の高い消費電力の低減を行うことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the limit of the number of retransmissions according to the quality of the communication path, and it is possible to perform power consumption reduction with higher efficiency.
[0896] (27.二次局は常に 0からの再送を要求する) [0896] (27. The secondary station always requests retransmission from 0)
本発明に係る通信機器〔27〕は、上記通信機器〔23〕において、前記エラー無しフ ラグをエラーありの意味として送信を行う際に、通し番号を常に予め定められたルー ルでの初期値と設定して送信することを特徴とする。  In the communication device [27] according to the present invention, when performing transmission with the error-free flag in the meaning of presence of an error in the communication device [23], the serial number is always taken as the initial value in a predetermined rule. It is characterized by setting and transmitting.
[0897] 上記の構成によれば、エラーが検出された場合に常にデータの最初力 の再送を 要求することになり、エラーが発生したフレームの通し番号を管理する必要がなくなりAccording to the above configuration, the first power retransmission of data is always requested when an error is detected, and there is no need to manage the serial number of the frame in which the error occurred.
、回路の簡略ィ匕につながる。 Leads to a simplified circuit.
[0898] (28.接続時に二次局がバッファサイズを一次局に通知する) [2898] (Secondary station notifies buffer size to primary station at connection)
本発明に係る通信機器〔28〕は、上記通信機器〔22〕または〔23〕において、接続時 に、自局のノッファサイズをフレームに付与して送信することを特徴とする。  The communication device [28] according to the present invention is characterized in that, at the time of connection, the communication device [22] or [23] adds a noffer size of its own station to a frame and transmits it.
[0899] 上記の構成によれば、対向局に自局の受信バッファサイズを通知することが可能と なり、対向局が一括送信するデータサイズを調整することが、自局の受信バッファが あふれてオーバーランエラーとなることを防ぐことが可能となる。 [0899] According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the opposite station of the reception buffer size of the own station, and adjusting the data size to be transmitted collectively by the opposite station overflows the reception buffer of the own station. It becomes possible to prevent an overrun error.
[0900] (29.二次局が BL=1で同一の通し番号のフレームを連続受信した場合は、エラーと して処理しない) [0900] (29. The secondary station does not process as an error if it continuously receives frames of the same serial number with BL = 1)
本発明に係る通信機器〔29〕は、上記通信機器〔23〕において、受信したフレーム の一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意味しており、かつ、そ の時の通し番号が直前に受信した一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの 終わりを示しているフレームの通し番号と同じである場合は、前記通し番号比較回路 にお 、てエラーとして処理しな 、ことを特徴とする。 In the communication device [29] according to the present invention, in the communication device [23], the flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data of the received frame means the end of the data, and The serial number comparison circuit does not treat as an error if the serial number at the time is the same as the serial number of the frame indicating the end of the data received, indicating that the flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data received immediately before is the same. It is characterized by
[0901] 上記の構成によれば、自局が送信したフレームにエラーが発生し、対向局が正常 に受信できな力つた場合に再送された対向局力ものフレームをエラーとして処理しな いことが可能となる。  [0901] According to the above configuration, if an error occurs in a frame transmitted by the own station, and the opposing station can not receive normally, the retransmitted opposing station force frame is not processed as an error. Is possible.
[0902] (30.二次局が BL=1の再送パケットを受信したときは、フレーム内データを受信バッ ファ内に保存しない)  [0902] (30. When the secondary station receives a retransmission packet with BL = 1, it does not store intraframe data in the reception buffer)
本発明に係る通信機器〔30〕は、上記通信機器〔29〕において、前記、受信したフ レームの一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意味しており、か つ、その時の通し番号が直前に受信した一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデ ータの終わりを示して 、るフレームの通し番号と同じである場合は、受信フレーム内 のデータを受信バッファ内に保存しないことを特徴とする。  In the communication device [30] according to the present invention, in the communication device [29], the flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data of the received frame means the end of the data, and the serial number at that time If the flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data received immediately before indicates the end of the data and is the same as the serial number of the frame, the data in the reception frame is not stored in the reception buffer. Do.
[0903] 上記の構成によれば、自局が送信したフレームにエラーが発生し、対向局が正常 に受信できな力つた場合に再送された対向局力ものフレーム内のデータを二重に受 信バッファに保存することを防ぐことが可能となる。 [0903] According to the above configuration, when an error occurs in a frame transmitted by the own station and the opposite station can not receive normally, the data in the opposite station power retransmitted frame is received in duplicate. It is possible to prevent saving in the communication buffer.
[0904] (31.二次局が BL=1の再送パケットを受信したときは、直前に送信したフレームを 再送する)  [0904] (31. When the secondary station receives a retransmission packet with BL = 1, it retransmits the frame transmitted immediately before)
本発明に係る通信機器〔31〕は、上記通信機器〔29〕において、前記受信したフレ ームの一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意味しており、かつ 、その時の通し番号が直前に受信した一括送信データの終わりを示すフラグがデー タの終わりを示しているフレームの通し番号と同じである場合は、直前に送信したフレ ームを再送することを特徴とする。  In the communication device [31] according to the present invention, in the communication device [29], the flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data of the received frame means the end of the data, and the serial number at that time is If the flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data received immediately before is the same as the serial number of the frame indicating the end of data, it is characterized in that the frame transmitted immediately before is retransmitted.
[0905] 上記の構成によれば、自局が送信したフレームにエラーが発生し、対向局が正常 に受信できな力つた場合に、再送を行うことが可能となる。  [0905] According to the above configuration, when an error occurs in a frame transmitted by the own station and the opposite station can not receive normally, retransmission can be performed.
[0906] (32.二次局が DL=1のフレームを受信したら、対向局の上位層のデータが終了し たことを通知する)  [0906] (32. When the secondary station receives a frame with DL = 1, notifies that the data in the higher layer of the opposite station has ended)
本発明に係る通信機器〔32〕は、上記通信機器〔22〕または〔23〕において、特に、 対向局のデータの終わりを示すフラグを判別する回路を有し、受信フレームにおいて 、前記対向局のデータの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを示している場合は、 自局の受信バッファ内データ処理部に対して、その旨を通知することを特徴とする。 In the communication device [32] according to the present invention, in the communication device [22] or [23], in particular, It has a circuit that determines a flag indicating the end of data of the opposite station, and in the reception frame, if the flag indicating the end of data of the opposite station indicates the end of data, data processing in the reception buffer of the own station It is characterized by notifying a department of that.
[0907] 上記の構成によれば、対向局の送信データの終わりを自局内受信データ処理部に 通知することが可能となる。  [0907] According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the end of transmission data of the opposite station to the in-station reception data processing unit.
[0908] (33.二次局が DL=1のフレームを受信したら、二次局の上位層のデータを送信) 本発明に係る通信機器〔33〕は、上記通信機器〔32〕において、受信フレームにお いて、前記対向局のデータの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを示している場合 は、自局の受信バッファ内データ処理部に対して、その旨を通知した後、自局のデ ータを送信することを特徴とする。 [0908] (33. When the secondary station receives a frame with DL = 1, transmits data of the upper layer of the secondary station) [0908] The communication device [33] according to the present invention receives the data in the communication device [32]. In the frame, when the flag indicating the end of the data of the opposite station indicates the end of the data, after notifying the data processing unit in the reception buffer of the own station of that fact, Data transmission.
[0909] 上記の構成によれば、受信データに対するレスポンスデータを送信することが可能 となる。 [0909] According to the above configuration, it is possible to transmit response data for received data.
[0910] (34.二次局が送信するデータは OBEXの SUCCESS)  [0910] (34. The data transmitted by the secondary station is SUCCESS in OBEX)
本発明に係る通信機器〔34〕は、上記通信機器〔33〕にお ヽて、前記自局のデータ には、 OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)の SUCCESSレスポンスの一部または全てが 含まれて!/、ることを特徴とする。  The communication device [34] according to the present invention is the communication device [33], and the data of the own station includes a part or all of SUCCESS responses of OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)! / Is characterized by.
[0911] 上記の構成によれば、対向局から OBEXの Putコマンドでのデータ転送が行われた 場合、 OBEXの SUCCESSレスポンスを送信することが可能となり、 OBEXの Putォペレ ーシヨンを用いた通信が可能となる。 [0911] According to the above configuration, when data is transferred from the opposite station using the Put command of OBEX, it is possible to transmit a SUCCESS response of OBEX, and communication using Put information of OBEX is possible. It becomes.
[0912] (35.二次局が上位層のデータを送信するときにエラー無しフラグを合わせて送信[0912] (35. When the secondary station transmits upper layer data, it transmits with no error flag and transmits
) )
本発明に係る通信機器〔35〕は、上記通信機器〔33〕において、特に前記自局のデ ータを送信時に、前記エラー無しフラグを合わせて送信することを特徴とする。  The communication device [35] according to the present invention is characterized in that the communication device [33] transmits the data without an error together, particularly when transmitting data of the own station.
[0913] 上記の構成によれば、対向局にエラー無しを通知するフレームと、自局のレスポン スデータを送信するフレームを 1つにまとめることができ、帯域の効率ィ匕につながる。 [0913] According to the above configuration, the frame for notifying the opposite station of no error and the frame for transmitting the response data of the own station can be put together into one, which leads to bandwidth efficiency.
[0914] (36.二次局が IrDAの UIフレームによる双方向通信を行う) [0914] (36. The secondary station performs two-way communication with the IrDA UI frame)
本発明に係る通信機器〔36〕は、上記通信機器〔22〕〜〔35〕の ヽずれかにお ヽて 、前記ウィンドウサイズの制限がない通信方式とは、 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Prot ocol)の UIフレームを用いた通信であることを特徴とする。 The communication device [36] according to the present invention is not limited to the above communication devices [22] to [35], and the communication method with no restriction on the window size is IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Prot It is characterized in that the communication is performed using the UI frame of Ocol).
[0915] 上記の構成によれば、 IrLAPの UIフレームを用いて、再送を行うことが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, retransmission can be performed using a UI frame of IrLAP.
[0916] (37.二次局が片方向通信でデータを受信 (通し番号をチェックする))  [0916] (37. The secondary station receives data in one-way communication (checks the serial number))
本発明に係る通信機器〔37〕は、 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol)の UIフレー ムを用いて、対向局に対してレスポンスを送信しない通信を行う場合において、受信 フレームにエラーがないかどうかを判別するための誤り検出回路と、受信すべき通し 番号を算出する回路と、受信すべき通し番号と受信したフレームの通し番号を比較 する回路と、受信フレーム内のデータを受信バッファに保存する回路と、受信バッフ ァ内のデータを処理する回路とを有し、データ転送時において、受信したフレームに おいて、前記誤り検出回路および通し番号比較回路において、エラーが検出されな 力 た場合は、正常なデータ受信として所望の処理を行い、エラーが検出された場 合は、データ受信失敗として所望の処理を行うことを特徴とする。  The communication device [37] according to the present invention uses the UI frame of Infrared Link Access Protocol (IrLAP) to determine whether there is an error in the received frame when performing communication without transmitting a response to the opposite station. An error detection circuit for discrimination, a circuit for calculating a serial number to be received, a circuit for comparing a serial number to be received with a serial number of a received frame, a circuit for storing data in a received frame in a reception buffer; The circuit has a circuit for processing data in the receive buffer, and at the time of data transfer, if no error is detected in the error detection circuit and the serial number comparison circuit in the received frame, normal data can be obtained. Desired processing is performed as reception, and when an error is detected, desired processing is performed as data reception failure.
[0917] 上記の構成によれば、 IrLAPの UIフレームを用いた片方向通信時においても、フレ ームの通し番号をチェックすることで、フレームの抜けを検出することが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, even in one-way communication using the UI frame of IrLAP, it is possible to detect frame omission by checking the serial number of the frame.
[0918] (38.二次局が片方向受信において DL解析回路でデータ終了を判断する) 本発明に係る通信機器〔38〕は、上記通信機器〔37〕において、特に、対向局のデ ータの終わりを示すフラグを判別する回路を有し、受信フレームにおいて、前記対向 局のデータの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを示している場合は、自局の受信 バッファ内データ処理部に対して、その旨を通知することを特徴とする。  [0918] (38. The secondary station judges the end of data in the DL analysis circuit in one-way reception) [0918] The communication device [38] according to the present invention is particularly suitable for the opposing station in the communication device [37]. If the flag indicating the end of data of the opposite station indicates the end of data in the reception frame, the data processing unit in the reception buffer of the own station is provided. To that effect.
[0919] 上記の構成によれば、受信側において、受信フレーム内に送信側が送信する全デ ータ長の情報がない状態でも、受信データの終わりを判別することが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, on the receiving side, it is possible to determine the end of received data even when there is no information on the total data length transmitted by the transmitting side in the received frame.
[0920] (39.二次局が片方向受信でエラー検出後のフレーム受信時に、受信フレーム内 データの処理を行わない)  [0920] (39. When the secondary station receives a frame after error detection in one-way reception, it does not process data in the received frame)
本発明に係る通信機器〔39〕は、上記通信機器〔37〕において、前記誤り検出回路 および通し番号比較回路にて、エラーが検出された場合は、少なくとも、前記一括送 信データの終わりを示すフラグがデータの終わりを意味する値となっているフレーム を受信するまで、受信フレーム内のデータを受信バッファに保存することを行わない ことを特徴とする。 [0921] 上記の構成によれば、エラーが検出された後のデータ保存処理を行わないことが 可能となり、消費電力の削減を行うことが可能となる。 In the communication device [39] according to the present invention, in the communication device [37], when an error is detected by the error detection circuit and the serial number comparison circuit, at least a flag indicating the end of the batch transmission data. It is characterized in that the data in the received frame is not stored in the reception buffer until the frame having a value indicating the end of data is received. According to the above configuration, it becomes possible not to perform data storage processing after an error is detected, and power consumption can be reduced.
[0922] (40.通信回路) [0922] (40. Communication circuit)
本発明に係る通信回路〔40〕は、上記通信機器〔 1〕〜〔39〕の ヽずれかの通信を実 現可能な通信回路であることを特徴とする。  A communication circuit [40] according to the present invention is characterized in that it is a communication circuit capable of realizing communication of any one of the communication devices [1] to [39].
[0923] 上記の構成によれば、他の通信機器にも組み込むことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it can be incorporated in other communication devices.
[0924] (41.プログラム) [0924] (41. Program)
本発明に係る通信プログラム〔41〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕〜〔39〕の 、ずれかの通 信を実現可能な通信プログラムであることを特徴とする。  The communication program [41] according to the present invention is characterized in that the communication apparatus [1] to [39] is a communication program capable of realizing any one of the communication.
[0925] 上記の構成によれば、他の通信機器にも組み込むことが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, it can be incorporated in other communication devices.
[0926] (42.記録媒体) [0926] (42. Recording medium)
本発明に係る記録媒体〔42〕は、上記通信プログラム〔41〕が記録されており、コン ピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体であることを特徴とする。  A recording medium [42] according to the present invention is characterized in that the communication program [41] is recorded, and is a computer readable recording medium.
[0927] 上記の構成によれば、本記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをメモリ上に展開して動 作させることで、本発明を実行することが可能となる。 According to the above configuration, the present invention can be implemented by expanding a program recorded on the present recording medium on a memory and causing the program to operate.
[0928] (43.携帯電話) [0928] (43. Mobile phones)
本発明に係る携帯電話〔43〕は、上記通信機器〔 1〕〜〔39〕の ヽずれかの通信を実 現可能な携帯電話であることを特徴とする。  A mobile phone [43] according to the present invention is characterized by being a mobile phone capable of realizing communication of any one of the communication devices [1] to [39].
[0929] 上記の構成によれば、携帯電話を用いて、前述の!/、ずれかの通信方式を実現する ことにより品質の高い通信が可能となる。 According to the above configuration, high-quality communication can be performed by realizing the above-mentioned any one of the above-mentioned communication methods using a mobile phone.
[0930] (44.表示装置) [0930] (44. Display Device)
本発明に係る表示装置〔44〕は、上記通信機器〔 1〕〜〔39〕の ヽずれかの通信を実 現可能な表示装置であることを特徴とする。  A display device [44] according to the present invention is characterized in that it is a display device capable of realizing communication of any one of the communication devices [1] to [39].
[0931] 上記の構成によれば、表示装置を用いて、前述の!/、ずれかの通信方式を実現する ことにより品質の高い通信が可能となる。 According to the above configuration, high-quality communication can be performed by realizing the above-mentioned any one of the above communication methods using the display device.
[0932] (45.印刷装置) [0932] (45. Printer)
本発明に係る印刷装置〔45〕は、上記通信機器〔1〕〜〔39〕の 、ずれかの通信を実 現可能な印刷装置であることを特徴とする。 [0933] 上記の構成によれば、印刷装置を用いて、前述の 、ずれかの通信方式を実現する ことにより品質の高い通信が可能となる。 The printing apparatus [45] according to the present invention is characterized in that the communication apparatus [1] to [39] can realize any one of the communications. [0933] According to the above configuration, high-quality communication can be performed by realizing the above-described one of the communication methods using the printing apparatus.
[0934] (46.記録装置)  [0934] (46. Recording device)
本発明に係る記録装置〔46〕は、上記通信機器〔 1〕〜〔39〕の ヽずれかの通信を実 現可能な記録装置であることを特徴とする。  A recording apparatus [46] according to the present invention is characterized in that the communication apparatus [1] to [39] can realize communication of any one of the communication apparatuses [1] to [39].
[0935] 上記の構成によれば、印刷装置を用いて、前述の 、ずれかの通信方式を実現する ことにより品質の高い通信が可能となる。  [0935] According to the above configuration, high-quality communication can be performed by realizing any of the above-described communication methods using a printing apparatus.
[0936] (47. OBEX層でレスポンス不要の通信方法)  [0936] (47. Communication method without response in the OBEX layer)
また、本発明に係る他の通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局にオブジェクトを送信する通信方法において 、 OBEXコマンドを送信後、対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンドを送信することを特徴として 、る。  Further, another communication method according to the present invention is a communication method of transmitting an object to the opposite station using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol), wherein after transmitting the OBEX command, the OBEX response from the opposite station is transmitted. It is characterized by sending the next OBEX command not to be received.
[0937] (48.片方向送信時のみレスポンス不要の通信方法)  [0937] (48. A communication method which requires no response only in one-way transmission)
本発明に係る他の通信方法は、さらに、上記の通信方法において、特に OBEXコ マンド送信後に対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを必要とする双方向通信と対向局か らの OBEXレスポンスを必要としない片方向通信を切り替える手段を有し、前記片方 向通信を選択している場合のみ、前記 OBEXコマンド送信後、対向局からの OBEX レスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンドを送信するようにしてもよい。  Another communication method according to the present invention is further characterized in that, in the above communication method, in particular, bidirectional communication requiring an OBEX response from the opposite station after transmission of the OBEX command and a piece not requiring an OBEX response from the opposite station. A means for switching direction communication may be provided, and only when the one-way communication is selected, after sending the OBEX command, the next OBEX command may be sent without receiving an OBEX response from the opposite station. .
[0938] (49. OBEX層でレスポンス不要の通信装置)  [0938] (49. A communication device requiring no response in the OBEX layer)
また、本発明に係る他の通信装置は、さらに、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局にオブジェクトを送信することが可能 な OBEX層処理部持つ通信装置において、前記 OBEX層処理部では、 OBEXコマ ンドを生成し送信後、対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBE Xコマンドを生成し送信することを特徴として 、る。  In the communication apparatus according to the present invention, the communication apparatus further includes an OBEX layer processing unit capable of transmitting an object to the opposite station using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol). The layer processing unit is characterized by generating and transmitting an OBEX command, and then generating and transmitting the next OBE X command which does not receive an OBEX response from the opposite station.
[0939] (50.片方向送信時のみレスポンス不要の通信装置)  [0939] (50. A communication device which does not require a response only at one-way transmission)
本発明に係る他の通信装置は、さらに、上記の通信装置において、特に OBEXコ マンド送信後に対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを必要とする双方向通信と対向局か らの OBEXレスポンスを必要としない片方向通信を切り替える通信方法切り替え部を 有し、前記、通信方法切り替え部が片方向通信を選択している場合のみ、前記 OBE Xコマンドを生成し送信後、対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンドを生成し送信するようにしてもょ 、。 Another communication apparatus according to the present invention is a communication apparatus according to the present invention, in particular, a piece which does not require two-way communication requiring an OBEX response from the opposite station after transmitting the OBEX command and an OBEX response from the opposite station. Communication method switching unit that switches direction communication After the OBE X command is generated and transmitted only when the communication method switching unit selects one-way communication, the next OBEX command is generated and transmitted without receiving the OBEX response from the opposite station. Let me do it.
[0940] 上記の方法および構成によれば、例えば OBEXを用いた片方向通信にぉ 、て、ク ライアント機器側力 の要求コマンドに対するサーバの応答コマンドをクライアント機 器側が受信できな 、場合にぉ 、ても、 OBEXでのオブジェクト送信を可能とすること ができる。また、双方向通信時は、サーバからの応答を確認する通信を行い、片方向 通信時は、サーバからの応答無しに通信を行うことが可能となり、双方向通信と片方 向通信を 1つの OBEXプロトコルで実現することが可能となる。  [0940] According to the above method and configuration, for example, in one-way communication using OBEX, the client device side can not receive the server response command to the client device side force request command. Even, you can enable object transmission with OBEX. Also, during bi-directional communication, communication is performed to confirm the response from the server, and during uni-directional communication, communication can be performed without a response from the server, and bi-directional communication and uni-directional communication can be performed by one OBEX. It is possible to realize by a protocol.
[0941] (51. Finalでない Putコマンドのみレスポンス不要の通信方法)  [0941] (51. Communication method not requiring response only for Put commands that are not Final)
また、本発明に係る他の通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局にオブジェクトを送信する通信方法において 、 OBEXの最終でない Putコマンドを送信後のみ、対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを 受信することなぐ次の OBEXの最終でない Putコマンドもしくは最終の Putコマンド を送信することを特徴として 、る。  Further, another communication method according to the present invention is a communication method of transmitting an object to the opposite station using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol), wherein the opposite station is transmitted only after transmitting the last Put command of OBEX. It is characterized by sending the next non-final Put command of OBEX or the final Put command without receiving an OBEX response from.
[0942] (52. Finalでない Putコマンドのみレスポンス不要の通信装置)  [0942] (52. A communication device that does not require a response for Put commands that are not Final)
また、本発明に係る他の通信装置は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局にオブジェクトを送信することが可能な OBEX 層処理部持つ通信装置において、前記 OBEX層処理部では、 OBEXの最終でない Putコマンドを生成送信後のみ、対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなく、 次の OBEXの最終でな!、Putコマンドもしくは最終の Putコマンドを生成し送信する ことを特徴としている。  Another communication apparatus according to the present invention is the communication apparatus having an OBEX layer processing unit capable of transmitting an object to the opposite station using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol). In this part, only after generating and sending a non-end OBEX put command, without generating an OBEX response from the opposite station, it is possible to generate and transmit the next OBEX end !, put command or the last put command. It is characterized.
[0943] 上記の方法および構成によれば、前述の PUTコマンドに対する CONTINUE応答 コマンドのみを必要としないオブジェクト交換を実現することが可能となる。  According to the above method and configuration, it is possible to realize object exchange which does not require only the CONTINUE response command to the above-mentioned PUT command.
[0944] (53. OBEX層でレスポンスを送信しない通信方法)  [0944] (53. Communication method not to transmit a response in the OBEX layer)
本発明に係る他の通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXch ange protocol)を用いて、対向局力 オブジェクトを受信する通信方法において、対 向局からの OBEXコマンドを受信後に、常に OBEXレスポンスを送信しないことを特 徴としている。 Another communication method according to the present invention is a communication method for receiving an opposing station power object using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EX ch ange protocol), in which an OBEX response is always received after receiving an OBEX command from the opposite station. Not to send It is a sign.
[0945] (54.片方向受信時のみ、 OBEX層でレスポンスを送信しない通信方法)  [0945] (54. A communication method in which a response is not transmitted in the OBEX layer only during one-way reception)
また、本発明に係る他の通信方法は、さらに、上記の通信方法において、特に OB EXコマンド送信後に対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを必要とする双方向通信と対向 局からの OBEXレスポンスを必要としない片方向通信を切り替える手段を有し、前記 片方向通信を選択している場合のみ、前記 OBEXコマンド受信後、常に対向局に O BEXレスポンスを送信しな!、としてもよ!/、。  Further, in the communication method according to the present invention, in the above communication method, in particular, bidirectional communication that requires an OBEX response from the opposite station after transmitting the OB EX command and an OBEX response from the opposite station are not required. It does not always send an OBEX response to the opposite station after receiving the OBEX command only when the one-way communication is selected.
[0946] (55. OBEX層でレスポンスを送信しない通信装置)  [0946] (55. A communication device that does not send a response in the OBEX layer)
また、本発明に係る他の通信装置は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局からオブジェクトを受信することが可能な OBE X層処理部持つ通信装置において、前記 OBEX層処理部では、対向局力 の OBE Xコマンドを受信後に、常に OBEXレスポンスを送信しないことを特徴としている。  Another communication apparatus according to the present invention is the communication apparatus having an OBE X layer processing unit capable of receiving an object from the opposite station using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol). The processing unit is characterized in that it does not always send an OBEX response after receiving the opposing station's OBE X command.
[0947] (56.片方向受信時のみ、 OBEX層でレスポンスを送信しない通信装置)  [0947] (56. A communication device that does not transmit a response in the OBEX layer only when receiving in one direction)
また、本発明に係る他の通信装置は、さらに、上記の通信装置において、特に OB EXコマンド送信後に対向局からの OBEXレスポンスを必要とする双方向通信と対向 局からの OBEXレスポンスを必要としない片方向通信を切り替える通信方法切り替え 部を有し、前記、通信方法切り替え部が片方向通信を選択している場合のみ、前記 OBEXコマンド受信後、常に対向局に OBEXレスポンスを送信しないとしてもよい。  Further, the other communication apparatus according to the present invention does not require, in the above-mentioned communication apparatus, two-way communication requiring an OBEX response from the opposite station, and an OBEX response from the opposite station, particularly after the transmission of the OB EX command. The communication method switching unit may be configured to switch one-way communication, and the OBEX response may not always be transmitted to the opposite station after receiving the OBEX command only when the communication method switching unit selects one-way communication.
[0948] 上記の方法および構成によれば、例えば OBEXを用いた片方向通信にぉ 、て、ク ライアント機器側力 の要求コマンドに対するサーバ機器側の応答コマンドをクライア ント機器側が送信する必要がない場合に、不必要な応答コマンドの生成および送信 を行わないといった制御を行うことが可能となる。また、双方向通信時は、クライアント 機器側へ応答コマンドを送信することにより、クライアント機器側での通信の確認を可 能とし、片方向通信時は、クライアント機器への不必要な応答コマンドの生成および 送信を行わないことが可能となり、双方向通信と片方向通信を 1つの OBEXプロトコ ルで実現することが可能となる。  [0948] According to the above method and configuration, for example, in one-way communication using OBEX, the client device side does not need to transmit the server device side response command to the client device side force request command. In such a case, it is possible to control not to generate and send unnecessary response commands. In addition, during bidirectional communication, a response command can be sent to the client device to enable confirmation of communication on the client device side. During unidirectional communication, generation of unnecessary response commands to the client device is enabled. And it becomes possible not to transmit, and it becomes possible to realize two-way communication and one-way communication with one OBEX protocol.
[0949] (57. Finalでない Putコマンドのみレスポンスしない通信方法)  [0949] (57. A communication method that does not respond only to Put commands that are not Final)
また、本発明に係る他の通信方法は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局からオブジェクトを受信する通信方法におい て、 OBEXの最終でない Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXレスポンスの送信を行わず 、最終の Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXのレスポンスの送信を行うことを特徴として いる。 Another communication method according to the present invention is an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject). In the communication method that receives an object from the opposite station using Exchange protocol), when receiving a Put command that is not the last of OBEX, do not send an OBEX response, and when receiving a final Put command, send an OBEX response. It is characterized by
[0950] (58. Finalでない Putコマンドのみレスポンスしない通信装置)  [0950] (58. A communication device that does not respond only to a Put command that is not Final)
また、本発明に係る他の通信装置は、オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol)を用いて、対向局からオブジェクトを受信することが可能な OBE X層処理部持つ通信装置において、前記 OBEX層処理部では、 OBEXの最終でな い Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXレスポンスの送信を行なわず、最終の Putコマン ド受信時には、 OBEXのレスポンスを生成し送信することを特徴として 、る。  Another communication apparatus according to the present invention is the communication apparatus having an OBE X layer processing unit capable of receiving an object from the opposite station using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject Exchange protocol). The processing unit is characterized in that the OBEX response is not transmitted when receiving the OBEX non-final Put command, and the OBEX response is generated and transmitted when the final Put command is received.
[0951] 上記の方法および構成によれば、クライアント機器側からの最終でない PUTコマン ドに対する CONTINUE応答コマンドのみを生成し、送信しな!、と!/、つた制御を行う ことが可能となり、通信帯域の効率ィ匕を図ることが可能となる。  [0951] According to the above method and configuration, it is possible to generate only the CONTINUE response command to the non-final PUT command from the client device side and perform control such as! /! It is possible to improve the efficiency of the bandwidth.
[0952] また、本発明は以下のように構成してもよ!/、。  Also, the present invention may be configured as follows! /.
[0953] 本発明に係る通信システムは、通信データを複数の非制限フレームに分割して、一 次局と二次局との間にてフレーム単位で通信データを通信する通信システムにおい て、該一次局では、前記非制限フレームにフレームの通し番号、および送信権を委 譲するか否かを示すフラグを付与してデータ送信を行い、該二次局では、前記一次 局から受信したフレームの送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグが送信権の委譲を 意味しているとき、前記一次局に対して、それまで受信したフレーム中にエラーゃフ レーム抜けがあつたかどうかの通信結果の通知を行うことを特徴とする。  [0953] A communication system according to the present invention is a communication system for dividing communication data into a plurality of non-restricted frames and communicating communication data between the primary station and the secondary station in frame units. The primary station transmits the data by adding the serial number of the frame and a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the non-restricted frame, and the secondary station transmits the frame received from the primary station. When the flag indicating whether to transfer the right means transfer of the transmission right, notification to the primary station of the communication result as to whether an error or missing frame has occurred in the frame received so far It is characterized by doing.
[0954] 前記非制限フレームとしては、赤外線を用いた、例えば IrDA通信方式に準拠した 通信方式にて使用されている、 UI (Unnumbered Information)フレームが挙げられる。 UIフレームは、連続送信できる最大ターンアラウンド時間の間であれば、送信フレー ム数に制限されずに、連続して送信することできるものである。  [0954] Examples of the unrestricted frame include a UI (Unnumbered Information) frame used in a communication method based on IrDA communication method, for example, using infrared light. The UI frame can be continuously transmitted without being limited to the number of transmission frames as long as it is within the maximum turnaround time that can be continuously transmitted.
[0955] 上記の構成によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限を持たない非制限フレームを用いた 通信においても、エラーやフレーム抜けが生じたフレームの再送を行うことが可能と なる。それゆえ、通信効率の向上を図ることができる。 [0956] また、前記二次局は、エラーやフレーム抜けを検知した場合、一次局に通信結果を 通知する際、エラーまたはフレーム抜けがあったフレームの通し番号も合わせて通知 することを特徴とする。 [0955] According to the above configuration, it is possible to retransmit a frame in which an error or a frame drop has occurred even in communication using a non-limit frame having no limitation on the window size. Therefore, communication efficiency can be improved. In addition, when the secondary station detects an error or a frame drop, when notifying the primary station of the communication result, it also notifies the serial number of the frame in which the error or the frame drop has occurred. .
[0957] 上記の構成によれば、一次局ではすべてのフレームを再送する必要がないため、 通信におけるオーバーヘッドの低減、一次局の消費電力を低減するという効果を奏 する。  [0957] According to the above configuration, the primary station does not have to retransmit all the frames, so that the overhead of communication can be reduced and the power consumption of the primary station can be reduced.
[0958] また、前記一次局は、前記二次局からエラーまたはフレーム抜けがあった旨の通知 を受けると、前記二次局力 通知されたエラーまたはフレーム抜けがあったフレーム 以降のフレームを再度送信することを特徴とする。  [0958] Also, when the primary station receives a notification from the secondary station that there is an error or a missing frame, the secondary station may retransmit the frames from the frame for which the error or missing frame was notified. It is characterized by transmitting.
[0959] 上記の構成によれば、一次局ではすべてのフレームを再送する必要がないため、 通信におけるオーバーヘッドの低減、一次局の消費電力を低減するという効果を奏 する。 According to the above configuration, since there is no need to retransmit all the frames in the primary station, the overhead of communication can be reduced, and the power consumption of the primary station can be reduced.
[0960] また、前記一次局は、エラーまたはフレーム抜けがあったフレームの通し番号以降 のフレームを再度送信することを一回だけ行うことを特徴とする。  [0960] Further, the primary station is characterized in that it retransmits the frame subsequent to the serial number of the frame in which there is an error or a missing frame only once.
[0961] 上記の構成によれば、一次局ではフレームの再送を 1回だけ行うため、該送信に伴 う消費電力を低減することができるという効果を奏する。  According to the above configuration, since the primary station retransmits the frame only once, the power consumption accompanying the transmission can be reduced.
[0962] また、前記二次局では、エラーまたはフレーム抜けを検知した際、エラーまたはフレ ーム抜けを検知したフレーム以降のフレームの受信処理を停止することを特徴とする  In addition, when the secondary station detects an error or a frame drop, it is characterized by stopping reception processing of frames subsequent to the frame in which the error or frame drop is detected.
[0963] 上記の構成によれば、二次局ではエラーまたはフレーム抜けを検出した以降のフレ ームを受信しないことにより、無駄なフレームの受信を行わなくてよぐ消費電力の低 減を図ることができる。 According to the above configuration, the secondary station does not receive a frame after detecting an error or a frame drop, thereby reducing power consumption without receiving unnecessary frames. be able to.
[0964] また、前記二次局では、前記一次局から再度送信されたフレームの中から必要な エラーまたはフレーム抜けがあったフレームのみを受信することを特徴とする。  Further, the secondary station is characterized in that only the frame having a necessary error or missing frame is received from the frames retransmitted from the primary station.
[0965] 上記の構成によれば、二次局では、無駄なフレームの受信を行わなくてよぐ消費 電力の低減を図ることができる。  [0965] According to the above configuration, the secondary station can reduce power consumption without receiving unnecessary frames.
[0966] また、接続確立時に、前記一次局から送信される接続要求フレームと前記二次局 から送信される接続応答フレームにそれぞれ、各局の一度に送受信可能なフレーム 数を意味するフィールドを付与してフレーム交換を行 、、各局にぉ 、て受信した相手 局の一度に受信可能なフレーム数を参照して最適なフレーム数を算出し、該フレー ム数に応じて送信権の委譲を行うことを特徴とする。 Also, at the time of connection establishment, a frame that can be transmitted and received by each station at one time in each of the connection request frame transmitted from the primary station and the connection response frame transmitted from the secondary station The frame exchange is performed by adding a field that means the number, and the optimum number of frames is calculated with reference to the number of frames that can be received at one time by each station, and the number of frames is calculated according to the number of frames. Transfer of the transmission right.
[0967] 上記の構成によれば、一次局と二次局両局間でサポートされているフレーム数毎 に必ず送信権の委譲が行われるので、各局に搭載されたメモリ容量に応じたフレー ム交換を行うことができる。  According to the above configuration, since the transfer right is always transferred for each number of frames supported between the primary station and the secondary station, the frame according to the memory capacity mounted in each station Exchange can be done.
[0968] また、本発明に係る通信システムは、通信データを複数の非制限フレームに分割し たうえで、一次局と二次局との間でフレーム単位にて通信データを通信する通信シス テムにおいて、前記一次局と二次局とは、階層構造の通信プロトコルを用いて通信を 行い、該一次局は、前記階層構造を構成する一つの特定通信プロトコル層において 、前記非制限フレームにフレームの通し番号、および、送信権を委譲するか否かを示 すフラグを付与し、該二次局は、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、前記一次局か ら受信したフレームの送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグが送信権の委譲を意味 しているとき、前記一次局に対して、それまで受信したフレーム中にエラーやフレーム 抜けがあった力どうかの通信結果の通知を行うことを特徴とする。  [0968] The communication system according to the present invention is a communication system in which communication data is divided into a plurality of non-restricted frames, and then communication data is communicated in units of frames between the primary station and the secondary station. In the above, the primary station and the secondary station communicate using a hierarchical communication protocol, and the primary station is configured to transmit the unrestricted frame in one specific communication protocol layer constituting the hierarchical structure. A serial number and a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right are added, and the secondary station determines whether to transfer the transmission right of the frame received from the primary station in the specific communication protocol layer. Is a flag indicating that the transmission right is to be transferred, the primary station is notified of the result of communication indicating whether or not there is an error or missing frame in the frames received so far. To.
[0969] 上記の構成によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限を持たない非制限フレームを用いた 通信においても、再送を行うことが可能となるとともに、上記特定通信プロトコル層以 外の層につ 、て既存のもの力 変更する必要がな!、。  [0969] According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform retransmission even in communication using a non-restrictive frame having no restriction on the window size, and it is also possible to carry out layers other than the above-mentioned specific communication protocol layer. Need to change the existing force!
[0970] さらに、前記二次局は、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、エラーやフレーム抜 けを検知した場合、一次局に通信結果を通知する際、エラーまたはデータ抜けがあ つたフレームの通し番号も合わせて通知することを特徴とする。  [0970] Furthermore, when the secondary station detects an error or frame omission in the specific communication protocol layer, when notifying the primary station of the communication result, the serial number of the frame in which the error or data omission occurred is also set. It is characterized by notifying.
[0971] 上記の構成によれば、通信におけるオーバーヘッドの低減、一次局の消費電力を 低減するとともに、上記特定通信プロトコル層以外の層について既存のもの力 変更 する必要がない。  According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to reduce communication overhead and power consumption of the primary station, and it is not necessary to change existing power of layers other than the specific communication protocol layer.
[0972] さらに、前記一次局は、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、前記二次局からエラ 一またはフレーム抜けがあった旨の通知を受けると、前記二次局から通知されたエラ 一またはフレーム抜けがあったフレーム以降のフレームを再度送信することを特徴と する。 [0973] 上記の構成によれば、通信におけるオーバーヘッドの低減、一次局の消費電力を 低減するとともに、上記特定通信プロトコル層以外の層について既存のもの力 変更 する必要がない。 [0972] Furthermore, when the primary station is notified in the specific communication protocol layer that there is an error or a missing frame from the secondary station, the primary station may receive the error or the missing frame from the secondary station. It is characterized by retransmitting the frame after the frame where there was an error. According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to reduce communication overhead and power consumption of the primary station, and it is not necessary to change existing power of layers other than the specific communication protocol layer.
[0974] さらに、前記一次局は、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、前記二次局からエラ 一またはフレーム抜けがあった旨の通知を受けた際、フレームの再送を一回だけ行う ことを特徴とする。  [0974] Furthermore, the primary station is characterized by performing retransmission of the frame only once when receiving notification that there is an error or missing frame from the secondary station in the specific communication protocol layer. Do.
[0975] 上記の構成によれば、送信に伴う消費電力を低減することができるとともに、上記特 定通信プロトコル層以外の層につ 、て既存のもの力 変更する必要がな 、。  According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the power consumption associated with transmission, and it is necessary to change the existing power of the layers other than the specific communication protocol layer.
[0976] さらに、前記二次局においては、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、エラーまた はフレーム抜けを検知した際、エラーまたはフレーム抜けを検知したフレーム以降の フレームの受信処理を停止することを特徴とする。  Furthermore, in the secondary station, when an error or a frame drop is detected in the specific communication protocol layer, reception processing of frames subsequent to a frame in which the error or the frame drop is detected is stopped. Do.
[0977] 上記の構成によれば、二次局が無駄なフレームの受信を行わなくてよぐ消費電力 の低減を図ることができるとともに、上記特定通信プロトコル層以外の層について既 存のものから変更する必要がな 、。  According to the above configuration, the secondary station can reduce power consumption without receiving unnecessary frames, and layers other than the above-mentioned specific communication protocol layer can be used I need to change it.
[0978] さらに、前記二次局では、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、前記一次局から再 度送信されたフレームの中から必要なエラーまたはフレーム抜けがあったフレームの みを受信することを特徴とする。  [0978] Furthermore, the secondary station is characterized in that, in the specific communication protocol layer, only the frame having a necessary error or missing frame is received from the frames retransmitted from the primary station. Do.
[0979] 上記の構成によれば、二次局が無駄なフレームの受信を行わなくてよぐ消費電力 の低減を図ることができるとともに、上記特定通信プロトコル層以外の層について既 存のものから変更する必要がな 、。  [0979] According to the above configuration, the secondary station can reduce power consumption without receiving unnecessary frames, and layers other than the above specific communication protocol layer can be used. I need to change it.
[0980] さらに、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、接続確立時に、前記一次局から送信 される接続要求フレームと前記二次局カゝら送信される接続応答フレームにそれぞれ 、各局の一度に送受信可能なフレーム数を意味するフィールドを付与してフレーム交 換を行い、各局において受信した相手局の一度に受信可能なフレーム数を参照して 最適なフレーム数を算出し、該フレーム数に応じて送信権の委譲を行うことを特徴と する。  [0980] Furthermore, in the specific communication protocol layer, when connection is established, the connection request frame transmitted from the primary station and the connection response frame transmitted by the secondary station can be transmitted and received at one time of each station. A field meaning the number of frames is added and frame exchange is performed, and the optimum number of frames is calculated with reference to the number of frames that can be received at one time of the other station received by each station, and the transmission right is determined according to the number of frames. It is characterized by the delegation of
[0981] 上記の構成によれば、各局に搭載されたメモリ容量に応じたフレーム交換を行うこと ができるとともに、上記特定通信プロトコル層以外の層について既存のものから変更 する必要がない。 According to the above configuration, frame exchange can be performed according to the memory capacity mounted in each station, and layers other than the specific communication protocol layer can be changed from existing ones. There is no need to
[0982] さらに、前記一次局では、前記特定通信プロトコル層において、前記非制限フレー ムに対して、上位層が送信フレームに対する応答フレームを要求する力否かを示す フラグを付与してフレームの送信を行い、前記二次局では、前記特定通信プロトコル 層において、前記一次局から受信したフレームの前記一次局の上位層が送信フレー ムに対する応答フレームを要求して 、る力否かを示すフラグが応答フレームを要求し ていることを意味している場合、上位層に対してその旨の通知を行い、上位層が応答 フレームの準備を完了した時点で、上位層力 渡された応答フレームに対して、それ まで受信したフレーム中にエラーやフレーム抜けがあつたかどうかの通信結果を意味 する情報を付与して応答フレーム生成し、送信することを特徴とする。  Furthermore, at the primary station, in the specific communication protocol layer, the non-restrictive frame is added with a flag indicating whether the upper layer requests the response frame for the transmission frame, and the frame is transmitted. In the secondary station, in the specific communication protocol layer, a flag indicating whether the upper layer of the primary station of the frame received from the primary station requests a response frame to the transmission frame is not effective. If it means that a response frame is requested, the upper layer is notified to that effect, and when the upper layer completes the preparation of the response frame, the upper layer receives a response frame for the passed response frame. It is important to add information that means the result of communication whether or not an error or missing frame occurred in the frame received until that time, and generate a response frame and transmit it. To.
[0983] 上記の構成によれば、再送管理を行う上記特定通信プロトコル層の上位層に位置 する通信プロトコル層での要求フレームおよび応答フレームのやり取りが可能となる。  According to the above configuration, it is possible to exchange request frames and response frames in the communication protocol layer positioned in the upper layer of the specific communication protocol layer that performs retransmission management.
[0984] さらに、前記一次局では、前記特定通信プロトコル層にお 、て、前記非制限フレー ムに対して、上位層が送信フレームに対する応答フレームを要求する力否かを示す フラグを付与してフレームの送信を行い、前記二次局では、前記特定通信プロトコル 層において、前記一次局から受信したフレームの前記一次局の上位層が送信フレー ムに対する応答フレームを要求して 、る力否かを示すフラグが応答フレームを要求し ていることを意味している場合、上位層に対してその旨の通知を行い、先にそれまで 受信したフレーム中にエラーやフレーム抜けがあつたかどうかの通信結果を意味する 応答フレームを送信し、上位層が応答フレームを準備が完了した時点で、上位層か らの応答フレームを再度送信することを特徴とする。  Furthermore, in the primary station, a flag indicating whether the upper layer requests the response frame to the transmission frame is added to the specific communication protocol layer to the non-restricted frame. The secondary station transmits a frame, and in the specific communication protocol layer, whether the upper layer of the primary station of the frame received from the primary station requests a response frame for the transmission frame, If the indicated flag indicates that a response frame is required, the upper layer is notified to that effect, and the result of the communication is whether an error or a missing frame has occurred in the previously received frame. A response frame is sent, and when the upper layer is ready for the response frame, the response frame from the upper layer is sent again.
[0985] 上記の構成によれば、一次局の上記特定通信プロトコル層では、二次局の上記特 定通信プロトコル層の上位層において応答フレームが準備されて力 応答フレーム が返信されてくる前の間に、上記特定通信プロトコル層レベルの応答フレーム(つまり 上位層の応答フレームが包含されていない)を受信することができる。これにより、一 次局の上記特定通信プロトコル層は、上位層からの応答フレームが返信される前に、 二次局が正常にフレームを受信できた力否かを知ることができるので、あら力じめ次 のデータ転送の準備などを行っておくことができる。 [0986] また、本発明に係る送信装置は、通信データを複数の非制限フレームに分割したう えで、フレーム単位にて通信データを受信局に送信する送信装置において、前記非 制限フレームにフレームの通し番号を付与する通し番号付加手段と、前記非制限フ レームに送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグを付与する送信権委譲フラグ付与手 段とを備えることを特徴とする。 According to the above configuration, in the specific communication protocol layer of the primary station, the response frame is prepared in the upper layer of the specific communication protocol layer of the secondary station and the force response frame is not returned. Meanwhile, it is possible to receive the above-mentioned specific communication protocol layer level response frame (that is, the upper layer response frame is not included). Thus, the specific communication protocol layer of the primary station can know whether or not the secondary station has successfully received the frame before the response frame from the upper layer is sent back. Preparations for the next data transfer can be made in advance. [0986] The transmitting device according to the present invention is a transmitting device for transmitting communication data to the receiving station in frame units after dividing communication data into a plurality of non-restricting frames. A serial number adding means for giving a serial number, and a transmission right transfer flag giving means for giving a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the non-restricted frame.
[0987] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、通信データを複数の非制限フレームに分割したう えで、フレーム単位にて通信データを受信局に送信する送信装置の通信方法であつ て、前記非制限フレームにフレームの通し番号を付与する通し番号付加ステップと、 前記非制限フレームに送信権を委譲するか否かを示すフラグを付与する送信権委 譲フラグ付与ステップとを含むことを特徴とする。  [0987] Further, a communication method according to the present invention is a communication method of a transmitting apparatus for transmitting communication data to a receiving station in frame units after communication data is divided into a plurality of unrestricted frames. It is characterized by including a serial numbering step of giving a serial number of a frame to a non-restricted frame, and a transmission right assignment flag giving step of giving a flag indicating whether or not to transfer the transmission right to the non-restricted frame.
[0988] 上記の構成によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限を持たない非制限フレームを用いた 通信にぉ 、ても、受信装置力 エラーやフレーム抜けがあった力否かを示すフレー ムを受信することができる。これにより、エラーやフレーム抜けがあった非制限フレー ムの再送を行うことが可能となる。  [0988] According to the above configuration, even in the communication using the non-restrictive frame without the limitation of the window size, the frame indicating whether the power of the receiving apparatus has been errored or the frame has been dropped is received. be able to. This makes it possible to retransmit unrestricted frames that have errors or dropped frames.
[0989] また、本発明に係る受信装置は、上記送信装置から通信データを受信する受信装 置にお 1ヽて、前記送信装置から受信したフレームの送信権を委譲するか否かを示す フラグが送信権の委譲を意味しているとき、それまで受信したフレーム中にエラーや フレーム抜けがあつたかどうかのを示すレスポンスフレームを生成するレスポンスフレ ーム生成手段と、レスポンスフレーム生成手段が生成したレスポンスフレームを前記 送信装置に送信する送信手段とを備えることを特徴とする。  [0989] Further, the receiving device according to the present invention is a flag indicating whether to transfer the transmission right of the frame received from the transmitting device to the receiving device that receives communication data from the transmitting device. Response frame generation means for generating a response frame indicating whether an error or missing frame has occurred in the frames received so far, and the response frame generation means And sending means for sending a response frame to the sending device.
[0990] また、本発明に係る通信方法は、上記送信装置から通信データを受信する受信装 置の通信方法であって、前記送信装置から受信したフレームの送信権を委譲するか 否かを示すフラグが送信権の委譲を意味しているとき、それまで受信したフレーム中 にエラーやフレーム抜けがあつたかどうかのを示すレスポンスフレームを生成するレス ポンスフレーム生成ステップと、レスポンスフレーム生成手段が生成したレスポンスフ レームを前記送信装置に送信する送信ステップとを含むことを特徴とする。  [0990] Further, a communication method according to the present invention is a communication method of a receiving device that receives communication data from the transmitting device, and indicates whether or not to transfer the transmission right of the frame received from the transmitting device. When the flag indicates the transfer of transmission right, the response frame generation step of generating a response frame indicating whether an error or missing frame has occurred in the frame received so far, and the response frame generation means Transmitting a response frame to the transmitting device.
[0991] 上記の構成によれば、ウィンドウサイズの制限を持たない非制限フレームを受信し た場合でも、エラーやフレーム抜けがあった力否かを示すフレームを送信することが できる。これにより、エラーのあった非制限フレームの再送を行うことが可能となる。 [0991] According to the above configuration, even when a non-restrictive frame without a restriction on the window size is received, it is possible to transmit a frame indicating whether or not there is an error or a missing frame. it can. This makes it possible to retransmit an error-free non-restricted frame.
[0992] また、本発明に係る通信システムが備える一次局を動作させる通信プログラムは、 コンピュータを上記一次局で行われるデータ通信処理を実行するコンピュータ 'プロ グラムである。  [0992] Further, a communication program for operating the primary station provided in the communication system according to the present invention is a computer program for executing a data communication process performed by the computer at the primary station.
[0993] 上記の構成によれば、コンピュータで上記一次局で行われるデータ通信処理を実 行することによって、上記通信システムが備える一次局を動作させることができる。  According to the above configuration, the computer can operate the primary station provided in the communication system by executing the data communication process performed by the primary station.
[0994] また、本発明に係る通信システムが備える二次局を動作させる通信プログラムは、 コンピュータを上記二次局で行われるデータ通信処理を実行するコンピュータ 'プロ グラムである。  Further, a communication program for operating the secondary station provided in the communication system according to the present invention is a computer program for executing a data communication process performed by the computer at the secondary station.
[0995] 上記の構成によれば、コンピュータで上記二次局で行われるデータ通信処理を実 行することによって、上記通信システムが備える二次局を動作させることができる。  According to the above configuration, the secondary station included in the communication system can be operated by executing the data communication process performed by the secondary station using a computer.
[0996] また、本発明に係る記録媒体は、上記通信システムが備える一次局を動作させる通 信プログラム、あるいは、上記通信システムが備える二次局を動作させる通信プログ ラムを記録したコンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体である。 [0996] Further, a recording medium according to the present invention may be a computer readable recording of a communication program for operating a primary station included in the communication system or a communication program for operating a secondary station included in the communication system. It is a recording medium.
[0997] 上記の構成によれば、上記記録媒体力 読み出された通信プログラムによって、上 記一次局で行われるデータ通信処理あるいは二次局で行われるデータ通信処理を コンピュータ上に実現することができる。 According to the above configuration, the data communication processing performed by the primary station or the data communication processing performed by the secondary station can be realized on the computer by the communication program read out from the recording medium power. it can.
[0998] 本発明は上述した各実施の形態に限定されるものではなぐ請求項に示した範囲 で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施の形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を 適宜組み合わせて得られる実施の形態についても本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる The present invention can be variously modified within the scope of the claims which are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the technical means disclosed in the different embodiments may be combined as appropriate. The resulting embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention.
[0999] 発明の詳細な説明の項においてなされた具体的な実施態様または実施例は、あく までも、本発明の技術内容を明らかにするものであって、そのような具体例にのみ限 定して狭義に解釈されるべきものではなぐ本発明の精神と次に記載する特許請求 事項との範囲内で、いろいろと変更して実施することができるものである。 [0999] The specific embodiments or examples made in the section of the detailed description of the invention reveal the technical contents of the present invention, and the invention is limited to such specific examples. Thus, the present invention can be variously modified and implemented within the spirit of the present invention and the scope of claims described below, which should not be construed in a narrow sense.
産業上の利用の可能性  Industrial Applicability
[1000] 本発明の通信システム、送信装置、受信装置、通信方法、通信プログラムおよび記 録媒体では、データ転送における信頼性が高ぐデータ転送に要する時間を短縮ィ匕 できるので、本発明に係る通信システムの送信機能は、例えば、携帯電話機、 PDA 、パーソナルコンピュータなどに適用することができる一方、本発明に係る通信システ ムの受信機能は、例えば、携帯電話機、テレビ、 AV機器、プリンタ、 DVDレコーダ、 HDDレコーダなどの記録装置、パーソナルコンピュータなどに適用することができる 。また、本発明の通信システムは、 IrDAに準拠した赤外線通信に適用することがで きる。 [1000] The communication system, transmitting apparatus, receiving apparatus, communication method, communication program and recording medium of the present invention shorten the time required for data transfer with high reliability in data transfer. Therefore, the transmission function of the communication system according to the present invention can be applied to, for example, mobile phones, PDAs, personal computers, etc., while the reception function of the communication system according to the present invention can be The present invention can be applied to recording apparatuses such as AV equipment, printers, DVD recorders, HDD recorders, personal computers, and the like. Further, the communication system of the present invention can be applied to infrared communication conforming to IrDA.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲せ ずに、データを一括送信する通信機器であって、  [1] A communication device for collectively transmitting data without delegating the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited.
一括送信する一括送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成する送信フレーム生 成手段と、  Transmission frame generation means for dividing transmission data to be transmitted collectively and generating transmission frames;
上記送信フレームに通し番号を付与する通し番号生成手段と、  Serial number generation means for giving a serial number to the transmission frame;
上記一括送信データの最終の送信フレームに、一括送信データの最終の送信フレ ームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定する一括送信最終フラグ生成手段 と、  Batch transmission final flag generation means for setting a batch transmission final flag indicating the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data in the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data;
上記送信フレームを送信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴とする通信機器。  A communication unit for transmitting the transmission frame.
[2] 受信した受信フレーム力もエラー無しフラグおよび通し番号を抽出する受信フレー ム解析手段と、  [2] Received frame analysis means for extracting the received frame strength and error-free flag and serial number;
上記エラー無しフラグを解析してエラーの有無を判定するエラー無しフラグ解析手 段と、  Error-free flag analysis means for analyzing the above-mentioned error-free flag to determine the presence or absence of an error;
上記エラー無しフラグがエラー有りを示して 、る場合、上記通し番号に対応する送 信フレームを再送する制御手段と、を備えることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の通信 機器。  The communication device according to claim 1, further comprising: control means for retransmitting a transmission frame corresponding to the serial number when the error free flag indicates that there is an error.
[3] 1つの送信データを複数の上記一括送信データに分割して送信する際、当該送信 データの最終の送信フレームに、送信データの最終の送信フレームであることを示 すデータ最終フラグを設定するデータ最終フラグ生成手段を備えることを特徴とする 請求項 2に記載の通信機器。  [3] When one transmission data is divided into a plurality of batch transmission data and transmitted, a data final flag indicating that it is the last transmission frame of transmission data is set in the final transmission frame of the transmission data. The communication device according to claim 2, further comprising: data final flag generation means.
[4] 上記通信方式力 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol)の UI (Unnumbered Infor mation)フレームを用いた通信であることを特徴とする請求項 1から 3のいずれか 1項 に記載の通信機器。  [4] The communication device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the communication method is communication using an unnumbered information (UI) frame of IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol).
[5] 上記送信フレームには、 OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)の最終の PUTコマン ドまたは最終でな 、PUTコマンドの少なくとも一部が含まれて 、ることを特徴とする請 求項 1から 4のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器。  [5] The above-mentioned transmission frame includes at least a part of a PUT command or a final PUT command or a final PUT command of Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX), wherein claims 1 to 4 are characterized. A communication device according to any one of the items.
[6] 一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲され ずに、データを一括受信する通信機器であって、 [6] Transmission right is delegated according to a communication method in which there is no limit on the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time. Communication equipment that collectively receives data without
上記受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号のエラーがないかどう かを判別する通し番号解析手段と、  Serial number analysis means for analyzing the serial number included in the received frame to determine whether there is an error in the serial number;
上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレームが送信機 によって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データの最終の 送信フレームであることを示しているとき、上記通し番号解析手段によって、それまで に受信した受信フレームにエラーが検出された場合、エラー有りを示すように設定し たエラー無しフラグおよびエラー発生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成する 送信フレーム生成手段と、  When the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame indicates that the reception frame is the final transmission frame of batch transmission data divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and collectively transmitted, the serial number Transmission frame generation means for generating a transmission frame including an error free flag set to indicate that there is an error and a serial number at the time of error occurrence, when an analysis means detects an error in a received frame received so far;
上記送信フレームを送信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴とする通信機器。  A communication unit for transmitting the transmission frame.
[7] 一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲され ずに、データを一括受信する通信機器であって、 [7] A communication device that collectively receives data without delegating the transmission right according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited.
受信した受信フレームにエラーがないかどうかを判別するためのエラー検出手段と 上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレームが送信機 によって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データの最終の 送信フレームであることを示しているとき、上記エラー検出手段によって、それまでに 受信した受信フレームにエラーが検出されている力否かに応じて、エラーの有無を示 すように設定したエラー無しフラグを含む送信フレームを生成する送信フレーム生成 手段と、  An error detection unit for determining whether or not there is an error in the received frame received and the batch transmission final flag included in the received frame are divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and the batch transmission is performed. When the last transmission frame of batch transmission data is indicated, the above error detection means indicates the presence or absence of an error depending on whether the error has been detected in the reception frame received so far. Transmission frame generation means for generating a transmission frame including the error-free flag set as
上記送信フレームを送信する送信手段と、を備えることを特徴とする通信機器。  A communication unit for transmitting the transmission frame.
[8] 上記通信方式力 IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol)の UI (Unnumbered Infor mation)フレームを用いた通信であることを特徴とする請求項 6または 7に記載の通信 機器。 [8] The communication device according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the communication method is communication using an unnumbered information (UI) frame of IrLAP (Infrared Link Access Protocol).
[9] 上記送信フレームには、 OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol)の SUCCESSレスポ ンスの一部もしくは全てが含まれていることを特徴とする請求項 6から 8のいずれか 1 項に記載の通信機器。  [9] The communication device according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the transmission frame includes part or all of SUCCESS responses of OBEX (Object Exchange Protocol).
[10] 一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲せ ずに、データを一括送信する通信方法であって、 [10] Transfer the transmission right according to a communication method that does not limit the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time. Communication method for batch transmission of data without
一括送信する一括送信データを分割して送信フレームを生成し、  Generate batch transmission frame by dividing batch transmission data to be sent collectively
上記送信フレームに通し番号を付与し、  Assign a serial number to the above transmission frame,
上記一括送信データの最終の送信フレームには、一括送信データの最終の送信 フレームであることを示す一括送信最終フラグを設定して、  In the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data, set the batch transmission final flag indicating that it is the final transmission frame of the batch transmission data, and
上記送信フレームを送信することを特徴とする通信方法。  A communication method characterized by transmitting the transmission frame.
[11] 一度に送信可能なフレーム数に制限がない通信方式に従って、送信権を委譲され ずに、データを一括受信する通信方法であって、  [11] A communication method for collectively receiving data according to a communication method in which the number of frames that can be transmitted at one time is not limited, without transferring the transmission right.
上記受信フレームに含まれる通し番号を解析して、通し番号のエラーがないかどう かを判別し、  The serial number included in the received frame is analyzed to determine whether there is an error in the serial number,
上記受信フレームに含まれる一括送信最終フラグが、当該受信フレームが送信機 によって複数の送信フレームに分割されて一括送信された一括送信データの最終の 送信フレームであることを示しているとき、それまでに受信した受信フレームにエラー が検出された場合、エラー有りを示すように設定したエラー無しフラグおよびエラー発 生時の通し番号を含む送信フレームを生成し、  When the batch transmission final flag included in the reception frame indicates that the reception frame is the final transmission frame of batch transmission data divided into a plurality of transmission frames by the transmitter and collectively transmitted, If an error is detected in the received frame received, the transmission frame including the no error flag set to indicate that there is an error and the serial number at the time the error occurred is generated,
上記送信フレームを送信することを特徴とする通信方法。  A communication method characterized by transmitting the transmission frame.
[12] 請求項 1に記載の通信機器と、  [12] The communication device according to claim 1;
請求項 6に記載の通信機器と、を含むことを特徴とする通信システム。  A communication system comprising: the communication device according to claim 6.
[13] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、ォブジ ェクトを送信する通信機器であって、 [13] A communication device for transmitting an object using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol),
OBEXコマンドを送信後、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンドを送信する OBEX層処理部を備えることを特徴とする通信機器。  A communication apparatus comprising: an OBEX layer processing unit that transmits an OBEX command following transmission of an OBEX command and then receiving an OBEX response from a receiver.
[14] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、ォブジ ェクトを送信する通信方法であって、 [14] A communication method for transmitting an object using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol),
OBEXコマンドを送信後、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを受信することなぐ次の OBEXコマンドを送信することを特徴とする通信方法。  A communication method comprising: transmitting an OBEX command; and transmitting the next OBEX command without receiving an OBEX response from a receiver.
[15] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、ォブジ ェクトを送信する通信機器であって、 OBEXの最終でな!ヽ Putコマンドを送信後のみ、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを 受信することなぐ次の OBEXの最終でない Putコマンドもしくは最終の Putコマンド を送信する OBEX層処理部を備えることを特徴とする通信機器。 [15] A communication device for transmitting objects using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), At the end of OBEX! ヽ Only after sending a Put command, it is characterized by including an OBEX layer processing unit that transmits the last Put command or the last Put command that is not the next OBEX response to receive the OBEX response from the receiver. Communication equipment to be.
[16] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、ォブジ ェクトを送信する通信方法であって、 [16] A communication method for transmitting an object using the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol),
OBEXの最終でな!ヽ Putコマンドを送信後のみ、受信機からの OBEXレスポンスを 受信することなぐ次の OBEXの最終でない Putコマンドもしくは最終の Putコマンド を送信することを特徴とする通信方法。  A communication method characterized by transmitting a non-final Put command or a final Put command following reception of an OBEX response from a receiver only after transmitting a Put command.
[17] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、送信 機力もオブジェ外を受信する通信機器であって、 [17] A communication device that uses the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol), and the transmitter also receives an object outside the object,
OBEXコマンドを受信後に、 OBEXレスポンスを常に送信しない OBEX層処理部を 備えることを特徴とする通信機器。  A communication device comprising: an OBEX layer processing unit that does not always transmit an OBEX response after receiving an OBEX command.
[18] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、送信 機力 オブジェクトを受信する通信方法であって、 [18] A communication method for receiving a transmitter device using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol),
OBEXコマンドを受信後に、 OBEXレスポンスを常に送信しないことを特徴とする通 信方法。  A communication method characterized in that an OBEX response is not always transmitted after an OBEX command is received.
[19] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、送信 機力もオブジェ外を受信する通信機器であって、  [19] A communication device that uses the object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol) to receive the outside of an object as a transmitter.
OBEXの最終でな!ヽ Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXレスポンスの送信を行わず、 最終の Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXのレスポンスの送信を行う OBEX層処理部 を備えることを特徴とする通信機器。  A communication device comprising: an OBEX layer processing unit that does not transmit an OBEX response when receiving a Put command, but transmits an OBEX response when receiving a final Put command.
[20] オブジェクト交換用プロトコル OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol)を用いて、送信 機力 オブジェクトを受信する通信方法であって、 [20] A communication method for receiving a transmitter power object using an object exchange protocol OBEX (OBject EXchange protocol),
OBEXの最終でな!ヽ Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXレスポンスの送信を行わず、 最終の Putコマンド受信時には、 OBEXのレスポンスの送信を行うことを特徴とする通 信方法。  A communication method characterized by not transmitting the OBEX response when receiving the Put command at the end of the OBEX, and transmitting the response of the OBEX when receiving the final Put command.
[21] 請求項 1から 8、 13、 15、 17、 19のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器を動作させる 通信プログラムであって、コンピュータを上記の各部として機能させるための通信プロ グラム。 [21] A communication program for operating the communication device according to any one of claims 1 to 8, 13, 15, 17, 19. A communication program for causing a computer to function as the above-described sections. Gram.
[22] 請求項 1から 8、 13、 15、 17、 19のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器を動作させる 通信回路であって、上記の各部として機能することを特徴とする通信回路。  [22] A communication circuit for operating the communication device according to any one of claims 1 to 8, 13, 15, 17, and 19. The communication circuit which functions as each of the above-mentioned sections.
[23] 請求項 1から 8、 13、 15、 17、 19のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器を搭載し、該通 信機器によって通信を行うことを特徴とする携帯電話。 [23] A mobile phone equipped with the communication device according to any one of claims 1 to 8, 13, 15, 17, and 19, and performing communication by the communication device.
[24] 請求項 6から 8、 17、 19のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器を搭載し、該通信機器 によって受信したデータに基づいて表示することを特徴とする表示装置。 [24] A display device equipped with the communication device according to any one of claims 6 to 8, 17 and 19, and displaying based on data received by the communication device.
[25] 請求項 6から 8、 17、 19のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器を搭載し、該通信機器 によって受信したデータに基づいて印刷することを特徴とする印刷装置。 [25] A printing apparatus equipped with the communication device according to any one of claims 6 to 8, 17 and 19, and printing based on data received by the communication device.
[26] 請求項 6から 8、 17、 19のいずれか 1項に記載の通信機器を搭載し、該通信機器 によって受信したデータを記録することを特徴とする記録装置。 [26] A recording apparatus mounted with the communication device according to any one of claims 6 to 8, 17 and 19 and recording data received by the communication device.
PCT/JP2006/301238 2005-01-28 2006-01-26 Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit WO2006080403A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/883,234 US8291273B2 (en) 2005-01-28 2006-01-26 Communication device, non-transitory computer-readable medium storing a communication program
JP2007500577A JP4198741B2 (en) 2005-01-28 2006-01-26 Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, communication circuit
CN2006800033193A CN101112069B (en) 2005-01-28 2006-01-26 Communication device, communication system, communication method, and communication circuit

Applications Claiming Priority (16)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005022209 2005-01-28
JP2005-022209 2005-01-28
JP2005023929 2005-01-31
JP2005-023901 2005-01-31
JP2005023901 2005-01-31
JP2005-023929 2005-01-31
JP2005-116096 2005-04-13
JP2005116096 2005-04-13
JP2005-152910 2005-05-25
JP2005152910 2005-05-25
JP2005192903 2005-06-30
JP2005-192903 2005-06-30
JPPCT/JP2005/014446 2005-08-05
PCT/JP2005/014446 WO2006013979A1 (en) 2004-08-06 2005-08-05 Transmitter, receiver, communication system, communication method, and communication program
JP2005271233 2005-09-16
JP2005-271233 2005-09-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2006080403A1 true WO2006080403A1 (en) 2006-08-03

Family

ID=36740429

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2006/301238 WO2006080403A1 (en) 2005-01-28 2006-01-26 Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2006080403A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009278354A (en) * 2008-05-14 2009-11-26 Sony Corp Communication device, communication method, program and communication system
JP2013062739A (en) * 2011-09-14 2013-04-04 Chino Corp Mobile radio terminal and radio data relay transmission system

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10308791A (en) * 1997-05-08 1998-11-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Method and equipment for data communication and data communication program recording medium
JPH11154908A (en) * 1997-11-20 1999-06-08 Nec Eng Ltd Non-reply monitor circuit in infrared ray communication, its monitoring method and recording medium storing its control program
JP2000196622A (en) * 1998-12-28 2000-07-14 Nec Corp Method and device for infrared non-connection type object exchange communication
JP2002158730A (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-05-31 Sony Corp Communication method and communication device
JP2003069610A (en) * 2001-08-22 2003-03-07 Canon Inc Communication device, its control method, communication system, and control program
JP2003218936A (en) * 2002-01-18 2003-07-31 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Transmission/reception method and transmission/reception apparatus for variable length message

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10308791A (en) * 1997-05-08 1998-11-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Method and equipment for data communication and data communication program recording medium
JPH11154908A (en) * 1997-11-20 1999-06-08 Nec Eng Ltd Non-reply monitor circuit in infrared ray communication, its monitoring method and recording medium storing its control program
JP2000196622A (en) * 1998-12-28 2000-07-14 Nec Corp Method and device for infrared non-connection type object exchange communication
JP2002158730A (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-05-31 Sony Corp Communication method and communication device
JP2003069610A (en) * 2001-08-22 2003-03-07 Canon Inc Communication device, its control method, communication system, and control program
JP2003218936A (en) * 2002-01-18 2003-07-31 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Transmission/reception method and transmission/reception apparatus for variable length message

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009278354A (en) * 2008-05-14 2009-11-26 Sony Corp Communication device, communication method, program and communication system
US7991005B2 (en) 2008-05-14 2011-08-02 Sony Corporation Communication apparatus, communication method, program, and communication system
JP2013062739A (en) * 2011-09-14 2013-04-04 Chino Corp Mobile radio terminal and radio data relay transmission system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4198741B2 (en) Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, communication circuit
JP4091095B2 (en) Transmitter, receiver, communication system, communication method, communication program
JP4755173B2 (en) Method and apparatus for generating a compressed status report updated to indicate data to be received later
CN101636989B (en) Method and system for transmission of different types of information in wireless communication
CN104115500A (en) Bi-directional tunneling via user input back channel for wireless displays
US8681755B2 (en) Method and apparatus for generating data frame in wireless personal area network
WO2021013092A1 (en) Sidelink information transmission method, terminal, and control node
RU2758080C2 (en) Communication method, network device and terminal
WO2006080357A1 (en) Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit
JP7238775B2 (en) Wireless LAN communication device and wireless LAN communication method
JP2009094733A (en) Radio communications equipment and radio communication method
JP7215427B2 (en) Wireless LAN communication device, wireless LAN communication method and wireless LAN communication program
WO2022083371A1 (en) Data transmission method and device
JP2008079330A (en) Communications device, communication system, communication method, communication program, communication circuit, mobile phone, display device, printer, and recording apparatus
JP2008311969A (en) Receiver, transmitter, communication system, control method for the receiver, communication method, control program for the receiver, and recording medium with the communication program stored
WO2006080403A1 (en) Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit
JP4948113B2 (en) Transmitter, receiver, communication system, communication method, communication program
JP2006129341A (en) Transparent data transmitting method
CN109309647B (en) Transmission protocol negotiation method, device and system
WO2006080330A1 (en) Communication device, communication system, communication method, communication program, and communication circuit
WO2021186587A1 (en) Transmission station and receiving station
US20230198600A1 (en) Communication apparatus and communication method
JP3148733B2 (en) Signal processing device and signal processing system
JP7318033B2 (en) Wireless communication device and wireless communication method
JP4430054B2 (en) COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, RECORDING MEDIUM

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007500577

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200680003319.3

Country of ref document: CN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11883234

Country of ref document: US

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06712420

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 6712420

Country of ref document: EP